Official Software
Lexus - ES 350 - Owners Manual - 2013 - 2013
£9.99
Get your hands on the complete Lexus factory workshop software
Download now
Check out our popular Lexus Other Model Manuals below:
Get your hands on the Complete Lexus Factory Workshop Software
Download now9.99
Summary of Content
8
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear
sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel
evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Dynamic radar cruise control system
● Cruise control system
● Anti-lock brake system
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special
instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
Hybrid vehicles: High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline
powered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic
shielding.
Hybrid vehicles: Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way
radio.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
Vehicle data recordings
Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain
data, such as:
• Engine speed
• Electric motor speed (traction motor speed) (hybrid vehicles)
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
• Hybrid battery (traction battery) status (hybrid vehicles)
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which
it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations, sounds or
pictures.
● Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions,
conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the
vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
● Usage of data collected through Safety Connect / Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland
only)
If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to
those services, please refer to the Safety Connect / Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
11
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
● Disclosure of the EDR data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is
obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Lexus may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
12
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
13
CAUTION
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the
moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely
cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) (hybrid vehicles)
Never resell, hand over or modify the hybrid battery. To prevent accidents, hybrid
batteries that have been removed from a disposed vehicle are collected through
Lexus dealers. Do not dispose of the battery yourself.
Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in death
of serious injury:
● The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and someone may
touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric shock.
● The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with your hybrid vehicle. If
the hybrid battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any way, accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an explosion
and electrolyte leakage may occur.
When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is
extremely high because the person receiving the vehicle may not be aware of
these dangers.
■ Disposal of the hybrid battery (traction battery) (hybrid vehicles)
If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed,
there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their
connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the
hybrid battery must be disposed of by your Lexus dealer or a qualified service
shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock
that can result in death or serious injury.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
28
1-1. For safe use
Before driving
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model
and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
1
Insert the retaining hooks (clips)
into the floor mat eyelets.
2
Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure the
floor mats in place.
*: Always align the
*
marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
29
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the
pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to an accident, or leading to death or a serious injury.
■ When installing the driver’s floor mat
1
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in
the correct place with all the provided
retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the
floor.
● With the engine stopped
and the shift lever in P, fully depress each
pedal to the floor to make sure it does not
interfere with the floor mat.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.
1-1. For safe use
For safety drive
For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position
before driving.
Correct driving posture
1
Adjust the angle of the seatback
so that you are sitting straight up
and so that you do not have to
lean forward to steer. (→P. 151)
2
Adjust the seat so that you can
depress the pedals fully and so
that your arms bend slightly at the
elbow when gripping the steering
wheel. (→P. 151)
3
Lock the head restraint in place
with the center of the head
restraint closest to the top of your
ears. (→P. 159)
4
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(→P. 32)
Correct use of the seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving
the vehicle. (→P. 32)
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 55)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
Adjusting the mirrors
Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and
outside rear view mirrors properly. (→P. 164, 167)
CAUTION
1
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel
tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue
driving and take a break immediately.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
1-1. For safe use
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving
the vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
● Extend the shoulder belt so that it
comes fully over the shoulder, but
does not come into contact with
the neck or slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the seat-
back. Sit up straight and well back
in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
1
To fasten the seat belt, push the
plate into the buckle until a click
sound is heard.
2
To release the seat belt, press the
release button.
Release button
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
1
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing the
release button.
2
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat belt
to quickly restrain the occupant by
retracting the seat belt when the
vehicle is subjected to certain types
of severe frontal or side collision.
The pretensioner does not activate in
the event of a minor frontal impact, a
minor side impact, a rear impact or a
vehicle rollover.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
Move the height adjuster up and down
as needed until you hear a click.
1
1-1. For safe use
Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision
system)
If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the front seat belt
will retract before the collision. (→P. 306)
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that
you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used
to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the
belt and then pull the belt out once more. (→P. 59)
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 55)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, fol-
low the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (→P. 32)
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
1
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
than one person at once, including children.
● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat
belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary.
The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well
back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (→P. 32)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants,
extending the shoulder belt completely over
the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with
the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only
the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could
suffer death or serious injury as a result of
sudden braking or a collision.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 32)
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could
result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■ Seat belt pretensioners
If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case,
the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
(→P. 33)
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed
in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.
Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot
protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in
a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because
the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by
1
1-1. For safe use
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types
of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants.
They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death
or serious injury.
◆ SRS front airbags
1
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger
from impact with interior components
2
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags
3
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS rear side airbags
Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats
4
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
For safety and security
SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
1-1. For safe use
SRS airbag system components
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Front passenger occupant clas- 9 Front side airbags
sification system (ECU and sen- 10 SRS warning light
sors)
11 Driver airbag
Side impact sensors (front
12 Rear side airbags
doors)
13 Side impact sensors (rear)
Knee airbags
14 Driver’s seat position sensor
Front passenger airbag
15 Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
Curtain shield airbags
16 Airbag sensor assembly
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
17 Front passenger’s seat belt
OFF” indicator lights
buckle switch
Seat belt pretensioners and
18 Front impact sensors
force limiters
Side impact sensors (front)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information
obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram
above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information.
As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the
airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or
serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of
inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you
with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the
steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now,
you can change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm)
distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the
back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to
see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still
maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the
instrument panel controls.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
CAUTION
1
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the front seat belt buckle but the
seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the
SRS front airbags will judge that the driver
and front passenger are wearing the seat
belt even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in
the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the
seat belt with the seat belt extender.
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-
ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the
front passenger seat. (→P. 55)
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger.
● Do not allow the front seat occupants to
1
hold items on their knees.
rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-
senger seats toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.
● Do not attach anything to or lean anything
against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad, lower portion of the instrument panel and door of the glove box.
These items can become projectiles when
the SRS driver, front passenger and knee
airbags deploy.
● Do not attach anything to areas such as a
door, windshield glass, side door glass, front
or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
● Do not lean against the door, the roof side
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not hang coat hangers or hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items
could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy.
● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to
remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags
inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the
side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door
or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off
any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and
front and rear pillar garnishes are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by
your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy
(inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
1
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars or kangaroo
bar etc.)
● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)
SRS airbag.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as
the seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails may be hot for several
minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a
severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the
response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push
the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to
communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to
dispatch the necessary emergency services. (→P. 641)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
panel, dashboard, glove box, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars
or roof side rails
1-1. For safe use
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set
threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph
[20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can
move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the
front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck
● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.
● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passen-
ger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front
passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.
(→P. 49)
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that
exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact
force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the
vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an
approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
● The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal colli-
sion.
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of
your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or
rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But,
whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
1
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to
a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed
side collision.
● Collision from the front*
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
*: Depending on the conditions and type of
accident, the curtain shield airbags may
deploy (inflate) upon frontal impact.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield
1-1. For safe use
■ When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.
● A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel, dash-
board near the front passenger airbag or
lower portion of the instrument panel is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● The surface of the seats with the side airbag
is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or
roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing
the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification
system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat
and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.
1
For safety and security
1
Seat belt reminder light
2
SRS warning light
3
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
4
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
50
1-1. For safe use
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■
Adult*1
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG ON”
SRS warning light
Off
Seat belt reminder light
Flashing*2
Indicator/
warning light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Devices
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
■
Child*3 or child restraint system*4
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”*5
SRS warning light
Off
Seat belt reminder light
Flashing*2
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Indicator/
warning light
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Devices
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
51
1-1. For safe use
■
Unoccupied
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light
Off
Seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Devices
■
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Deactivated
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
There is a malfunction in the system
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light
On
Seat belt reminder light
Off
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Indicator/
warning light
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Devices
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
1
52
1-1. For safe use
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits
in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child
depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front
passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on
his/her physique or posture.
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A
forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (→P. 55)
*5: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to
install the child restraint system properly. (→P. 59)
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the
seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and
reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the
passenger may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury
in the event of a collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seat-
back pockets or armrest).
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on
the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on
the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
53
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illu-
minated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (→P. 59)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-
backs.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
For safety and security
may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates
that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
54
1-1. For safe use
Safety information for children
Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental
contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.
● Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to
avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power
window accidentally.
● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch
body parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc.
CAUTION
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the
moon roof or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely
cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
55
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use
of child restraint systems.
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much
safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropri-
ate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (→P. 59)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
Points to remember
1
56
1-1. For safe use
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child:
w
w
Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat
w
Forward facing ⎯ Convertible
seat
Booster seat
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use
the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 32)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
57
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must
be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even
if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child
restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether
strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether
strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of an accident.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the
SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to
1
58
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could
result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.
Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
59
Installing child restraints
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for the
outboard rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are
attached to the seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism (ALR/
ELR belts except driver’s seat belt)
(→P. 34)
Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap)
An anchor bracket is provided for
each rear seat.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
For safety and security
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat
belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not
compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children)
system.
60
1-1. For safe use
Installation with LATCH system
1
Lower the head restraint in place
at the lowest position.
2
Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
w
Type A
3
Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
Canada only
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
w
Type B
3
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint has a top tether strap,
the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.
61
1
Canada only
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
62
1-1. For safe use
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock
function belt)
■
Rear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat
1
Place the child restraint system
on the rear seat facing the rear
of the vehicle.
2
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the buckle.
Make sure that the belt is not
twisted.
3
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode, the
belt cannot be extended.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
4
While pushing the child
restraint system down into the
rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child
restraint system is securely in
place.
■
Forward-facing ⎯ Convertible seat
1
Lower the head restraint in
place at the lowest position.
2
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of
the vehicle.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
For safety and security
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
63
64
1-1. For safe use
3
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the buckle.
Make sure that the belt is not
twisted.
4
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode, the
belt cannot be extended.
5
While pushing the child
restraint system into the rear
seat, allow the shoulder belt to
retract until the child restraint
system is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
6
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should
be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 66)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
■
65
Booster seat
1
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of
the vehicle.
1
Sit the child in the child
restraint system. Fit the seat
belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (→P. 32)
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button and
fully retract the seat belt.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
2
66
1-1. For safe use
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
1
Lower the head restraint in place
at the lowest position.
2
Secure the child restraint system
using the seat belt or LATCH
anchors.
3
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can
be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
67
CAUTION
■ When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (→P. 34)
■ When installing a child restraint system
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it
does not interfere with the child restraint
system.
● Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible
even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated. Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury if the airbags deploy
(inflate).
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden braking or an
accident.
1
68
1-1. For safe use
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from
the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so
may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or a sudden braking.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to
ensure that it has been securely installed.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-
turer.
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.
Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or
serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking or
an accident.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1. For safe use
69
Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if
inhaled.
1
CAUTION
■ Important points while driving
● Keep the trunk lid closed.
● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open
the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop
the engine .
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a
long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow
build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while
the engine is running , exhaust gases may collect and
enter the vehicle.
■ Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack
caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have
the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
70
1-2. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features (hybrid vehicles)
Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from
conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your vehicle, and operate with care.
The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving
fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.
1
Gasoline engine
2
Electric motor (traction motor)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-2. Hybrid system
71
◆ When stopped/during start off
The gasoline engine stops when the vehicle is stopped. During start off,
the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or
when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped and the electric motor (traction motor) is used.
1
◆ During normal driving
◆ When accelerating sharply
When the accelerator pedal is depressed heavily, the power of the
hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine
via the electric motor (traction motor).
◆ When braking (regenerative braking)
The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction
battery).
Vehicle proximity notification system
When driving with the gasoline engine stopped, a sound, which changes
in accordance with the driving speed, will be played in order to warn people nearby of the vehicle’s approach. The sound will stop when the vehicle
speed exceeds approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor (traction
motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery) as necessary.
72
1-2. Hybrid system
■ Regenerative braking
In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery).
● The accelerator pedal is released while driving with the shift position in D or S.
● The brake pedal is depressed while driving with the shift position in D or S.
■ EV indicator
The EV indicator comes on when driving the
vehicle using only the electric motor (traction
motor).
■ Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop
The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions:
● During gasoline engine warm-up
● During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging
● When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or low
● When the heater is switched on
■ Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)
● As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery
does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left
parked for a long time the hybrid battery will slowly discharge. For this reason, be
sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or
10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery becomes fully discharged and you are unable
to jump-start the vehicle with the 12-volt battery, contact your Lexus dealer.
● If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged.
Always put the shift lever in P when the vehicle is stopped. When driving in heavy
traffic, operate the vehicle with the shift lever in D or S to avoid discharging the battery.
■ Charging the 12-volt battery
→P. 811
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-2. Hybrid system
73
■ After the 12-volt battery has discharged or has been changed or removed
The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is running on the hybrid battery
(traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicles
There may be no engine sounds or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move.
For safety, apply the parking brake and make sure to shift the shift position to P when
parked.
● Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment.
● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind the rear
seats when the hybrid system starts or stops.
● Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the trunk lid is open.
● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid transmission when the hybrid system starts
or stops.
● Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.
● Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is
depressed.
● Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.
● Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vent on rear left seat.
■ Vehicle proximity notification system
In the following cases, the vehicle proximity notification system may be difficult for
surrounding people to hear.
● In very noisy areas
● In the wind or the rain
Also, as the vehicle proximity notification system is installed on the front of the vehicle, it may be more difficult to hear from the rear of the vehicle compared to the
front.
■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal
Contact your Lexus dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal.
Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. on/off operation of the EV indicator) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 852)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating
and are not a malfunction:
1
74
1-2. Hybrid system
Hybrid system precautions (hybrid vehicles)
Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a high voltage
system (about 650 V at maximum) as well as parts that become
extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the caution
labels attached to the vehicle.
1
Air conditioning compressor
5
Service plug
2
Power control unit with DC/
DC converter
6
Electric motor (traction motor)
7
Caution label
3
High voltage cables (orange)
4
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-2. Hybrid system
75
Hybrid battery (traction battery) air vent
Emergency shut off system
When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emergency shut off system blocks off the high voltage current and stops the fuel
pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the
hybrid system, contact your Lexus dealer.
Hybrid warning message
A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the
hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.
If a warning message is shown on
the multi-information display, read
the message and follow the instructions. (→P. 761)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
For safety and security
There is an air intake vent beside the
rear left seat for the purpose of
cooling the hybrid battery (traction
battery). If the vent becomes
blocked, the hybrid battery may
overheat, leading to a reduction in
hybrid battery output.
76
1-2. Hybrid system
■ If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12-volt battery is
disconnected
The hybrid system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If the
“READY” indicator does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Running out of fuel
When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel
the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light
(→P. 754) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not be
able to start. (The minimum amount of fuel to add to make the low fuel level warning
light go out is about 3.0 gal. [11.3 L, 2.5 Imp.gal.], when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope.)
■ Electromagnetic waves
● High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles incorporate electromagnetic
shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic
waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances.
● Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio
parts.
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the
hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving style and
driving conditions.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-2. Hybrid system
77
CAUTION
■ High voltage precautions
The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC
and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric
shock that may result in death or serious injury.
● Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables or
1
their connectors.
Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey
the caution labels attached to the vehicle.
● Never try to open the service plug access
hole located behind the rear seats. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is
serviced and is subject to high voltage.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
● The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage.
78
1-2. Hybrid system
CAUTION
■ Road accident cautions
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:
● Pull your vehicle off the road, apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, and
turn the hybrid system off.
● Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors.
● If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may
occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.
● If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte
from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or
eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or, if possible, boric
acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
● If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicles, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never
use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small
amount of water may be dangerous.
● If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with front wheels raised. If the wheels
connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing,
the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause an electricity
leakage leading to a fire. (→P. 743)
● Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked
onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as
soon as possible.
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Your vehicle contains a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery. If disposed of improperly, it is hazardous to the environment and there is a risk of severe burns and electrical shock that may result in death or serious injury.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-2. Hybrid system
79
NOTICE
■ Hybrid battery air vent
● Do not put foreign objects near the air vent. The hybrid battery (traction battery)
may overheat and be damaged.
● Clean the air vent regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from
1
overheating.
● Do not wet or allow foreign substances to enter the air vent as this may cause a
● Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If
water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery).
1-3. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system (gasoline vehicles)
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the
vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The indicator light flashes after the
“START STOP ENGINE” switch
has been turned off to indicate that
the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the “START STOP ENGINE”
switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode to
indicate that the system has been
canceled.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a
built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-3. Theft deterrent system
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
w For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
1
w For vehicles sold in Canada
CAUTION
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
1-3. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system (hybrid vehicles)
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously registered
in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The indicator light flashes after the
“POWER” switch has been turned
off to indicate that the system is
operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the “POWER” switch has been
turned to ACCESSORY or ON
mode to indicate that the system has
been canceled.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a
built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-3. Theft deterrent system
■ Certifications for the immobilizer system
w For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
1
w For vehicles sold in Canada
CAUTION
■ Certifications for the immobilizer system
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
1-3. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
The alarm
The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is
detected.
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:
● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than
using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key.
(The doors will lock again automatically.)
● The hood is opened.
Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, trunk and hood,
and lock all the doors. The system
will be set automatically after 30
seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the system
is set.
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
● Unlock the doors or open the trunk.
● Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine . (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1-3. Theft deterrent system
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following:
1
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door,
the trunk or hood.
● The 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. (→P. 807)
w Gasoline vehicles
w Hybrid vehicles
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For safety and security
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
1-3. Theft deterrent system
■ Alarm-operated door lock
● When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent intrud-
ers.
● Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and make sure
the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the battery.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and center
panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all
warning lights and indicators illuminated.
◆ Instrument cluster
The units used on the speedometer and some indicators may differ depending on
the target region or grade/type.
◆ Center panel
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
◆ Outside rear view mirrors (vehicles with BSM)
2
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s
systems.
*1
*1
Brake system warning light
(→P. 751)
(U.S.A.)
*1
Electric power steering
system warning light
(→P. 753)
*1
Brake system warning light
(→P. 751)
Slip indicator (→P. 753)
(Canada)
*1
*1
Charging system warning
light (→P. 752)
*1
*1
Malfunction
indicator
lamp (→P. 752)
(U.S.A.)
*1
(hybrid vehicles)
(if equipped)
Brake system warning light
(→P. 753)
Automatic headlight leveling system warning light
(→P. 753)
Malfunction
indicator
lamp (→P. 752)
Open door warning light
(→P. 754)
SRS warning light
(→P. 752)
Low fuel level warning light
(→P. 754)
(Canada)
*1
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument cluster
Warning lights
90
2. Instrument cluster
*1
Seat belt reminder light
(→P. 754)
ABS warning light
(→P. 752)
(U.S.A.)
*1
*1
ABS warning light
(→P. 752)
Master warning light
(→P. 754)
(Canada)
*1, 2
*1
“PCS” warning light
(→P. 753, 764)
Tire pressure warning light
(→P. 755)
(if equipped)
*1: These lights turn on when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being
performed. They will turn off after the engine is on, or after a few
seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not turn on, or
turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
*2: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
91
Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
(U.S.A.)
(if equipped)
Cruise control “SET” indicator (→P. 244, 248)
Headlight indicator
(→P. 224)
“LDA” (Lane Departure
Alert) indicator (→P. 264)
(if equipped)
Tail light indicator
(→P. 224)
(if equipped)
Headlight high beam indicator (→P. 225)
*1, 2
Automatic High Beam
indicator (→P. 228)
*1
*1, 3
Front fog light indicator
(→P. 234)
Intuitive parking assist indicator (→P. 271)
Slip indicator
(→P. 299, 304)
VSC OFF indicator
(→P. 304)
“PCS” warning light
(→P. 307)
(if equipped)
(hybrid vehicles)
*4
“READY” indicator
(→P. 204)
(if equipped)
BSM outside rear view
mirror indicators
(→P. 313)
*1
(hybrid vehicles)
EV indicator (→P. 72)
(gasoline
vehicles)
Cruise control indicator
(→P. 244, 248)
(if equipped)
Radar cruise control indicator (→P. 248)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Eco Driving Indicator
Light (→P. 105)
*1
“AIR BAG ON/OFF”
indicator (→P. 49)
2
Instrument cluster
(Canada)
Turn signal indicator
(→P. 221)
92
2. Instrument cluster
*1: These lights turn on when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being
performed. They will turn off after the engine is on, or after a few
seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not turn on, or
turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*3: The light turns on when the system is turned off. The light flashes quickly to indicate that the system is operating.
4
* : In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illuminate in the following situations:
• When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode while the BSM main switch is set to ON.
• When the BSM main switch is set to ON while the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators
will turn off after a few seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not turn off,
there may be a malfunction with the system. If this occurs, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on
when you start the engine , this could mean that these systems are
not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this
occurs.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
93
Gauges and meters
2
1
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
2
Tachometer/Hybrid System Indicator
w
Tachometer
Gasoline vehicles, or hybrid vehicles with sport mode selected (→P. 296)
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
w
Hybrid System Indicator
Hybrid vehicles with other than sport mode selected (→P. 296)
Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (→P. 96)
3
ECO lamp and SPORT lamp
Changes colors according to driving mode (→P. 97)
4
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (→P. 98)
5
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument cluster
The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target region.
94
2. Instrument cluster
6
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
7
Shift position and shift range
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (→P. 214, 217)
8
Odometer and trip meter display
w Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven
w Trip meter
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset.
Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently.
Changing the display
Switches between odometer and
trip meter displays. When the trip
meter is displayed, pressing and
holding the button will reset the trip
meter.
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
1
Darker
2
Brighter
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
95
■ The meters and display illuminate when
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
■ Instrument panel brightness adjustment
The instrument panel brightness levels when the tail lights are on and off can be
adjusted individually. However, when the surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.),
turning on the tail lights will not change the instrument panel brightness. At this time,
any adjustments made to the instrument panel brightness levels will be applied to
both settings at once.
2
■ Limitation of brightness adjustment
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument cluster
The brightness of the instrument panel lights is automatically adjusted based on the
light sensor detecting how bright the surroundings are. However, if the instrument
panel brightness has been manually set to either the brightest or darkest setting, the
automatic adjustment will not be performed.
96
2. Instrument cluster
■ Hybrid System Indicator (hybrid vehicles)
1
Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is
being exceeded (during full power driving
etc.)
2
Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an
Eco-friendly manner.
3
Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is not
being used very often.
The gasoline engine will automatically stop
and restart under various conditions.
4
Charge area
Shows regenerative charging.
● Hybrid System Indicator is displayed when the driving mode is other than the sport
mode.
● By keeping the indicator needle within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be
achieved.
● Charge area indicates regeneration* status. Regenerated energy will be used to
charge the battery.
*: When used in this manual, “regeneration” refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
97
■ ECO lamp and SPORT lamp
● When sport mode is selected, SPORT lamp (red) will illuminate.
● When all of the following conditions are satisfied and Eco-friendly driving, ECO
lamp (blue) will illuminate. (ECO lamp will become brighter the more Eco-friendly
driving you perform. Also, while the vehicle is stopped or the acceleration exceeds
Zone of Eco driving, ECO lamp turns off. (→P. 105) However, when Eco drive
mode is selected, while the vehicle is stopped or the acceleration exceeds Zone of
Eco driving, ECO lamp does not turn off.):
• Driving with the shift lever in D
• Either normal mode or Eco drive mode is selected.
• The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or below.
Hybrid System Indicator automatically switches to the tachometer when driving
mode is in sport mode.
■ Engine speed (hybrid vehicles)
Engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve fuel efficiency and
reduce exhaust emissions etc.
There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehicle operation and driving conditions are the same.
■ Odometer and trip meter display
→P. 201, 209
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. on/off operation of ECO lamp) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 852)
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-
cates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the
red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check
the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 813, 816)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument cluster
■ Tachometer (hybrid vehicles)
2
98
2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
Display contents
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data including the current outside air temperature.
● Eco Driving Indicator Zone Dis-
play (gasoline vehicles)
(→P. 105)
● Energy monitor (hybrid vehicles)
(→P. 108)
● Outside temperature display
(→P. 99)
● Trip information (→P. 99)
Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising related information
● Tire inflation pressure (→P. 703)
● Drive monitor (→P. 102)
● Intuitive parking assist display* (if equipped) (→P. 273)
● Dynamic radar cruise control display* (if equipped) (→P. 248)
● LDA (Lane Departure Alert) display* (if equipped) (→P. 265)
● Warning messages (→P. 761)
Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s systems. Display can be switched by pressing the “DISP” button. (→P. 99)
*: Automatically displayed when the system is used. Display can be switched by
pressing the “DISP” button. (→P. 99)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
99
Trip information
■
Switching the display
Items displayed can be switched
by pressing the “DISP” button.
2
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display (gasoline vehicles)
→P. 105
■
Energy monitor (hybrid vehicles)
→P. 108
■
Outside temperature
Displays the outside air temperature
The temperature range that can be displayed is from
-40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C)
■
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument cluster
■
2. Instrument cluster
■
Average fuel consumption after refueling
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
vehicle was last refueled
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
■
Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
function was reset
• The function can be reset by pressing the “DISP”
button for longer than 1 second when the average
fuel consumption is displayed.
• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a
reference.
■
Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the
function was reset
The function can be reset by pressing the “DISP” button for longer than 1 second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
■
Driving range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that
can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining
■
Elapsed time
Displays the elapsed time since the engine
was started
■
Tire inflation pressure
Displays inflation pressure of each tire
For the vehicles with a full-size spare tire: The inflation
pressure of the spare tire will be displayed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
Instrument cluster
• This distance is computed based on your average
fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance
that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the
tank, the display may not be updated.
When refueling, turn the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch off. If the vehicle is refueled
without turning the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch off, the display may not be
updated.
2. Instrument cluster
Drive monitor
Outside temperature, average fuel
consumption after refueling or driving range can be selected and displayed.
If displayed on the drive monitor,
other trip information or warning
messages can be displayed simultaneously.
For display and selection procedures, follow the “Setting up the displays”.
The information displayed on the drive
monitor will not be displayed on the
trip information screen.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
Setting up the displays
1
While the vehicle is stopped,
press the “DISP” button until the
“Settings” screen appears.
2
2
Vehicles without Lexus Display
Audio system or a navigation system: Press and hold the “DISP”
button after selecting the desired
setting item (“Meter”, “Vehicle”
or
“Ambient
illumin.”
[if
equipped]) by pressing the
“DISP” button.
3
Press and hold the “DISP” button
after selecting the desired setting item by pressing the “DISP”
button.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument cluster
Press and hold the “DISP” button
until the screen changes.
2. Instrument cluster
4
Press and hold the “DISP” button
after selecting the desired setting by pressing the “DISP” button.
The display goes back to step
5
3
.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
after selecting the “EXIT” by
pressing the “DISP” button.
The display goes back to step 1 .
(The display goes back to step 1
automatically in few seconds without
proceeding step 5 .)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
■ System check display
After turning the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON
mode, “SYSTEM CHECK” is displayed while system operation is checked.
■ Eco Driving Indicator (gasoline vehicles)
Suggests Zone of Eco driving and Eco driving
ratio based on acceleration.
1
Eco Driving Indicator Light
Eco Driving Indicator Light availability can
be customized. The default setting is off.
(→P. 852)
When the acceleration exceeds Zone of
Eco driving, or when the vehicle is stopped,
the light turns off.
2
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
3
Zone of Eco driving
4
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration
If the acceleration exceeds Zone of Eco driving, the right side of Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display blinks.
Eco Driving Indicator will not operate in the following conditions:
● The shift lever is anything other than D.
● Neither normal mode nor Eco drive mode is selected. (→P. 296)
● The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or higher.
■ Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument cluster
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn
on.
2
2. Instrument cluster
■ Setting display automatic cancelation
In the following situations, setting display in which the settings can be changed
through the “DISP” button will automatically be turned off.
● When a warning message appears while the setting display is displayed
● When the vehicle begins to move while the setting display is displayed
■ Tire inflation pressure
● It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the “START
STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. It
may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.
● “---” may be displayed if the tire position information cannot be determined due to
unfavorable radio wave conditions.
● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be
different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.
■ Customization
Setting of available languages can be changed. (Customizable features →P. 852)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
CAUTION
■ The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number
appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death
or injury.
2
■ Cautions during setting up the display
NOTICE
■ During setting up the display
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting up the display features.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument cluster
As the engine needs to be running during
setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate
ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a
serious health hazard.
2. Instrument cluster
Energy monitor/consumption screen
You can view the status of your vehicle on the multi-information display
and the navigation system screen or Lexus Display Audio system
screen.
1
Navigation system screen or
Lexus Display Audio system
screen (if equipped)
2
Multi-information display
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
Remote Touch/Lexus Display Audio controller (if equipped)
w
Navigation system
Remote Touch*
1
“MENU” button
2
Remote Touch knob
*: For use of the Remote Touch, refer to
the “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual”.
Lexus Display Audio system
Lexus Display Audio controller
(→P. 334)
1
“MENU” button
Displaying the “MENU” screen
2
Lexus Display Audio controller
Turn or move the controller in the four
direction to select a function, number
and screen button.
Push the controller to enter the
selected function, number and screen
button.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument cluster
w
2
110
2. Instrument cluster
Energy monitor (hybrid vehicles)
■
Navigation system screen or Lexus Display Audio system screen (if
equipped)
w
Vehicles with a navigation system
1
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.
2
Select “Info/Apps” on the
“Menu” screen.
3
Select “Fuel Consumption” on
the “Information” screen.
If the “Energy Monitor” screen
is not displayed, select
“Energy”.
w
Vehicles with Lexus Display Audio system
1
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller.
2
Select “Car” on the “Menu”
screen.
If the “Energy Monitor” screen
is not displayed, select
“Energy”.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
■
Multi-information display
Press the “DISP” button on the
steering wheel several times to
select the energy monitor display.
2
Instrument cluster
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
112
2. Instrument cluster
Navigation system
screen/Lexus Display
Audio system screen
w Navigation system
When the vehicle is powered by the electric motor
(traction motor)
w Lexus
Display Audio
system
w Navigation system
When the vehicle is powered by both the gasoline
engine and the electric
motor (traction motor)
w Lexus
Display Audio
system
w Navigation system
When the vehicle is powered by the gasoline engine
w Lexus
Display Audio
system
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Multi-information display
2. Instrument cluster
Navigation system
screen/Lexus Display
Audio system screen
113
Multi-information display
w Navigation system
w Lexus
Display Audio
system
w Navigation system
w Lexus
Display Audio
system
w Navigation system
When there is no energy
flow
w Lexus
Display Audio
system
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument cluster
When the vehicle is charging the hybrid battery
(traction battery)
2
114
2. Instrument cluster
Navigation system
screen/Lexus Display
Audio system screen
Multi-information display
w Navigation system
Low
Full
Low
Hybrid battery
(traction battery) status
Full
w Lexus
Display Audio
system
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
115
Consumption (if equipped)
w
Vehicles with a navigation system
1
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info/
Apps” on the “Menu” screen.
2
Select “Fuel Consumption” on the “Information” screen.
Hybrid vehicles: If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, select
“Fuel Consumption”.
w
2
Vehicles with Lexus Display Audio system
Hybrid vehicles: If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, select
“Fuel Consumption”.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument cluster
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller, then
select “Car” on the “Menu” screen.
116
■
2. Instrument cluster
Trip information
If the “Trip Information” screen is not displayed, select “Trip Information”.
w
Navigation system
1
Current fuel consumption
2
Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes
3
Hybrid vehicles: Regenerated energy in the past 15 minutes
w
Lexus Display Audio system
One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up to 5 symbols are shown.
4
Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine
was started.
5
Displays the elapsed time since the engine was started.
6
Cruising range (→P. 118)
7
Reset the consumption data
8
“Past Record” (Navigation system) or “History” (Lexus Display Audio
system) screen appears
9
Hybrid vehicles: “Energy Monitor” screen appears
Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into
past averages and averages attained since the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch was last turned to IGNITION ON mode. Use
the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Instrument cluster
■
117
Past record
If the “History” or “Past Record” screen is not displayed, select “History”
or “Past Record”.
w
Navigation system
w
Lexus Display Audio system
2
Average fuel consumption
2
Previous fuel consumption record
3
Best recorded fuel consumption
4
Update the average fuel consumption data
5
Reset the past record data
6
“Trip Information” screen appears
7
Hybrid vehicles: “Energy Monitor” screen appears
The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated. Use the
displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument cluster
1
118
2. Instrument cluster
■ Updating the past record data
Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the current
fuel consumption again.
■ Resetting the data
The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.
■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel
remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
120
3-1. Key information
Keys
The keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
1
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access system
with push-button start (→P. 123)
• Operating the wireless remote
control function (→P. 136)
2
Mechanical keys
3
Key number plate
Using the mechanical key
To take out the mechanical key, push
the release button and take the key
out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key
only has grooves on one side. If the
key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to
insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store
it in the electronic key. Carry the
mechanical key together with the
electronic key. If the electronic key
battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you
will need the mechanical key.
(→P. 802)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-1. Key information
121
■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch off and lock the glove box as circumstances
demand. (→P. 145, 608)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
electronic key only.
■ If you lose your mechanical keys
New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other
mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the
plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
■ When riding in an aircraft
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
Operation of each component
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any
buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an
electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed
accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that
could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
122
3-1. Key information
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to
such materials.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,
audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as
low-frequency therapy equipment.
■ Carrying the electronic key on your person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that
are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm)
of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function
properly.
■ In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other key-
related problems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer.
■ When an electronic key is lost
If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly.
Visit your Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was
provided with your vehicle.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
123
Smart access system with push-button start
Function summary
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should
always carry the electronic key.)
Hybrid vehicles Gasoline vehicles
3
Locks and unlocks the doors (→P. 124)
2
Opens the trunk (→P. 124)
3
Starts the engine (→P. 197)
Starts the hybrid system (→P. 204)
■ Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Welcome light illumination control
The side marker, parking, tail and license plate lights automatically turn on at night
when the doors are unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control if
the light switch is in the “AUTO” position.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
1
124
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Unlocking and locking the doors
Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passenger’s door handle to unlock all the
doors.*
Make sure to touch the sensor on the
back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the doors are locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (→P. 128)
Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part of the door
handle) to lock all the doors.
Opening the trunk
Press the button.
If the vehicle is equipped with power
trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid
automatically opens fully.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
125
Antenna location and effective range
■
Antenna location
1
Antennas outside the cabin
2
Antennas inside the cabin
3
Antenna outside the trunk
34
Antenna inside the trunk
3
Operation of each component
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
126
■
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking the
doors
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is within about
2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of an outside door
handle. (Only the doors detecting
the key can be operated.)
When opening the trunk
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is within about
2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release
button.
When starting the engine
or changing
“START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch modes
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door
handle
If the door will not lock even when the topside
sensor area is touched, try touching both the
topside and underside sensor areas at the
same time.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
127
■ Alarms and warning indicators
An alarm sounds and warning message displays shown on the multi-information display are used to protect against unexpected accidents or theft of the vehicle resulting from erroneous operation. When a warning message is displayed, take
appropriate measures based on the displayed message. (→P. 761)
When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as follows.
Alarm
Situation
Correction procedure
The “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”>
switch was turned to
ACCESSORY
mode
while the driver’s door
Interior alarm sounds
was open (or the driver’s
continuously
door was opened while
the
“START
STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”>
switch was in ACCESSORY mode).
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Turn the “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”>
switch off and close the
driver’s door.
3
Operation of each component
The trunk was closed
while the electronic key Retrieve the electronic
was still inside the trunk key from the trunk and
Exterior alarm sounds and all the doors were close the trunk lid.
locked.
once for 5 seconds
An attempt was made to
Close all of the doors and
lock the vehicle while a
lock the doors again.
door was open.
128
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote
control.
1
Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off.
2
When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold
or
for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding
,
.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds,
and repeat step 2 .)
Multi-information
display
Unlocking function
Beep
Holding the driver’s door handle unlocks only the driver’s
Exterior: Beeps 3 times
door.
Interior: Pings once
Holding a passenger’s door
handle unlocks all the doors.
Holding a door handle unlocks Exterior: Beeps twice
all the doors.
Interior: Pings once
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless
remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been
changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the
doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (→P. 84)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
129
■ Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key
battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in
operation for a long time.
● In the following situations, the smart access system with push-button start may take
some time to unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the
outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 5 days or
longer.
● If the smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 14 days or
longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this
case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the
mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the
electronic key from receiving radio waves.
Press
twice while pressing and holding
. Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the
smart access system with push-button start
cannot be used. To cancel the function, press
any of the electronic key buttons.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
■ Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote
control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping: →P. 802)
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, air-
port or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless
communication device
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic
objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit
radio waves
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear
window
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the
system may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear
bumper center when the trunk is opened.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the
door pockets or glove box when the engine is started or
“START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch modes are changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door
pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will
become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the
vehicle.
or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can
be used to unlock the vehicle.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the
engine if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door han-
dle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds
if the doors are not opened and closed.)
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is
near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Note for locking the doors
● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock
operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.
● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective
range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following
correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle.
(Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (→P. 129)
● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a
car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer
will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud,
etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor
on the lower part of the door handle.
● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle. Be
careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.
■ Note for the unlocking function
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors
from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position
and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective
range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following
correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle.
(Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (→P. 129)
● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to
unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle. Be
careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle.
● The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance.
(→P. 852)
■ Alarm
Using the smart access system with push-button start to lock the doors will set the
alarm system. (→P. 84)
■ To operate the system properly
● Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the
electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside
of the vehicle.
● Do not leave the electronic key inside the luggage compartment.
The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depending on the location of the key (close to a spare tire, the inside edge of the luggage compartment),
conditions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio waves in the
surrounding area. (→P. 146)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(→P. 802)
● Starting the engine : →P. 803
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
Operation of each component
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key
may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The
alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine
stops. (→P. 781)
● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become
depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate
that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 710)
• The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control
does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of
the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•
•
•
•
•
•
TVs
Personal computers
Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
Table lamps
Induction cookers
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
→P. 710
■ Customization
Settings (e. g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 852)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a cus-
tomized setting
● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk:
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (→P. 136, 802)
● Starting the engine and changing “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch
modes: →P. 803
● Stopping the engine : (→P. 198, 205)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
w For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ23AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14FBA
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-8
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-3
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away
from the smart access system with push-button start antennas. (→P. 125)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry
function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency
of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor
to see if you should disable the entry function.
● Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details on disabling the entry function.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
w For vehicles sold in Canada
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Wireless remote control
Function summary
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle.
1
Locks all the doors
2
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 5 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
3
Opens the windows and moon
roof (press and hold)*
4
Opens the trunk
(press and hold)
If the vehicle is equipped with a power
trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid
automatically opens fully.
5
Sounds the alarm
(press and hold) (→P. 137)
*: This setting must be customized at
your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Operation signals
Doors:
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
Trunk:
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been opened.
Windows and moon roof:
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating.
■ Welcome light illumination control
→P. 123
■ Door lock buzzer
■ Panic mode
When
is pressed for longer than about
one second, an alarm will sound intermittently
and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any
person from trying to break into or damage
your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
electronic key.
■ Security feature
→P. 123
■ Alarm
Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
(→P. 84)
■ Conditions affecting operation
→P. 130
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
Operation of each component
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer
sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock
the vehicle once more.
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ If the wireless remote control does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(→P. 802)
■ Electronic key battery depletion
→P. 134
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
→P. 710
■ Confirmation of the registered key number
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 852)
■ Certification for wireless remote control
w For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ23AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14FBA
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
w For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Doors
Unlocking and locking the doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switches.
◆ Entry function
→P. 123
◆ Wireless remote control
3
→P. 136
1
Locks all the doors
2
Unlocks all the doors
Operation of each component
◆ Door lock switches
◆ Inside lock buttons
1
Locks the door
2
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by
pulling the inside handle even if the
lock buttons are in the lock position.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
1
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
2
Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”>
switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is
set.
1
Unlock
2
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors.
Push down on each rear door switch
to lock both rear doors.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
Function
Operation
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors.
Shift position linked
door unlocking function
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door
locking function
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver’s door linked door
unlocking function
All doors are unlocked when the driver’s door is
opened within 45 seconds after turning the “START
STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off.
■
Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:
1
Close all the doors and turn the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform step
2 within 20 seconds.)
2
Shift the shift lever to P or N,
and press and hold the driver’s
door lock switch (
or
) for approximately 5
seconds and then release.
The shift lever and switch positions
corresponding to the desired function to be set are shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to cancel
the function.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
Operation of each component
Shift position linked
door locking function
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Function
Shift lever position
Shift position linked
door locking function
Driver’s door lock
switch position
P
Shift position linked
door unlocking function
Speed linked door
locking function
N
Driver’s door linked door
unlocking function
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked
and then unlocked.
■ Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system
may not operate.
■ Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (→P. 802)
■ If a wrong key is used
The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 852)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant throwing out of the
vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.
3
Operation of each component
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or
wireless remote control.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the
trunk can be closed using the trunk closer.
Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Press the opener switch.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power
trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid
automatically opens fully.
Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
■
Entry function
→P. 123
■
Wireless remote control
→P. 136
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Trunk closer switch (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
Pressing the switch closes the trunk
lid automatically. (A buzzer sounds.)
Pressing the switch while the trunk lid
is closing opens the trunk lid again.
When closing the trunk
Luggage security system
The trunk opener switch can be temporarily disabled to protect luggage
stored in the trunk against theft.
Turn the main switch in the glove
box off to disable the trunk opener.
1
On
2
Off
The trunk lid cannot be opened even
with the wireless remote control or the
entry function.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
Operation of each component
Using the trunk grip, lower the trunk
without applying force to the side
and push the trunk down from the
outside to close it.
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Trunk light
The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
■ Trunk easy closer (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.
■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside
● When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left
inside the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened pressing the trunk release button on the
trunk lid.
● Even when the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the
key confinement prevention function can be activated so the trunk can be opened.
In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.
● Even when the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors are locked, the
key may not be detected depending on the places and the surrounding radio wave
conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check
where the key is before closing the trunk.
● The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the
doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.
■ Overload protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
The trunk lid will not operate when excessive load is present on the top of the trunk
lid.
■ Fall-down protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
While the trunk lid is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop
the opening operation to prevent the trunk lid from rapidly falling down.
■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
While the trunk lid is closing automatically, the trunk lid will stop closing and open if
something gets caught.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Internal trunk release lever
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling the
glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside
of the trunk lid to the side.
The lever will continue to glow for some time
after the trunk lid is closed.
■ Using the mechanical key
The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (→P. 803)
■ When leaving a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
→P. 121
3
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Before driving
● Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may
open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the trunk
may be thrown out, causing an accident.
● Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffocate.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the child’s
hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
■ Important points while driving
Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they
are susceptible to death or serious injury.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
CAUTION
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious
injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening
it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again after it is opened.
● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the sur-
rounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the
trunk is about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may
move abruptly in strong wind.
● The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened fully.
It is more difficult to open or close the trunk
lid on an incline than on a level surface, so
beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the
trunk lid is fully open and secure before
using the trunk.
● When closing the trunk lid, take extra care
to prevent your fingers etc. from being
caught.
● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to
press it lightly on its outer surface. If the
trunk handle is used to fully close the trunk
lid, it may result in hands or arms being
caught.
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid.
Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed again after
it is opened.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Trunk easy closer (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly
open, the trunk easy closer will automatically
close it to the fully closed position. It takes
several seconds before the trunk easy closer
begins to operate. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the trunk lid, as this
may cause bone fractures or other serious
injuries.
■ Power trunk opener and closer (if equipped)
● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or
anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the
trunk is about to open or close.
● If the trunk closer switch is pressed while the trunk lid is opening during automatic
operation, the trunk lid stops opening. Take extra care when on an incline, as the
trunk lid may open or close suddenly.
● On an incline, the trunk lid may fall after it opens automatically. Make sure the
trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.
● In the following situations, the power trunk opener and closer may detect an
abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the trunk lid
has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped trunk
lid may suddenly fall, causing an accident.
• When the trunk lid contacts an obstacle
• When the 12-volt battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the “START
STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode or the engine is started during automatic operation
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. The
power trunk opener and closer may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or
the trunk lid may fall closed again after it is opened.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
Operation of each component
Observe the following precautions when operating the power trunk opener and
closer.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
150
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-
tion.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the trunk lid fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the
trunk lid.
● The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object
that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
NOTICE
■ To prevent trunk easy closer malfunctions (vehicles with power trunk opener and
closer)
Do not apply force to the trunk lid while the trunk easy closer is operating.
■ To prevent damage to the power trunk opener and closer (vehicles with power
trunk opener and closer)
● Make sure that there is no luggage or snow on the trunk lid before operating the
power trunk opener and closer. In addition, make sure that there is no ice
between the trunk lid and frame that prevents movement of the trunk lid. Operating the power trunk opener and closer when excessive load is present on the
trunk lid may cause a malfunction.
● Do not apply excessive force to the trunk lid while the power trunk opener and
closer is operating.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-3. Adjusting the seats
151
Front seats
Adjustment procedure
3
Seat position adjustment switch
4
2
Seatback
switch
Vertical
switch
5
Lumbar support adjustment
switch
3
angle
adjustment
height
adjustment
Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch
6 Seat cushion length adjustment
switch (if equipped)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
1
152
3-3. Adjusting the seats
■ Power easy access system
The driver’s seat and steering wheel move in accordance with “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch mode and the driver’s seat belt condition. (→P. 156)
CAUTION
■ When adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are
not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
■ Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move
and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
■ When adjusting the seat positions
Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-3. Adjusting the seats
153
Driving position memory∗
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and
recalled by pressing a button. It is also possible to set this function to
activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.
The same buttons are found on the front passenger’s side, allowing the
position of the front passenger’s seat to be memorized (if equipped).
3
Entering a position to memory
Check that the shift lever is in P.
2
Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION
ON mode.
3
Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to
the desired positions. (When memorizing the front passenger’s seat,
adjust the front passenger’s seat to the desired positions.)
4
While pressing the “SET” button,
or within 3 seconds after the
“SET” button is pressed, press
button “1”, “2” or “3” until the signal beeps.
If the selected button has already
been preset, the previously recorded
position will be overwritten.
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
1
154
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Recalling the memorized position
1
Check that the shift lever is in P.
2
Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION
ON mode.
3
Press button “1”, “2” or “3” to
recall the desired position.
■ When you want to stop the position recall operation part-way through
Perform any of the following operations:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).
■ The adjusted positions that can be memorized
The adjusted positions other than the position adjusted by lumber support switch can
be memorized.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-3. Adjusting the seats
155
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
(driver’s side only)
A desired driving position can be recalled linked with the unlocking of the
door.
■
Setting procedure
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing
the following:
Carrying only the key to which you want to link the driving position, shift
the shift lever to P and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be linked
properly.
Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode and recall the position which you want to
link.
2
While pressing the button to
recall the position, press the
driver’s door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the
signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver’s door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver’s
door is opened.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
1
3
156
3-3. Adjusting the seats
■
Cancelation procedure
Carry only the key for which you want to cancel the linked door unlock
operation.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled properly.
1
Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode and close the driver’s door.
2
While pressing the “SET” button, press the driver’s door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps.
Power easy access system
The auto away/return function
enables easy access by activating
when the driver attempts to enter or
exit the vehicle.
■
Auto away function when exiting the vehicle
When all of the following actions have been performed, the steering
wheel will move up and back to the point farthest away from the driver
and the seat will move backward:
• The shift lever has been shifted to P.
• The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch has been turned
off.
• The driver seat belt has been unfastened.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-3. Adjusting the seats
■
157
Auto return function when entering the vehicle
When either of the following actions has been performed, the steering
wheel will move toward the driver and seat will move forward:
• The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY mode.
• The driver’s seat belt has been fastened.
■ When driving position memory is linked with door unlock operation
■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch off
Driver’s seat:
Memorized seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door
is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again. Memorized steering
wheel position can be activated by pressing the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch.
Front passenger’s seat:
Memorized positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the front passenger’s
door is opened by pressing button “1”, “2” or “3”.
■ Correct seat position
When the seat is in the most forward or most backward position, and the seat is
being moved in those directions, the system may not correctly recognize the current
position and the memorized position will not be correctly recalled.
■ The auto away function for exiting the driver’s seat
If the seat is already close to the rearmost position, the auto away function may not
operate when the driver exits the vehicle.
■ Customization
The distance that the driver’s seat moves backward during the auto away function
can be changed. (Customizable features: →P. 852)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
Operation of each component
If the driver’s door is opened, the driver’s seat will move toward the memorized position but stop slightly beforehand to allow easy access to the vehicle.
Turning the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode, or fastening the driver’s seat belt moves the seat fully
into the memorized position.
158
3-3. Adjusting the seats
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-3. Adjusting the seats
159
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
Vertical adjustment
1
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2
Down
3
Lock release button
Angle adjustment
The position of the head restraint
can be adjusted forward in 4 stages.
If the head restraint is pulled forward
from the foremost position, it will
return to the rearmost position.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
160
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Rear seats
1
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Lock release button
■ Removing the head restraints
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the
lock release button.
Lock release button
■ Installing the head restraints
w Front seats
Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when
lowering the head restraint.
Lock release button
w Rear seats
Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lowest lock
position while pressing the lock release button.
Lock release button
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-3. Adjusting the seats
161
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
CAUTION
3
■ Head restraint precautions
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are
locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury.
162
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel
Adjustment procedure
w
Manual adjustment
1
Hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever down.
2
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up to
secure the steering wheel.
w
Power adjustment
Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:
1
Up
2
Down
3
Toward the driver
4
Away from the driver
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
163
■ The power adjustment type steering wheel can be adjusted when
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode*.
*: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of
“START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch mode.
■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position (power adjustment type)
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by
the driving position memory system. (→P. 153)
■ Power easy access system (power adjustment type)
The steering wheel and driver’s seat move in accordance with “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch mode and the driver’s seat belt condition. (→P. 156)
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel (manual adjustment type)
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident,
and resulting in death or serious injury.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
CAUTION
3
164
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Inside rear view mirror
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient
confirmation of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
165
Anti-glare function
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind,
the reflected light is automatically reduced.
w
Without compass
Changing automatic
function mode
1
ON
2
OFF
anti-glare
w
Indicator
With compass
Turning automatic anti-glare
function mode on/off
When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode
each time the “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is
turned to IGNITION ON
mode.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
Operation of each component
When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode
each time the “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is
turned to IGNITION ON
mode.
Pressing the button turns the function
to OFF mode. (The indicator also
turns off.)
Indicator
166
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
■ To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover them.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
167
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjustment procedure
1
To select a mirror to adjust, press
the switch.
1
Left
2
Right
3
2
1
Up
2
Right
3
Down
4
Left
Folding the mirrors
Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle’s rear.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
168
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ Linked mirror function when reversing
● When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select switch is selected, the outside rear view
mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order
to give a better view of the ground. To disable this function, select neither “L” nor
“R”.
● If the mirror angle adjustment switch is operated while the linked mirror function is
in operation, the angle and position of the mirrors can be remembered, and the
mirrors will operate at the angle adjusted to the last time the linked mirror function
was operated.
However, because the mirrors move based on the angle they are in when the linked
mirror function is not operating, the mirror angle when the linked mirror function is
operating will also be changed if the mirrors are adjusted while the function is not
operating.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the
rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (→P. 372)
■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (→P. 153)
■ Auto anti-glare function
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside
rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (→P. 165)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
169
CAUTION
■ Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand
caught by the moving mirror.
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating
3
170
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
Opening and closing procedures
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
1
Closing
2
One-touch closing*
3
Opening
4
One-touch opening*
*: Pushing the switch in the opposite
direction will stop window travel partway.
Window lock switch
Press the switch to lock the passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or closing a
passenger window.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
171
■ The power windows can be operated when
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or
turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ When the power window does not close normally
● After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power window
switch in the one-touch closing position while the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
● If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation as explained
above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.
1
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue
holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has closed.
2
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Continue
holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has opened completely.
3
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once again.
Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has
closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the
above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
Operation of each component
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be
closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the relevant door.
172
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■ Door lock linked window operation
● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.*
(→P. 802)
● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (→P. 136)
*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected
The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after
reconnecting the battery.
■ Power windows open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the
instrument cluster when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned
off and the driver’s door is opened with the power windows open.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 852)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some
instances, even death.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-
tion.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the window fully closes.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
173
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it
up and down.
Opening and closing
w
Standard type
1
Opens the moon roof*
The moon roof stops slightly before
the fully open position to reduce
wind noise.
2
Closes the moon roof*
*: Lightly press either way of the
moon roof switch to stop the moon
roof partway.
w
Glass type
1
Opens the moon roof
2
Closes the moon roof (push
and hold)*
*: The moon roof stops once. Push
and hold the switch again to fully
close.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
Press the switch again to fully open
the moon roof.
3
174
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Tilting up and down
w
Standard type
1
Tilts the moon roof up*
2
Tilts the moon roof down*
*: Lightly press either way of the
moon roof switch to stop the moon
roof partway.
w
Glass type
1
Tilts the moon roof up*
2
Tilts the moon roof down (push
and hold)
*: Lightly press either way of the
moon roof switch to stop the moon
roof partway.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
175
■ The moon roof can be operated when
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the “START
STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned
off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is
closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open
automatically when the moon roof is opened.
● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.* (→P. 802)
● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (→P. 136)
*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
3
176
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■ When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
1
Stop the vehicle.
2
Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2
Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it
will tilt down, open and close.
3
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release
the switch.
● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
1
Stop the vehicle.
2
Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up position and stops.
3
Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2
Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt
down, open and close.
4
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release
the switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
*2 :
If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic
operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP”
switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then
it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
177
■ Moon roof open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the
instrument cluster when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned
off and the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof open.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 852)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
3
■ Opening the moon roof
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-
tion.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the moon roof fully closes.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of each component
it is moving.
178
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:
Starting the engine
→P. 197, 204
Driving
1
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(→P. 214, 217)
2
Release the parking brake. (→P. 222)
3
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator
pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Stopping
1
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
2
If necessary, set the parking brake.
Gasoline vehicles: If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time,
shift the shift lever to P or N. (→P. 214)
Hybrid vehicles: If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to P. (→P. 217)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-1. Before driving
Parking the vehicle
1
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
2
Shift the shift lever to P. (→P. 214, 217)
3
Set the parking brake. (→P. 222)
4
Press the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to stop the
engine .
5
Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your
person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Starting off on a steep uphill
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
2
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
3
Release the parking brake.
■ When starting off on a uphill (hybrid vehicles)
The hill-start assist control is available. (→P. 304)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially
slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there
may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the
steering and brakes from operating properly.
■ Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is
due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released
● When sport mode is selected (→P. 296)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
1
4-1. Before driving
■ Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:
● For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
•
•
•
•
Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in low gears.
Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system
needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding
down operation.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (→P. 837)
■ For efficient use (hybrid vehicles)
● Shift the shift lever to D when driving.
In the N position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated.
The hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, requiring unnecessary engine
power to recharge.
● Drive your vehicle smoothly.
Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine power.
● Avoid repeated acceleration.
Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting
in poor acceleration. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator
pedal slightly released.
● Shift the shift lever to P when parking.
In the N position, the hybrid battery (traction battery) does not recharge.
Leaving the shift lever in the N position for an extended period of time may discharge the hybrid battery. The vehicle cannot run if the hybrid battery is discharged.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-1. Before driving
■ Eco-friendly driving
Gasoline vehicles: →P. 105
Hybrid vehicles: →P. 96
■ Customization (gasoline vehicles)
Setting of Eco Driving Indicator Light can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 852)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running
. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
4
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● Hybrid vehicles only: When the hybrid vehicles are driven using the electric
motor only, no engine noise is made. As such, pedestrians, people riding bicycles
or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area may not realize that the
vehicle is approaching. Even with the vehicle proximity notification system active,
people may not realize the vehicle is approaching when the surrounding area is
noisy and so forth. Therefore, take extra care while driving.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may
cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
4-1. Before driving
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When driving the vehicle
● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine . Turning the
engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking
control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more
difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop
the vehicle in the normal way: →P. 741
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a
steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (→P. 215, 218)
● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside
rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not
outside the vehicle.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do
not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability
tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-1. Before driving
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce
your ability to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in engine
speed could cause the vehicle to, resulting in an accident.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that
the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from
functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected.
■ When shifting the shift lever
● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or
● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Gasoline vehicles: Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will dis-
engage the engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N
is selected.
Hybrid vehicles: Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid system. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.
● Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shift-
ing the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious
injury.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Gasoline vehicles: Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake
and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
Hybrid vehicles: Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
4-1. Before driving
CAUTION
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Gasoline vehicles: Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
Hybrid vehicles: Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running , and apply the parking brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the
vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely
apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the
exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is
nearby.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-1. Before driving
CAUTION
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-
cle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such
as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded
or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place contain-
● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metal-
lized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to
act as a lens, causing a fire.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running .
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
ers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs
or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
4-1. Before driving
CAUTION
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move
the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire
due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a
poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side
of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may
not securely hold the vehicle.
● If the brake booster (gasoline vehicles) or brake actuator (hybrid vehicles) does
not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that
require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.
● Gasoline vehicles only: Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
● Gasoline vehicles: The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if
one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase. If this happens, do not drive the vehicle. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
Hybrid vehicles: The brake system consists of 3 individual hydraulic systems; if
one of the systems fails, the others will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase. If this happens, do not continue to drive the vehicle. If the brake system
warning light (red indicator) comes on together with the buzzer sound while driving, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-1. Before driving
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving,
as this may restrain driving torque.
● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at
the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or
the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally
depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an
extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
4
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (→P. 784)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
190
4-1. Before driving
NOTICE
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause
the following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to
have your Lexus dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of engine oil, fluid used for automatic transaxle
, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and
the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-1. Before driving
191
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions,
cargo capacity and load:
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
⎯
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650
lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
(→P. 194)
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not
designed for trailer towing.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
192
4-1. Before driving
Calculation formula for your vehicle
1
Cargo capacity
2
Total load capacity (vehicle
capacity weight) (→P. 824)
When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your
vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb.
(kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb.
(kg) as follows:
B*2 lb. (kg) — A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)
*1: A = Weight of people
*2: B = Total load capacity
*3: C = Available cargo and luggage load
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get
on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:
C lb. (kg) — D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)
*4: D = Additional weight of people
*5: E = Available cargo and luggage load
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the
cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the
increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an
increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load
capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load),
you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-1. Before driving
193
CAUTION
■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block
the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly
causing an accident.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
At the feet of the driver
On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
On the package tray
On the instrument panel
On the dashboard
In front of the navigation system screen, Lexus Display Audio system screen or
the audio/air conditioning system display
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total
load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
•
•
•
•
•
•
194
4-1. Before driving
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing
capacity and cargo capacity.
◆ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): →P. 824
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.
◆ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
◆ Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
◆ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 703)
CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-1. Before driving
195
Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus
also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a
tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is
not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
196
4-1. Before driving
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
197
Engine (ignition) switch (gasoline vehicles)
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key
on your person starts the engine or changes “START STOP ENGINE”
switch modes.
Starting the engine
1
Check that the parking brake is set.
2
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
3
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
will be displayed on the multi-information display.
4
If it is not displayed, the engine cannot be started.
Press the “START
ENGINE” switch.
STOP
The engine will crank until it starts or
for up to 30 seconds, whichever is
less.
Continue depressing the brake pedal
until the engine is completely started.
The engine can be started from any
“START STOP ENGINE” switch
mode.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
4
198
4-2. Driving procedures
Stopping the engine
1
Stop the vehicle.
2
Shift the shift lever to P.
3
Set the parking brake. (→P. 222)
4
Press the “START STOP ENGINE” switch.
5
Release the brake pedal and check that “POWER ON” on the multiinformation display is off.
Changing “START STOP ENGINE” switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the “START STOP ENGINE” switch
with brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is
pressed.)
Off*
The emergency flashers can be used.
The multi-information display will not
be displayed.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as
the audio system can be used.
“POWER ON” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can be
used.
“POWER ON” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
*: If the shift lever is in a position other
than P when turning off the engine, the
“START STOP ENGINE” switch will
be turned to ACCESSORY mode,
not to off.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
199
When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other
than P
If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the
“START STOP ENGINE” switch will not be turned off but instead be
turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn
the switch off:
1
Check that the parking brake is set.
2
Shift the shift lever to P.
3
Check that “POWER ON” and “Turn Power OFF” are displayed alternately on the multi-information display and then press the “START
STOP ENGINE” switch once.
4
Check that “POWER ON” and “Turn Power OFF” on the multi-information display are off.
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
■ Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNITION
ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P,
the “START STOP ENGINE” switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with
the “START STOP ENGINE” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for
long periods of time when the engine is not running.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
→P. 134
■ Conditions affecting operation
→P. 130
■ Notes for the entry function
→P. 131
■ If the engine does not start
● The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 80)
Contact your Lexus dealer.
● Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The engine may not start if the shift
lever is displaced out of P. “Shift to P position to Start” will be displayed on the multiinformation display.
■ Steering lock
After turning the “START STOP ENGINE” switch off and opening and closing the
doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating
the “START STOP ENGINE” switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
“Steering Lock active” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the
“START STOP ENGINE” switch while turning
the steering wheel left and right.
■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if
the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case,
refrain from operating the engine. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor
will resume functioning.
■ When “Check Access System with Elec. Key” is displayed on the multi-information
display
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
→P. 710
■ Operation of the “START STOP ENGINE” switch
● When operating the “START STOP ENGINE” switch, one short, firm press is
enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the engine may not start or the “START
STOP ENGINE” switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to press and
hold the switch.
● If attempting to restart the engine immediately after turning the “START STOP
ENGINE” switch off, the engine may not start in some cases. After turning the
“START STOP ENGINE” switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting
the engine.
■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a cus-
tomized setting
→P. 802
■ Odometer and trip meter display
When the “START STOP ENGINE” switch is turned off, the odometer or trip meter
display will extinguish after approximately 30 seconds.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
4-2. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving
If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors
until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in
this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and
hold the “START STOP ENGINE” switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession. (→P. 741)
However, do not touch the “START STOP ENGINE” switch while driving except in
an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or
braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it
more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
● Do not leave the “START STOP ENGINE” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running.
● If “POWER ON” is displayed on the multi-information display, the “START STOP
ENGINE” switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the “START STOP
ENGINE” switch off.
● Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the
engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the “START STOP ENGINE”
switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the
vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery discharge may occur.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer immediately.
If the “START STOP ENGINE” switch seems to be operating somewhat differently
than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact
your Lexus dealer immediately.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “START STOP ENGINE” switch
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch (hybrid vehicles)
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key
on your person starts the hybrid system or changes “POWER” switch
modes.
Starting the hybrid system
1
Check that the parking brake is set.
2
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
3
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
will be displayed on the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started.
4
Press the “POWER” switch.
Continue depressing the brake pedal
until the hybrid system is completely
started.
The hybrid system can be started from
any “POWER” switch mode.
5
Check that the “READY” indicator is on.
The vehicle will not move when the
“READY” indicator is off.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
Stopping the hybrid system
1
Stop the vehicle.
2
Shift the shift lever to P.
3
Set the parking brake. (→P. 222)
4
Press the “POWER” switch.
5
Release the brake pedal and check that “POWER ON” on the multiinformation display is off.
Changing “POWER” switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the “POWER” switch with brake
pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
4
Off*
The multi-information display will not
be displayed.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as
the audio system can be used.
“POWER ON” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
ON mode
All electrical components can be
used.
“POWER ON” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
*: If the shift lever is in a position other
than P when turning off the hybrid system, the “POWER” switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to
off.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
The emergency flashers can be used.
4-2. Driving procedures
When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a position
other than P
If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P,
the “POWER” switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to
ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch
off:
1
Check that the parking brake is set.
2
Shift the shift lever to P.
3
Check that “POWER ON” and “Turn Power OFF” are displayed alternately on the multi-information display and then press the “POWER”
switch once.
4
Check that “POWER ON” and “Turn Power OFF” on the multi-information display are off.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
■ Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or ON mode
(the hybrid system is not operating) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the
“POWER” switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely
prevent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the “POWER”
switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not operating.
■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicles
→P. 73
■ Electronic key battery depletion
→P. 134
■ When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions
It may take time until the “READY” indicator comes on.
■ Conditions affecting operation
4
→P. 130
Driving
■ Notes for the entry function
→P. 131
■ If the hybrid system does not start
● The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 82)
Contact your Lexus dealer.
● Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The hybrid system may not start if the
shift lever is displaced out of P. “Shift to P position when starting” will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
■ Steering lock
After turning the “POWER” switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the “POWER”
switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
“Steering Lock active” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the
“POWER” switch while turning the steering
wheel left and right.
■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if
the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this
case, refrain from operating the hybrid system. After about 10 seconds, the steering
lock motor will resume functioning.
■ When “Check Access System with Elec. Key” is displayed on the multi-information
display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
■ If the “READY” indicator does not come on
If the “READY” indicator does not come on when you press the “POWER” switch
with the shift lever in P and the brake pedal depressed, contact your Lexus dealer
immediately.
■ If the hybrid system is malfunctioning
→P. 762
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
→P. 710
■ Operation of the “POWER” switch
● When operating the “POWER” switch, one short, firm press is enough. If the switch
is pressed improperly, the hybrid system may not start or the “POWER” switch
mode may not change. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.
● If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the “POWER”
switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases. After turning the
“POWER” switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the hybrid system.
■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a cus-
tomized setting
→P. 802
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
■ Odometer and trip meter display
When the “POWER” switch is turned off, the odometer or trip meter display will
extinguish after approximately 30 seconds.
CAUTION
■ When starting the hybrid system
Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving
If hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the
doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering
lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
■ Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency
However, do not touch the “POWER” switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or
braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it
more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
press and hold the “POWER” switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3
times or more in succession. (→P. 741)
4
210
4-2. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
● Do not leave the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long peri-
ods of time without the hybrid system on.
● If “POWER ON” is displayed on the multi-information display, the “POWER”
switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the “POWER” switch off.
● Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If
the hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the “POWER” switch
will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle
is left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery discharge may occur.
■ When starting the hybrid system
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.
● If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer immediately.
■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “POWER” switch
If the “POWER” switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual,
such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus
dealer immediately.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
211
EV drive mode (hybrid vehicles)
In EV drive mode the electric motor (traction motor), powered by the
hybrid battery (traction battery), is used to drive the vehicle.
This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning
and late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern for
noises and gas emissions.
However, when the vehicle proximity notification system is active, the
vehicle may produce sound.
Turns EV drive mode on/off
■ Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on
It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot
be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display.
● The temperature of the hybrid system is high.
The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.
● The temperature of the hybrid system is low.
The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 68°F (20°C) for a long
period of time etc.
● The gasoline engine is warming up.
● The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.
The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” screen or the multiinformation display is low. (→P. 110)
● Vehicle speed is about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly.
● The windshield defogger is in use.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
When EV drive mode is turned on,
“EV MODE” will be displayed on the
multi-information display. Pressing the
switch when in EV drive mode will
return the vehicle to normal driving
(using the gasoline engine and electric
motor [traction motor]).
212
4-2. Driving procedures
■ Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold
If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine
will start automatically in order to warm up. In this case, you will become unable to
switch to EV drive mode.
After the hybrid system has started and the “READY” indicator has illuminated,
press the EV drive mode switch before the gasoline engine starts to switch to EV
drive mode.
■ Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode
When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the
following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound and the
EV indicator will flash 3 times and go off.
● The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low.
The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” screen or the multiinformation display is low. (→P. 110)
● Vehicle speed becomes more than about 25 mph (40 km/h).
● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly.
When it is possible to inform the driver of automatic cancelation in advance, a prior
notice screen will appear on the multi-information display.
■ Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode
EV drive mode’s possible driving distance ranges from a few hundred meters to
approximately 1.3 mile (2 km). Driving is possible at speeds of less than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). However, depending on vehicle conditions, there are situations when EV drive mode cannot be used.
(The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level
and driving conditions.)
■ Fuel economy
Your Lexus is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal
driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV
drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
213
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
When driving in EV drive mode no engine noise is made. As such, pedestrians,
people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area may
not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them. Therefore, take extra
care while driving even if the vehicle proximity notification system is active.
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
214
4-2. Driving procedures
Automatic transmission (gasoline vehicles)
Shifting the shift lever
While the “START STOP ENGINE” switch is in IGNITION ON
mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is
completely stopped.
Shift position purpose
Shift position
Objective or function
P
Parking the vehicle/starting the engine
R
Reversing
N
Neutral
D
Normal driving*1
S
S mode driving*2 (→P. 215)
*1: Shifting the shift lever to D allows the system to select a gear suitable for the driving conditions.
Setting the shift lever to D is recommended for normal driving.
*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear
ranges, controls engine braking force, and prevents unnecessary upshifting.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
215
Selecting gears in the S position
When the shift lever is in S, the shift lever can be operated as follows:
1
Upshifting
2
Downshifting
The selected shift range, from S1 to
S6, will be displayed in the meter.
The initial shift range in S mode is set
automatically to S5 or S4 according
to vehicle speed. However, the initial
shift range may be set to S3 if AISHIFT has operated while the shift
lever was in D. (→P. 216)
4
Driving
■
Shift ranges and their functions
● Automatically selecting gears between S1 and S6 according to vehi-
cle speed and driving conditions. But the gear is limited according to
selected shift range.
● You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a
higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
216
4-2. Driving procedures
■ S mode
● When the shift range is S4 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the shift
range to S6.
● To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur.
● To protect the automatic transmission, a function is adopted that automatically
shifts to the top range when the temperature is too hot.
■ When driving with cruise control activated
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not activate while driving in S mode and downshifting to 5 or
4 because cruise control will not be canceled. (→P. 244)
■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
■ If the S indicator does not come on or the D indicator is displayed even after shift-
ing the shift lever to S
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when the shift
lever is in D.)
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
→P. 801
■ AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in D. (Shifting the shift
lever to S cancels the function.)
CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting
in an accident.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
217
Hybrid transmission (hybrid vehicles)
Shifting the shift lever
4
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is
completely stopped.
Shift position purpose
Shift position
Objective or function
P
Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system
R
Reversing
N
Neutral
D
Normal driving*1
S
S mode driving*2 (→P. 218)
*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in D for normal
driving.
*2:
By selecting shift ranges using S mode, you can control engine braking forces.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
While the “POWER” switch is in ON mode, move the shift lever with
the brake pedal depressed.
218
4-2. Driving procedures
Selecting shift ranges in the S position
To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to S. Shift ranges can then be selected
by operating the shift lever, allowing you to drive in the shift range of your
choosing.
1
Upshifting
2
Downshifting
The selected shift range, from S1 to
S6, will be displayed in the meter.
The initial shift range in S mode is
automatically set to S4 or S5 according to vehicle speed.
■
Shift ranges and their functions
● You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a
higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.
● If you accelerate while in ranges S1 to S4, the shift range may auto-
matically range up in accordance with the vehicle’s speed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
219
■ S mode
● When the shift range is S4 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the shift
range to S6.
● To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur.
■ When driving with cruise control activated
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not activate while driving in S mode and downshifting to S5
or S4 because cruise control will not be canceled. (→P. 244)
■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
■ If the S indicator does not come on or the D indicator is displayed even after shift-
ing the shift lever to S
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
→P. 801
■ AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance
and driving conditions.
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting
the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when the shift
lever is in D.)
220
4-2. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting
in an accident.
NOTICE
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge
If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged
even when the engine is running. Therefore, if the vehicle is left with the shift lever
in N for a long period of time, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge,
and this may result in the vehicle not being able to start.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
221
Turn signal lever
Operating instructions
1
Right turn
2
Lane change to the right (move
the lever partway and then
release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3
times.
3
Lane change to the left (move the
lever partway and then release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.
4
4
Left turn
Driving
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed
Operate the lever again.
■ To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change
Operate the lever in the opposite direction.
■ Customization
The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed.
(→P. 852)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
222
4-2. Driving procedures
Parking brake
To set the parking brake, fully
depress the parking brake pedal
with your left foot while depressing
the brake pedal with your right foot.
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)
U.S.A. Canada
■ Usage in winter time
→P. 327
NOTICE
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2. Driving procedures
223
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or close
to the
mark.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel (manual adjustment type only)
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked. (→P. 162)
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
224
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
The side marker, daytime
running, tail, license plate
and instrument panel lights
turn on.
1
2
The headlights, parking and
all lights listed above
(except daytime running
lights) turn on.
3
The headlights, daytime
running lights and all the
lights listed above turn on
and off automatically.
(When the “START STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”>
switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.)
4
Off
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
The daytime running lights
turn on.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
U.S.A. Canada
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
225
Turning on the high beam headlights
1
With the headlights on, push the
lever away from you to turn on
the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
2
Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high beams
once.
You can flash the high beams with the
headlights on or off.
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
226
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ Daytime running light system
● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the parking lights turn on auto-
matically (at an increased intensity) whenever the engine is started
and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use
at night.
For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.
● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers
greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.
■ Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.
■ Automatic light off system
: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds
When the light switch is in
after the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY
mode or turned off and a door is opened and all of the doors and trunk are closed.
(The lights turn off immediately if
on the key is pressed twice after all the doors
are closed.)
To turn the lights on again, turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to
IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to
or
.
If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 20
minutes.
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned
off or turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver’s door is opened while the lights
are turned on.
■ Automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped)
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not
interfere with other road users.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
227
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 852)
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running
.
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
228
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Automatic High Beam∗
The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to assess
the brightness of streetlights, the lights of oncoming and preceding
vehicles, etc., and automatically turns high beam on or off as necessary.
Activating the Automatic High Beam system
1
Push the lever away from you
with the headlight switch in
or
position.
2
Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will come on when the headlights are
turned on automatically to indicate
that the system is active.
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
229
High beam automatic turning on or off conditions
When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be automatically turned on (after approximately 1 second):
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 21 mph (34 km/h).
● The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
● There are no oncoming or preceding vehicles with headlights or tail
lights turned on.
● There are few streetlights on the road ahead.
If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be automatically turned off:
● Vehicle speed drops below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
● The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
on.
● There are many streetlights on the road ahead.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
● Oncoming or preceding vehicles have headlights or tail lights turned
4
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Turning the high beam on/off manually
■
Switching to low beam
Pull the lever to original position.
The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off.
Push the lever away from you to
activate the Automatic High Beam
system again.
■
Switching to high beam
Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off and the high beam
indicator will turn on.
Press the switch to activate the
Automatic High Beam system
again.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ The Automatic High Beam can be operated when
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
■ Camera sensor detection information
● High beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:
• When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve
• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another
• When oncoming or preceding vehicles are hidden from sight due to repeated
curves, road dividers or roadside trees
• When oncoming vehicles appear from the faraway lane on wide road
• When oncoming or preceding vehicles have no lights
● High beam may be turned off if an oncoming vehicle that is using fog lights without
using the headlights is detected.
● House lights, street lights, red traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs may
cause the high beam to turn off.
4
● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn high beam on or
• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of oncoming and preceding vehicles
• The movement and direction of oncoming and preceding vehicles
• When a oncoming or preceding vehicle only has operational lights on one side
• When a oncoming or preceding vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface etc.)
• The number of passengers and amount of luggage
● High beam may be turned on or off when unexpected by the driver.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
off:
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
● In the situations below, the system may not be able to correctly detect the sur-
rounding brightness levels, and may flash or expose nearby pedestrians to the high
beam. Therefore, you should consider turning the high beams on or off manually
rather than relying on the Automatic High Beam system.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms etc.)
The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt etc.
The windshield is cracked or damaged.
The camera sensor is deformed or dirty.
Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or fog
lights.
Vehicles ahead have headlights or tail lights that are either switched off, dirty, are
changing color, or are not aimed properly.
When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness.
When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads
with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel tracks
etc.).
When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road.
There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror.
The vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly.
The vehicle is listing or titling, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed etc.
The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to
other drivers or pedestrians nearby.
■ Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity
The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.
1
Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off while the following
conditions are met.
• The headlight switch is in
or
.
• The headlight switch lever is in high beam position.
• Automatic High Beam switch is on.
2
Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
3
Within 5 seconds after 2 , repeat pulling the headlight switch lever to the original position then pushing it to the high beam position quickly 9 times, then leave
the lever in high beam position.
Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even the vehicle is stopped.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
CAUTION
■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam
Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings and turning high beam on or off manually if necessary.
NOTICE
■ Notes when using the Automatic High Beam system
Observe the following to ensure that the Automatic High Beam functions correctly.
● Do not touch the camera sensor.
● Do not subject the camera sensor to a
strong impact.
● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.
● Do not apply window tinting or stickers to
the camera sensor or the area of windshield
near the camera sensor.
● Do not place items on the dashboard. There is a possibility that the camera sensor
will mistake items reflected in the windshield for streetlights, the headlights of
other vehicles, etc.
● Do not install a parking tag or any other accessories near or around the camera
sensor.
● Do not overload the vehicle.
● Do not modify the vehicle.
● Do not replace windshield with non-genuine windshield.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not replace headlights with non-genuine headlights.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
● Do not spill liquid onto the camera sensor.
4
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions,
such as in rain and fog.
1
(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Turns the fog lights off
2
Turns the fog lights on
■ Fog lights can be used when
The headlights are on in low beam.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
Operating the wiper lever
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
w
Intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster
1
Temporary operation
2
Intermittent operation
3
Low speed operation
4
High speed operation
4
Driving
Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.
5
Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency
6
Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency
7
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer
squirts.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
w
Rain-sensing windshield wipers
1
Temporary operation
2
Rain-sensing wiper operation
(AUTO)
3
Low speed operation
4
High speed operation
When AUTO is selected, the wipers
will operate automatically when the
sensor detects falling rain. The system
automatically adjusts wiper timing in
accordance with rain volume and
vehicle speed.
The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted when AUTO is selected.
5
Increases the sensitivity
6
Decreases the sensitivity
7
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer
squirts.
■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
● The raindrop sensor judges the amount of
raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not
operate properly when sunlight from the
rising or setting of the sun intermittently
strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are
present on the windshield.
● If the wiper switch is turned to AUTO position while the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wipers will operate once
to show that AUTO mode is activated.
● When the sensor sensitivity ring is turned toward high while in AUTO mode, the
wipers will operate once to indicate that the sensor sensitivity is enhanced.
● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or -22°F
(-30°C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the
wipers in any mode other than AUTO mode.
4
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode (vehicles with
rain-sensing windshield wipers)
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or
anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm.
The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
■ When standing the windshield wipers up
Raise the wipers in line with the windshield. (→P. 329)
Failure to do so may result in damage to the wipers and/or the hood.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
● Close all the doors and windows, and turn the “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off.
● Confirm the type of fuel.
■ Fuel types
Use unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or higher)
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-4. Refueling
CAUTION
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted
metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static
electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can
cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to
come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■ When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the fuel tank.
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted
surface.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
1
Press the opener switch to open
the fuel filler door.
2
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
4
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
3
4-4. Refueling
■ If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
Remove the cover inside the trunk and pull
the lever to open the fuel filler door if the fuel
filler door cannot be opened using the inside
switch.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-4. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once the
cap is released, it will turn slightly in
the opposite direction.
CAUTION
■ When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious
injury.
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Cruise control∗
Summary of functions
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
1
Indicators
2
Cruise control switch
Setting the vehicle speed
1
Press the “ON/OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come on.
Press the button again to deactivate
the cruise control.
2
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed, and
push the lever down to set the
speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set
speed.
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is
obtained.
1
Increases the speed
2
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move
the lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in
the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated.
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
1
Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied.
2
Pushing the lever up resumes the
constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately
25 mph (40 km/h).
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until
the lever is released.
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D or range S4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first
accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to
set the new speed.
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the
preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
■ If the warning message for the cruise control is shown on the multi-information dis-
play
Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● During emergency towing
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Dynamic radar cruise control∗
Summary of functions
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in
order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
1
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button
2
Display
3
Set speed
4
Indicators
5
Cruise control switch
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
1
Press the “ON/OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to deactivate
the cruise control.
2
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed, and
push the lever down to set the
speed.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set
speed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
“SET” indicator will come on.
4
250
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is
displayed.
1
Increases the speed
2
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move
the lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in
the desired direction.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased or
decreased as follows:
• When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held
• When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 0.6 mph (1 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held
In the constant speed control mode (→P. 255), the set speed will be increased or
decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually
until the lever is released.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
251
Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Pressing the button changes the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:
1
Long
2
Medium
3
Short
Preceding
vehicle mark
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set
automatically to long mode when the
“START
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
4
Driving
If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the
preceding vehicle mark will also be
displayed.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Distance options
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)
Medium
Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)
Short
Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
252
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Canceling and resuming the speed control
1
Pulling the lever toward you cancels the cruise control.
The speed setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied.
2
Pushing the lever up resumes the
cruise control and returns vehicle
speed to the set speed.
Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately
25 mph (40 km/h).
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
253
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to
approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-tovehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following
distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill
slopes.
4
Driving
1
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle
distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
2
Example of deceleration cruising
When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the
system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot
decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle
ahead.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
254
3
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Example of follow-up cruising
When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed
of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the
driver.
4
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than the
set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to
constant speed cruising.
Approach warning
When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will
flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this
would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a
vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
■
Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not
occur:
● When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your vehi-
cle speed
● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed
● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
● At the instant the accelerator is applied
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
255
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain
a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this
mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due to dirt etc.
1
Press the “ON/OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to deactivate
the cruise control.
2
Switch to constant speed control
mode.
Cruise control indicator will come on.
When in constant speed control mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, push the lever forward again and hold for approximately 1 second.
After the desired speed has been set, it is not possible to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.
If the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned off and then turned
to IGNITION ON mode again, the vehicle will automatically return to
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.
Adjusting the speed setting: →P. 245
Canceling and resuming the speed setting: →P. 245
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
(Push the lever forward and hold for approximately 1 second.)
4
256
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may
decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following
situations:
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wipers are in AUTO
mode or the high speed wiper operation).
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
257
■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control
The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set
vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.
■ Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice and plastic
objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
1
Grille cover
2
Radar sensor
4
Driving
■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control
Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to
inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (→P. 763)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
258
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Certification
w For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
w For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
259
CAUTION
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes etc.
■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated
vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive
driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It
is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
4
● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision
with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver
must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in
order to ensure the safety of all involved.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance
between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is
appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement.
Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.
260
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and
down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● At entrances to expressways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors
from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
● During emergency towing
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
261
CAUTION
■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the
approach warning (→P. 254) will not be activated, and a fatal or serious accident
may result.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function
correctly
4
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-
ing of the sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk etc.)
● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may
not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a fatal or serious accident may
result:
262
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding
area.
● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
● Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
263
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)∗
Summary of function
While driving on a road that has lane markers, this system recognizes the
white lane markers using a camera as a sensor to alert the driver when the
vehicle deviates from its lane.
If the system judges that the vehicle may deviate from its lane, it alerts the
driver using beeping and indications on the multi-information display.
Camera sensor
4
Driving
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
264
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Turning the LDA system on
Press the “LDA” switch to activate
the system.
“LDA” indicator and the lane lines will
come on.
Press the switch again to turn the LDA
system off.
The LDA system will remain on or off
even if the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
Operating conditions
● When the vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more
● When the lane width is more than approximately 8.2 ft. (2.5 m)
● When driving on a straight road or through a curve with a radius of
more than approximately 328 ft. (100 m)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
265
Indication on the multi-information display
When the LDA system is on, the lane lines are shown.
The inside of the lane lines turn
white when the right and left lane
markers are recognized.
If the vehicle deviates from the lane,
the lane line on the side the vehicle
deviates from will flash.
The inside of the recognized lane
line turns white when the right or left
lane marker is recognized.
The inside of the lane lines turn
black when no lane marker is recognized or the LDA system is temporarily canceled.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
If the vehicle deviates from a lane that
has lane markers recognized, the lane
line will flash.
266
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Temporary cancelation of the LDA system
When the lane departure warning function is activated. The lane departure warning
function will not operate again for a several seconds after it has been activated, even
if the vehicle leaves the lane again.
■ The lane departure warning
It may be difficult to feel the sensory warning depending on the road conditions.
■ After the vehicle has been parked in the sun
The LDA system may not be available and a warning message (→P. 771) will be displayed for a while after driving has started. When the temperature in the cabin
decreases and the temperature around the camera sensor (→P. 263) becomes suitable for its operation, the functions will begin to operate.
■ Conditions in which the function may not operate correctly
In the following conditions, the LDA system may not operate, or it may not be possible to ensure adequate performance. Also, the camera sensor may be unable to recognize lane markers causing the lane departure warning function to operate
incorrectly. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.
● When driving through an area with no lane markers, such as a tollbooth, a crossing
or before a ticket checkpoint
● When driving on a sharp curve
● When lane markers are extremely narrow or extremely wide
● When the vehicle leans to one side an unusual amount due to a heavy load or
improper tire inflation pressure
● When the following distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is
extremely short
● When the lane markers are yellow (These may be more difficult for the system to
recognize compared to white markers.)
● When the lane markers are broken, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or
stones
● When the lane markers are on a curb etc.
● When lane markers are obscured or partially obscured by sand, dirt, etc.
● When there are shadows on the road running parallel with lane markers, or if a
shadow covers the lane markers
● When driving on a particularly bright road surface, such as concrete
● When driving on a road surface that is bright due to reflected light
● When driving in a location where the light level changes rapidly, such as the
entrance to or exit from a tunnel
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
267
● When sunlight or the headlights of oncoming vehicles are shining directly into the
camera lens
● When driving on roads that are branching or merging
● When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, previous rainfall, standing
water, etc.
● When the vehicle experiences strong up-and-down motion such as when driving
on an extremely rough road or on a seam in the pavement
● When headlight brightness at nighttime is reduced due to dirt on the lenses, or
when the headlights are misaligned
● When driving on winding roads or roads that are uneven
● When driving on rough or unpaved roads
■ When changing the tires
Depending on the tires used, sufficient performance may not be maintainable.
■ Warning messages for LDA system
Warning messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver
of the need for caution while driving. (→P. 764, 771)
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
268
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ Before using the LDA system
Do not rely solely on the LDA system. The LDA system does not drive the vehicle
automatically, nor does it reduce the amount of care you need to take. As such, the
driver must always assume full responsibility for understanding his/her surroundings, for operating the steering wheel to correct the driving line, and for driving
safely.
Inappropriate or negligent driving could lead to an accident.
■ To avoid operating the LDA by mistake
Switch the LDA system off using the “LDA” switch when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for LDA system
Do not use LDA system in any of the following situations.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
● When driving with tire chains, a spare tire, or similar equipment
● When there are objects or structures along the roadside that might be misinter-
preted as lane markers (such as guardrails, curb, reflector posts, etc.)
● When driving on snowy roads
● When pavement lane markers are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, etc.
● When there are visible lines on the pavement from road repairs, or if the remains
of old lane markers are still visible on the road
● When driving on a road with lane closures due to maintenance, or when driving
in a temporary lane
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
269
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to or incorrect operation of the LDA system
● Do not modify the headlights or attach stickers to the surface of the lights.
● Do not modify the suspension or replace it with non-genuine parts.
● Do not install or place anything on the hood or the grille. Also, do not install a
grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.).
● If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Camera sensor (→P. 263)
Observe the following to ensure that the LDA system functions correctly.
● Keep the windshield clean at all times.
Performance could be affected if the windshield is dirty, or if raindrops, condensation or ice are adhering to the windshield.
● Do not attach a sticker or other items to the
windshield near the camera sensor.
4
Driving
● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
● Do not install an antenna in front of the camera lens.
● If the windshield is fogged up, use the windshield defogger to remove fog from
the windshield.
When it is cold, using the heater with air blowing to the feet may allow the upper
part of the windshield to fog up. This will have a negative effect on the images.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
270
4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE
● Do not scratch the camera lens, or let it get dirty.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, be careful not to get any glass
cleaner etc. on the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
For lens repair, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or
remove it. The direction of the camera sensor is precisely adjusted.
● Do not subject the camera sensor to strong impact or force, and do not disas-
semble the camera sensor.
● Do not replace windshield with non-genuine windshield.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
271
Intuitive parking assist∗
The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via the multi-information display, navigation system screen
or Lexus Display Audio system screen and a buzzer. Always check the
surrounding area when using this system.
■
Types of sensors
4
Driving
1
Front center sensors
2
Front corner sensors
3
Rear corner sensors
4
Rear center sensors
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
272
■
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Intuitive parking assist switch
Turns the intuitive parking assist
on/off
When on, the indicator light comes
on to inform the driver that the system is operational.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
273
Display
When the sensors detect an obstacle, a graphic is shown on the multiinformation display and navigation system screen or Lexus Display Audio
system screen depending on the position and distance to the obstacle.
■
Multi-information display
1
Front corner sensor detection
2
Front center sensor detection
3
Rear corner sensor detection
4
Rear center sensor detection
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
274
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■
Navigation system screen/Lexus Display Audio system screen (if
equipped)
1
When the rear view monitor system is not displayed
A graphic is automatically displayed
when an obstacle is detected. The
screen can be set so that the graphic is
not displayed. (→P. 279)
2
When the rear view monitor system is displayed (insert display)
A simplified image is displayed on the
right upper corner of the navigation
system screen or Lexus Display Audio
system screen when an obstacle is
detected.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
275
Sensor detection display, obstacle distance
■
Front center sensor
Approximate
distance to
obstacle
Navigation
MultiNavigation
system
information
system
(insert
display
display)
Lexus
Display
Audio
system
Lexus
Display
Audio
system
(insert
display)
3.3 ft. (100 cm) to
2.0 ft. (60 cm)
(continuous)
(blinking
slowly)
(continuous)
(blinking
slowly)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(blinking)
(continuous)
(blinking)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(blinking
rapidly)
(continuous)
(blinking
rapidly)
(blinking)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)
4
Driving
(continuous)
2.0 ft. (60 cm) to
1.5 ft. (45 cm)
1.5 ft. (45 cm) to
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
Less than
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
276
■
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Corner sensors
Approximate
distance to
obstacle
Navigation
MultiNavigation
system
information
system
(insert
display
display)
Lexus
Display
Audio
system
Lexus
Display
Audio
system
(insert
display)
2.0 ft. (60 cm) to
1.5 ft. (45 cm)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(blinking)
(continuous)
(blinking)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(blinking
rapidly)
(continuous)
(blinking
rapidly)
(blinking)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)
(continuous)
1.5 ft. (45 cm) to
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
Less than
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■
277
Rear center sensor
Approximate distance
to obstacle
Multi-information
display
Navigation
system
(insert display)
Lexus Display
Audio system
(insert display)
(continuous)
(blinking slowly)
(blinking slowly)
(continuous)
(blinking)
(blinking)
(continuous)
(blinking rapidly)
(blinking rapidly)
(blinking)
(continuous)
(continuous)
4.9 ft. (150 cm) to
2.0 ft. (60 cm)
2.0 ft. (60 cm) to
1.5 ft. (45 cm)
4
Driving
1.5 ft. (45 cm) to
1.1 ft. (35 cm)
Less than
1.1 ft. (35 cm)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
278
■
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle
A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.
● The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer sounds continuously:
• Front center sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
• Corner sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
• Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
● When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer
system responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come within
the above distances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast
beeps.
Detection range of the sensors
1
Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)
2
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
3
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors cannot detect obstacles that
are extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may change
depending on the shape of the object
etc.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
279
Setting up intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
You can change the warning beep volume and navigation system screen
or Lexus Display Audio system screen operating conditions.
1
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch (navigation system) or
Lexus Display Audio controller (Lexus Display Audio system).
(→P. 109)
2
Select “SETUP” on the “Menu” screen.
3
Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
4
Select “LEXUS Park Assist” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.
w
Navigation system
w
Lexus Display Audio system
4
Driving
1
Alert volume setting
2
Display on/off setting
3
Alert distance setting
Make sure to save after changing settings.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■
Alert volume setting
The alert volume can be adjusted.
■
1
Select “1” to “5” on the “LEXUS Park Assist settings”.
2
Select “Save”.
Display on/off setting
On or off can be selected for intuitive parking assist display.
1
Select “Display Off”.
When the “Display Off” indicator is turned on, the display of intuitive parking
assist will be off. Select “Display Off” again to turn the display of intuitive parking assist on.
2
■
Select “Save”.
Alert distance setting
Front or rear center sensors display and tone indication can be set.
1
Select “Front” or “Rear”.
Long distance or short distance can be selected.
2
Select “Save”.
■ The intuitive parking assist can be operated when
● Front center sensors:
• The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P or R.
• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
● Front corner sensors:
• The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P.
• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
● Rear corner and rear center sensors:
• The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
• The shift lever is in R.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Intuitive parking assist display
When an obstacle is detected while the rear view monitor system is in use, the warning indicator will appear in the top right of the screen even if the display setting has
been set to off.
■ Sensor detection information
● The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s front cor-
ner and rear bumpers.
● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability
of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this may
occur are listed below.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this
problem.)
• The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnormal display, or obstacles may not be detected.
• The sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.
• Towing eyelets are installed.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.
• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.
• A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.
• People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their
shape, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they
are.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular
attention to the following obstacles:
•
•
•
•
•
Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
Sharply-angled objects
Low obstacles
Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your
vehicle
● The following situations may occur during use.
• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.
• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at slow
speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within the sensor’s
detection areas before the display is shown and the warning beep sounds.
• Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected for collision
when approached, even if they have been detected once.
• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air flow
noise of air conditioning system.
■ If a message is displayed on the multi-information display
→P. 763, 770
■ Certification
w For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
w For vehicles sold in Canada
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
Cet appareil ISM est conforme à la norme NMB-001 du Canada.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ When using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.
● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
● The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving for-
ward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides
of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s
speed.
● Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.
NOTICE
4
■ When using intuitive parking assist-sensor
● The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a beep sounds when no
obstacles are detected.
● If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong
impact.
● If the bumper collides with something.
● If the display shows continuously without a beep.
● If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.
If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that
the sensor is malfunctioning.
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor
malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Rear view monitor system∗
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image
of the view behind the vehicle and fixation guide lines while backing up,
for example while parking.
The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and
may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.
w
Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
w
Vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system
Rear view monitor system will activate when the shift lever is in R.
If you move the lever out of R, the rear
view monitor system will be deactivated.
When the shift lever is shifted to the R
position and any mode button (such as
“MENU”) is pressed, the rear view
monitor system is canceled, and the
screen is switched to the mode of the
button that was pressed.
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Using the rear view monitor system
■
Screen description
The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is
shifted to R while the power switch is in ON mode.
1
Vehicle width extension guide line
2
Vehicle center guide lines
These lines indicate the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
3
Distance guide line
The line shows points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the center of the
edge of the bumper.
4
Distance guide line
The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 3 ft. (1 m)
(blue) from the edge of the bumper.
5
Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped)
If an obstacle is detected while the Intuitive parking assist-sensor is on, a display is shown in the top right corner of the screen.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
The line indicates a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.
The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Rear view monitor system precautions
■
Area displayed on screen
The rear view monitor system displays an image of the view from
the bumper of the rear area of the
vehicle.
To adjust the image on the rear
view monitor system screen.
(→P. 340)
• The area displayed on the screen
may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions.
• Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper cannot be displayed.
• The camera uses a special lens. The
distance of the image that appears
on the screen differs from the
actual distance.
• Items which are located higher
than the camera may not be displayed on the monitor.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Corners of bumper
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■
Rear view monitor system camera
The camera for the rear view
monitor system is located above
the license plate.
4
Driving
● Using the camera
If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If
water droplets, snow or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and
wipe with a soft cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild
cleanser and rinse.
■
Differences between the screen and the actual road
The distance guide lines and the vehicle width extension guide lines
may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space,
even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distances between the vehicle width extension guide lines and the
left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even
when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In
any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the
fixation guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the
road.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be closer to the vehicle
than the actual distance. Because
of this, objects will appear to be
farther away than they actually
are. In the same way, there will be
a margin of error between the
guidelines and the actual distance/course on the road.
● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be further from the
vehicle than the actual distance.
Because of this, objects will
appear to be closer than they
actually are. In the same way,
there will be a margin of error
between the guidelines and the
actual distance/course on the
road.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● When any part of the vehicle sags
When any part of the vehicle sags
due to the number of passengers
or the distribution of the load,
there is a margin of error
between the fixation guide lines
on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.
■
A margin of error
When approaching three-dimensional objects
The distance guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaced
objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of
three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the distance guide
lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.
Visually check the surroundings
and the area behind the vehicle.
On the screen, it appears that a
truck is parking at point 2 .
However, in reality if you back up
to point 1 , you will hit the truck.
On the screen, it appears that 1
is closest and 3 is furthest away.
However, in reality, the distance
to 1 and 3 is the same, and 2
is farther than 1 and 3 .
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
● Distance guidelines
4
290
■
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Vehicle width extension guide lines
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. In the
case shown below, the truck appears
to be outside of the vehicle width
extension guide lines and the vehicle
does not look as if it hits the truck.
However, the rear body of the truck
may actually cross over the vehicle
width extension guide lines. In reality if
you back up as guided by the vehicle
width extension guide lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
291
Things you should know
■
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and
the solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Symptom
Likely cause
The image is blurry
If this happens due to
these causes, it does not
indicate a malfunction.
Back up while visually
checking the vehicle’s
surroundings. (Use the
monitor again once conditions
have
been
improved.)
To adjust the image on
the rear view monitor system screen. (→P. 340)
Rinse the camera lens
Dirt or foreign matter
with water and wipe it
(such as water droplets,
clean with a soft cloth.
snow, mud etc.) is adherWash with a mild soap if
ing to the camera.
the dirt is stubborn.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
• The vehicle is in a dark
area
• The
temperature
around the lens is
either high or low
• The outside temperature is low
• There are water droplets on the camera
• It is raining or humid
The image is difficult to • Foreign matter (mud
see
etc.) is adhering to the
camera
• There are scratches on
the camera
• Sunlight or headlights
are shining directly into
the camera
• The vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium
lights, mercury lights
etc.
Solution
292
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Symptom
Likely cause
Solution
The camera or surround- Have
the
vehicle
The image is out of aligning area has received a inspected by your Lexus
ment
strong impact.
dealer.
The fixation guide lines
Have
the
vehicle
The camera position is
are very far out of aligninspected by your Lexus
out of alignment.
ment
dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
293
CAUTION
■ When using the rear view monitor system
When backing up, be sure to check visually behind and all around the vehicle
before proceeding.
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death
or serious injuries.
● The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist the
driver when backing up. Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely
when backing up. Always make sure your intended path is clear.
Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.
● Never back up while looking only at the screen.
The image shown on the screen may differ from the actual state, and you could
collide with another vehicle or obstacles if backing up looking only at the screen,
possibly causing an accident. When backing up, be sure to check in front of and
behind the vehicle, both directly and with mirrors.
4
● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view monitor system.
● When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your
vehicle before maneuvering into it.
● Do not use system in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
• When using tire chains or the compact spare tire
• When the trunk lid is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.
● In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The
image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to
see the image on the screen. Be sure to check direct visually and with mirror all
around the vehicle before proceeding.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixation guide lines displayed on
the screen may change.
● The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians
that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances. (→P. 287)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
● The instructions given are only guidelines.
294
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ When using the rear view monitor system screen
● The position of the fixation guide lines displayed on the screen may change in
accordance with the number of passengers, the amount of cargo etc. Be sure to
check behind and all around the vehicle direct visually and with mirror before
proceeding.
● The vehicle width extension guide lines are wider than the actual width of the
vehicle. When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle
direct visually and with mirror before proceeding.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
295
NOTICE
■ How to use the camera
● The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following cases, or
if the precautions described below are not followed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera
may change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or
modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
• Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If the camera lens is scratched, it cannot
transmit a clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere
to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the
vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
• When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium light or mercury
light etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
● Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If
this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
296
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving mode select switch
The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition.
1
Normal mode
For normal driving.
Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when selected to
Eco mode or sport mode.
2
Eco drive mode
Use Eco mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that
involve frequent accelerating.
When not in Eco drive mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the
left, the “ECO MODE” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.
3
Sport mode
Assists acceleration response by controlling the steering and transmission . Suitable for when precise handling is desirable,
for example when driving on mountain roads.
When not in Sport mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the right,
the “SPORT” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.
Hybrid vehicles: The hybrid system indicator changes to the tachometer.
(→P. 93)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
297
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air
conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency (→P. 347, 359). To improve air conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.
■ Sport mode automatic deactivation
Sport mode is automatically deactivated if the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is turned off after driving in sport mode.
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
298
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be
aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not
be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
◆ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
◆ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces
◆ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control)
Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.
Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road
surfaces by controlling steering performance.
◆ TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
◆ Hill-start assist control (hybrid vehicles)
→P. 304
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
299
◆ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to
turn the steering wheel
◆ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
→P. 306
When the TRAC/VSC/ABS (hybrid vehicles) systems are operating
w
Gasoline vehicles
The slip indicator light will flash
while the TRAC/VSC systems are
operating.
Hybrid vehicles
The slip indicator light will flash
while the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
w
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Disabling the TRAC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may
reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing
to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
To turn the TRAC system off, quickly
press and release the button.
The “TRAC OFF” will be shown on the
multi-information display. Press the
button again to turn the system back
on.
■ Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems
To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold
for more than 3 sec-
onds while the vehicle is stopped.
The VSC OFF indicator light will come on and the “TRAC OFF” will be shown on the
multi-information display.
Press
again to turn the systems back on.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that
TRAC has been disabled even if the VSC OFF switch has not been pressed
TRAC and hill-start assist control (hybrid vehicles) cannot be operated. Contact
your Lexus dealer.
■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected
The steering wheel may move from its straight forward position, but this will be corrected automatically when driving.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is
depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the
vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has
occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating.
None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
■ EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC systems
After turing the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically reactivated in the following situations:
● When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned off
● If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed
increases.
If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic reactivation will not
occur when vehicle speed increases.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated. (gasoline vehicles)
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated. (gasoline
vehicles)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive
steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS
system should return to normal within 10 minutes.
CAUTION
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn tires on
a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal condi-
tions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery
road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■ When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause
an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are the systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the
TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire
inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are
installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■ Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the
driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Hill-start assist control (hybrid vehicles)
Assists with starting off and temporarily maintains braking power even
if the foot is removed from the brake pedal when starting off on an
incline or a slippery slope.
To engage hill-start assist control,
further depress the brake pedal
when the vehicle is stopped completely.
A buzzer will sound once to indicate
the system is activated. The slip indicator will also start flashing.
■ Hill-start assist control operating conditions
● The system operates in the following situations:
• The shift lever is in a position other than P.
• The parking brake is not applied.
• The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
● Hill-start assist control cannot be operated while the slip indicator light is illuminated.
■ Hill-start assist control
● While hill-start assist control is operating, the brakes remain automatically applied
after the driver releases the brake pedal. The stop lights and the high mounted
stoplight turn on.
● Hill-start assist control operates for about 2 seconds after the brake pedal is
released.
● If the slip indicator does not flash and the buzzer does not sound when the brake
pedal is further depressed, slightly reduce the pressure on the brake pedal (do not
allow the vehicle to roll backward) and then firmly depress it again. If the system still
does not operate, check that the operating conditions explained above have been
met.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Hill-start assist control buzzer
● When hill-start assist control is activated, the buzzer will sound once.
● In the following situations, hill-start assist control will be canceled and the buzzer
will sound twice.
• No attempt is made to drive the vehicle within approximately 2 seconds of
releasing the brake pedal.
• The shift lever is moved to P.
• The parking brake is applied.
• The brake pedal is depressed again.
• The brake pedal has been depressed for more than approximately 3 minutes.
■ If the slip indicator comes on
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
4
■ Hill-start assist control
● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not oper● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehi-
cle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start
assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
ate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
PCS (Pre-Collision System)∗
When the radar sensor detects possibility of a frontal collision, the precollision system such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically
engaged to lessen impact as well as vehicle damage.
The pre-collision system can be turned on and off as necessary by operating the switch. (→P. 307)
◆ Pre-collision seat belts (front seats only)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the
pre-collision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or
loses control of the vehicle. (→P. 34)
However, when the VSC system is disabled, the system will not operate
in the event of skidding.
◆ Pre-collision brake assist
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies
greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed.
◆ Pre-collision braking
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system warns
the driver using a warning light, warning display and buzzer. If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes are automatically applied to reduce the collision speed.
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Disabling pre-collision system
1
Enabled
2
Disabled
The “PCS” warning light turns on
when pre-collision system is disabled.
4
Driving
Radar sensor
The radar sensor detects vehicles or
other obstacles on or near the road
ahead and determines whether a
collision is imminent based on the
position, speed, and heading of the
obstacles.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ The pre-collision system is operational when
The pre-collision system off switch is not pressed and the following conditions are
met:
● Pre-collision seat belts (operating conditions A):
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision seat belts (operating conditions B):
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 4 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
● Pre-collision braking:
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no possibility of a collision
● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
● When driving over a narrow iron bridge
● When there is a metal object on the road surface
● When driving on an uneven road surface
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
● When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure appears
to be directly in the vehicle’s line of travel
● When the steep angle of the road causes a metal object located beneath the road
surface to be seen ahead of the vehicle
● When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
● When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
4
● When passing through certain toll gates
When the system is activated in the situations described above, there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force
greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten it.
■ Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as traffic cones. There may also be
occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts.
■ Situations in which the pre-collision system does not function properly
The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following:
● On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces
● If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an intersection
● If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtaking
● In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
● When your vehicle is skidding such as the VSC system off
● When your vehicle is steeply inclined
● When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
● When passing through an overpass
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Automatic cancelation of the pre-collision system
When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contamination, etc. that results in the sensors being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-collision system will be automatically
disabled. In this case, the system will not activate even if there is a collision possibility.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
“PCS” warning light will flash and warning messages will be displayed.
(→P. 753, 763)
■ Certification
w For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
w For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not overly rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary in any of the following situations.
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-
ing of the sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage
compartment etc.)
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
4
■ Handling the radar sensor
● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may become inaccurate
or malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact,
always have the area inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding
area.
● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
● Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system
By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-collision system is intended to assist
the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of LOOK-JUDGE-ACT.
There are limits to the degree of assistance the system can provide, so please keep
in mind the following important points.
● Assisting the driver in watching the road
The pre-collision system is only able to detect obstacles directly in front of the
vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism that allows careless
or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for the driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver in making correct judgment
When attempting to estimate the possibility of a collision, the only data available
to the pre-collision system is that from obstacles it has detected directly in front of
the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant
and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of collision in any given situation.
● Assisting the driver in taking action
The pre-collision system’s braking assist feature is designed to help reduce the
severity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has judged that a collision
is unavoidable. This system by itself is not capable of automatically avoiding a collision or bringing the vehicle to a stop safely. For this reason, when encountering a
dangerous situation the driver must take direct and immediate action in order to
ensure the safety of all involved.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)∗
Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions;
● The Blind Spot Monitor function
Assists the driver in making the decision when changing lanes
● The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
Assists the driver when backing up
These functions use same sensors.
4
Driving
1
BSM main switch
Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is set to on, the
switch’s indicator illuminates. Common switch for Blind Spot Monitor function
and Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
2
Outside rear view mirror indicator
Blind Spot Monitor function:
When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator comes on while the turn signal lever is not operated and the outside rear view
mirror indicator flashes while the turn signal lever is operated.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function:
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected,
the outside rear view mirror indicators flash.
3
Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer (Rear Cross Traffic Alert function only)
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected,
a buzzer sounds from behind the rear seat.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility
When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to
see.
■ Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer hearing
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may be difficult to hear over loud noises such as
high audio volume.
■ When there is a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor system
If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, warning messages will be displayed: (→P. 765)
● There is a malfunction with the sensors
● The sensors have become dirty
● The outside temperature is extremely high or low
● The sensor voltage has become abnormal
■ Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor system
FCC ID: OAYSRR2A
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
w For vehicles sold in Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05-24.25 GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
w For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■ Handling the radar sensor
One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot
Monitor system can function correctly.
● Keep the sensor and its surrounding area
on the bumper clean at all times.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and
vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the
bumper.
● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
● Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The Blind Spot Monitor function
The Blind Spot Monitor function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that
are traveling in an adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicles
existence via the outside rear view mirror indicator.
The Blind Spot Monitor function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of the detection area
extends to:
Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m)
from the side of the vehicle
1
2
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from
the rear bumper
3
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper
CAUTION
■ Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor function is a supplementary function which alerts the
driver that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot
Monitor function. The function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore
over reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the
driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of
the vehicle is not in the detection area
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ The Blind Spot Monitor function is operational when
● The BSM main switch is set to on
● Vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
■ The Blind Spot Monitor function will detect a vehicle when
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.
● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.
■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function will not detect a vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
● Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle*
*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function may not function cor-
rectly
● The Blind Spot Monitor function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following
conditions:
•
•
•
•
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall
etc.
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your
vehicle enters the detection area
• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Driving
During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.
When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper
When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water etc.
When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the
vehicle that enters the detection area
• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection
area as your vehicle accelerates
• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the
road etc.
• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away
from your vehicle
• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same
speed as your vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the
vehicle that enters the detection area
• Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on
● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/
or object may increase under the following conditions:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert functions when your vehicle is in reverse. It
can detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of the
vehicle. It uses radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehicle’s existence through flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.
1
Approaching vehicles
2
Detection areas
CAUTION
■ Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is only an assist and is not a replacement for
careful driving. Driver must be careful when backing up, even when using Rear
Cross Traffic Alert function. The driver’s own visual confirmation of behind you and
your vehicle is necessary and be sure there are no pedestrians, other vehicles etc.
before backing up. Failure to do so could cause death or serious injury.
According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the
driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
To give the driver a more consistent time to react, the buzzer can alert for
faster vehicles from farther away.
Example:
4
1 Approximate
Speed
Fast
18 mph (28 km/h)
65 ft. (20 m)
Slow
5 mph (8 km/h)
18 ft (5.5 m)
alert distance
■ The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is operational when
● The BSM main switch is set to on.
● The shift lever is in R.
● Vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
● Approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 18 mph
(28 km/h).
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
Approaching vehicle
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function will not detect a vehi-
cle
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is not designed to detect the following types of
vehicles and/or objects.
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.*
● Vehicles approaching from directly behind
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle*
● Vehicles backing up in the parking space next to your vehicle*
*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not function
correctly
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:
● When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper
● During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.
● When multiple vehicles approach continuously
● Shallow angle parking
● When a vehicle is approaching at high speed
● When parking on a steep incline, such as hills, a dip in the road etc.
● Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect
because of obstacles
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-6. Driving tips
Hybrid vehicle driving tips (hybrid vehicles)
For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following
points:
Using Eco drive mode
When using Eco drive mode, the torque corresponding to the accelerator
pedal depression amount can be generated more smoothly than it is in
normal conditions. In addition, the operation of the air conditioning system
(heating/cooling) will be minimized, improving the fuel economy.
(→P. 296)
Use of Hybrid System Indicator
When braking the vehicle
Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in good time. A greater
amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down.
Delays
Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic
lights, will lead to bad fuel consumption. Check traffic reports before leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When encountering a delay,
gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward
slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help
control excessive gasoline consumption.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
The Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the indicate of Hybrid System Indicator within Eco area. (→P. 96)
4
4-6. Driving tips
Highway driving
Control your speed and keep at a constant speed. Also, before stopping
at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the accelerator and
gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy can be
retained when slowing down.
Air conditioning
Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help control
excessive gasoline consumption.
In summer: In high temperatures, use the recirculated air mode. Doing so
will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioner and reduce fuel consumption as well.
In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out until
the gasoline engine and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of
the heater.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire
inflation pressure can cause poor fuel consumption.
Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry
roads can lead to poor fuel consumption. Use a tire that is appropriate for
the season.
Luggage
Carrying heavy luggage can lead to poor fuel consumption. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack can also cause poor
fuel consumption.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-6. Driving tips
Warming up before driving
Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when cold,
warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driving short
distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which can lead to
poor fuel consumption.
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate
to the prevailing weather conditions.
Preparation for winter
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
•
•
•
•
Engine oil
Engine coolant
Power control unit coolant (hybrid vehicles)
Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt battery.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire
chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the specified size and brand, and that chains match the
size of the tires.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-6. Driving tips
Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen.
Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the
water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove
any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumu-
lated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on
the brakes.
● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting
4
in the vehicle.
Driving
When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the
vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking
brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being
released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or
creeping.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-6. Driving tips
Selecting tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
w
Side chain
1
0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
2
0.39 in. (10 mm) in width
3
1.18 in. (30 mm) in length
w
Cross chain
4
0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter
5
0.55 in. (14 mm) in width
6
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location
and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.
● Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving
1/4 ⎯ 1/2 mile (0.5 ⎯ 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-6. Driving tips
Shifting the windshield wiper position
If heavy snow or icy condition is expected, shift the rest position manually.
Grip the hook section of the wiper arm firmly when shifting the wiper
position.
■
To rest position
Raise the wiper in line with the
windshield until it locks.
You can stand the wipers up for the
rest position.
★: More than 3.9 in. (10 cm)
4
■
To retract position
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving
Lower the wipers by pressing on
the upper part of the hook section.
4-6. Driving tips
CAUTION
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,
or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting opera-
tions that cause sudden engine braking.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.
● Do not use LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4-6. Driving tips
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire
retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when
tire chains are fitted.
■ When standing the windshield wipers up
Raise the wipers in line with the windshield. (→P. 329)
Failure to do so may result in damage to the wipers and/or the hood.
4
Driving
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Lexus Display Audio system∗
By using the Lexus Display Audio controller, you can control the audio
system and hands-free system, etc.
Lexus Display Audio controller
1
Displaying the audio control
screen (→P. 376)
2
Displaying the “Menu” screen
(→P. 335)
3
Displaying the previous screen
4
Turn or move the controller to
select a function, number and
screen button.
Push the controller to enter the
selected function, number and
screen button.
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-1. Lexus Display Audio system
“Menu” screen
To display the “Menu” screen, press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller.
Button
Function
“Phone”
Hands-free system (→P. 444)
“Car”
Vehicle information (→P. 108)
“Setup”
Setup menu (→P. 341)
“Display”
Display settings (→P. 339)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
“Climate”
Automatic air conditioning system
(→P. 347)
5-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Initial screen
If the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is turned to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode, the initial screen will
be displayed for a few seconds as
the system starts up.
Images shown on the initial screen can
be changed to image1 or image2.
(→P. 342)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Lexus Display Audio system operation
■
■
Using the Lexus Display Audio controller
1
Select: Turn or move the controller.
2
Enter: Push the controller.
Basic screen operation
When a list is displayed, use the appropriate button to scroll through
the list.
: This indicator turn on when
the list box is selected.
To scroll to the next or previous
page.
:
To return to the previous screen.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
:
5
5-1. Lexus Display Audio system
■ When using the screen
● Under extremely cold conditions, the Lexus Display Audio controller may react
slowly.
● If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be operat-
ing slightly slower than normal.
● The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses.
Change your angle of viewing, adjust the display on the “Display Settings” screen
(→P. 339) or remove your sunglasses.
CAUTION
■ Using the Lexus Display Audio controller
● Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to become caught in the Lexus Display
Audio controller as this may cause an injury.
● Be careful when touching the Lexus Display Audio controller in extreme temper-
atures as it may become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the Lexus Display Audio controller malfunction
● Do not allow the Lexus Display Audio controller to come into contact with food,
liquid, stickers or lit cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a
strange odor or stop functioning.
● Do not subject the Lexus Display Audio controller to excessive pressure or
strong impact as the controller may bend or break off.
● Do not allow coins, contact lenses or other such items to become caught in the
Lexus Display Audio controller as this may cause it to stop functioning.
● Items of clothing may rip if they become caught on the Lexus Display Audio con-
troller.
● If your hand or any object is on the Lexus Display Audio controller when the
“START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode,
the Lexus Display Audio controller may not operate properly.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Display settings
You can adjust the contrast and brightness of the screen and also turn
the display off.
To display the “Display Settings” screen, press the “MENU” button on
the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “Display” on the
“Menu” screen.
1
Turns off screen
The screen is turned off. To turn it on,
press the “AUDIO” or “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller.
Changes to day mode
(→P. 339)
3
Adjusts screen contrast/brightness (→P. 340)
4
Adjusts screen contrast/brightness of rear view monitor camera
(→P. 340)
Changing between day mode and night mode
When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims.
However, the screen can be switched to day mode by selecting “Day
Mode”.
If the screen is set in day mode with the headlight switch turned on, this condition
is memorized even with the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is
turned off.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
2
5-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Adjusting the screen contrast/brightness
1
Select “General” or “Camera” on the “Display Settings” screen.
2
Adjust the display as desired
using “+” or “-”.
Select “Contrast” or “Brightness”
using the “<<” or “>>”.
3
“-”
“+”
“Contrast”
Weaker
Stronger
“Brightness”
Darker
Brighter
Select “OK”.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Setup menu
You can change the Lexus Display Audio system to your desired setting.
To display the “Setup” screen, press the “MENU” button on the Lexus
Display Audio controller and then select “Setup” on the “Menu”
screen.
5
Page
“General”
P. 342
“Voice”
P. 346
“Bluetooth*”
P. 452
“Phone”
P. 471
“Audio”
P. 345
“Vehicle”
P. 344
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
Button
5-1. Lexus Display Audio system
General settings
This screen is used for various settings.
1
Display the “Setup” screen. (→P. 341)
2
Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
w
Page 1
w
1
Select language (→P. 343)
2
Beep on/off
3
Select button color
4
Customize Startup Image
Page 2
The initial screen displayed when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”>
switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode can be
changed to image 1, or image 2 which displays the vehicle screen.
5
Animation on/off
The animation effect for audio source selection screen, screen transitions, etc.
can be set to “On” or “Off”.
6
3
Personal data can be deleted. (→P. 343)
When you complete settings, select “Save”.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-1. Lexus Display Audio system
■
Selecting a language
1
Select “Language” on the “General Settings” screen.
2
Select the desired language.
The selectable languages may differ depending on the model or
region.
■
Delete personal data
1
Select “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen.
2
Select “Delete”.
Check carefully beforehand, as
data cannot be retrieved once
deleted.
A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”.
The following personal data can be deleted or turned to their default
settings.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Phonebook data
Call history data
Speed dial data
Bluetooth® devices data
Phone sound settings
Detailed Bluetooth® settings
Sound settings
Preset switch data
Last used radio station
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
3
5
5-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Vehicle settings
This screen is used for various vehicle settings.
1
Display the “Setup” screen. (→P. 341)
2
Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
1
2
■
Vehicle customization settings
(→P. 344)
LEXUS park assist settings∗
(→P. 279)
Vehicle customization settings
Various setting can be changed.
1
Select “Vehicle Customization” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.
Refer to the list of settings that
can be changed for details.
(→P. 853)
2
When you complete settings, select “Save”.
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Audio settings
This screen is used for various audio settings.
1
Display the “Setup” screen. (→P. 341)
2
Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.
1
HD Radio™ technology settings (→P. 385)
2
iPod setting (→P. 345)
3
When you complete settings, select “Save”.
■
iPod setting
This screen is used for iPod setting.
Select “iPod Settings” on the “Audio Settings” screen. (→P. 345)
2
Select “Display Cover Art”.
“On” or “Off” can be selected to
display/iPod cover art in the
screen.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
1
5
5-1. Lexus Display Audio system
Voice settings
This screen is used for guidance for Bluetooth® hands-free systems setting.
1
Display the “Setup” screen. (→P. 341)
2
Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.
3
1
Voice guidance volume setting
2
Voice recognition prompts on/
off
3
Restore default settings
When you complete settings, select “OK”.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
To display the air conditioning operation screen, press the “MENU”
button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then select “Climate”.
w
Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
w
Vehicles without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system
→P. 359
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Control panel
1
Air conditioning
screen
operation
2
Outside temperature display
3
Automatic mode button
4
“OFF” button
5
Fan speed control button
6
Air outlet selector button
7
Windshield defogger button
8 DUAL mode button
9
Passenger’s side temperature
control buttons
10
Passenger’s side temperature
display
11
Outside/recirculated air mode
button
12
Driver’s side temperature display
13
Driver’s side temperature control buttons
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system control screen
1
Adjusting driver’s side temperature setting
2
Adjusting passenger’s side temperature setting
3
Adjusting the fan speed
4
Selecting air outlet mode
5
Cooling and dehumidification
function on/off
6
Dual mode on/off
7
Micro dust and pollen filter on/off
8
Windshield wiper de-icer on/off
Using the automatic air conditioning system
Press
.
The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan
speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
2
Press
and
or select
or
of the “TEMP” to increase the temperature
to decrease the temperature.
When
is selected (the indicator on
is on) or the passenger’s side
temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
1
5
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the settings manually
1
To turn on the air conditioning system and adjust the fan speed, press
on
to increase the fan speed and
fan speed or select “>” of
to decrease the fan speed.
Press
2
to decrease the
to increase the fan speed and “<”
to turn the fan off.
To adjust the temperature setting, press
“TEMP” to increase the temperature and
temperature.
or select
of the
or
to decrease the
When
is selected (the indicator on
is on) or the passenger’s side
temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.
3
To change the air outlets, press
or select an air outlet
switch on the operation screen.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Defogging the windshield
Press
.
The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode
button to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may
switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side
windows early, turn the air flow and
temperature up.
To return to the previous mode, press
again when the windshield is
defogged.
[
Air outlets and air flow
5
Interior features
Upper body
Upper body and feet
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Feet
Feet and windshield
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press
.
The mode switches among
(recirculated air mode), automatic and
(outside air mode) modes each time the button is pressed.
When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system
operates automatically.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Micro dust and pollen filter button
Operates micro dust and pollen filter on/off.
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is
removed from the air and the air flows
to the upper part of the body.
Usually the system will turn off automatically after approximately 1 to 3
minutes.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
■
■
Front center outlets and front side outlets
1
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
2
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Rear seat outlets
1
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
2
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Registering air conditioning settings to electronic keys
● Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic key and turning the “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode will recall that key’s
registered air conditioning settings.
● When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> is turned off, the current air con-
ditioning settings will automatically be registered to the electronic key that was
used to unlock the vehicle.
The system may not operate correctly if more than one electronic key is in the vicinity
or if the smart access system with push-button start is used to unlock a passenger
door.
■ Air conditioning system settings
● When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned on, the air condi-
tioning system settings will be set to those that were in use the last time the “START
STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch was turned off.
● Air conditioning system settings are memorized individually on each electronic
key, so the settings reproduced will be specific to the key that is used.
● This feature is customizable at your Lexus dealer.
5
■ Using automatic mode
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Selecting
on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.
● If you turn
off, the windows may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Windshield fog detection function (if equipped)
When automatic mode is set, the humidity sensor (→P. 358) detects fog on the
windshield and controls the air conditioning system to prevent fog.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/
recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the tem-
perature setting or the inside temperature.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the
ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after
is pressed.
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning sys-
tem is on
● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning
system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce
fuel consumption.
● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned on.
● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing
.
■ Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
When the dehumidification function is off, and the fan is operating, turning automatic
mode on will activate the dehumidification function.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter
● In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the
following may occur:
• Outside air mode does not switch to
(recirculated air) mode.
• The dehumidification function operates.
• The operation cancels after approximately 1 minute.
● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press
.
● In extremely humid weather, the windows may fog up.
● The pollens are filtered out even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off.
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
In the Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency:
● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling
capacity
● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected
To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:
● Adjust the fan speed
● Turn off Eco drive mode
■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
is pressed.
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Air conditioning odors
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and
accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted
from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
■ Air conditioning filter
→P. 708
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. exhaust gas sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 853)
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
5
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
NOTICE
■ Humidity sensor (if equipped)
In order to detect fog on the windshield, a
sensor which monitors the temperature of
the windshield, the surround humidity, etc. is
installed. (→P. 355)
Follow these points to avoid damaging the
sensor:
● Do not disassemble the sensor
● Do not spray the glass cleaner on the sen-
sor or subject it to strong impacts
● Do not stick anything on the sensor
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is off.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
w
Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
w
Vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system
→P. 347
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
1
Driver’s side temperature display
9
Passenger’s side temperature
control button
2
Airflow display
10
3
Fan speed display
Micro dust and pollen filter button
4
Outside temperature
11
5
Passenger’s side temperature
display
Outside air or recirculated
mode button
12
Off button
6
Air outlet selector button
13
7
Cooling and dehumidification
function on/off button
Driver’s side temperature control button
14
Automatic mode button
DUAL mode button
15
Fan speed control button
16
Windshield defogger button
8
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the automatic air conditioning system
1
Press
.
The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are
automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting and humidity.
2
Press
to switch to automatic air intake mode.
The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
3
Press “∧” on
to increase the temperature and “∨” to decrease
the temperature.
When
is selected (the indicator on
is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passenger
seats can be adjusted separately.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the settings manually
1
2
To adjust the fan speed, select
and
to decrease the fan speed.
Press
to turn the fan off.
on
to increase the fan speed
To adjust the temperature setting, press “∧” on
to increase the
temperature and “∨” to decrease the temperature.
When
is selected (the indicator on
is on) or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passenger
seats can be adjusted separately.
3
To change the air outlets, press
.
The air outlets used are switched each time the switch is pressed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Defogging the windshield
Press
.
The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode
button to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may
switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side
windows early, turn the air flow and
temperature up.
To return to the previous mode, press
again when the windshield is
defogged.
5
[
Air outlets and air flow
Interior features
Upper body
Upper body and feet
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Feet
Feet and windshield
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press
.
The mode switches among
(recirculated air mode), automatic and
(outside air mode) modes each time the button is pressed.
When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system
operates automatically.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Micro dust and pollen filter button
Operates micro dust and pollen filter on/off.
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is
removed from the air and the air flows
to the upper part of the body.
Usually the system will turn off automatically after approximately 1 to 3
minutes.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
[
Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode
1
Press
for 2 or more
seconds.
2
Press “∧” (increase) or “∨”
(decrease) on
.
From - 3 (low) to 3 (high) can be set.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
■
Front center outlets and front side outlets
1
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
2
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
5
Rear seat outlets
1
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
2
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
■
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Registering air conditioning settings to electronic keys
● Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic key and turning the “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode will recall that key’s
registered air conditioning settings.
● When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> is turned off, the current air con-
ditioning settings will automatically be registered to the electronic key that was
used to unlock the vehicle.
The system may not operate correctly if more than one electronic key is in the vicinity
or if the smart access system with push-button start is used to unlock a passenger
door.
■ Air conditioning system settings
● When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned on, the air condi-
tioning system settings will be set to those that were in use the last time the “START
STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch was turned off.
● Air conditioning system settings are memorized individually on each electronic
key, so the settings reproduced will be specific to the key that is used.
● This feature is customizable at your Lexus dealer.
■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the
ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after
is pressed.
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Selecting
on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.
● If you turn
off, the windows may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Windshield fog detection function (if equipped)
When automatic mode is set, the humidity sensor (→P. 371) detects fog on the windshield and controls the air conditioning system to prevent fog.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/
recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the tem-
perature setting or the inside temperature.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning sys-
tem is on
● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning
system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce
fuel consumption.
● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned on.
● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing
.
■ Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
When the dehumidification function is off, and the fan is operating, turning automatic
mode on will activate the dehumidification function.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter
● In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the
following may occur:
• Outside air mode does not switch to
(recirculated air) mode.
• The dehumidification function operates.
• The operation cancels after approximately 1 minute.
.
● In extremely humid weather, the windows may fog up.
● The pollens are filtered out even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off.
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
In the Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency:
● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling
capacity
● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected
To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:
● Adjust the fan speed
● Turn off Eco drive mode
■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
is pressed.
Interior features
● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press
5
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Air conditioning odors
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and
accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted
from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
■ Air conditioning filter
→P. 708
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. exhaust gas sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 853)
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
NOTICE
■ Humidity sensor (if equipped)
In order to detect fog on the windshield, a
sensor which monitors the temperature of
the windshield, the surround humidity, etc. is
installed. (→P. 368)
Follow these points to avoid damaging the
sensor:
● Do not disassemble the sensor
● Do not spray the glass cleaner on the sen-
sor or subject it to strong impacts
● Do not stick anything on the sensor
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is off.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
w
Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
w
Vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system
On/off
The defoggers will automatically turn
off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time changes according to the
ambient temperature and vehicle
speed.
w
Vehicles without a navigation system or the Lexus Display Audio system
On/off
The defoggers will automatically turn
off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time changes according to the
ambient temperature and vehicle
speed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Operating conditions
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch must be in the IGNITION ON
mode.
CAUTION
■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Turn the defoggers off when the engine is off.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Windshield wiper de-icer∗
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield
and wiper blades.
w
Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
w
Vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system
1
Display the air conditioning operation screen. (→P. 347)
2
Select
to the windshield
wiper de-icer on/off
The windshield wiper de-icer will
automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
w
Vehicles without a navigation system and the Lexus Display Audio system
On/off
The windshield wiper de-icer will
automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Operating conditions
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch must be in the IGNITION ON
mode.
CAUTION
■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on
Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front
pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
To display the audio control screen, press the “MEDIA” button,
“RADIO” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display Audio
controller.
w
Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
w
Vehicles without a navigation system or a Lexus Display Audio system
→P. 493
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Button
Page
Using the radio
P. 379
Using the CD player
P. 394
Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
P. 395
Listening to an iPod
P. 405
Listening to a USB memory
P. 413
Using the AUX port
P. 422
Listening to Bluetooth® audio
P. 424
Optimal use of the audio system
P. 439
Using the steering wheel audio switches
P. 441
Hands-free system for cellular phone
P. 444
Switching the audio source
1
Press the “MEDIA” button, “RADIO” button or the “AUDIO” button on
the Lexus Display Audio controller to display the audio control screen.
5
2
Select “Source” or press the
“AUDIO” button on the Lexus
Display Audio controller to display the audio source selection
screen.
Interior features
Each time the “MEDIA” button is
pressed, an audio source other than
radio is changed to.
Each time the “RADIO” button is
pressed, radio mode is changed.
3
Select the desired audio source.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
CAUTION
■ Certification
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
● Laser products
• USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
• THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL
INCREASE EYE HAZARD.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Using the radio
Press the “RADIO” button or “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display
Audio controller and then select “AM”, “FM” or “SAT”.
Control panel
5
Interior features
1
Audio control screen
5
AM/FM/SAT mode buttons
2
Mute button
6
Power
3
Frequency adjustment knob
7
Volume
4
Seek/preset station selector
button
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Audio control screen
Pressing the “RADIO” button or “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display
Audio controller displays the audio control screen from any screens of the
selected source.
w
“Presets” screen
1
“Options” screen appears
2
Audio source selection screen appears
3
Changing the Multicast Ch
4
Information in the music under broadcasting is memorized
5
Selecting HD Radio™ technology
6
Setting the sound (→P. 439)
7
Displaying text messages
8
Scanning for receivable station
9
Preset stations
10
“Presets” screen appears
11
Selecting program type or channel category
12
RBDS message display on/off
13
Displaying traffic messages
w
“Options” screen
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Selecting a station
■
Seek tuning
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on the “PRST•TRACK” button.
■
Manual tuning
Turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob.
■
Preset stations
Press “∧” or “∨” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or select desired preset
stations.
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Radio mode has a mix preset function, which can store up to 36 stations
(6 station per page × 6 page) from any of the AM, FM or SAT bands.
1
2
Search for desired stations by turning the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob or
pressing and holding “∧” or “∨” on the “PRST•TRACK” button.
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
1
Select “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen. The radio will find the next station and stay there
for 10 seconds if “All” or “HD Only” is selected, or 5 seconds if “Analog” is
selected (→P. 385), and then scan again.
2
Select “SCAN” once again when the desired station is reached.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
Select and hold one of the preset stations (1-6 every page).
5
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information. RBDS features are available only when listening to an FM station that broadcasts RBDS information and the “FM Info”
indicator is on.
■
Selecting a desired type
1
Select “Options”.
2
Select “FM Info” to turn the
indicator on.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Select “TYPE >” or “< TYPE” to select program types.
The type of program changes each time the button is selected.
• Classical
• Country
• EasyLis (Easy Listening)
• Inform (Information)
• Jazz
• News
• Oldies
• Other
• Pop Music
• Religion
• Rock
• R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
• Sports
• Talk
• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio Settings” are set to analog)
• Alert (Emergency Alert)
When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears.
4
5
Select “TYPE SEEK”.
If no relevant program can be
found, “no type” will appear on the
screen.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
The radio seeks or scans for stations by the relevant program type.
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
Traffic announcement
Select “Traffic” on the “Options”
screen.
“TRAF SEEK” appears on the screen,
and the radio will start seeking any
station broadcasting traffic program
information.
If no traffic program station is found,
“No Traffic” appears on the screen.
HD Radio™ technology information (if equipped)
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your radio
product has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives. Digital broadcasts
have better sound quality than analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts provide free,
crystal clear audio with no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to
available radio stations and programming, refer to www.hdradio.com.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos
are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
1
Display the “Setup” screen. (→P. 341)
2
Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.
3
Select “HD Radio Settings”.
4
Select “HD Radio/Analog Settings”.
1
Receiving both analog and
digital broadcasts
2
Receiving
broadcasts
only
digital
3
Receiving only
broadcasts
analog
Using HD Radio™ technology
1
Select “HD Radio” portion to
turn the indicator on.
The radio receiver will automatically tune from an analog signal to a
digital signal within 5 seconds.
An orange “HD)” logo indicator
will be displayed when in digital.
2
Search for desired stations by turning the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob or
pressing and holding “∧” or “∨” on the “PRST•TRACK” button.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
■
HD Radio™ technology settings
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
Selecting a desired type
1
Select “Options”.
2
Select “TYPE >” or “< TYPE” to select program types.
The type of program changes each time the button is selected. (→P. 382)
When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears.
3
Select “TYPE SEEK”.
The radio seeks or scans for stations by the relevant program type.
If no relevant program can be found, “no type” will appear on the screen.
■
Displaying text information
Information such as the artist name, song title, album title and music
genre being listened to are displayed on the text screen.
1
Select “Text”.
2
Select “Additional Information” to display messages from
the station.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
Changing the multiple or supplemental programs
On the FM radio frequency most digital stations have multiple or supplemental programs on one FM station.
Select “Multicast”.
Each time “Multicast” is selected,
the
supplemental
program
changes.
If “Multicast” is selected when
tuned to the last of the supplemental programs, the main program will
be returned to.
■
Preserving tag information
Tag information in the music broadcasting is preserved in the system
and transmits to an iPod.
Select “Tag” to bookmark the
music information.
2
Connect iPod using an iPod cable. (→P. 405)
5
Interior features
1
The music tag moves from the system into the iPod.
If tagging the music information fails, error message will be displayed on the
screen. If this occurs, tag the information again.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.
When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the “tagged” information of the songs
which were tagged while listening to the radio can be viewed. Then a user may
decide to purchase the song or CD/Album.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
HD Radio™ technology troubleshooting guide
Experience
Mismatch of time
alignment- a user may
hear a short period of
programming
replayed or an echo,
stutter or skip.
Cause
Action
The radio stations
analog and digital vol- None, radio broadcast issue. A
ume is not properly user can contact the radio staaligned or the station tion.
is in ballgame mode.
Reception issue, may clear-up
Radio is shifting
Sound fades, blendas the vehicle continues to be
between analog and
ing in and out.
driven. Selecting “Analog” can
digital audio.
force radio in an analog audio.
Audio mute condition
This is normal behavior, wait
The radio does not
when an HD2/HD3
until the digital signal returns. If
have access to digital
multicast channel had
out of the coverage area, seek a
signals at the moment.
been playing.
new station.
The digital multicast
content is not availAudio mute delay able until HD Radio™
when selecting an broadcast can be This is normal behavior, wait for
HD2/HD3 multicast decoded and make the audio to become available.
the audio available.
channel preset.
This takes up to 7 seconds.
Broadcaster should be notified.
Text information does
Complete the form; www.ibiqData service issue by
uity.com/automotive/
not match the present
the radio broadcaster.
report_radio_station_experien
song audio.
ces.
Broadcaster should be notified.
No text information
Complete the form; www.ibiqData service issue by
shown for the present
uity.com/automotive/
the radio broadcaster.
report_radio_station_experien
selected frequency.
ces.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
XM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
■
■
Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
1
Press the “RADIO” button or select “SAT” on the audio source
selection.
2
Turn the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired channel in the
all categories or press and hold “∧” or “∨” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button to select the desired channel in the current category.
Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Select and hold one of the preset stations
(1-6 every page).
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
■
Changing the channel category
1
Select “Options”.
2
Select “TYPE >” or “ switch is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
■
When the connection method is set to “From Audio Player”
Operate the portable player and connect it to the Bluetooth® audio
system.
1
Display the “Bluetooth* Audio” screen.
2
Select “Connect”.
5
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Select the device to connect.
A message is shown if connection
has been successful.
If connection fails, a message will
be displayed and connection will
be re-attempted.
Selecting, fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
■
Selecting a track
Press “∧” or “∨” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the
“TUNE•SCROLL” knob to select the desired track number.
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “∨” or “∧” on the “PRST•TRACK”
button until you hear a beep.
■
Selecting a track from audio control screen
Select
or
.
To fast-forward or reverse, select and hold
■
Selecting a track from the list
w
From “Tracks”
1
Select “Tracks” on the screen.
2
Select the desired track.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
or
until you hear a beep.
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
w
From “Browse”
1
Select “Browse” on the screen.
2
Select the desired item.
Continue to select the applicable
screen button until its track list is
displayed.
3
Select the desired track.
5
Each time
is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
: Random play on the album
: Random play in all the album
: Off
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
Random playback
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Repeat play
Each time
is selected, the mode changes in the following order:
: Track repeat
: Album repeat
: Off
■ When using the Bluetooth® audio system
● In the following conditions, the system may not function.
• If the portable audio player is turned off
• If the portable audio player is not connected
• If the portable audio player’s battery is low
• If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
• If metal is covering or touching the portable player
● There may be a delay if phone connection is carried out during Bluetooth® audio
play.
● Depending on the type of portable audio player that is connected to the system,
operation may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.
■ Bluetooth® antenna
The antenna is built into the display. If the portable audio player is behind the seat or
in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate.
■ Battery charge/signal status
This display may not correspond exactly with the portable audio player, and this system does not have a charging function.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■ About Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
■ Compatible models
Portable audio players must correspond to the specifications.
● Bluetooth® specifications:
Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher)
● Profiles:
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sounds to the headphone.
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)
This is a profile to remote control the A/V equipment.
However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of
portable audio player.
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■ Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system
FCC ID: AJDK046
IC ID: 775E-K046
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire
de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
■ Reconnecting the portable audio player
If the portable audio player is disconnected with a poor reception when the “START
STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode, the system automatically reconnects the portable audio player.
If you have switched off the portable audio player yourself, follow the instructions
below to reconnect:
● Select the portable audio player again
● Enter the portable audio player
■ When you release your car
Be sure to initialize your data. (→P. 343)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But
it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least
20 cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet
and ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à
OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC.
Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de
20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
5
w For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
w For vehicles sold in Canada
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using
an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by
Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the
antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio
peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur)
approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques
de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le
type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implanted pace-
makers or cardiac defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between
themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other
than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult
the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Press the “MEDIA” button or the “AUDIO” button on the Lexus Display
Audio controller.
Select
on the audio control
screen to adjust the sound settings.
“Sound” tab
1
2 3
Select “-” or “+” to adjust
the treble, mid or bass to
a level between -5 to 5.
5
4 5
Select “Front” or “Rear” to
adjust the front/rear audio
balance to a level between
Front 7 and Rear 7.
Interior features
w
6 7
Select “L” or “R” to adjust the
left/right audio balance to a
level between L7 and R7.
w
“DSP” tab
1
Surround on/off
2
Automatic sound levelizer (ASL)
on/off
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■ The sound quality level is adjusted individually
The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for the each audio mode separately.
■ About Automatic Sound Leveliser (ASL)
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle
speed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.
1
Radio mode:
Selects radio stations
CD mode:
Selects tracks/files and folders
(MP3/WMA)
iPod mode: Selects songs
USB memory mode:
Selects files and folders
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects tracks and albums
5
Increases/decreases volume
3
Press: Turns the power on, selects
audio source
Press and hold: Pause or mute
Interior features
2
Turning the audio system on
To turn the audio system on, press
.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Changing the audio source
Press
when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes as follows each time
is pressed. If no discs are inserted in
the player, or if the external device is not connected, that mode will be
skipped.
FM→SAT→CD player→iPod or USB memory→
Bluetooth® audio→AUX→AM→FM
Adjusting the volume
Press
to increase the volume and
to decrease the volume.
Hold the button in that position to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Silencing a sound
Press and hold
.
To cancel, press and hold
.
Selecting a radio station
1
Press
2
Press
to select the radio mode.
or
to select a radio station.
To seek stations, press and hold
or
To cancel, press either switch.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
until you hear a beep.
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Selecting a track/file or song
1
Press
mode.
2
Press
to select the CD, Bluetooth® audio, iPod or USB memory
or
to select the desired track/file or song.
Selecting a folder or album
1
Press
to select the CD (only when MP3/WMA disc is in use),
Bluetooth® audio or USB memory mode.
2
Press and hold
or
until you hear a beep.
CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
5
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cellular
phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth®. Bluetooth® is a wireless data system
that allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free
system and make/receive calls.
Telephone switch
1
Volume switch
During an incoming call: Adjusts
the ring tone volume
During an ongoing call: Adjusts
the receiver volume
The voice guidance volume cannot be
adjusted using this button.
2
Talk switch
Press: Turns the voice command
system on
Press and hold: Turns the voice
command system off
3
Off hook switch
• Sending
• Receiving
• “Phone” screen display
4
On hook switch
• End call
• Refuse call
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
Microphone
You can use the microphone
when talking on the phone.
The person you are speaking to
can be heard from the front
speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth®
phone in the system. (→P. 453)
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Status display
You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on
the “Phone” screen.
1
Connection status
2
Battery charge
3
Call area
4
Signal strength
Indicators
Connection status
Battery charge
Call area
Signal strength
Conditions
Good
Not connected
Full
Empty
“Rm”: Roaming area
Excellent
Poor
■ When using the hands-free system
● The audio system is muted when making a call.
● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
● If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
If the Bluetooth® phone is too close to the system, quality of the sound may deteriorate and connecting condition may go down.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
•
•
•
•
•
When driving on unpaved roads
When driving at high speeds
If a window is open
If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
There is an effect from the network of the cellular phone
■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the cellular phone is turned off
● If you are outside service range
● If the cellular phone is not connected
● If the cellular phone’s battery is low
● When outgoing is controlled, due to heavy traffic on telephone lines, etc.
● When the cellular phone itself cannot be used
● When transferring the phonebook data from the cellular phone
■ Bluetooth® antenna
■ Battery charge/Signal status
● This display may not correspond exactly with the cellular phone itself.
● This system does not have a charging function.
● The Bluetooth® phone battery will burn quickly when it is connected to Bluetooth®.
● When the cellular phone is not connected, “No Connect” is displayed.
● When you are out of service area or in a place inaccessible by radio waves, “No
service” is displayed.
■ When using Bluetooth® audio and hands-free system at the same time
The following problems may occur.
● The Bluetooth® connection may be cut.
● Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth® audio playback.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
The antenna is built into the display. If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the
console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate.
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■ About the phonebook in this system
The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
● Phonebook data
● Call history date
● Speed dial
When you delete the phone, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.
■ When you release your car
Be sure to initialize your data. (→P. 343)
■ About Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
■ Compatible models
This system supports the following service.
● Bluetooth® Specification:
Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1+EDR or higher)
● Profiles:
• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.5 or higher)
This is a profile to allow hands-free phone calls using the cellular phone or head
sets. It has an outgoing and incoming call function.
• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher
This is a profile to exchange phonebook data. When the Bluetooth® phone has
PBAP and OPP, OPP cannot be used.
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
This is a profile to transfer phonebook data.
If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth® phone.
You need to take OPP or PBAP service individually.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■ Certification for the hands-free system
FCC ID: AJDK046
IC ID: 775E-K046
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire
de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But
it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least
20 cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet
and ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à
OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC.
Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de
20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
w For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
w For vehicles sold in Canada
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using
an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by
Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the
antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio
peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur)
approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques
de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le
type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not use a cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implanted pace-
makers or cardiac defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between
themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other
than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult
the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to cellular phones
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
Do not leave cellular phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the phone.
5
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Using the Bluetooth® phone
1
Device name
2
Bluetooth® connection status (→P. 446)
3
Dialing from history (→P. 462)
4
Speed dialing (→P. 462)
5
Dialing from the phonebook (→P. 460)
6
Dialing by inputting a number (→P. 459)
7
Connecting a Bluetooth® phone (→P. 455)
To display the screen shown above, press
on the steering wheel or
press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller and then
select “Phone” on the “Menu” screen.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Registering a Bluetooth® phone
To use the hands-free system, you must register a Bluetooth® phone in
the system. You can register up to 5 phones in the system.
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Yes”.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
Input the passcode displayed on
the screen into your phone.
For the operation of the phone, see
the manual that comes with your cellular phone.
Depending on the type of phone, further phone operations may be
required after inputting the passcode
(for example to confirm if connection
is to be received or not) when registering a phone.
Passcodes are not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth® devices. Depending on
the phone, you may need to select
“Yes” to register, or “No” to cancel on
your cellular phone.
If you want to cancel it, select “Cancel”.
If a completion message is displayed,
registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed, follow
the guidance on the screen to try
again.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Selecting the Bluetooth® phone
If multiple Bluetooth® devices are registered, follow the procedure below
to select the Bluetooth® device to be used. You may only use one device
at a time.
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Connect Phone”.
3
Select the device to connect.
“Add New”: Registering a Bluetooth®
device. (→P. 485)
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed
when you connected the device.
When the system cannot get the
device names, alternate names will be
displayed such as “Device1”,
“Device2”, etc.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
The selection indicator is displayed on
left side of the selected device name.
5
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Connecting a Bluetooth® phone
There are two connecting methods available-automatic and manual.
■
Automatic
When you register your phone, auto connection will be activated.
Always set it to this mode and leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place
where connection can be established.
When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system will search
for a nearby cellular phone you have registered.
Next, the system automatically connects with the most recent of the
phones connected to in the past. Then, the connection result is displayed.
Depending on the type of phone, phone operations may be required
(to confirm if connection is to be received or not) even when automatically connected.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
Manual
When the auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth* Power” is turned
off (→P. 491), you must connect Bluetooth® manually.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Connect Phone”.
3
Select the device to connect.
A message is shown if connection
has been successful.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
If connection fails, a message will
be displayed and connection will
be re-attempted.
5
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■ Reconnecting to the Bluetooth® phone
If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode,
the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.
If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, connection must be made manually, or the phone must be re-selected.
■ Connecting the phone while Bluetooth® audio is playing
● Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.
● It may take time to connect.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Making a call
Once the Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call using the
following procedure:
■
Dialing
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Dial” on the “Phone” screen.
3
Input the phone number.
To delete the inputted phone number, select
.
For the first digit, you can enter “+”
by selecting “∗” for a while.
4
Press
on the steering wheel or select
.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
Depending on the type of phone, when internet communication functions such
as skype are available, phone operations (selecting between normal phone
communication or internet communication) may be necessary after dialing
operations are performed.
5
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
Dialing from the phonebook
You can dial a number from the phonebook data imported from your
cellular phone. The system has one phonebook for each telephone. Up
to 1000 entries may be stored in each phonebook. (→P. 474)
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
3
Choose the desired data to
call from the list.
If the phonebook is empty, a message will be displayed. (→P. 461)
4
Choose the number and then
press
on the steering
wheel or select
.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
● When the phonebook is empty
You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth® phone to the
system.
Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and PBAP
incompatible Bluetooth® phones. If your cellular phone does not support either PBAP or OPP service, you cannot transfer contacts.
1
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
2
If the phonebook is empty, a
message will be displayed.
w
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phone
5
3
Select “Yes” if you want to transfer new contacts from a cellular
phone.
Select “No” if you want to cancel transferring the contacts.
Depending on the type of phone, phone operations may be necessary when transferring contacts by PBAP.
Interior features
w
For PBAP incompatible and OPP compatible Bluetooth® phone
3
Select “Transfer” if you want to transfer new contacts from a cellular
phone.
Select “Cancel” if you want to cancel transferring the contacts.
You need to operate your phone to transfer new contacts.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
Calling using speed dial
You can make a call using numbers registered from the phonebook.
■
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
3
Select the desired tab and
choose the desired number to
make a call.
Dialing from history
You can call using the call history which has the 4 functions below.
“All”: all the calls below which were memorized
“Missed”: calls which you missed
“Incoming”: calls which you received
“Outgoing”: calls which you called
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
3
Select the desired tab and
choose the desired data from
the list.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
4
■
Press
on the steering
wheel or select
.
Calling using voice recognition
Calls can be made by giving a voice command.
1
Press the talk switch.
To cancel voice recognition press and hold the talk switch.
2
Following the system guidance, wait for the beep, and
then say the desired voice
commands.
Voice prompts on/off
2
Voice commands
Voice commands
marked with
.
3
are
Canceling voice recognition system
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
1
5
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
● Dial by name
The procedure below shows “Call ” or “Call at ”.
Follow similar procedures for the other operations.
1
Press the talk switch.
2
Say the name, or the name and type of phone, of a registered contact.
3
Say “Dial” or press
steering wheel.
on the
Say or select “Go Back” to
return to the previous screen.
■ Call history list
● If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phonebook,
the name is displayed in the call history.
● If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in
the call history.
■ When driving
The functions “Dialing”, “Dialing from the phonebook”, and “Dialing from history”
(only the 6th page of “All” tab) are unavailable.
■ International calls
You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the cellular phone in
use.
■ Calling by using the latest call history item
1
Press
on the steering wheel to display the “Phone” screen.
2
Press
on the steering wheel to display the “Call History” screen.
3
Press
on the steering wheel to select the latest history item.
4
Press
on the steering wheel or select
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
to call the latest history item.
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■ Voice guidance function
● Voice guidance for the voice recognition system can be skipped by pressing the
talk switch.
● When “Voice Prompts (on/off)” is selected, voice recognition will be temporarily
suspended. Press the talk switch again.
● Voice guidance can be canceled by setting voice prompts to off. Use this setting
when it is desirable to say a command immediately after pressing the talk switch.
■ Using voice command
● Using voice command “Call ” or “Call at ”
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
• In the same manner as it is displayed on the screen, “Call ” or “Call
at ”, after saying “Call” say the name, or the name and type of
phone, of a contact.
For example: “Call”, “John Smith” or “Call”, “Mary Davis”, “at”, “Mobile”
• There are 4 types of phones: Home, Mobile, Work and Other.
• Short or abbreviated names in the phonebook may not be recognized. Change
names in the phonebook to full names.
• Sometimes a voice recognition result confirmation screen will be displayed.
After confirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”.
• When the system recognizes multiple names from the phonebook, a name candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired name is not displayed on
the top of the screen, say the number of the name from the candidate list (number 1 or number 2) to select a name from the candidate list.
• When a contact has multiple phone numbers registered in the phonebook, a
candidate list will be displayed. If the desired phone number is not displayed on
the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from the
candidate list (number 1 or number 2) to select a phone number from the candidate list.
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
● Using voice command “Dial ”
• In the same manner as it is displayed on the screen, “Dial ”, after saying
“Dial” say the phone number.
• Say the phone number one digit at a time.
For example, if the phone number is 2345678:
Say “two three four five six seven eight”
Do not say “twenty three forty five sixty seven eight”
• The system can recognize the following types of the phone numbers:
3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)
7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers)
10 digit numbers (Area code + Local phone number)
11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code + Local phone number)
• As the system cannot recognize additional numbers, say the complete number
without stopping.
• When the system recognizes multiple phone numbers, a phone number candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired phone number is not displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number
from the candidate list (number 1 or number 2) to select a phone number from
the candidate list.
● Using voice command “International call”.
Up to 20 digits can be recognized when using the international call function. The
number can also be divided into multiple groups and recognized.
■ When using voice recognition
Speak clearly when using the voice recognition, otherwise the system may not correctly recognize your voice. Wind or other noises may also cause the system not to
recognize your voice.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Receiving a call
When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a
sound.
To answer the phone:
• Press
on the steering wheel.
• Select
.
■
To refuse a call
Press
■
on the steering wheel or select
.
To adjust the incoming call volume
Select “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering
switches or volume knob.
Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on the cellular phone in use.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
■ International calls
5
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Speaking on the phone
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.
■
To adjust the receiver volume
Select “-” or “+”. You can also adjust the volume using the steering
switches or the volume knob.
■
To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Select “Mute”.
■
Inputting tones
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank,
you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the phonebook.
1
Select “0-9”.
2
Input the number.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
3
If repeated tone symbols* are
stored in the phone book,
“Send” and “Exit” are displayed
on the right side of the screen.
*: Repeated tone symbols are symbols
or numbers displayed as p or w, that
come after the phone number. (e.g.
056133w0123p#1 ∗)
4
Confirm the number displayed on the screen, and select “Send”.
If you select “Exit”, this function will end.
■
To transfer a call
Select “Handset Mode” to change from Hands-free call to cellular
phone call.
Select “Handsfree Mode” to change from cellular phone call to Handsfree call.
■
To hang up
on the steering wheel or select
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
Interior features
Press
5
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
Call waiting
When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, the incoming
call message will be displayed.
To talk with the other party:
• Press
on the steering
wheel.
• Select
.
To refuse the call:
• Press
on the steering
wheel.
• Select
.
Every time you press
on the steering wheel or select
call waiting, you will be switched to the other party.
during
■ Transferring calls
● It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to the cellular phone while driving.
● If you transfer from the cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be
displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.
● Transfer method and operate may vary according to the cellular phone used.
● For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone’s manual.
■ Call waiting operation
Call waiting operation may differ depending on your phone company and cellular
phone.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Setting the hands-free system
You can set the hands-free system to your desired settings.
1
Setting the sound
2
Phonebook settings
5
1
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller.
2
Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3
Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
To display the screen shown above, follow the steps below.
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Setting the sound
1
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (→P. 471)
2
Select “Phone Sound Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
1
Changes the speaker volume
(→P. 472)
2
Changes the ring tone volume
(→P. 472)
3
Changes the ring tone
(→P. 473)
4
Restore default settings
3
When you complete settings, select “Save”.
■
Setting the volume
1
Select “Call Volume” or “Ring Tone Volume” on the “Phone Sound
Settings” screen.
2
Select “-” or “+” to lower or
raise the volume, and then
“OK”.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
Setting the ring tone
1
Select “Ring Tone” on the “Phone Sound Settings” screen.
2
Select “Tone1”, “Tone2” or
“Tone3” to change the ring
tone, and then “OK”.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Phonebook settings
The phonebook manages a maximum of 5 phones in total. The data for
1000 contacts (up to 3 numbers per contact) can be registered in each
phonebook.
1
Managing the contacts
2
Managing the speed dials
3
Deleting the call history
To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
1
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (→P. 471)
2
Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
Managing the contacts
● Transferring a phone number
You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth® phone to the
system. Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and
PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones. If your cellular phone does
not support either PBAP or OPP services, you cannot transfer contacts.
1
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (→P. 474)
2
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
3
Select “Transfer Contacts”.
5
1
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones
Automatic phonebook download on/off
The phonebook data can be automatically transferred.
Depending on the cellular phone,
call history will be also transferred.
2
Update phonebook
The phonebook data can be
updated.
3
Restore default settings
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
w
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
w
For PBAP incompatible Bluetooth® phones
1
Replace contacts
The phonebook data can be
replaced.
2
Add contacts
The phonebook can be added.
● Deleting the phonebook data
1
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (→P. 474)
2
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
3
Select “Delete Contacts”.
If your phone supports PBAP service, “Automatically Download
Contacts” setting needs to be set to
“Off”. (→P. 475)
4
Choose the data to delete.
To delete all data, select “All
Delete”.
5
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
select “Yes”.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■ Phonebook data
Phonebook data is managed for every registered phone. When another phone is
connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
■ Setting the phonebook in a different way (To display the “Contacts” screen)
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
3
Select “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.
4
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.
■ When transferring a phone number
Transfer the phone number while engine is running .
If your cellular phone is OPP or PBAP compatible, you may need to input “1234” by
your cellular phone for OBEX certification.
■ When you have selected “Update Contacts” to transfer the phone number
● If your cellular phone does not support PBAP service, you cannot use this function.
● If your phone supports PBAP service, you can transfer the phonebook data with-
out operating your phone.
5
■ When you have selected “Replace Contacts” or “Add Contacts” to transfer the
If your cellular phone does not support OPP service, you cannot use these functions.
You can transfer the phonebook data only by operating your phone.
■ Transferring the phone number in a different way (To display the “Transfer Con-
tacts” screen)
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
3
Select “Transfer” on the “Contacts” screen.
■ Transferring the phone number while Bluetooth® audio is playing
Bluetooth® audio will disconnect. It will reconnect automatically when data transfer
finishes. It will not be reconnected depending on the phone you are using.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
phone number
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■ Deleting the phonebook data in a different way
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
3
Choose the desired data from the list.
4
Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.
5
Select “Delete” on the “Contact” screen.
6
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”.
If your phone supports PBAP service, “Automatically Download Contacts” setting
needs to be set to “Off”. (→P. 475)
When you delete a Bluetooth® phone, the phonebook data will be deleted at the
same time.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Managing the speed dials
■
Registering the speed dial from contacts
You can register the desired phone number from phonebook. Up to 18
numbers per phone can be registered.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (→P. 474)
2
Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
3
Select “New Speed Dial from
Contacts”.
4
Choose the data to register.
5
Select the desired phone number.
5
Interior features
1
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
6
Select the switch you want to
register the number in.
7
If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation message
will be displayed. If you want to replace it, select “Yes”.
Registering the speed dial from call history
1
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (→P. 474)
2
Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
3
Select “New Speed Dial from Call History” on the “Speed Dials”
screen.
4
Choose the data to register.
5
Select the switch you want to
register the number in.
6
If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation message
will be displayed. If you want to replace it, select “Yes”.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
Deleting the speed dial
1
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (→P. 474)
2
Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
3
Select “Delete Speed Dials” on the “Speed Dials” screen.
4
Choose the data to delete.
To delete all data, select “All
Delete”.
5
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
select “Yes”.
■ Setting the speed dials in a different way (From “Speed Dial” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
3
Select “Options” on the “Speed Dial” screen.
■ Setting the speed dials in a different way (From “Contacts” screen)
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
3
Select “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.
4
Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Contacts” screen.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
1
5
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■ Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Speed Dial” screen)
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
3
Select “(add new)” on the “Speed Dial” screen.
4
Select “Contacts” or “History” to set new speed dial.
Select “Cancel” to cancel it.
5
Choose the desired data from the list.
6
Select the desired phone number.
■ Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Contact” screen)
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
3
Choose the desired data from the list.
4
Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.
5
Select “Set Speed Dial” on the “Contact” screen.
6
Select the desired telephone number.
7
Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial from contacts” from
(→P. 479).
6
■ Registering the speed dial in a different way (From “Call History” screen)
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
3
Choose the desired data from the list.
4
Select “Add Speed Dial” on the “Call History” screen.
5
Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial from call history” from
(→P. 480)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
.
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Deleting the call history
1
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (→P. 474)
2
Select “Delete Call History” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
If your phone supports PBAP service, the “Automatically Download Contacts”
setting needs to be set to “Off”. (→P. 475)
3
Choose the desired history to
delete.
4
Choose the data to delete.
To delete all data, select “All
Delete”.
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
select “Yes”.
■ Deleting call history in a different way
1
Display the “Phone” screen. (→P. 452)
2
Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
3
Select “Delete” on the “Call History” screen.
4
Follow the steps “Deleting the call history” from
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
. (→P. 483)
Interior features
5
5
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Bluetooth® settings
You can set the Bluetooth® system to your desired settings.
1
Registered devices settings
2
Connecting telephone
3
Connecting audio player
4
Detailed Bluetooth® settings
To display the screen shown above, follow the steps below.
1
Press the “MENU” button on the Lexus Display Audio controller.
2
Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3
Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Registered devices settings
■
Registering a Bluetooth® device
Bluetooth® devices compatible with phones (HFP) and portable audio
players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously. You can register up to
5 Bluetooth® devices.
1
Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (→P. 484)
2
Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
3
Select “Add New”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
4
When this screen is displayed,
input the passcode displayed
on the screen into your
Bluetooth® device.
For the operation of the Bluetooth®
device, see the manual that comes
with your Bluetooth® device.
Depending on the type of phone,
further phone operations may be
required after inputting the passcode (for example to confirm if
connection is to be received or not)
when registering a phone.
Passcodes are not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the phone, you may need to
select “Yes” to register, or “No” to
cancel on your cellular phone.
If you want to cancel it, select “Cancel”.
If a completion message is displayed, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.
■
Removing a Bluetooth® device
1
Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (→P. 484)
2
Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Select “Remove”.
4
Select the device to remove.
5
A confirmation message will be displayed, select “Yes” to remove the
device.
Displaying a Bluetooth® device details
You can confirm and change the device details.
1
Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (→P. 484)
2
Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
3
Select “Details”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
■
3
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
4
Select the device.
5
Following screen is displayed:
1
Display device name
2
Display device address
3
Display your
number
telephone
The number may not be displayed depending on the
phones.
6
4
Display compatibility profile
of the device
5
Change connection method
(→P. 489)
6
Restore default settings
When you complete settings, select “OK”.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
● Changing connection method
1
Select “Connection Method” on the “Device Details” screen.
2
Select “From Vehicle” or
“From Audio Player”.
“From Vehicle”: Connect the audio
system to the portable audio player.
“From Audio Player”: Connect the
portable audio player to the audio
system.
Selecting the Bluetooth® phone
If multiple Bluetooth® devices are registered, follow the procedure below
to select the Bluetooth® device to be used. You may only use one device
at a time.
Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (→P. 484)
2
Select “Connect Phone” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
3
Select the device to connect.
“Add New”: Registering a Bluetooth®
device. (→P. 485)
The selection indicator is displayed on
left side of the selected device name.
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed
when you connected the device.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
1
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Selecting the audio player
If multiple Bluetooth® devices are registered, follow the procedure below
to select the Bluetooth® device to be used. You may only use one device
at a time.
1
Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (→P. 484)
2
Select “Connect Audio Player” on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
3
Select the device to connect.
“Add New”: Registering a Bluetooth®
device. (→P. 485)
The selection indicator is displayed on
left side of the selected device name.
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed
when you connected the device.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
Detailed Bluetooth® settings
You can confirm and change the detailed Bluetooth® settings.
1
Display the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (→P. 484)
2
Select “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” on the “Bluetooth* Settings”
screen.
3
Following screen is displayed:
1
Change Bluetooth® power
on/off
You can change Bluetooth® function to “On” or “Off”
2
Display device name
3
Change passcode
(→P. 492)
4
Display device address
5
Restore default settings
6
Display compatibility profile of
the system
7
Change displaying telephone
status on/off
5
8
Change displaying
player status on/off
audio
You can set the system to show the
status confirmation display when
connecting audio player
4
When you complete settings, select “Save”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
You can set the system to show the
status confirmation display when
connecting telephone
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
■
Editing the passcode
You can change the passcode that you use to register your Bluetooth®
device in the system.
1
Select “Passcode” on the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
2
Input a passcode, and select
“OK”.
To delete the inputted phone number, select
.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3. Using the Lexus Display Audio system
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
w
Vehicles with a navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
w
Vehicles with the Lexus Display Audio system
→P. 376
w
CD player with a changer and AM/FM radio (type A)
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
w
CD player with a changer and AM/FM radio (type B)
Title
Page
Using the radio
P. 496
Using the CD player
P. 505
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
P. 514
Operating an iPod
P. 522
Operating a USB memory
P. 532
Using the Bluetooth® audio system
P. 545
Optimal use of the audio system
P. 562
Using the AUX port
P. 564
Using the steering wheel audio switches
P. 565
Hands-free system for cellular phones
P. 568
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■ Certification
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
● Laser products
• USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
• THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL
INCREASE EYE HAZARD.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
5
5-4. Using the audio system
Using the radio
w
Type A
1
AM⋅FM/SAT mode buttons
6
Traffic information button
2
Scan button
7
Preset station buttons
3
Seek button
8
Radio text message button
4
Channel category button
9
Power
5
Frequency adjustment (AM/FM 10 Volume
mode) and channel (SAT mode)
knob
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
w
Type B
5
Interior features
1
AM⋅FM buttons
5
Traffic information button
2
Seek button
6
Preset station buttons
3
Channel category button
7
Radio text message button
4
Frequency adjustment knob
8
Power
9
Volume
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
1
Search for the desired stations by turning
on
2
or pressing “>” or “<”
.
Press and hold the button (from
to until you hear a beep.
to
) the station is to be set
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio) (type A)
■
Scanning the preset radio stations
1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
2
■
When the desired station is reached, press the button again.
Scanning all the radio stations within range
1
Press
.
All the stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
2
When the desired station is reached, press the button again.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■
Receiving RBDS broadcasts
1
Press “>” or “<” on
during FM reception.
The type of program changes each time the button is pressed.
● “ROCK”
● “EASYLIS” (Easy listening)
● “CLS/JAZZ” (Classical music and Jazz)
● “R & B” (Rhythm and Blues)
● “INFORM” (Information)
● “RELIGION”
5
● “MISC” (Miscellaneous)
If the system receives no RBDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display.
2
Press
, or “>” or “<” on
.
The radio seeks or scans for stations of the relevant program type.
■
Displaying radio station names
Press
■
.
Displaying radio text messages
Press
twice.
A text message is displayed when “MSG” is shown on the screen.
If the text continues past the end of the display,
until you hear a beep.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
is displayed. Press and hold
Interior features
● “ALERT” (Emergency messages)
5-4. Using the audio system
XM® Satellite Radio (type A)
■
Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
1
Press
.
The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed:
“SAT1” → “SAT2” → “SAT3”
2
Turn
to select the desired channel in all the categories or
press “>” or “<” on
current category.
■
to select the desired channel in the
Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Press and hold the button (from
) the channel is to be set to until you hear a beep.
■
Changing the channel category
Press “>” or “<” on
.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
to
5-4. Using the audio system
■
Scanning the XM® Satellite Radio channels
● Scanning the channels in the current category
1
Press
.
2
When the desired channel is reached, press the button again.
● Scanning the preset channels
■
1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
2
When the desired channel is reached, press the button again.
Displaying text information
Press
.
The display will show up to 10 characters.
The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed:
● CH NAME
● TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE)
5
● NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE)
Interior features
● CH NUMBER
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected
All preset stations are erased.
■ Reception sensitivity
● Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may adversely
affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio.
● It is difficult to maintain perfect radio reception at all times due to the continually
changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains and transmitters.
● The radio antenna is mounted inside the trunk and the rear window. To maintain
clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic
objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous
states and 10 Canadian provinces.
● XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A. ⎯
Visit on the web at www.siriusxm.com or call 1-866-635-2349.
Canada ⎯
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
● Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a problem.
Select “CH000” using
, and the receiver’s 8-character ID number will
appear.
● Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying
Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
“ANTENNA”
“UNAUTH”
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check
whether the XM® antenna cable is attached
securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified
dealer.
You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio.
The radio is being updated with the latest encryption
code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled,
you can choose the “CH000” and all the free-to-air
channels.
“NO SIGNAL”
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a
stronger signal.
“LOADING”
The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
“OFF AIR”
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any
programming. Select another channel.
“-----”
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No
action needed.
“CH UNAVL”
The channel you selected is no longer available.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to
the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not
change automatically, select another channel.
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.A.) or 1-877438-9677 (Canada).
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio
returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it
does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel,
contact the XM® Satellite Radio.
5-4. Using the audio system
■ Certifications for XM® Satellite Radio
This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est
autorisée sous réserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage préjudiciable.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
Using the CD player
w
Type A
5
Interior features
1
Eject button
7
Playback/Pause button
2
Load button
8
Repeat play button
3
Playback button
9
Random playback button
4
Search playback button
10
Text button
5
Track selector button
11
Power
6
CD selector button
12
Volume
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
w
Type B
1
Eject button
7
Repeat play button
2
Load button
8
Random playback button
3
Playback button
9
Text button
4
Track selector button
10
Power
5
CD selector button
11
Volume
6
Playback/Pause button
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
Loading a CD
■
Loading a CD
1
Press
.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
2
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert a
CD.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
■
Loading multiple CDs
1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
2
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert a
CD.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is being inserted.
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green, insert the
next CD.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To cancel the operation, press
. If you do not insert a disc within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
3
5
5-4. Using the audio system
Ejecting CDs
■
Ejecting a CD
1
To select the CD to be ejected,
press “>” or “<” on
.
The selected disc number is
shown on the display.
2
■
Press
and remove the CD.
Ejecting all the CDs
Press and hold
until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs.
Selecting, fast-forwarding, reversing and scanning tracks
■
Selecting a track
Press “>” to move up or “<” to move down using
desired track number is displayed.
■
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “>” or “<” on
you hear a beep.
■
until the
Scanning tracks (type A)
1
Press
.
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
To cancel, press
2
again.
Press the button again when the desired track is reached.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
until
5-4. Using the audio system
Selecting a CD
■
Selecting a CD to play
To select the desired CD, press “>” or “<” on
■
.
Scanning loaded CDs (type A)
1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
To cancel, press
2
again.
Press the button again when the desired CD is reached.
Playing and pausing tracks
To play or pause a track, press
.
Random playback
■
5
Current CD
.
Songs are played in random order.
To cancel, press
■
again.
All CDs
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order.
To cancel, press
again.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
Press
510
5-4. Using the audio system
Repeat play
■
Repeating a track
Press
.
To cancel, press
■
again.
Repeating all of the tracks on a CD
Press and hold
To cancel, press
until you hear a beep.
again.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time → CD title → Track title
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
511
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected.
■ Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 or more characters, pressing and holding
until you hear a beep
enables to display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If
is pressed until you hear a beep again or has not been operated for more
than 6 seconds, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly
or may not be displayed at all.
■ When “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display
“ERROR”:
This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty,
damaged, or inserted up-side down.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not be used.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■ If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods
of time
The discs may be damaged and may not play properly.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
“WAIT”:
This indicates that operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player.
Wait for a while and then press
or
. If the CD still cannot be played
back, contact your Lexus dealer.
512
5-4. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD load/eject function.
● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm)
● Low-quality and deformed CDs
● CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
513
NOTICE
■ CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or
the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
● Do not apply oil to the CD player.
● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
● Do not insert more than one CD at a time.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
514
5-4. Using the audio system
Playing MP3 and WMA discs
w
Type A
1
Eject button
8
Folder selector buttons
2
Load button
9
Playback/Pause button
3
Playback button
10
Repeat play button
4
Search playback button
11
Random playback button
5
File selector button
12
Text button
6
Disc selector button
13
Power
7
File selector knob
14
Volume
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
w
515
Type B
5
Interior features
1
Eject button
8
Playback/Pause button
2
Load button
9
Repeat play button
3
Playback button
10
Random playback button
4
File selector button
11
Text button
5
Disc selector button
12
Power
6
File selector knob
13
Volume
7
Folder selector buttons
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
516
5-4. Using the audio system
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
→P. 507, 508
Selecting MP3 and WMA discs
→P. 509
Selecting and scanning a folder
■
Selecting a folder one at a time
Press
■
or
Returning to the first folder
Press and hold
■
to select the desired folder.
until you hear a beep.
Scanning the first file of all the folders (type A)
1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
2
When the desired folder is reached, press
again.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “>” or “<” on
you hear a beep.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
until
5-4. Using the audio system
517
Selecting and scanning files
■
Selecting a file
Turn
■
or press “>” or “<” on
to select the desired file.
Scanning the files in a folder (type A)
Press
.
The first ten seconds of each file will be played.
To cancel, press
again.
When the desired file is reached, press
again.
Playing and pausing files
To play or pause a file, press
.
5
Random playback
Playing files from a folder in random order
Press
.
To cancel, press
■
again.
Playing all the files from a disc in random order
Press and hold
To cancel, press
until you hear a beep.
again.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
■
518
5-4. Using the audio system
Repeat play
■
Repeating a file
Press
.
To cancel, press
■
again.
Repeating all the files in a folder
Press and hold
To cancel, press
until you hear a beep.
again.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order: Folder
no./File no./Elapsed time → Folder name → File name → Album title (MP3
only) → Track title → Artist name
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
519
■ CD player protection feature
→P. 511
■ Display
→P. 511
■ When “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display
“ERROR”:This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player. The CD
may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”:This indicates that operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the
player. Wait for a while and then press
or
. If the CD still cannot be
played back, contact your Lexus dealer.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that an MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.
■ Discs that can be used
→P. 511
■ Lens cleaners
→P. 511
■ If discs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods
5
of time
■ MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
→P. 511
520
5-4. Using the audio system
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not
finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is
scratched or marked with fingerprints.
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used:
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not
play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title
and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
521
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
● Playback
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
→P. 512
■ CD player precautions
→P. 513
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at
least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending
on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the
file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In
some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
522
5-4. Using the audio system
Operating an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
w
Type A
1
Playback button
6
Repeat play button
2
Song selector button
7
Shuffle playback button
3
iPod menu/Song selector knob
8
Text button
4
Go back button
9
Power
5
Playback/Pause button
10
Volume
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
w
523
Type B
5
Interior features
1
Playback button
6
Repeat play button
2
Song selector button
7
Shuffle playback button
3
iPod menu/Song selector knob
8
Text button
4
Go back button
9
Power
5
Playback/Pause button
10
Volume
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
524
5-4. Using the audio system
Connecting an iPod
1
Push the knob to release the lock,
and lift the armrest to open fully.
2
Open the cover and connect an
iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not
turned on.
3
Press
or
.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
525
5-4. Using the audio system
Selecting a play mode
1
Press
2
Turning
to select iPod menu mode.
changes the play mode in the following order:
“PLAYLISTS”→“ARTISTS”→“ALBUMS”→“SONGS”→
“PODCASTS”→“GENRES”→“COMPOSERS”→
“AUDIOBOOKS”
3
Press
■
Play mode list
Play mode
to select the desired play mode.
5
Second
selection
“PLAYLISTS” Playlists select Songs select
Third
selection
Fourth
selection
-
-
“ARTISTS”
Artists select
Albums select Songs select
“ALBUMS”
Albums select Songs select
-
-
“SONGS”
Songs select
-
-
-
-
-
“PODCASTS” Albums select Songs select
“GENRES”
Genre select
“COMPOS- Composers
ERS”
select
“AUDIOBOOKS”
Songs select
Artists select
Albums select Songs select
Albums select Songs select
-
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
-
-
-
Interior features
First
selection
526
■
5-4. Using the audio system
Selecting a list
1
Turn
2
Press
to display the first selection list.
to select the desired item.
Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list.
3
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.
To return to the previous selection list, select “GO BACK” or press
.
Selecting songs
Turn
or press “>” or “<” on
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
to select the desired song.
5-4. Using the audio system
527
Playing and pausing songs
To play or pause a song, press
.
Fast-forwarding and reversing songs
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “>” or “<” on
you hear a beep.
until
Shuffle playback
■
Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order
Press
.
To cancel, press
■
again.
Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press
again.
Press
Interior features
Repeat play
.
To cancel, press
again.
Switching the display
Press
5
.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time → Album title → Track title → Artist name
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
528
5-4. Using the audio system
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
1
Press
2
Pressing
to enter iPod menu mode.
changes sound modes. (→P. 562)
■ About iPod
● “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has
been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with
iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
■ iPod functions
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the
iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not
be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may
resolve the problem.
● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own controls.
It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system instead.
● When the battery level of an iPod is very low, the iPod may not operate. If so, charge
the iPod before use.
● Supported models (→P. 530)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
529
■ iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod
from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual.
■ Display
→P. 511
■ Error messages
“ERROR”:
This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”:
This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“EMPTY”:
This indicates that some available songs are not found in a selected playlist.
“UPDATE”:
This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible. Upgrade your iPod software to the latest version.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
■ Compatible models
The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices
can be used with this system.
● Made for
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
● Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
● Maximum number of songs in device: 65535
● Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to iPod
● Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become
high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is con-
nected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its ter-
minal.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
Operating a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
w
Type A
1
Playback button
6
Playback/Pause button
2
Search playback button
7
Repeat play button
3
File selector button
8
Random playback button
4
File selector knob
9
Text button
5
Folder selector buttons
10
Power
11
Volume
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
w
Type B
5
Interior features
1
Playback button
6
Repeat play button
2
File selector button
7
Random playback button
3
File selector knob
8
Text button
4
Folder selector buttons
9
Power
5
Playback/Pause button
10
Volume
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
Connecting a USB memory
1
Push the knob to release the
lock, and lift the armrest to
open fully.
2
Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.
3
Press
or
.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
Selecting and scanning a folder
■
Selecting folders one at a time
Press
■
or
Returning to the first folder
Press and hold
■
to select the desired folder.
until you hear a beep.
Scanning the first file of all the folders (type A)
1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
2
When the desired folder is reached, press
again.
Selecting and scanning files
■
Selecting a file
5
Turn
to select the desired file.
Interior features
■
or press “>” or “<” on
Scanning the files in a folder (type A)
Press
.
The first ten seconds of each file will be played.
To cancel, press
again.
When the desired file is reached, press
again.
Playing and pausing files
To play or pause a file, press
.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “>” or “<” on
you hear a beep.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
until
5-4. Using the audio system
Random playback
■
Playing files from a folder in random order
Press
.
To cancel, press
■
again.
Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order
Press and hold
To cancel, press
until you hear a beep.
again.
Repeat play
■
Repeating a file
Press
.
To cancel, press
■
again.
Repeating all the files in a folder
Press and hold
To cancel, press
until you hear a beep.
again.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time → Folder name → File name → Album title (MP3 only) → Track
title → Artist name
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
■ USB memory functions
● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device itself
may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is
inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may
resolve the problem.
● If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and
reconnected, format the memory.
■ Display
→P. 511
■ Error messages
“ERROR”:
This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”:
This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB memory.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
■ USB memory
● Compatible devices
USB memories that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback
● Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 Mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not
play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 65025
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
● MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title
and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3 and WMA playback
5
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be skipped (not played).
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at
least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the
file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In
some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the USB
memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or
WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend
that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any
unnecessary folders.
• When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB
memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the first folder. If
the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been
changed), the USB device will resume play from the same point in which it was
last used.
● Extensions
5-4. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect USB memories or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to USB memories
● Do not leave USB memories in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it
is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory
or its terminal.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
Bluetooth® audio system
The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a
portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable
of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player
does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not
function.
Title
Page
P. 545
Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
P. 550
Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
P. 554
Bluetooth® audio system setup
P. 561
■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the portable player is switched off
● If the portable player is not connected
● If the portable player’s battery is low
● If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
● If metal is covering or touching the portable player
■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly
accessed. (→P. 593)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
Using the Bluetooth® audio system
5-4. Using the audio system
■ About Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
■ Compatible models
● Bluetooth® specifications:
Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.2)
● Following profiles:
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (Conformed:
Ver. 1.2)
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed:
Ver. 1.3)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some functions
may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
■ Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system
FCC ID: AJDK018
IC ID: 775E-K018
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire
de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But
it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least
20 cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet
and ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à
OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC.
Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de
20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
5
w For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
w For vehicles sold in Canada
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using
an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by
Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the
antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio
peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur)
approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques
de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le
type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5-4. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Audio unit
1
Display
A message, name, number, etc. is
displayed.
Lower-case characters and special
characters cannot be displayed.
2
Displays information that is too
long to be displayed at one time
on the display (press and hold)
3
Selects items such as menu and
number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected item
Bluetooth® connection condition
If “BT” is not displayed, the Bluetooth®
audio system cannot be used.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
4
5
5-4. Using the audio system
Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice
commands enable the operation of the Bluetooth® audio system without
the need to check the display or operate
■
.
Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■
Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command:
“Cancel”:
Exits the Bluetooth® audio system
“Repeat”:
Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”:
Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”:
Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered
for the selected function
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio system for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to register a
Bluetooth® enabled portable player in the system. Follow the procedure
below to register (pair) a portable player:
1
Press
and select “BT•A MENU” using
2
Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using
.
.
The introductory guidance and portable player name registration instructions are heard.
3
Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command or
5
.
Register a portable player name by either of the following methods:
a. Select “Record Name” using
, and say the name to be regis-
tered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
5
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for
inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
4
5-4. Using the audio system
6
Input the passkey into the portable player.
Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the operation of the
portable player.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the portable player has a Bluetooth® phone, the phone can be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a
Bluetooth® phone is heard.
7
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or
(Bluetooth® phone →P. 569)
.
Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio system
First menu
Second menu
“BT•A Setup”
“Setup”
“System Setup”
Third menu
Operation detail
“Pair Audio”
Registering
player
“Connect”
Selecting a portable player
to be used
“Change Name”
Changing the registered
name of a portable player
“List Audios”
Listing the registered portable players
“Set Passkey”
Changing the passkey
“Delete Audio”
Deleting a registered portable player
“Guidance Vol”
Setting voice guidance
volume
“Device Name”
Displaying the Bluetooth®
device address and name
“Initialize”
Initializing the system
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
a
portable
5-4. Using the audio system
■ When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine.
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■ Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice
● When driving on rough roads
● When driving at high speeds
● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving
● Operating the system with
● Registering a portable player to the system
■ Changing the passkey
→P. 559
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
550
5-4. Using the audio system
Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
w
Type A
1
Playback button
6
Playback/Pause button
2
Search playback button
7
Repeat play button
3
Track selector button
8
Random playback button
4
BT•A menu knob
9
Text button
5
Album selector buttons
10
Power
11
Volume
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
w
551
Type B
5
Interior features
1
Playback button
6
Repeat play button
2
Track selector button
7
Random playback button
3
BT•A menu knob
8
Text button
4
Album selector buttons
9
Power
5
Playback/Pause button
10
Volume
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
552
5-4. Using the audio system
Selecting an album
To select the desired album, press
or
.
Selecting tracks
Press “>” or “<” on
to select the desired track.
Playing and pausing tracks
To play or pause a track, press
.
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “>” or “<” on
you hear a beep.
until
Random playback
Press
.
To cancel, press
again.
Repeat play
Press
.
To cancel, press
again.
Scanning tracks (type A)
Press
.
To cancel, press
again.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following order:
Elapsed time → Album title → Track title → Artist name
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
553
■ Bluetooth® audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available.
■ Display
→P. 511
■ Error messages
“Memory Error”: This indicates a problem in the system.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
554
5-4. Using the audio system
Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth® audio system allows
the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered portable players:
Functions and operation procedures
w
Pattern A
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice
command or
:
● Registering a portable player
1. “Setup” → 2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” →
3. “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)”
● Selecting a portable player to be used
1. “Setup” → 2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” →
3. “Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
● Changing the registered name of a portable player
1. “Setup” → 2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” →
3. “Change Name”
● Listing the registered portable players
1. “Setup” → 2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” →
3. “List Audio Players (List Audios)”
● Changing the passkey
1. “Setup” → 2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” →
3. “Set Passkey”
● Deleting a registered portable player
1. “Setup” → 2. “Bluetooth Audio Setup (BT•A Setup)” →
3. “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
555
w
Pattern B
1
Press
2
Press the talk switch or select “BT•A Setup” using
3
Select one of the following functions using a voice command or
to select “BT•A MENU”.
.
.
● Registering a portable player
“Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)”
● Selecting a portable player to be used
5
“Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
Interior features
● Changing the registered name of a portable player
“Change Name”
● Listing the registered portable players
“List Audio Players (List Audios)”
● Changing the passkey
“Set Passkey”
● Deleting a registered portable player
“Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
Registering a portable player
Select “Pair Audio Player (Pair Audio)” using a voice command or
and perform the procedure for registering a portable player. (→P. 547)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
,
556
5-4. Using the audio system
Selecting a portable player to be used
1
Select “Connect Audio Player (Connect)” using a voice command or
.
w
Pattern A
2
Select the portable player to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of
the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.
w
Pattern B
2
Select the portable player to be used using
w
Pattern A
3
Press the talk switch and say “From Car” or “From Audio player”, and
.
select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
w
Pattern B
3
Select “From Car” or “From Audio”, using
.
.
If “From Car” is selected, the portable player will be automatically connected
whenever the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
557
Changing the registered name of a portable player
1
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or
.
w
Pattern A
2
Select the name of the portable player to be changed by either of the
following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of
the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.
w
Pattern B
2
Select the desired portable player name to be changed using
3
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using
5
4
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
, and say
Interior features
the new name.
.
558
5-4. Using the audio system
Listing the registered portable players
Select “List Audio Players (List Audios)” using a voice command or
. The list of registered portable players will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT•A Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being read
aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will become
available:
● Selecting a portable player: “Connect Audio Player (Connect)”
● Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
● Deleting a portable player: “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)”
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
559
Changing the passkey
1
Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or
w
Pattern A
2
Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm”
using a voice command or
.
.
w
Pattern B
2
Select a 4 to 8-digit number using
.
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
3
5
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input,
again.
If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is not necessary.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
press
560
5-4. Using the audio system
Deleting a registered portable player
1
Select “Delete Audio Player (Delete Audio)” using a voice command
or
.
w
Pattern A
2
Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of
the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.
w
Pattern B
2
Select the desired portable player to be deleted using
.
If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® phone, the
registration of the cellular phone can be deleted at the same time. A voice
guidance instruction to delete a cellular phone is heard.
3
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or
(Bluetooth® phone →P. 569)
■ The number of portable players that can be registered
Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
5-4. Using the audio system
561
Bluetooth® audio system setup
System setup items and operation procedures
w
Pattern A
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice
command or
: (→P. 590)
w
Pattern B
1
Press
2
Select “System Setup” using
3
Select one of the following items using
to select “BT•A MENU”.
5
.
● Setting voice guidance volume
“Guidance Vol” (→P. 592)
● Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name
“Device Name” (→P. 593)
● Initializing the system
“Initialize” (→P. 593)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
:
562
5-4. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
1
Displays the current mode
2
Changes the following settings:
• Sound quality and volume balance →P. 563
The sound quality and balance setting can be changed to produce
the best sound.
• Automatic Sound Levelizer
on/off →P. 563
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
■
Changing sound quality modes
Press
.
Pressing the button changes sound modes in the following order:
“BAS”→“MID”→“TRE”→“FAD”→“BAL”→“ASL”
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
563
5-4. Using the audio system
■
Adjusting sound quality
Turning
adjusts the level.
Mode
displayed
Sound quality
mode
Level
“BAS”
Bass*
-5 to 5
“MID”
Mid-range*
-5 to 5
“TRE”
Treble*
-5 to 5
“FAD”
Front/rear volume
balance
“BAL”
Left/right
volume
balance
Turn counterTurn clockwise
clockwise
Low
High
F7 to R7
Shifts to rear
Shifts to front
L7 to R7
Shifts to left
Shifts to right
5
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.
Turning
clockwise turns on the ASL, and turning
coun-
terclockwise turns off the ASL.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise
level as you drive your vehicle.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
Turning the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) on/off
564
5-4. Using the audio system
Using the AUX port
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
through the vehicle’s speakers.
1
Push the knob to release the lock,
and lift the armrest to open fully.
2
Open the cover and connect the
portable audio device.
3
Press
or
.
■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjustments
must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
565
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.
1
Radio mode:Selects a radio station
CD mode: Selects a track, file
(MP3 and WMA) and disc
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects a track and album
iPod mode:
Selects a song
USB memory mode:
5
Selects a file and folder
Increases/decreases volume
3
Turns the power on, selects an
audio source
Turning the power on
Press
when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down until you hear a
beep.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
2
566
5-4. Using the audio system
Changing the audio source
Press
when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes as follows each time the button is pressed. If no discs are inserted
in the player, that mode will be skipped.
Type A:
FM1→FM2→SAT1→SAT2→SAT3→CD player→
Bluetooth® audio→AUX→iPod or USB memory→
AM→FM1
Type B:
FM1→FM2→CD player→Bluetooth® audio→AUX→
iPod or USB memory→AM→FM1
Adjusting the volume
Press
to increase the volume and
to decrease the volume.
Hold down the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
1
Press
2
Press
to select radio mode.
or
to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold
you hear a beep.
To cancel, press either switch.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
or
on the button until
5-4. Using the audio system
567
Selecting a track/file or song
1
Press
mode.
2
Press
to select CD, Bluetooth® audio, iPod or USB memory
or
to select the desired track/file or song.
Selecting an album
to select Bluetooth® audio mode.
1
Press
2
Press and hold
or
until you hear a beep.
Selecting a folder
1
Press
to select USB memory mode.
2
Press and hold
or
until you hear a beep.
1
Press
to select CD mode.
2
Press and hold
or
until you hear a beep.
CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
Selecting a disc in the CD player
5
568
5-4. Using the audio system
Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cellular
phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth® cellular phones. Bluetooth® is a wireless data system that allows the cellular phone to wirelessly connect to
the hands-free system and make/receive calls.
Title
Page
Using the hands-free system
P. 573
Making a phone call
P. 581
Setting a cellular phone
P. 585
Security and system setup
P. 590
Using the phone book
P. 595
■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the cellular phone is switched off
● If you are outside service range
● If the cellular phone is not connected
● If the cellular phone’s battery is low
● If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
● If metal is covering or touching the phone
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
569
■ When using the hands-free system
● The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.
● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
● If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
● Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.
● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
•
•
•
•
•
When driving on unpaved roads
When driving at high speeds
When a window is open
When the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
When the air conditioning is set to high
■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly
accessed. (→P. 593)
■ About Bluetooth®
■ Compatible models
Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Conformed: Ver. 1.5)
and OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1.
If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth®
phone. If your cellular phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the Bluetooth®
phone.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
570
5-4. Using the audio system
■ Certification for the hands-free system
FCC ID: AJDK018
IC ID: 775E-K018
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire
de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
571
CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But
it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least
20 cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet
and ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à
OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC.
Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de
20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
5
w For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
w For vehicles sold in Canada
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using
an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by
Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the
antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio
peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur)
approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques
de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le
type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
572
5-4. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not use a cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to cellular phones
Do not leave cellular phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the phone.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
573
Using the hands-free system (for cellular phones)
Audio unit
1
Display
A message, name, phone number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and special
characters cannot be displayed.
Displays information that is too
long to be displayed at one time
on the display (press and hold)
3
Selects speed dials
4
Selects items such as menu and
number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected item
5
Bluetooth® connection condition
If “BT” is not displayed, the hands-free
phone system cannot be used.
6
Reception level
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
2
574
5-4. Using the audio system
Steering wheel switches
1
Volume
During an incoming call: Adjusts
the ring tone volume
During an ongoing call: Adjusts
the receiver volume
The voice guidance volume cannot be
adjusted using this button.
2
Talk switch
Turns the voice command system
on (press)/turns the voice command system off (press and hold)
3
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system on/
starts a call
4
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system off/
ends a call/refuses a call
Microphone
You can use the microphone when
talking on the phone.
The person you are speaking to can
be heard from the front speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth® phone in
the system. (→P. 576)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
575
Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice
commands enable the operation of the hands-free phone system without
the need to check the display or operate
■
.
Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■
Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command:
“Help”:
Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for
the selected function
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
“Cancel”:
Exits the hands-free phone system
“Repeat”:
Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”:
Returns to the previous procedure
576
5-4. Using the audio system
Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a cellular phone in the system. The system will enter phone registration mode
automatically when starting the system with no cellular phone registered.
Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a cellular phone:
1
Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch.
The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are
heard.
2
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or
3
Register a phone name by either of the following methods:
a. Select “Record Name” using
.
, and say the name to be regis-
tered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
4
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for
inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard.
5
Input the passkey into the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the
phone.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the cellular phone has a Bluetooth® audio player, the audio player can
be registered at the same time. A voice guidance instruction to register a
Bluetooth® audio player is heard.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or
6
577
.
(Bluetooth® audio player →P. 542)
Menu list of the hands-free phone system
■
Normal operation
First menu
Third menu
Operation detail
“Callback”
-
-
Dialing a number stored in
the incoming call history
memory
“Redial”
-
-
Dialing a number stored in
the outgoing call history
memory
“Add Entry”
-
Adding a new phone number
“Change Name”
-
Changing the registered
name in the phone book
“Delete Entry”
-
Deleting
data
“Del Spd Dial”
-
Deleting speed dials
“List Names”
-
Listing the registered data
“Speed Dial”
-
Setting speed dials
“Phonebook”
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
the registered
5
Interior features
Second menu
578
5-4. Using the audio system
First menu
Second menu
“Security”
“Phone Setup”
“Setup”
“System Setup”
Third menu
Operation detail
“Set PIN”
Setting a PIN code
“Phbk Lock”
Locking the phone book
“Phbk Unlock”
Unlocking the phone book
“Pair Phone”
Registering the
phone to be used
“Connect”
Selecting a cellular phone
to be used
“Change Name”
Changing the registered
name of a cellular phone
“List Phones”
Listing the registered cellular phones
“Set Passkey”
Changing the passkey
“Delete Phone”
Deleting a registered cellular phone
“Guidance Vol”
Setting voice guidance volume
“Device Name”
Displaying the Bluetooth®
device address and name
“Initialize”
Initializing the system
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
cellular
579
5-4. Using the audio system
■
Short cut key operation
Second menu
Operation detail
“Dial XXX (name)”
-
Dialing a name registered
in the phone book
“Phone book add Entry”
-
Adding a new phone
number
“Phone book Change
name”
-
Changing a registered
name in the phone book
“Phone
Entry”
-
Deleting the registered
data
“Phone book List names”
-
Listing
data
“Phone book Set Speed
Dial”
-
Setting speed dials
“Phone book
Speed Dial”
-
Deleting speed dials
5
-
Dialing by inputting a
number
Interior features
First menu
Second menu
book
Delete
Delete
“Dial XXX (number)”
“Phonebook”
the
registered
“Phonebook Unlock”
Unlocking
book
“Phonebook Lock”
Locking the phone book
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
the
phone
5-4. Using the audio system
■ Automatic volume adjustment
When vehicle speed reaches 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically
increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed
drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
■ When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),
∗ (star), and + (plus).
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■ Situations in which the system may not recognize your voice
● When driving on rough roads
● When driving at high speeds
● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving
● Operating the system with
● Registering a cellular phone to the system
■ Changing the passkey
→P. 588
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
Making a phone call
Functions
■
Making a phone call
● Dialing by inputting a number
“Dial by number”
● Dialing by inputting a name
“Dial by name”
● Speed dialing
● Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory
“Redial”
● Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory
“Call back”
■
5
Receiving a phone call
Interior features
● Answering a phone call
● Refusing a phone call
■
Transferring a phone call
■
Call waiting
■
Using the call history memory
● Dialing
● Storing number in the phone book
● Deleting
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
Dialing by inputting a number
1
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”.
2
Press the talk switch and say the phone number.
3
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” using
.
Dialing by inputting a name
1
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”.
2
Select a registered name to be input by either of the following methods:
a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. Press the talk switch when
the desired name is read aloud.
3
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” using
.
Speed dialing
1
Press the off-hook switch.
2
Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered.
3
Press the off-hook switch.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
When receiving a phone call
■
Answering a phone call
Press the off-hook switch.
■
Refusing a phone call
Press the on-hook switch.
Transferring a phone call
A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system while
dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods:
a. Operate the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the
phone.
b. Press the off-hook switch*1.
c. Press the talk switch and say “Call Transfer”*2.
phone to the system during a call.
*2: While the vehicle is in motion, calls cannot be transferred from the system to
the cellular phone.
Call waiting
When a call is interrupted by an incoming call from a third party, the following options will become available:
● Answer the incoming call: Press the off-hook switch. (Press the off-
hook switch again as necessary to switch back and forth between calls.)
● Refuse the incoming call: Press the on-hook switch.
Using the call history memory
Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history
memory:
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
*1: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from the cellular
5
5-4. Using the audio system
1
Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number stored in
the outgoing call history memory) or “Call back” (when using a number
stored in the incoming call history memory).
2
Select the number by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is displayed.
b. Select the desired number using
3
.
The following operations can be performed:
Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” using a voice command or
.
Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” and then
“Confirm” using a voice command or
.
Deleting: Select “Delete” and then “Confirm” using a voice command
or
.
■ Call waiting
● If your phone does not support HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used.
● Call waiting operation may differ depending on your cellular phone and service
provider.
■ Call history
Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call history
memories.
■ When talking on the phone
● Do not talk at the same time as the other party.
● Keep the volume of the incoming voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will increase.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
Setting a cellular phone
Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows the
system to function. The following functions can be used for registered
cellular phones:
Functions and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice
command or
:
● Registering a cellular phone
1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Pair Phone”
● Selecting a cellular phone to be used
1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Connect Phone (Connect)”
Interior features
● Changing the registered name of a cellular phone
1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Change Name”
● Listing the registered cellular phones
1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “List Phones”
● Changing the passkey
1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Set Passkey”
● Deleting a registered cellular phone
1. “Setup” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Delete Phone”
Registering a cellular phone
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or
procedure for registering a cellular phone. (→P. 576)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
, and perform the
5-4. Using the audio system
Selecting a cellular phone to be used
1
Select “Connect Phone (Connect)” using a voice command or
.
w
Pattern A
2
Select the cellular phone to be used by either of the following methods,
and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired cellular phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of the
desired cellular phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
w
Pattern B
3
Select the cellular phone to be used using
.
Changing the registered name of a cellular phone
1
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or
.
w
Pattern A
2
Select the name of the cellular phone to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired cellular phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of the
desired cellular phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
w
Pattern B
2
Select the desired cellular phone name to be changed using
3
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using
.
, and say
the new name.
4
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
Listing the registered cellular phones
Select “List Phones” using a voice command or
. The list of regis-
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a cellular phone is being read
aloud selects the cellular phone, and the following functions will become
available:
● Selecting a cellular phone: “Connect Phone (Connect)”
● Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
● Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete Phone”
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
tered cellular phones will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.
5
5-4. Using the audio system
Changing the passkey
1
Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or
w
Pattern A
2
Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm”
using a voice command or
.
.
w
Pattern B
2
Select a 4 to 8-digit number using
.
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
3
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input,
press
again.
If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is not necessary.
Deleting a registered cellular phone
1
Select “Delete Phone” using a voice command or
w
Pattern A
2
Select the cellular phone to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired cellular phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Phones”. When the name of the
desired cellular phone is read aloud, press the talk switch.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
w
Pattern B
2
Select the desired cellular phone to be deleted using
.
If the cellular phone to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® audio player,
the registration of the audio player can be deleted at the same time. A
voice guidance instruction to delete a Bluetooth® audio player is heard.
3
Select “Yes” or “No” using a voice command or
.
(Bluetooth® audio player →P. 542)
■ The number of cellular phones that can be registered
Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
590
5-4. Using the audio system
Security and system setup
Security setting items and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice
command or
:
● Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)
1. “Setup” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Set PIN”
● Locking the phone book
1. “Setup” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)”
● Unlocking the phone book
1. “Setup” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Phonebook Unlock (Phbk Unlock)”
System setup items and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using
● Setting voice guidance volume
1. “Setup” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Guidance Vol”
● Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name
1. “Setup” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Device Name”
● Initializing the system
1. “Setup” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Initialize”
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
:
591
5-4. Using the audio system
Setting or changing the PIN
■
Setting a PIN
1
Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or
2
Enter a PIN using a voice command or
When using
■
.
.
, input the code 1 digit at a time.
Changing the PIN
1
Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or
Enter the registered PIN using a voice command or
3
Enter a new PIN using a voice command or
When using
, input the code 1 digit at a time.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
.
.
Interior features
2
.
592
5-4. Using the audio system
Locking or unlocking the phone book
1
Select “Phonebook Lock (Phbk Lock)” or “Phonebook Unlock (Phbk
Unlock)” using a voice command or
2
.
Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select “Confirm”
using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN.
b. Input a new PIN using
.
Setting voice guidance volume
1
Select “Guidance Vol” using
2
Change the voice guidance volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn
To increase the volume: Turn
.
counterclockwise.
clockwise.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
593
Displaying the Bluetooth® device address and name
1
Select “Device Name” using
2
Turn
3
Select “Go Back” using
.
to display the Bluetooth® device address and name.
to return to “System Setup”.
Initializing the system
Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” using
2
Select “Confirm” again using
.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
5
Interior features
1
594
5-4. Using the audio system
■ Initialization
● The following data in the system can be initialized:
• Phone book
• Outgoing and incoming call history
• Speed dials
• Registered cellular phone data
• Security code
• Registered Bluetooth® enabled portable player data
• Passkey for the cellular phones
• Passkey for the Bluetooth® audio players
• Guidance volume
• Receiver volume
• Ring tone volume
● Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to its original state.
■ When the phone book is locked
The following functions cannot be used:
● Dialing by inputting a name
● Speed dialing
● Dialing a number stored in the call history memory
● Using the phone book
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
595
Using the phone book
Phonebook items and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a voice
command or
:
● Adding a new phone number
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Add Entry”
● Changing the registered name in the phone book
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Change Name”
● Listing the registered data
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “List Names”
● Setting speed dials
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Delete Entry”
● Deleting speed dials
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)”
Adding a new phone number
The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:
● Inputting a phone number using a voice command
● Transferring data from the cellular phone
● Inputting a phone number using
● Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call history
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
● Deleting the registered data
5
596
■
5-4. Using the audio system
Adding procedure
1
Select “Add Entry” using a voice command or
2
Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number:
.
Inputting a telephone number using a voice command:
STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” using a voice command or
.
STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and select
“Confirm” using a voice command.
Transferring data from the cellular phone:
STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for details
on transferring data.
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following
methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice command.
b. Select the desired data using
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
5-4. Using the audio system
Inputting a phone number using
597
:
STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” using
STEP2-2 Input a phone number using
.
, and press
again.
Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.
Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call history:
STEP2-1 Select “Call History” using a voice command or
.
5
STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” using a voice command
.
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following
methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is
displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice command.
b. Select the desired data using
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
Interior features
or
598
5-4. Using the audio system
3
Select the name to be registered by either of the following methods,
and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Select “Record Name” using
4
and say the desired name.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
In 4 , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of “Confirm” registers
the newly added phone number as a speed dial.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
599
Changing the registered name in the phone book
1
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or
w
Pattern A
2
Select the name to be changed by either of the following methods, and
select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the desired name
is read aloud, press the talk switch.
w
Pattern B
5
Select the desired name to be changed using
.
3
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using
the new name.
4
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
and say
Interior features
2
5-4. Using the audio system
Listing the registered data
Select “List Names” using a voice command or
. The list of the
registered data will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to the “Phonebook”.
Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud selects
the data, and the following function will become available:
● Dialing: “Dial”
● Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
● Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”
● Setting a speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
Setting speed dials
1
Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” using a voice command or
.
w
Pattern A
2
Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the desired name
is read aloud, press the talk switch.
w
Pattern B
2
Select the desired data using
.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4. Using the audio system
3
Select the desired preset button and register the data into speed dial by
either of the following methods:
a. Press the desired preset button and select “Confirm” by using a voice
command or
.
b. Press and hold the desired preset button.
Deleting the registered data
1
Select “Delete Entry” using a voice command or
.
w
Pattern A
2
Select the data to be deleted by either of the following methods and
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired phone number.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List Names”. When the name of the
desired phone number is read aloud, press the talk switch.
w
Pattern B
2
Select the desired data to be deleted using
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
Interior features
select “Confirm” using a voice command or
5
5-4. Using the audio system
Deleting speed dials
1
Select “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” using a voice command or
.
2
Press the preset button to which the desired speed dial is registered
and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
■ Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
.
5-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
5
Outer foot lights
5
Rear personal lights (→P. 604)
2
Shift lever light
6
Door courtesy lights
3
Interior light
7
Ornament lights (if equipped)
4
Front personal lights
8
Footwell lights
(→P. 604)
(→P. 604)
When the instrument panel light control switch is turned to minimum and the tail
lights are on, the ornament lights and the footwell lights will turn off. (→P. 94)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
1
5-5. Using the interior lights
Interior light
1
Turns the light on/off
The rear personal lights are also
turned on/off by the interior light
operation. However, if the interior light
is turned off after being turned on
while the rear personal lights are
turned on, the rear personal lights will
not turn off simultaneously.
2
Turns the door position on
Personal lights
■
Front
Turns the light on/off
■
Rear
Turns the light on/off
If the lights are turned on by interior
light operation, the lights cannot
turn off by pressing the switch.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-5. Using the interior lights
■ Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are
locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/closed.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
If the following lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the personal/
interior light main switch is in the door position, the lights will go off automatically
after 20 minutes:
● Outer foot lights
● Personal/interior light
● Door courtesy lights
● Ornament lights (if equipped)
● Footwell lights
■ Customization
Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 852)
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features
1
Cup holders
2
Glove box
(→P. 610)
3
Console box
(→P. 609)
(→P. 608)
4
Auxiliary box
(→P. 611)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-6. Using the storage features
CAUTION
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause
the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with
other stored items.
● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored
items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire
hazard.
■ When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use
Keep the lids closed.
In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to
an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-6. Using the storage features
Glove box
1
Open (press the button)
2
Unlock with the mechanical key
3
Lock with the mechanical key
■ Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
■ Trunk opener main switch
The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (→P. 145)
■ Removing the insert
The insert inside the glove box can be removed. (→P. 708)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-6. Using the storage features
Console box
Push the knob to release the lock,
and lift the armrest to open fully.
■ Tray in the console box
The tray slides forward/backward and can be
removed.
5
The console box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
CAUTION
When using the console box with half-open, do not apply too much load on the
armrest. Doing so may damage the armrest and may cause you to injure yourself.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
■ Console box light
610
5-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders
■
■
Driver’s side
1
To open, move the cup holder
lid until it locks.
2
To close, press and release the
cup holder lid.
Front passenger’s side
To open, press down and release
the cup holder lid.
■
Rear
To open, pull down the armrest
and press in and release the rear
cup holder on the armrest.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-6. Using the storage features
611
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holders
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder (front passenger’s side)
Do not place anything larger than a 32 oz cup in the cup holder.
Doing so may prevent the switches from being operated properly or block the
driver’s view of the switches, which may cause an accident.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the rear cup holder
Stow the cup holder before stowing the armrest.
Auxiliary box
5
Interior features
Press in the button.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
612
5-6. Using the storage features
Trunk features
Cargo hooks
Raise the hooks when needed.
The cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
Grocery bag hooks
Luggage mat
1
Pull the lever upwards when lifting the luggage mat up.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-6. Using the storage features
2
613
The lever can be hooked on the
edge of the trunk.
CAUTION
■ When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions.
NOTICE
■ When closing the trunk
Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
The luggage mat may get damaged.
5
614
5-7. Other interior features
Sun visors and vanity mirrors
Sun visors
1
To set the visor in the forward
position, flip it down.
2
To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing
it to the side.
3
To use the side extender, place
the visor in the side position, then
slide it backward.
Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the cover is
opened.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is not running .
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
615
Clock
The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.
1
Pressing and holding will move
the clock hands backward.
2
Pressing and holding will move
the clock hands forward.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
616
5-7. Other interior features
Power outlets
The power outlets can be used for 12V accessories that run on less than
10A.
■
Front
Open the lid.
■
Rear
Open the lid.
■ The power outlets can be used when
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
617
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlets
Close the power outlet lids when the power outlets are not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlets may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent blown fuse
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12V 10A.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the engine is not running
.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
618
5-7. Other interior features
Heated steering wheel∗
The heated steering wheel heats the side grips of the steering wheel.
Turns the heater on/off
The indicator light comes on when the
heater is operating.
■ Operating condition
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
■ Timer
The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.
■ If the indicator light flashes
Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel off and then press the button
again. If the indicator light still flashes, a malfunction may be occurring. Turn the
heated steering wheel off and have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
619
CAUTION
■ Burns
Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes
in contact with the steering wheel when the heated steering wheel is on:
● Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
● Persons with sensitive skin
● Persons who are fatigued
● Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold
remedies, etc.)
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Turn the switch off when the engine is not running .
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
620
5-7. Other interior features
Seat heaters∗/seat ventilators∗
The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow by blowing air from the seats.
Seat heaters
Heats the seat
The indicator light comes on.
The higher the number of dots, the
warmer the seat becomes.
Seat heaters and ventilators
1
Heats the seat
The indicator light comes on.
The higher the number of dots, the
warmer the seat becomes.
2
Blows air from the seat
The indicator light comes on.
The higher the number of dots, the
stronger the airflow becomes.
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
621
■ The seat heaters/seat ventilators can be used when
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
CAUTION
■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on
to avoid the possibility of burns:
•
•
•
•
Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the
seat and may lead to overheating.
● Do not use seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause minor burns or
overheating.
■ To prevent damage to the seat heaters/seat ventilators
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Turn the seat heaters/seat ventilators off when the engine is not running .
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
NOTICE
5
622
5-7. Other interior features
Armrest
Fold down the armrest for use.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not apply too much load on the armrest.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
623
Rear sunshade∗/rear door sunshades∗
Rear sunshade
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating the button
shown below.
Raise/lower
5
Interior features
Rear door sunshades
Pull the tab of the rear door sunshade and hook the shade on using
the anchors.
To retract the rear door sunshade,
unhook the shade and retract it slowly.
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
624
5-7. Other interior features
■ The rear sunshade can be used when
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
■ Operating the rear sunshade after the engine is turned off
The rear sunshade can be operated for approximately 1 minute even after the
“START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or
turned off.
■ Reverse operation feature
To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear sunshade automatically lowers when the
shift lever is shifted to R.
However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs:
● The button is pressed again.*
● Shift the shift lever into P.
● The shift lever is shifted out of R, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h).
If the engine is off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due
to the reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the engine
is turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15
km/h). To raise the sunshade again, press the button.
*: Occasionally, the reverse function may not be carried out after the switch has
been pressed. Repeat the above operation to operate the function.
■ Customization
Time elapsed before the reverse operation feature activates can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 852)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
625
CAUTION
■ When the rear sunshade is being operated
Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening.
They may get caught, causing injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is not running .
■ To ensure normal operation of the rear sunshade and rear door sunshades
Observe the following precautions.
● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components of the rear sun-
shade.
● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
● Do not attach items to the rear sunshade and rear door sunshades.
5
● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
● Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously for long periods of time.
626
5-7. Other interior features
Trunk storage extension∗
Long objects can be loaded into the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space
and rear seat area.
1
Fold down the armrest.
2
Fold down the handle and open
the armrest door.
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Ensure that the armrest door is closed.
In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward
into the cabin, resulting in injury.
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
627
Coat hooks
The coat hooks are provided with
the rear assist grips.
CAUTION
■ Items that cannot be hung on the coat hook
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death
or serious injury.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
628
5-7. Other interior features
Assist grips
An assist grip installed on the ceiling
can be used to support your body
while sitting on the seat.
CAUTION
■ Assist grip
Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your
seat.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the assist grip
Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
629
Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems,
and other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink® Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink®.
Programming the HomeLink®
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
1
Indicator light
2
Buttons
■
Before programming HomeLink®
5
devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent
injury or other potential harm.
● It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote con-
trol transmitter for more accurate programming.
● Garage door openers manufactured after 1995 may be equipped
. If this is the case, you will need a stepwith
ladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door opener motor.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
● During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or other
5-7. Other interior features
■
Programming HomeLink®
1
Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in.
(25 to 75 mm) from the
HomeLink® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator
light in view while programming.
w
For U.S.A. owner’s
2
Press
and
hold
the
®
HomeLink button you want
to program and the handheld
transmitter button simultaneously.
When
the
®
HomeLink
indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both buttons.
Programming has completed when
the indicator light changes to a
rapid flash.
w
2
Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a
device in the Canadian market
With one hand, press and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program. With your other hand, press and release the remote control transmitter every 2 seconds and repeat this cycle until the
HomeLink® indicator light starts to flash rapidly. Then, release the
buttons.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
3
Test the HomeLink® operation
by pressing the newly programmed button and observing the indicator light:
● If the indicator light is solid/
continuous, programming
has been completed and
your device should activate
when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released.
● If the indicator light blinks
rapidly for 2 seconds and
then turns into a solid/continuous light, proceed with
the following instructions
4 for programming a rolling code system.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
w
Programming a rolling code
system
4
Locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door
opener motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the unit. The name and
color of the button may vary by
manufacturer. Please refer to the
operator’s manual supplied with
the garage door opener motor for
details.
5
Press and release the “Learn”
or “Smart” button.
Perform 6 within 30 seconds
after performing 5 .
6
Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
(located inside the vehicle) for
2 seconds and release it.
Repeat this sequence (press/
hold/release) up to 3 times to
complete programming.
If the garage door opener motor
activates when the HomeLink®
button is pressed, the garage door
opener motor recognizes the
HomeLink® signal.
7
Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the
remaining HomeLink® buttons.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
■
Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button
When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already
have devices registered to them can be overwritten:
1
With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
2
When the HomeLink® indicator starts flashing, continue to hold the
HomeLink® button and perform “Programming HomeLink®” from
1 (it takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink® indicator to start flashing).
Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons
shown in the illustration for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink® memory.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
■ Programs stored in the HomeLink® memory
● The registered codes are not erased even if the 12-volt battery cable is discon-
nected.
● If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink® button that
already has a code registered to it, the already registered code is not erased.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
w For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NZLOBIHL4
FCC ID: NZLWZLHL4
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
w For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are
out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
■ When operating or programming HomeLink®
Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink® buttons.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
Compass∗
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in
which the vehicle is heading.
Operation
To turn the compass on or off, push
the switch.
Displays and directions
Display
Direction
“N”
North
“NE”
Northeast
“E”
East
“SE”
Southeast
“S”
South
“SW”
Southwest
“W”
West
“NW”
Northwest
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
Calibrating the compass
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the
earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Interior features
If you cross over one of the map boundaries shown in illustration, the compass will
deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to “Deviation calibration”.
5-7. Other interior features
■
Deviation calibration
1
Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.
2
Press the switch until a number
(1 to 15) appears on the compass display.
3
Press the switch and referring to the map above, select the number
of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is
complete.
■
Circling calibration
When “C” appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less in a circle until a
direction is displayed.
If there is not enough space to drive
in a circle, drive around the block
until the direction is displayed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference
by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower,
between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large
vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
● The 12-volt battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.
CAUTION
■ While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.
5
■ When doing the circling calibration
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the vicinity. Do not
violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
5-7. Other interior features
NOTICE
■ To avoid the compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction.
■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
● Do not perform a circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth’s
magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows,
etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
Safety Connect∗
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses
Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which
operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by
the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and
Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy
of which is available at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.
5
System components
“SOS” button
2
LED light indicators
3
Microphone
Interior features
1
∗: If equipped
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
● Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service
providers. (→P. 644)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
● Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (→P. 645)
● Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (→P. 645)
● Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (→P. 645)
Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement
and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your
Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or push the
“SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
■ Safety Connect Services Information
● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible during
Safety Connect.
● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Contact
with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device
being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive
emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by
subscription term selected.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Loca-
tion will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada,
and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States (except
Hawaii) and in Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the
United States in countries other than Canada.
● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications
Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
■ Languages
5
■ When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The
Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
5-7. Other interior features
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:
● Green indicator light on = Active service
● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction
(contact your Lexus dealer)
● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
Safety Connect services
■
Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the
system is designed to automatically call the response center. The
responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak
with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the
call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to
the location.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
■
Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities
to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police
report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-LEXUS
(1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain
circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Lexus.com.
■
Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to
reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will
determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch
the necessary assistance required.
■
Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included
warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such
as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside
Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect
Terms and Conditions, which are available at Lexus.com.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior features
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that
you are not experiencing an emergency.
5
5-7. Other interior features
Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■
Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power
radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless
phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measure-
ment) Report 86 [1986]
● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Pro-
tection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers,
and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and
industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI
Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
■ Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
FCC ID: O9EGTM1
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
FCC ID: N7NGTM2
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5
Interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7. Other interior features
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
650
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition:
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body,
wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly
with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is
cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the
vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm
your vehicle’s paint.
● Hybrid vehicles: Rear spoiler may not be washable in some automatic car washes.
There may also be an increased risk of damage to vehicle.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the win-
dows.
● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed
properly.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-1. Maintenance and care
651
■ When using a car wash
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range,
the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the
vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
● Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system
with push-button start. (→P. 129)
■ Aluminum wheels
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard
brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for
long distance in the hot weather.
● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■ Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
6
Maintenance and care
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
652
6-1. Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause
the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■ When cleaning the windshield (with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
Turn off the wiper switch.
If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may
operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught
or other serious injuries and cause damage
to the wiper blades.
Off
● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is
touched by hand
● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
● If something bumps against the windshield
● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the
raindrop sensor
■ Precautions regarding exhaust pipes
Exhaust gases cause exhaust pipes to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch any pipes until they have cooled
sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.
■ Precaution regarding the Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped)
If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction. If this occurs, consult your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-1. Maintenance and care
653
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (alu-
minum wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint
surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
•
•
•
•
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with
low humidity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
6
■ When using an automatic car wash (with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
■ When cleaning the windshield
Raise the wipers in line with the windshield. (→P. 329)
Failure to do so may result in damage to the wipers and/or the hood.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
Turn off the wiper switch.
If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be
damaged.
654
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and
keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a
cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all
remaining traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining mois-
ture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or
soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and
wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-1. Maintenance and care
655
■ Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
■ When cleaning the carpeted portions of the glove box, console box, etc.
If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a possibility that the surface of the carpet
could be damaged.
CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Gasoline vehicles: Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
6
● Hybrid vehicles: Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(→P. 40)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the
windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
and in the hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents or in the luggage compartment.
Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
656
6-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle inte-
rior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline
or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior
part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park
the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as
they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the
floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with LDA [Lane Departure
Alert] and Automatic High Beam)
Be careful not to touch the camera sensor (→P. 269).
If the camera is accidentally scratched or hit, LDA and Automatic High Beam system may not operate properly or may cause a malfunction.
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to
the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with
lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes
running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-2. Maintenance
657
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. Lexus recommends performing the following maintenance:
General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be
done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.
Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and
Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.
Do-it-yourself maintenance
The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s Guide”,
“Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty
Booklet”.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
6
658
6-2. Maintenance
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop
other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
■ Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedure described below:
1
Switch the display to the trip meter “A” (→P. 94) when the engine
is running .
2
Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off.
3
While pressing the “ODO TRIP” button (→P. 94), turn the “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to the IGNITION ON mode (do not start
the engine because otherwise the reset mode will be canceled).
The message shown in the illustration will
appear on the display.
Continue to press and hold the button until
the trip meter displays “000000”.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest
service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on
your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been per-
formed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle
is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-2. Maintenance
659
CAUTION
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible
death or serious injury.
■ Handling of the 12-volt battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-
ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.
● 12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after
handling. (→P. 685, 690)
6
Maintenance and care
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
660
6-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer
or qualified service shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items
Check points
12-volt battery (gasoline vehicles)
Check the battery fluid level and
connections.
(→P. 685)
Brake fluid
Is the brake fluid at the correct level?
(→P. 684)
Engine coolant (gasoline vehicles)
Is the engine coolant at the correct
level?
(→P. 681)
Engine/power control unit coolant Is the engine/power control unit coolant
(hybrid vehicles)
at the correct level?
(→P. 681)
Engine oil
Is the engine oil at the correct level?
(→P. 676)
Exhaust system
There should not be any fumes or
strange sounds.
Radiator/condenser
The radiator and condenser should be
free from foreign objects. (→P. 683)
Washer fluid
Is there sufficient washer fluid?
(→P. 689)
Luggage compartment
Items
12-volt battery (hybrid vehicles)
Check points
Check the connections.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(→P. 690)
6-2. Maintenance
661
Vehicle interior
Items
Accelerator pedal
Check points
• The accelerator pedal should move
smoothly (without uneven pedal
effort or catching).
Automatic transmission “Park” mecha• When parked on a slope and the shift
nism (gasoline vehicles)/Hybrid translever is in P, is the vehicle securely
mission “Park” mechanism (hybrid
stopped?
vehicles)
Brakes
• The vehicle should not pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effectively.
• The brake pedal should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get too
close to the floor when the brakes are
applied.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
Maintenance and care
Brake pedal
• Does the brake pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?
(→P. 834)
• Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play?
(→P. 834)
662
6-2. Maintenance
Items
Check points
Head restraints
• Do the head restraints
smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers
• Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
• Are the headlights aimed correctly?
Parking brake
• Does the parking brake pedal move
smoothly? brake pedal move
smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the
parking brake is on, is the vehicle
securely stopped?
Seat belts
• Do the seat belts operate smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be damaged.
Seats
• Do the seat controls operate properly?
Steering wheel
• Does the steering wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the
correct amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange
sounds coming from the steering
wheel.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
move
6-2. Maintenance
663
Vehicle exterior
Items
Check points
Doors/trunk
• Do the
smoothly?
doors/trunk
operate
Engine hood
• Does the engine hood lock system
work properly?
Fluid leaks
• There should not be any signs of fluid
leakage after the vehicle has been
parked.
Tires
• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?
• The tires should not be damaged or
excessively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be loose.
CAUTION
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation
before performing maintenance checks.
6
Maintenance and care
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
664
6-2. Maintenance
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the
operation of the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the
emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may
need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
● When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be
completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several
driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is
driven 40 or more times.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
665
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedure as given in these sections.
Items
12-volt battery condition
(gasoline vehicles)
12-volt battery condition
(hybrid vehicles)
Brake fluid level
Parts and tools
(→P. 685)
(→P. 690)
(→P. 684)
•
•
•
•
Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
• Distilled water
• Grease
• Conventional wrench (for terminal
clamp bolts)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or
a similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, nonEngine coolant level
nitrite and non-borate coolant with
(gasoline vehicles)
(→P. 681)
long-life hybrid organic acid technology
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
Engine/power control unit coolant level
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
(hybrid vehicles)
(→P. 681)
pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
6
666
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items
Parts and tools
Engine oil level
(→P. 676)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding engine
oil)
Fuses
(→P. 712)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
Light bulbs
(→P. 724)
• Bulb with same number and wattage
rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Flathead screwdriver
• Wrench
Radiator and condenser
(→P. 683)
Tire inflation pressure
(→P. 703)
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
(→P. 689)
• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding water or
washer fluid)
Washer fluid
⎯
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
667
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious
injury, observe the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Hybrid vehicles: Make sure that the “POWER ON” on the multi-information dis-
play and the “READY” indicator are both off.
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
● Gasoline vehicles: Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold,
etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Hybrid vehicles: Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator,
exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids
may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine
compartment.
● Gasoline vehicles: Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel
or the 12-volt battery. Fuel and 12-volt battery fumes are flammable.
● Hybrid vehicles: Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel.
Fuel fumes are flammable.
● Gasoline vehicles: Be extremely cautious when working on the 12-volt battery. It
6
contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
Maintenance and care
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
668
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Be sure the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is off.
With the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch in IGNITION ON
mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning
is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 683)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to
dirt in the air.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
669
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
1
Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2
Pull up the auxiliary catch lever
and lift the hood.
6
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
670
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
◆ Front
w
Gasoline vehicles
w
Hybrid vehicles
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
671
◆ Rear
w
Gasoline vehicles
w
Hybrid vehicles
6
Maintenance and care
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
672
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of death
or serious injury:
● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as
the one shown in the illustration.
● When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the
jack.
● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
● Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is supported
only by the floor jack.
● Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface.
● Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor
jack.
● Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift the
shift lever to P.
● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
● When raising the vehicle, do not place any object on top of or underneath the
floor jack.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
673
Engine compartment
Gasoline vehicles (2GR-FE engine)
1
Washer fluid tank (→P. 689)
2
Engine oil filler cap
3
5
Brake fluid reservoir
(→P. 684)
6
(→P. 678)
6
Fuse box
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 676)
7
12-volt battery
8
Electric cooling fans
9
Condenser
(→P. 683)
10
Radiator
(→P. 683)
Maintenance and care
w
4 Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 681)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(→P. 712)
(→P. 685)
674
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
w
Hybrid vehicles (2AR-FXE engine)
1
Washer fluid tank (→P. 689)
2
Fuse boxes
3
6
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 681)
Power control unit coolant
reservoir
(→P. 681)
7
Brake fluid reservoir
(→P. 684)
4
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 676)
8
Power control unit coolant
radiator
(→P. 683)
5
Engine oil filler cap
9
Electric cooling fans
10
Condenser
11
Engine coolant radiator
(→P. 683)
(→P. 712)
(→P. 678)
■ 12-volt battery (hybrid vehicles)
→P. 690
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(→P. 683)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
675
Engine compartment cover
■
Removing the engine compartment cover
■
Installing the clips
1
Push up center portion
2
Insert
3
Press
6
■ Checking the engine compartment cover after installation
Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
676
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■
Checking the engine oil
1
Park the vehicle on level ground.
w
Gasoline vehicles
After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for
the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
w
Hybrid vehicles
After warming up the engine and turning off the hybrid system, wait more than
5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
2
w
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.
Gasoline vehicles
w
3
Wipe the dipstick clean.
4
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Hybrid vehicles
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
5
w
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil
level.
Gasoline vehicles
w
Hybrid vehicles
1
Low
1
Low
2
Full
2
Measuring side
3
Full
6
677
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
6
Maintenance and care
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
678
■
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the
same type as that already in the engine.
w
Gasoline vehicles
w
Hybrid vehicles
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Engine oil selection
→P. 830
Oil quantity
(Low → Full)
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)
Items
Clean funnel
1
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
2
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
3
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
679
■ Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in
between oil maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after
replacing the engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while
accelerating or decelerating frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through
heavy traffic
CAUTION
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin
disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
Maintenance and care
pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
■
Engine coolant reservoir
1
Reservoir cap
2
“FULL” line
3
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (→P. 813, 816)
■
Power control unit coolant reservoir (hybrid vehicles)
1
Reservoir cap
2
“FULL” line
3
“LOW” line
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
Maintenance and care
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (→P. 816)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized
water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C])
Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized
water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps,
drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in
the cooling system.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■ When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.
6
Maintenance and care
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Brake fluid
■
Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on
the tank.
w
Gasoline vehicles
■
Adding fluid
w
Hybrid vehicles
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Fluid type
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Items
Clean funnel
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency.
Use only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water
immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out
or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.
12-volt battery (gasoline vehicles)
Check the 12-volt battery as follows.
■
12-volt battery exterior
Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
1
Terminals
2
Hold-down clamp
6
Checking 12-volt battery fluid
Check that the level is between the “UPPER LEVEL” and “LOWER
LEVEL” lines.
1
“UPPER LEVEL” line
2
“LOWER LEVEL” line
If the fluid level is at or below the
“LOWER LEVEL” line, add distilled
water.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
■
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Adding distilled water
1
Remove the vent plug.
2
Add distilled water.
Low
O.K.
If the “UPPER LEVEL” line cannot
be seen, check the fluid level by
looking directly at the cell.
3
Put the vent plug back on and close it securely.
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
● If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.
● Make sure the “START STOP ENGINE” switch on the charger is off when con-
necting and disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.
1
Shift the shift lever to P.
2
Open and close any of the doors.
3
Restart the engine.
● Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start may not
be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use
the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
● Start the engine with the “START STOP ENGINE” switch in ACCESSORY mode.
The engine may not start with the “START STOP ENGINE” switch turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from the second attempt.
● The “START STOP ENGINE” switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt
battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the “START STOP ENGINE” switch
mode to the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure
to turn off the engine before disconnect the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when
connecting the 12-volt battery if the “START STOP ENGINE” switch mode prior to
discharge is unknown.
If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
6
■ Chemicals in the 12-volt battery
● Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery.
● Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious
injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12-volt battery:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery
Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the 12-volt battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
NOTICE
■ When recharging the 12-volt battery
Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
■ When adding distilled water
Avoid overfilling. Water spilled during 12-volt battery recharging may cause corrosion.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
CAUTION
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine
etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
6
690
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
12-volt battery (hybrid vehicles)
Location
The 12-volt battery is located on the
right-hand side of luggage compartment.
Removing the 12-volt battery cover
Remove the 12-volt battery cover.
Installing the 12-volt battery cover
1
Install the cover
2
Lift the tab to secure to the trunk
liner
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
691
Exterior
Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
1
Terminals
2
Hold-down clamp
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging:
● If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.
● Make sure the “POWER” switch on the charger is off when connecting and dis-
connecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.
6
■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery
1
Shift the shift lever to P.
2
Open and close any of the doors.
3
Restart the hybrid system.
● Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start may not
be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use
the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
● Start the hybrid system with the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY mode. The
hybrid system may not start with the “POWER” switch turned off. However, the
hybrid system will operate normally from the second attempt.
● The “POWER” switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is recon-
nected, the vehicle will return the “POWER” switch mode to the status it was in
before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the “POWER”
switch before disconnect the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12volt battery if the “POWER” switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts at all methods above, contact
your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
● The hybrid system may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.
692
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Chemicals in the 12-volt battery
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12volt battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery.
● Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.
■ Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery
Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the 12-volt battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
693
CAUTION
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
■ When replacing the 12-volt battery
Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause gas
(hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion.
For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Lexus dealer.
6
NOTICE
Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be
sure all accessories are turned off.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
■ When recharging the 12-volt battery
694
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and
treadwear.
Checking tires
1
New tread
2
Treadwear indicator
3
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is
shown by the “TWI” or “∆” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
w
Vehicles with compact spare tire
Front
w
Vehicles with full-size spare tire
Front
To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
695
Tire pressure warning system
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.
● If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is
warned by a screen display and a warning light. (→P. 775)
● The tire pressure detected by the tire pressure warning system can be
displayed on the multi-information display. (→P. 101)
◆ Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer
and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus
dealer. (→P. 697)
6
◆ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
● When rotating the tires.
● When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing
traveling speed or load weight.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
■
696
■
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
1
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
2
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (→P. 835)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure
level.
3
Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode.
4
Press and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until
the tire pressure warning light
blinks slowly 3 times.
5
Wait for a few minutes with the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch in IGNITION ON mode and then turn
the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
697
◆ Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code
registered by your Lexus dealer.
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric,
and bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or loca-
tion of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the
tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
6
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
■ When rotating the tires
Make sure that the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is off. If the tires are
rotated while the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION ON
mode, the tire position information will not be updated.
If this accidentally occurs, either turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”>
switch to off and then to IGNITION ON mode, or initialize the system after
checking that the tire pressure is properly adjusted.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
698
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Low profile tires (P225/45R18 tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be
reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use
snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed
appropriate for road and weather conditions.
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.
For the maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
mentioned on the sidewall of the tire.
(→P. 840)
■ Tire types
● Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or
icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is
recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
● All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season
tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow
tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
● Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity
as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow
tires should be installed on all wheels. (→P. 326)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
699
■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly
● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.
A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.
Tire chains etc. are equipped.
Lock nuts are equipped.
An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.
If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level.
• If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal reception.*
• If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the
trunk.*
*: Vehicles with a full-size spare tire only
● Performance may be affected in the following situations.
● When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could
be extended.
● When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the
warning may not function.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
Maintenance and care
• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device
If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions, the display may be corrected by driving and changing the radio wave conditions.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ The initialization operation
● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation
pressure adjustment.
● If you have accidentally turned the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch
off during initialization, it is not necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization will restart automatically when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”>
switch has been turned to IGNITION ON mode for the next time.
● If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust
the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct
initialization again.
■ When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the
settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning
light does not blink 3 times.
● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks
for 1 minute then stays on after driving for 20 minutes.
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
MODEL/FCC IDs:
Transmitter: PAXPMVC010
Initiator: HYQ22AAA
w For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
Note:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
w For vehicles sold in Canada
Note:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous
handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
● Do not tow if your vehicle has a compact spare tire (if equipped) installed.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light
may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
diac defibrillators should not come within
17.7 in. (450 mm) of the tire pressure warning system initiators. The radio waves may
affect the operation of such devices.
● Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
● People with implanted pacemakers or car-
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters
and tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed,
water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning
valves could be bound.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those speci-
fied. The cap may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace
the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 695)
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ Low profile tires (P225/45R18 tires)
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following:
● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may
be damaged more severely.
● Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so
may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading
information label. (→P. 835)
6
Maintenance and care
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Inspection and adjustment procedure
1
Tire valve
2
Tire pressure gauge
1
Remove the tire valve cap.
2
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
3
Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
4
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the
pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
5
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
6
Put the tire valve cap back on.
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressure that
is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality and handling.
● Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire inflation pres-
sure to be higher after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur
and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
6
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost, replace them as soon as
possible.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
● Poor sealing of the tire bead
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are
equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and
inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Lexus does not recommend using the following:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your
aluminum wheels.
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel
nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or
rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the
event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (→P. 695)
CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
6
● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
1
Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off.
2
Open the glove box. Lift and
remove the partition.
3
Remove the glove box cover.
4
Remove the filter cover.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
5
Slide and pull out the filter.
Replace it with a new one.
The “↑UP” marks shown on the filter
should be pointing up.
■ Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.
6
Maintenance and care
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
710
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small flathead screwdriver
● Lithium battery CR2032
Replacing the battery
1
Take out the mechanical key.
2
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
3
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
711
■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance shops
or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
● The operational range will be reduced.
CAUTION
■ Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they
can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
6
712
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
1
Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch off.
2
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” for
details about which fuse to check. (→P. 715)
3
Open the Fuse box cover.
w
Engine compartment (type A fuse box)
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
w
Engine compartment (type B fuse box) (hybrid vehicles only)
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
w
713
Driver’s side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
4
Remove the fuse with the pullout
tool.
Only type A fuse can be removed
using the pullout tool.
6
Maintenance and care
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
714
5
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Check if the fuse is blown.
1
Normal fuse
2
Blown fuse
Type A and B:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type C:
Contact your Lexus dealer.
w
Type A
w
Type C
w
Type B
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
715
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■
Engine compartment (type A fuse box)
● Fuse block
6
● Fuse block on the back of the cover
Maintenance and care
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
716
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
1
Ampere
WIP-S
5
Circuit
Driver support system, windshield wipers
2 FAN
50
Electric cooling fan
3 H-LP CLN
30
No circuit
4 ENG W/PMP*1
30
Cooling system
5 PTC HTR NO.2
50
PTC heater
6 PTC HTR NO.1
50
PTC heater
7 HTR
50
Air conditioning system
140
Charging system
120
Hybrid system
9 ABS NO.2*2
30
VSC, ABS
ST/AM2*2
30
Starting system
ABS NO.1*1
30
VSC, ABS
11 H-LP-MAIN
8
10
ALT*
2
DC/DC*
1
30
H-LP RH-LO, H-LP LH-LO
ABS MTR NO.2*1
50
VSC, ABS
ABS NO.1*2
50
VSC, ABS
ABS MTR NO.1*1
50
VSC, ABS
R/B NO.2*1
50
IGCT MAIN, INV W/PMP
15 EPS
80
Electric power steering
16 S-HORN
7.5
S-HORN
17 DEICER
15
Windshield deicer
18 HORN
10
Horn
19 TV
15
Multi-information display, audio display,
Remote Touch, audio system, gauges and
meters
20 AMP NO.2
30
Audio system
21 EFI NO.2
15
Multiport fuel injection system, sequential
multiport fuel system, electronic controlled
transmission
12
13
14
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
717
Circuit
10*2
Multiport fuel injection system, sequential
multiport fuel system, air intake system,
exhaust system
7.5*1
Multiport fuel injection system, sequential
multiport fuel system, air intake system
7.5
Multiport fuel injection system, sequential
multiport fuel system
24 ECU-IG2 NO.3
7.5
Multiport fuel injection system, sequential
multiport fuel system, electronic controlled
transmission, power management system,
steering lock system, cruise control system
25 IGN
15
Starting system
26 D/L-AM2
25
Power door lock system
27 IG2-MAIN
25
INJ, IGN
ALT-S*2
7.5
Charging system
DC/DC-S*1
7.5
Hybrid system
29 MAYDAY
5
MAYDAY
30 TURN&HAZ
15
Turn signal lights, emergency flashers
31 STRG LOCK
10
Steering lock system
32 AMP
30
Audio system
33 H-LP LH-LO
15
Left-hand headlight
34 H-LP RH-LO
15
Right-hand headlight
35 EFI-MAIN NO.1
30
EFI NO.2, EFI NO.3, fuel system
36 SMART
5
Smart access system with push-button start,
occupant classification system
37 ETCS
10
Multiport fuel injection system, sequential
multiport fuel system
38 ABS NO.2*1
7.5
VSC, ABS
39 EFI NO.1
7.5
Multiport fuel injection system, sequential
multiport fuel system, electronic controlled
transmission
22 EFI NO.3
23 INJ
28
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
Maintenance and care
Ampere
718
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
A/F*
Ampere
2
Circuit
20
Air intake system
40 EFI-MAIN
NO.2*1
20
Fuel system, air intake system, exhaust system
41 AM2
7.5
Power management system, smart access
system with push-button start
42 PANEL
10
Switch illumination, audio system, multi-information display, audio display, shift lever light,
glove box light, console box light, Remote
Touch, intuitive parking assist switch illumination
43 DOME
7.5
Clock, footwell lights, vanity lights, ornament
lights, personal lights, door courtesy lights
44 ECU-B NO.1
10
Smart access system with push-button start,
main body ECU, steering sensor, gauges and
meters, gateway ECU, electric tilt and telescopic steering column, power seats, overhead module, outside mirror control ECU,
power trunk opener and closer ECU
45 SPARE
25
Spare fuse
46 SPARE
30
Spare fuse
*1: Hybrid vehicles
*2: Gasoline vehicles
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
719
Engine compartment (type B fuse box) (hybrid vehicles only)
Fuse
1
Ampere
BATT FAN
Circuit
Battery cooling fan
2 INV W/PMP RLY
7.5
INV W/PMP RLY
3 DC/DC IGCT
10
Hybrid system
4 INV
7.5
Hybrid system
5 BATT VL SSR
10
Hybrid system
6 PM IGCT
7.5
Power management system, hybrid system
7 IGCT-MAIN
25
INV W/PMP RLY, INV, DC/DC IGCT,
BATT VL SSR, PM IGCT, BATT FAN
8 INV W/PMP
15
Hybrid system
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
Maintenance and care
7.5
720
■
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Driver’s side instrument panel
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
10
Main body ECU, audio system, shift lock system, outside mirror control ECU, tension
reducer, windshield wipers, heated steering
wheel, multi-information display, audio display, intuitive parking assist, tire pressure
warning system, moon roof, auto anti-glare
inside rear view mirror, raindrop sensor, rear
sunshade, wireless door lock system, power
trunk opener and closer ECU
2 ECU-IG1 NO.1
10
FAN, DEICER, VSC, ABS, charging system,
steering sensor, electronic controlled transmission, electric power steering, gateway
ECU, electric tilt and telescopic steering column
3 PANEL NO.2
5
Clock
4 TAIL
15
Parking lights, side marker lights, license
plate lights
5 DOOR F/R
20
Power window, outside mirror control ECU
6 DOOR R/R
20
Power window
7 DOOR F/L
20
Power window, outside mirror control ECU
8 DOOR R/L
20
Power window
9 H-LP LVL
7.5
Automatic headlight leveling system
10 WASHER
10
Windshield washer
11 A/C-IG1
7.5
Air conditioning system, PTC heater, gauges
and meters, seat heaters and ventilators
1
ECU-IG1 NO.2
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
12 WIPER
721
Circuit
25
Windshield wipers
13 BKUP LP
7.5
Multiport fuel injection system, sequential
multiport fuel system, electronic controlled
transmission, audio system, navigation system, back-up lights
14 FUEL OPN
10
Fuel filler door opener
15 EPS-IG1
10
Electric power steering
16 P/OUTLET RR
15
Power outlet
17 RADIO-ACC
5
Audio system, Remote Touch, multi-information display, audio display, navigation system
18 S/HTR&FAN F/R
10
Seat heaters and ventilators
19 S/HTR&FAN F/L
10
Seat heaters and ventilators
20 OBD
7.5
On-Board diagnosis system
10
Power window master switch, air conditioning system, smart access system with pushbutton start, tire pressure warning system,
rear sunshade
21 ECU-B NO.2
10
Heated steering wheel
23 PTL
25
Power trunk opener and closer ECU
24 STOP
7.5
Power management system, multiport fuel
injection system, sequential multiport fuel
system, VSC, ABS, electronic controlled
transmission, driver support system, engine
room junction block assy, tail lights, high
mounted stoplight, smart access system with
push-button start, shift lock system
25 P/SEAT F/L
30
Power seats
26 A/C-B
7.5
Air conditioning system
27 S/ROOF
10
Moon roof
28 P/SEAT F/R
30
Power seats
29 PSB
30
Pre-collision seat belt
30 D/L-AM1
20
Main body ECU
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
22 STRG HTR
6
722
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
31 TI&TE
20
Electric tilt and telescopic steering column
32 A/B
10
Occupant classification system, SRS airbag
system
33 ECU-IG2 NO.1
7.5
Gauges and meters
34 ECU-IG2 NO.2
7.5
VSC, ABS, gateway ECU, smart access system with push-button start, SRS airbag system
35 CIG& P/OUTLET
15
Power outlet
36 ECU-ACC
7.5
Main body ECU, gauges and meters, outside
rear view mirrors
37 ECU-IG1 NO.3
10
Intuitive parking assist, driver support system, skid control buzzer, Blind Spot Monitor,
radar sensor
38 S/HTR RR
20
No circuit
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
723
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need
replacement. (→P. 724)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
■ When replacing light bulbs
Lexus recommends that you use genuine Lexus products designed for this vehicle.
Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, nongenuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable.
CAUTION
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any
other object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
6
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
724
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your
Lexus dealer.
Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (→P. 836)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
725
Bulb locations
■
■
Front
1
Front side marker light
4
Headlight high beam
2
Front turn signal light
5
Fog light
3
Headlight low beam (halogen
bulb)
6
Rear
Maintenance and care
1
Back-up light
2
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear turn signal light
726
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing light bulbs
■
Headlight high beam
1
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
2
Unplug the connector while
pressing the lock release.
3
Exchange the light bulb, and
install the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
4
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlights on once and visually
confirm that no light is leaking
through the mounting.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
727
Headlight low beam (halogen bulb)
1
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
2
Unplug the connector while
pressing the lock release.
3
Exchange the light bulb, and
install the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlights on once and visually
confirm that no light is leaking
through the mounting.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
4
6
728
■
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fog lights
1
Remove the bolt and partly
remove the under cover, and
unplug the connector while
pushing the lock release.
2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
3
Set the new light bulb.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert. Turn
it clockwise to set.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
729
Set the connector.
After installing the connector,
shake the bulb base gently to check
that it is not loose, turn the fog lights
on once and visually confirm that
no light is leaking through the
mounting.
6
Maintenance and care
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Front turn signal lights
1
To allow enough working
space, turn the steering wheel
to the opposite side of the bulb
to be replaced.
Remove the 3 fender liner
clips and 1 screw.
Turn the steering wheel to the
left when replacing the right
side light bulb, and turn the
steering wheel to the right
when replacing the left side
light bulb.
To take out the clips, turn the
head of the clip to unlock, then
remove by pulling.
2
While holding the clamp open,
pull and remove the tabs and
open the fender liner.
3
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Remove the light bulb.
5
When installing, reverse the
steps listed.
After installing the bulb base, reinstall the fender liner and install the
clips and screw.
6
Maintenance and care
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Front side marker lights
1
Partly remove the fender liner.
Perform the procedure for “Front turn signal lights” from step 1 to 2.
(→P. 730)
2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
3
Remove the code from clip.
4
Remove the light bulb.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
5
When installing, reverse the
steps listed.
After installing the bulb base, reinstall the fender liner and install the
clips and screw.
6
Maintenance and care
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Rear turn signal lights
1
Open the trunk lid and remove
the cover.
2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
3
Remove the light bulb.
4
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Back-up lights
1
Open the trunk lid.
2
For the left side (vehicles with
power trunk opener and closer
only): Pry out each side of the
trunk closer switch in turn by
inserting a screwdriver into the
base.
To prevent damage, cover the tip of
the screwdriver with a rag.
Remove the clips on whichever
side you are replacing and
open the cover of the trunk lid.
4
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
When installing, pass the wire
around the connector rib and make
sure that it does not rest on top of
the connector rib.
5
6
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
Connector rib
Maintenance and care
3
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■
Replacing the following bulbs
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your
Lexus dealer.
● Headlight low beams (discharge bulbs)
● Parking lights and daytime running lights
● Side turn signal lights
● Stop/tail lights
● Tail lights
● Rear side marker lights
● High mounted stoplight
● License plate lights
● Outer foot lights
■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may go
out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored.
■ LED lights
The lights other than the headlights, fog lights, front turn signal lights, front side
marker lights, rear turn signal lights, back-up lights and outer foot lights each consist
of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus
dealer to have the light replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction.
● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
■ When replacing light bulbs
→P. 723
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning
off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by
the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may
result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage
the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)
● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing the discharge headlights (including
light bulbs).
● Do not touch the discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights
are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 25000 V will be discharged and could result in
death or serious injury by electric shock.
● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the headlight bulbs, connectors, power
supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and death or serious injury.
● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
● Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and care
■ To prevent damage or fire
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch once again.
w
Type A
w
Type B
■ Emergency flashers
Gasoline vehicles: If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the
engine is not operating, the 12-volt battery may discharge.
Hybrid vehicles: If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid
system is not operating (while the “READY” indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt
battery may discharge.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-1. Essential information
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
1
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to
slow the vehicle.
2
Shift the shift lever to N.
w
If the shift lever is shifted to N
3
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
4
Stop the engine .
w
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
3
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle
speed as much as possible.
4
Gasoline vehicles: To stop the
engine, press and hold the
“START STOP ENGINE” switch
for 2 consecutive seconds or
more, or press it briefly 3 times or
more in succession.
5
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more
or press briefly 3 times or more
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more
or press briefly 3 times or more
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
Hybrid vehicles: To stop the
hybrid system, press and hold the
“POWER” switch for 2 consecutive seconds or more, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession.
7
7-1. Essential information
CAUTION
■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal
harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as
possible before turning off the engine .
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type
truck or flat bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer before towing.
● The engine is running but the vehicle will
not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
7
When trouble arises
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency towing
Gasoline vehicles: If a tow truck is
not available in an emergency, your
vehicle may be temporarily towed
using a cable or chain secured to
the emergency towing eyelet. This
should only be attempted on hard
surfaced roads for short distances
at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
Hybrid vehicles: If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced
roads for short distances at under 18 mph (30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing towing eyelet
1
Take out the towing eyelet (→P. 785)
2
Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag
between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the illustration.
3
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.
4
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut
wrench.
7
When trouble arises
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck to
prevent body damage.
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
w
From the front
Release the parking brake.
w
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Using a flat bed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a flat
bed truck, it should be tied down at
the locations shown in the illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.
■ Before emergency towing
Release the parking brake.
2
Shift the shift lever to N.
3
Gasoline vehicles: Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” switch to ACCESSORY
(engine off) or IGNITION ON (engine running) mode.
Hybrid vehicles: Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY (hybrid system off)
or ON (hybrid system operating) mode.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
When trouble arises
1
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while towing
● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on
the emergency towing eyelet and the cable or chain. Always be cautious of the
surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
● Gasoline vehicles: If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and
steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
Hybrid vehicles: If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and
steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
■ Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing.
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission when towing using a
wheel-lift type truck
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the
opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could
be damaged while being towed.
■ To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher
than normal.
Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the
floor
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
Operational symptoms
7
750
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Fuel pump shut off system (gasoline vehicles)
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when an
airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the
supply of fuel to the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.
1
Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” switch to ACCESSORY mode or
turn it off.
2
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged
and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
751
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes
on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does
not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this
continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may
be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake booster system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released.
If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the
system is operating normally.
(Canada)
When there is a possible problem that could affect braking performance, the
warning light will come on and a warning buzzer will sound.
Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
→P. 768
■ Brake system warning light operation (hybrid vehicles)
Although depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may cause the red brake system
warning light to turn on and the buzzer to sound, this does not indicate a malfunction.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
*: Brake system warning buzzer (hybrid vehicles):
7
752
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The hybrid system (hybrid vehicles);
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system;
• The electronic automatic transmission control system (gasoline vehicles); or
• The electronic hybrid transmission control system (hybrid
vehicles)
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
(U.S.A.)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system
(Canada)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
753
Warning light/Details
Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system
Pre-collision system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system
The warning light will operate as follows, even when the system
is not malfunctioning:
• The light will flash quickly when the system is operating.
(→P. 306)
(Flashes)
• The light will turn on when the pre-collision system is dis(If equipped)
abled. (→P. 307)
• The light will flash when the system cannot temporarily be
used. (→P. 771)
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system;
• The TRAC system; or
• The hill-start assist control system (hybrid vehicles)
Gasoline vehicles:
The light will flash when the VSC or the TRAC is operating.
Hybrid vehicles:
The light will flash when the ABS, the VSC, the TRAC or the
hill-start assist control system is operating.
Automatic headlight leveling system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system
(If equipped)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
When trouble arises
(Hybrid
vehicles)
Brake system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The regenerative brake system; or
• The electronically controlled brake system
754
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light goes off.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Check that all the doors and
Indicates that a door or the the trunk are closed.
trunk is not fully closed
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates remaining fuel is
Refuel the vehicle.
approximately 2.6 gal. (9.7 L,
2.1 Imp.gal.)
Seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver and/or front
passenger to fasten their seat
belts
Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is
occupied, the front passenger’s seat belt also needs to
be fastened to make the
warning light (warning
buzzer) off.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on and
→P. 761
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
755
Correction procedure
Tire pressure warning light
Adjust the tire inflation pressure
(including the full-size spare
tire) to the specified level.
When the light comes on:
The light will turn off after a
Low tire inflation pressure such
few minutes. In case the light
as
does not turn off even if the
• Natural causes (→P. 757)
tire inflation pressure is
• Flat tire (→P. 784)
adjusted, have the system
checked by your Lexus
dealer.
When the light comes on after
blinking for 1 minute:
Have the system checked by
Malfunction in the tire pressure your Lexus dealer.
warning system
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
→P. 766
*2: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:
Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his
or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a
speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds,
the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still
unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
When trouble arises
The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is
not fastened. Once the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle
reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is
still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different
tone for 20 more seconds.
756
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors,
side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors
(rear), driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger
occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), “AIR BAG ON” indicator light,
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
(→P. 40)
■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sen-
sor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a
passenger is not sitting in the seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the
warning light may not operate properly.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
757
■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural
air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case,
adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
Vehicles with a compact spare tire: The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire
pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning
light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire.
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire: The spare tire is also equipped with a tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter. The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire
inflation pressure of the spare tire is low. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning
light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire.
■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly
→P. 699
■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when
the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to IGNITION ON
mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily
drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio
sound.
7
When trouble arises
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
758
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. The
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may
fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and
operate using more force than usual.
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-
ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change
it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could
lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
759
CAUTION
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
When trouble arises
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
760
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■ Precaution when installing a different tire
When differently constructed tires or tires of different makers, models or tread patterns are installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
761
If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and
perform the following actions:
1
Master warning light
The master warning light also comes
on or flashes in order to indicate that a
message is currently being displayed
on the multi-information display.
2
Multi-information display
If any of the warning light comes on again after the following actions have
been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.
7
When trouble arises
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
762
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to
the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning message
Details
Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure
The warning light may come on if the engine oil
pressure is too low.
Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system
(Hybrid vehicles)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
763
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may
lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Warning message
(Flashes)
Details
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist
The malfunctioning assist-sensor is flashing.
7
Indicates a malfunction in the dynamic radar cruise
control system (if equipped) or the cruise control system
Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the
system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
(If equipped)
764
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Indicates a malfunction in the LDA (Lane Departure
Alert) system
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the Automatic High Beam
system
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power
Steering) system
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
765
Details
Indicates a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor with
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the smart access system
with push-button start
(Flashes)
7
When trouble arises
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
766
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected
problem, check that the warning message goes off.
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that one or
more of the doors is not
fully closed
The system also indicates which doors are
not fully closed.
If the vehicle reaches a Make sure that all the
speed of 3 mph (5 doors are closed.
km/h),
flashes
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
door(s) are not yet
fully closed.
Indicates that the hood is
not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph (5
km/h),
flashes Close the hood.
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
hood is not yet fully
closed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
767
Correction procedure
Indicates that the trunk is
not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph (5
km/h),
flashes Close the trunk.
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
trunk is not yet fully
closed.
(Flashes)
Indicates that the windows are not fully closed
(with the “START STOP
Close all the windows.
ENGINE” <“POWER”>
switch off, and the driver’s
door open)
(Flashes)
Indicates that the moon
roof is not fully closed
(with the “START STOP
Close the moon roof.
ENGINE” <“POWER”>
switch off, and the driver’s
door open)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
When trouble arises
(Flashes)
Indicates that the windows and the moon roof
are not fully closed (with
Close all the windows
the
“START
STOP
and the moon roof.
ENGINE” <“POWER”>
switch off, and the driver’s
door open)
768
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Indicates that the parking
brake is still engaged
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph
Correction procedure
Release
(5 km/h),
brake.
flashes and a buzzer
sounds to indicate that
the parking brake is
still engaged.
(Flashes)
the
parking
When stopping the vehicle for a long period of
Indicates that the hybrid
time, shift the shift lever to
battery (traction battery)
P. The battery cannot be
is low
charged with the shift
lever in N.
(Hybrid vehicles)
(Flashes)
(Hybrid vehicles)
(Flashes)
Indicates that the hybrid
battery (traction battery)
power has dropped
Restart the hybrid system
because a long period of
when starting the vehicle.
time has elapsed after
shifting the shift lever to
N
Indicates that the accelRelease the accelerator
erator pedal is depressed
pedal and shift the shift
while the shift position is
lever to D or R.
in N
(Hybrid vehicles)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
(Hybrid vehicles)
(Hybrid vehicles)
Details
769
Correction procedure
Indicates that the EV
drive mode is not available*
The reason the EV
drive mode is not available (the vehicle is
Use the EV drive mode
idling, battery charge is
when it becomes availlow, speed is higher
able.
than the EV drive
mode operating speed
range,
accelerator
pedal is depressed too
much) may be displayed.
Indicates that engine oil Check the level of engine
level is low
oil, and add if necessary.
(If equipped)
*: For the EV drive mode operating conditions: →P. 211
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
When trouble arises
Indicates that the EV
drive mode has been
automatically canceled*
The reason the EV
drive mode is not available (the battery
Drive the vehicle for a
charge is low, speed is
while.
higher than the EV
drive mode operating
speed range, accelerator pedal is depressed
too much) may be displayed.
770
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that intuitive
parking assist sensor is Clean the sensor.
dirty or covered with ice
(If equipped)
Indicates that the radar
sensor is dirty or covered Clean the sensor.
with ice
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
• Turn off the snow
mode.
Indicates that the radar • If the windshield wipcruise control system is
ers are on, turn them
unable to judge vehicleoff or set them to a
to-vehicle distance
mode other than
AUTO or high speed
wiper operation.
Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle Slow the vehicle by
ahead (in vehicle-to-vehi- applying the brakes.
cle distance mode)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
(Flashes)
Details
771
Correction procedure
Indicates that there is a
high possibility of a frontal
Slow the vehicle by
collision, or that the preapplying the brakes.
collision braking function
is operating
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the LDA
(Lane Departure Alert)
Restart the LDA (Lane
system is suspended
The camera sensor Departure Alert) system
temperature is higher after driving for a while.
than the operation temperature range.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Check around the vehicle and steer the vehicle
back within the lane
markers with safe steering.
7
When trouble arises
Alerts the driver that the
vehicle is out of the lane
markers (while the LDA
[Lane Departure Alert]
system is operating)
The warning buzzer
sounds continuously.
The lane line on the
side the vehicle deviates from flashes.
772
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that the Blind
Spot Monitor sensors or Clean the sensor and its
the surrounding area on surrounding area on the
the bumper is dirty or bumper.
covered with ice
(If equipped)
(Hybrid vehicles)
Indicates that the hybrid
system has overheated
This message may be
displayed when driving Stop and check.
under severe operating (→P. 816)
conditions. (For example, when driving up a
long steep hill.)
Indicates that remaining
fuel is approximately 2.6
Refuel the vehicle.
gal. (9.7 L, 2.1 Imp.gal.) or
less
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
Indicates that the “START
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is
turned off or turned to
Turn the lights off.
ACCESSORY mode and
the driver’s door is
opened while the lights
are turned on
Indicates that the driver’s
door was opened with the
Shift the shift position to P.
shift position in any position other than P
(Hybrid vehicles)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
773
■ Warning message in radar cruise mode (if equipped)
In the following cases, the warning message may not be displayed even if vehicle-tovehicle distance decreases:
● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the
vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle
● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
● Immediately after cruise control speed is set
● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
■ The LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system (if equipped)
In the following cases, the warning message will not be displayed even if the vehicle
deviates from the lane markers.
● When the vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LDA system
functions
● When the lane markers cannot be recognized
7
When trouble arises
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
774
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
A warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking
the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the
warning message goes off.
Warning message
(If equipped)
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that the AutoTurn the high beam on
matic High Beam switch
and press the Automatic
is pressed while the headHigh Beam switch again.
lights are in low beam.
Indicates that the washer
Add washer fluid.
fluid level is low
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all maintenance according to the
driven distance on the
maintenance schedule*
should be performed
If necessary,
soon.
maintenance.
Comes on approximately 4500 miles
(7200 km) after the
maintenance data has
been reset.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
perform
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
(U.S.A. only)
Details
775
Correction procedure
Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven
distance on the maintenance schedule*.
Perform the necessary
Please
Comes on approxi- maintenance.
reset
the
maintenance
mately 5000 miles
(8000 km) after the data after the maintemaintenance data has nance is performed
(→P. 658)
been reset.
(The indicator will not
work properly unless the
maintenance data has
been reset.)
Check the tire inflation
Indicates that the tire
pressure, and adjust to
inflation pressure is low
the appropriate level.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
When trouble arises
Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and turn the
“START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch off
then on again.
Indicates a malfunction in
If the tire pressure
the tire pressure warning
warning
indicator
system
flashes for 1 minute
then illuminates, there
is a malfunction in the
system. Have the vehicle inspected at your
Lexus dealer.
776
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
Drive for a short while
and check if the display
updates.
If the radio wave conditions improve, the display may return to
normal. If the tire pressure is still not displayed after driving for
several minutes, stop
Indicates that the tire
the vehicle in a safe
position information canplace, turn the “START
not be recognized
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch off
then on again, and start
driving.
If the tire pressure is still
not displayed even
after repeating this several times, have the
vehicle inspected at
your Lexus dealer.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the pre-collision system is not cur- • Check the grille cover
rently functional because
and the sensor and
the grille cover or the
clean them if they are
sensor is dirty
dirty.
This message also • In case of overheating,
appears when the prethe system will become
functional once the syscollision system is not
functional due to overtem cools down.
heating.
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
777
Have the malfunction repaired immediately.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning message and light go off.
Interior
buzzer
Once
Exterior
buzzer
⎯
(Flashes)
Once
Details
Correction
procedure
The electronic key
is not detected
when an attempt is
made to start the
engine .
Start
the
engine with
the
electronic key
present.
The electronic key
was carried outside the vehicle and
a door other than
the driver’s door
was opened and
closed while the
“START
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch
was in a mode
other than off.
Bring the
electronic
key back
into
the
vehicle.
The driver’s door
was opened and
closed while the
electronic key was
not in the vehicle,
the shift lever was in
P and the “START
STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch
was not turned off.
Turn
the
“START
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”
> switch off
or bring the
electronic
key back
into
the
vehicle.
Warning message
3
times
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
(Flashes)
7
778
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Once
Exterior
buzzer
Details
Correction
procedure
Turn
the
“START
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”>
switch off
and lock the
doors again.
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to exit the
vehicle with the
electronic key and
lock the doors without first turning the
“START
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch
off when the shift
lever was in P.
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to drive when
the regular key was
not inside the vehicle.
Confirm
that
the
electronic
key is inside
the vehicle.
Warning message
Continuous
(Displayed alternately)
9
times
Continuous
⎯
⎯
(Flashes)
The driver’s door
was opened when
the shift lever was
Shift
the
not in P and the
shift lever to
“START
STOP
P.
ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch
was not turned off.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message
ConContinuous tinuous
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
⎯
Continuous
(Flashes)
Continuous
(Flashes)
Correction
procedure
The driver’s door
was opened and • Shift the
closed while the
shift lever
electronic key was
to P.
not in the vehicle, • Bring the
the shift lever was
elecnot in P and the
tronic key
“START
STOP
back into
ENGINE”
the vehi<“POWER”> switch
cle.
was not turned off.
An attempt was
made to lock the
doors using the
smart access system with push-button start while the
electronic key was
still inside the vehicle.
An attempt was
made to lock either
front door by opening a door and putting the inside lock
button into the lock
position, then closing the door with
the electronic key
still inside the vehicle.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Retrieve the
electronic
key from the
vehicle and
lock
the
doors again.
7
Retrieve the
electronic
key from the
vehicle and
lock
the
doors again.
When trouble arises
Once
Details
779
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
w Gasoline vehicles
(Flashes)
Once
⎯
Details
Correction
procedure
• When the doors
were unlocked
with the mechanical key and then
the
“START
STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”>
switch
was
pressed,
the
electronic key
could not be
detected in the
vehicle.
• The electronic
key could not be
detected in the
vehicle even after
the
“START
STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”>
switch
was
pressed two consecutive times.
Touch the
electronic
key to the
“START
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”>
switch while
depressing
the brake
pedal.
An attempt was
made to start the
engine with the shift
lever in an incorrect
position.
Shift
the
shift lever to
P and start
the engine
.
Warning message
w Hybrid vehicles
(Flashes)
w Gasoline vehicles
(Flashes)
Once
⎯
w Hybrid vehicles
(Flashes)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
⎯
Once
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message
Details
Correction
procedure
⎯
Next time
when starting
the
engine
,
increase the
Power was turned engine
off due to the auto- speed
matic power off slightly and
maintain
function.
that level for
approximately
5
minutes to
recharge
the 12-volt
battery.
⎯
Replace the
The electronic key electronic
has a low battery.
key battery.
(→P. 710)
7
When trouble arises
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
w Gasoline vehicles
(Flashes)
Once
⎯
w Hybrid vehicles
(Flashes)
Once
Details
Correction
procedure
The driver’s door
was opened and
closed with the
“START
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch
turned off and then
the “START STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch
was put in ACCESSORY mode twice
without the engine
being started.
Press
the
“START
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”>
switch while
depressing
the brake
pedal.
During an engine
starting procedure
in the event that the
electronic key was
not
functioning
properly
(→P.
803), the “START
STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch
was touched with
the electronic key.
Press
the
“START
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”>
switch within
10 seconds
of the buzzer
sounding.
The steering lock
could
not
be
released within 3
seconds of the
“START
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch
being pressed.
Press
the
“START
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”>
switch while
depressing
the brake
pedal and
moving the
steering
wheel left
and right.
Warning message
⎯
(Flashes)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Once
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message
⎯
(Flashes)
Once
⎯
(Flashes)
Details
Correction
procedure
The “START STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch Shift
the
has been turned off shift lever to
with the shift lever P.
in a position other
than P or N.
After the “START
STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch
has been turned off
with the shift lever
in a position other
than P, the shift
lever has been
shifted to P.
Turn
the
“START
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”>
switch off.
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio
sound.
7
When trouble arises
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare tire provided.
For details about tires: →P. 694
CAUTION
■ If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair, which could result in an accident.
Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Stop the engine .
● Turn on the emergency flashers. (→P. 740)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
w
Vehicles with a compact spare tire
1
Jack handle
4
Wheel nut wrench
2
Towing eyelet
5
Spare tire
3
Jack
6
Screwdriver
7
When trouble arises
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
w
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire
1
Towing eyelet
4
Jack handle
2
Wheel nut wrench
5
Screwdriver
3
Jack
6
Spare tire
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack
Observe the following precautions.
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack,
leading to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.
● Put the jack properly in its jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the
jack.
● Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is
supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
● When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If
there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.
7
When trouble arises
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
1
Open the luggage mat. (→P. 612)
2
Remove the auxiliary boxes.
w
Vehicles with a compact spare
tire
3
Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.
w
Vehicles with a compact spare
tire
w
w
Vehicles with a full-size spare
tire
Vehicles with a full-size spare
tire
CAUTION
■ When storing the spare tire
Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the
body of the vehicle.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
1
Chock the tires.
Flat tire
Front
Rear
2
Wheel chock positions
Left-hand side
Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side
Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Left-hand side
In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side
In front of the front left-hand side tire
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
7
Turn the tire jack portion A by
hand until the notch of the jack is
in contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are located
under the rocker panel. They indicate
the jack point positions.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
3
790
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
5
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the ground,
place the tire so that the wheel design
faces up to avoid scratching the wheel
surface.
6
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire:
Remove the wheel ornament by
pushing from the reverse side.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
791
CAUTION
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury:
• Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in handling
the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.
• Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after
the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the
brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other
body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading
to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m,
10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel
while the vehicle is moving.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed
for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt
holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
7
When trouble arises
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
792
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the spare tire
1
Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may
loosen while the vehicle is in motion,
causing the tire to come off.
2
Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
When replacing an aluminum
wheel with an aluminum wheel,
turn the wheel nuts until the
washers come into contact with
the disc wheel.
Disc wheel
Washer
When replacing an aluminum
wheel with a steel wheel, tighten
the wheel nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
3
Lower the vehicle.
4
Firmly tighten each wheel nut two
or three times in the order shown
in the illustration.
793
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
5
Vehicles with a full-size spare tire:
Reinstall the wheel ornament.
7
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
6
794
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ The compact spare tire
● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” on
the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.
(→P. 835)
■ When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire
pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire
pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.
■ When the compact spare tire is equipped
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to
when driving with standard tires.
■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with a com-
pact spare tire)
Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle. Perform the
following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:
1
Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
2
Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehicle.
3
Fit tire chains to the front tires.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
795
CAUTION
■ When using the compact spare tire
● Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use
with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.
● Do not use more than one compact spare tires simultaneously.
● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting opera-
tions that cause sudden engine braking.
■ When the compact spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may
not operate correctly:
•
•
•
•
•
ABS & Brake assist
VSC
TRAC
Cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control
(if equipped)
• PCS (if equipped)
• EPS
• LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
(if equipped)
• Rear view monitor system
(if equipped)
• Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
• Navigation system (if equipped)
■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire
is installed on the vehicle.
■ After using the tools and jack
Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden
braking.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
When trouble arises
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to
observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
796
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
797
If the engine will not start (gasoline vehicles)
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are
being followed (→P. 197), consider each of the following points:
The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates
normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.
(→P. 197)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(→P. 80)
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.
7
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
The starter motor does not turn over
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical
problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, an interim measure is available to start the engine. (→P. 798)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P. 805)
798
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P. 805)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.
Emergency start function
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the engine if the “START STOP ENGINE” switch
is functioning normally:
1
Set the parking brake.
2
Shift the shift lever to P.
3
Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” switch to ACCESSORY mode.
4
Press and hold the “START STOP ENGINE” switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be
malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
799
If the hybrid system will not start (hybrid vehicles)
Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure:
The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting
procedure is being followed. (→P. 204)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (→P. 803)
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (→P. 82)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
● The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem
such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However,
depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available
to start the hybrid system. (→P. 800)
The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not
sound or sounds at a low volume.
● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P. 809)
● The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does
not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (→P. 809)
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.
Emergency start function
When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as
an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the “POWER” switch is
functioning normally:
1
Set the parking brake.
2
Shift the shift lever to P.
3
Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY mode.
4
Press and hold the “POWER” switch for about 15 seconds while
depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal,
there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent
accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure
that the shift lever can be shifted:
1
Set the parking brake.
2
Turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to ACCESSORY mode.
3
Depress the brake pedal.
4
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
7
5
The shift lever can be shifted while the
button is pressed.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
Press the shift lock override button.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (→P. 130) or the electronic key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and
wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and
trunk can be opened and the engine can be started by
following the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key
linked functions
■
Doors
Use the mechanical key
(→P. 120) in order to perform
the following operations:
1
Locks all the doors
2
Closes the windows and moon
roof (turn and hold)*
3
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver’s door. Turning the key
once again within 5 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
4
Opens the windows and moon
roof (turn and hold)*
*: This setting must be customized at
your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■
Trunk
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open.
Starting the engine
1
Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.
2
Touch the Lexus emblem side of
the electronic key to the “START
STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”>
switch.
The “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch will turn to IGNITION ON mode.
When the smart access system with
push-button start is deactivated in
customization setting, the “START
STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch
will turn to ACCESSORY mode.
7
Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that
multi-information display.
is shown on the
4
Press the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact
your Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
3
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch
as you normally do when stopping the engine .
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (→P. 710)
■ Changing “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch
in step 3 above.
The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the
switch is pressed. (→P. 198, 205)
■ When the electronic key does not work properly
● Make sure that the smart access system with push-button start has not been deac-
tivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features →P. 852)
● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (→P. 129)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the 12-volt
battery is discharged.
You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a
12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps
below.
1
Open the hood (→P. 669)
2
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
7
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery
terminal on your vehicle.
2
Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
3
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal
on the second vehicle.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
1
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid,
stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the 12-volt battery
and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.
3
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle.
4
Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the “START STOP
ENGINE” switch off.
5
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the engine of
your vehicle by turning the “START STOP ENGINE” switch to IGNITION ON mode.
6
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the
exact reverse order from which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
■ Starting the engine when the 12-volt battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■ Charging the 12-volt battery
The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges
automatically during driving.)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery
● Make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the 12-volt
battery to prevent the doors from being locked with the key left inside the vehicle
when the alarm operates.
● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart access
system with push-button start when the 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
● The engine may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has recharged
but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
● The “START STOP ENGINE” switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the
12-volt battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before
the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-volt battery, turn
the “START STOP ENGINE” switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the “START STOP ENGINE” switch was in before the
12-volt battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12-volt
battery.
CAUTION
■ Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is
not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to
● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with
each other.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12-
volt battery.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as
brackets or unpainted metal.
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ 12-volt battery precautions
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery:
● When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the
vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi-
ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other
battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in
the cooling fans or engine drive belt.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the 12-volt battery is discharged (hybrid vehicles)
The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the
12-volt battery is discharged.
You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a
12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps
below.
1
Open the trunk lid and remove the 12-volt battery cover. (→P. 690)
In the event that the trunk opener cannot be used, use the mechanical key to open
the trunk. (→P. 802)
2
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
7
When trouble arises
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
1
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery
terminal on your vehicle.
2
Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
3
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal
on the second vehicle.
4
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid,
stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the 12-volt battery
and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.
3
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle.
4
Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the “POWER”
switch off.
5
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid
system of your vehicle by turning the “POWER” switch to ON mode.
6
Make sure the “READY” indicator comes on. If the indicator does not
come on, contact your Lexus dealer.
7
Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the
exact reverse order from which they were connected.
Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged
The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■ Charging the 12-volt battery
The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges
automatically while the hybrid system is operating.)
■ When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery
● Make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the 12-volt
battery to prevent the doors from being locked with the key left inside the vehicle
when the alarm operates.
● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart access
system with push-button start when the 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
● The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has
recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
● The “POWER” switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
When trouble arises
is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-volt battery, turn the “POWER”
switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the “POWER” switch was in before the 12-volt battery
discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12-volt battery.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is
not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to
come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as
brackets or unpainted metal.
● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with
each other.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the bat-
tery.
■ 12-volt battery precautions
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery:
● When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any 12-volt battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.
● In the event that 12-volt battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the 12-volt battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.
■ After recharging the 12-volt battery
Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery
to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers.
■ When replacing the 12-volt battery
→P. 693
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats (gasoline vehicles)
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (→P. 93)
enters the red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For
example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)
● Steam comes out from under the hood.
Follow the correction procedure as described below.
1
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system,
and then stop the engine.
2
If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
3
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, inspect the
hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.
4
The coolant level is satisfactory if
it is between the “FULL” and
“LOW” line on the reservoir.
1
Reservoir cap
2
“FULL”
3
“LOW”
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
When trouble arises
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
5
Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if
coolant is unavailable.
6
Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that
the radiator cooling fan operates and to check for coolant leaks from
the radiator or hoses.
The fan operates when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after
a cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating by checking the fan sound and air
flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off
repeatedly.
(The fan may not operate in freezing temperatures.)
7
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and contact your Lexus dealer.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
● Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fan
and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting
in serious injury.
● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool
coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).
● Do not use commercially available coolant additives.
7
When trouble arises
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats (hybrid vehicles)
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (→P. 93)
enters the red zone or a loss of hybrid system power is experienced.
(For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)
● “Hybrid System Overheat” (→P. 772) is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display.
● Steam comes out from under the hood.
Correction procedures
■
If the needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red
zone
1
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the hybrid system.
2
If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
3
After the hybrid system has
cooled down sufficiently,
inspect the hoses and cooling
system for leaks.
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4
5
The coolant level is satisfactory
if it is between the “FULL” and
“LOW” line on the reservoir.
1
Reservoir cap
2
“FULL”
3
“LOW”
Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.
6
Start the hybrid system and turn the air conditioning system on to
check that the radiator cooling fan operates and to check for coolant
leaks from the radiator or hoses.
The fan operates when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately
after a cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating by checking the fan sound
and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on
and off repeatedly.
(The fan may not operate in freezing temperatures.)
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately and contact your Lexus dealer.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
7
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■
If “Hybrid System Overheat” is shown on the multi-information display
1
Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
2
Stop the hybrid system and carefully lift the hood.
3
After the hybrid system has
cooled down, inspect the
hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.
4
The coolant level is satisfactory
if it is between the “FULL” and
“LOW” line on the reservoir.
5
1
Reservoir cap
2
“FULL”
3
“LOW”
Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.
6
Start the hybrid system and check for the multi-information display.
If the message does not disappear:
Stop the hybrid system and contact your Lexus dealer.
If the message is not displayed:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
● Check that the indicator on the “POWER” switch and the “READY” indicator are
off.
● On hybrid vehicles, the gasoline engine may automatically start, or the cooling
fan may suddenly operate even if the gasoline engine stops. Do not touch or
approach rotating parts such as the fan, which may lead to fingers or clothing
(especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) getting caught, resulting in serious injury.
● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the hybrid system and radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine/power control unit coolant
Add coolant slowly after the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently. Adding
cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid
system.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
● Do not use commercially available coolant additives.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
When trouble arises
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
1
Stop the engine . Set the parking brake and shift the
shift lever to P.
2
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the front wheels.
3
Place wood, stones or some other material under the front wheels to
help provide traction.
4
Restart the engine .
5
Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while
exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.
■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle
Press
to turn off TRAC.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may
also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the front wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than
necessary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehi-
cle may require towing to be freed.
7
When trouble arises
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
Overall length
192.7 in. (4895mm)
Overall width
71.7 in. (1820mm)
Overall height*
57.1 in. (1450mm)
Wheelbase
111.0 in. (2820mm)
Tread
Front
62.6 in. (1590mm)
Rear
62.0 in. (1575mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
905 lb. (410 kg)
*: Unladen vehicle
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle identification
■
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.
This number is also on the Certification Label.
This number is also stamped
under the right-hand front seat.
8
Vehicle specifications
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
■
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
w
2GR-FE engine
w
2AR-FXE engine
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Engine
w
Gasoline vehicles
Model
3.5L 6-cylinder (2GR-FE)
Type
6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
3.70 × 3.27 in. (94.0 × 83.0 mm)
Displacement
210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)
Valve clearance
(engine cold)
Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
w
Hybrid vehicles
Model
2.5L 4-cylinder (2AR-FXE)
Type
4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
3.54 × 3.86 in. (90.0 × 98.0 mm)
Displacement
152.2 cu.in. (2494 cm3)
Valve clearance
(engine cold)
Automatic adjustment
8
Vehicle specifications
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Fuel
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
Octane Rating
87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
17.0 gal. (64.35 L, 14.2 Imp.gal.)
Electric motor (Traction motor) (hybrid vehicles)
Type
Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Maximum output
105 kW
Maximum torque
199 ft•lbf (270 N•m, 27.5 kgf•m)
Hybrid battery (Traction battery) (hybrid vehicles)
Type
Nickel-metal hydride battery
Voltage
7.2 V/module
Capacity
6.5 Ah (3HR)
Quantity
34 modules
Overall voltage
244.8 V
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Lubrication system
w
Gasoline vehicles
Oil capacity
With filter
(Drain and refill ⎯
Without filter
reference*1)
6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.4 Imp.qt.)
6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp.qt.)
*1: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the
engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check
the oil level on the dipstick.
w
Hybrid vehicles
Oil capacity
With filter
(Drain and refill ⎯
Without filter
reference*2)
4.6 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp.qt.)
4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp.qt.)
*2: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the
engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5
minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.
8
Vehicle specifications
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
■
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice
for good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
Outside temperature
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one
with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at
high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant
Standardization
and
Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil
containers to help you select the
oil you should use.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Cooling system
w
Gasoline vehicles
Capacity
9.7 qt. (9.2 L, 8.1 Imp.qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based nonsilicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
w
Hybrid vehicles
Capacity
Gasoline
engine
7.6 qt. (7.2 L, 6.3 Imp.qt.)
Power
control unit
3.4 qt. (3.2 L, 2.8 Imp.qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based nonsilicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
8
Vehicle specifications
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Ignition system
Spark plug
w Gasoline vehicles
Make
DENSO FK20HR11
w Hybrid vehicles
DENSO FK16HR-A8
w Gasoline vehicles
Gap
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
w Hybrid vehicles
0.031 in. (0.8 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
Electrical system
w
Gasoline vehicles
12-volt battery
Specific gravity reading
at 68 °F (20 °C):
1.250 ⎯ 1.290 Fully charged
1.160 ⎯ 1.200 Half charged
1.060 ⎯ 1.100 Discharged
Charging rates
Quick charge
Slow charge
w
15 A max.
5 A max.
Hybrid vehicles
12-volt battery
Open voltage at 68 °F 12.6 ⎯ 12.8 V Fully charged
(20 °C):
12.2 ⎯ 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 ⎯ 12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the hybrid system and all lights are turned off.)
Charging rates
5 A max.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Automatic transaxle (gasoline vehicles)
Fluid capacity*
6.9 qt. (6.5 L, 5.7 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■ Transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration,
and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
Hybrid transaxle (hybrid vehicles)
Fluid capacity*
3.9 qt. (3.7 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■ Transmission fluid type
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8
Vehicle specifications
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration,
and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
8-1. Specifications
Brakes
w Gasoline vehicles
3.58 in. (91 mm) Min.
w Hybrid vehicles
Pedal clearance*1
3.62 in. (92 mm) Min.
Pedal free play
0.04 — 0.24 in. (1.0 — 6.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit
Front
0.06 in. (1.5 mm)
Rear
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit
Parking brake pedal travel *
2
Fluid type
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
7 ⎯ 10 clicks
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112.4 lbf (500 N,
51.0 kgf) while the engine is running .
*2:
Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N,
30.6 kgf).
Steering
Free play
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Tires and wheels
w
Type A
Tire size
P215/55R17 93V
Front tire
Tire inflation pressure
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire
Rear tire
inflation pressure)
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size
17 × 7J
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
w
Type B
Tire size
P225/45R18 91V
Front tire
Tire inflation pressure
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire
Rear tire
inflation pressure)
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size
18 × 7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
w
Compact spare tire (if equipped)
Tire size
T155/70D17 110M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
inflation pressure)
17 × 4T
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle specifications
Wheel size
8
8-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
9005
⎯
⎯
60
55
35
A
B
C
⎯
19
D
Front turn signal lights
7444NA
28/8
E
Front side marker lights
W5W
5
F
WY21W
21
E
Back-up lights
W16W
16
F
Outer foot lights
W5W
5
F
Door courtesy lights
⎯
5
F
Vanity lights
⎯
5
F
Interior light
⎯
8
F
Personal lights
⎯
8
F
Trunk light
⎯
5
F
Headlights
High beam
Low beam (halogen bulbs)
Low beam (discharge bulbs)
Fog lights
Exterior
Rear turn signal lights
Interior
A: HB3 halogen bulbs
B: H11 halogen bulbs
C: D4S discharge bulbs
D: H16 halogen bulbs
E: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
F: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use
of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in
engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which
is expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels.
In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
8
Vehicle specifications
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid
the build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/
or keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration program.
● Lexus strongly recommends the use of Top Tire Detergent Gasoline. For more
information on Top Tire Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the
official website www.toptiregas.com.
■ Recommendation of the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates
such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
● Use only gasoline containing a maximum of
10% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that
could contain more than 10% ethanol,
including from any pump labeled E15, E30,
E50, E85 (which are only some examples
of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol).
DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol.
(15% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than
87.
● Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing
MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or
driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be dam-
aged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level
previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle specifications
■ When refueling with gasohol
8
8-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
w
Full-size tire
w
Compact spare tire
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
1
Tire size
(→P. 843)
2
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(→P. 842)
3
Location of treadwear indicators
(→P. 694)
4
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form
the plies in a tire.
5
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a biasply tire.
6
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type
tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
7
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
(→P. 847)
8
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure
(→P. 847)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
9
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
10
Summer tires or all season tires
(→P. 698)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer
tire.
11
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle specifications
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.
8
8-1. Specifications
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
1
DOT symbol*
2
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3
Tire manufacturer’s identification
mark
4
Tire size code
5
Manufacturer’s optional tire type
code (3 or 4 letters)
6
Manufacturing week
7
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire
conforms to applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Tire size
■
Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
■
1
Tire use (P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
2
Section width (millimeters)
3
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
4
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
5
Wheel diameter (inches)
6
Load index
(2 digits or 3 digits)
7
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
Tire dimensions
1
Section width
2
Tire height
3
Wheel diameter
8
Vehicle specifications
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Tire section names
1
Bead
2
Sidewall
3
Shoulder
4
Tread
5
Belt
6
Inner liner
7
Reinforcing rubber
8
Carcass
9
Rim lines
10
Bead wires
11
Chafer
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this
information.
■
DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
■
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight
ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8
Vehicle specifications
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
8-1. Specifications
■
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated
and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
Meaning
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
Cold tire inflation presthree hours or more, or has not been driven more
sure
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pres- The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
sure
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended
pressure
inflation Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
Maximum loaded vehicle
(b) Accessory weight
weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
Production options weight
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8
Vehicle specifications
Normal occupant weight
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by
style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
(Total load capacity)
kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
Vehicle maximum load on
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
the tire
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
Vehicle normal load on
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (disthe tire
tributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components in
the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord
The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit
on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses
the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Groove
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
Intended outboard sidedeeper than the same molding on the other sidewall
wall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must always
face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure
8
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire
Vehicle specifications
Maximum
permissible The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
inflation pressure
may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to
labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted
on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces,
and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
) on
at least one sidewall
Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around a
tire
Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread
indicators
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
*: Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various
designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15
5
2 in front, 1 in second seat,
1 in third seat, 1 in fourth
seat
16 through 20
7
2 in front, 2 in second seat,
2 in third seat, 1 in fourth
seat
8
Vehicle specifications
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-2. Customization
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. These preferences can be changed by
using the “DISP” button, by using the Remote Touch, Lexus Display
Audio system screen, or at your Lexus dealer.
Customizing vehicle features
■
Changing by using the Remote Touch (vehicles with a navigation system)
Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
■
Changing by using the Lexus Display Audio system screen
→P. 344
■
Changing by using the “DISP” button
→P. 103
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-2. Customization
Customizable features
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
1
Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio system: Settings that can be
changed using the Lexus Display Audio system
2
Vehicles with a Lexus Display Audio system: Settings that can be
changed using the “DISP” button
3
Vehicles with a navigation system: Settings that can be changed using
the screen of the navigation system
4
Vehicles with a navigation system: Settings that can be changed using
the “DISP” button
5
Vehicles without a Lexus Display Audio system and navigation system:
Settings that can be changed using the “DISP” button
6
Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
8
Vehicle specifications
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-2. Customization
■
Multi-information display(→P. 98)
Function
“Language”*
Default
setting
Customized setting
“English”
(English)
(French)
1
2
3
4
5
6
— O — O O —
(Spanish)
“Units”*
“miles
(MPG)”
“km (km/L)”
“km (L/
100km)”
— O — O O —
“Off”/”Off”
“ECO lamp”
(gasoline vehicles)
ECO lamp/Eco Driving
Indicator Light
“On (Selflighting)”/
”Off”
“On
(Always)”/
“Off”
“On
(Always)”/
“On”
— O — O O —
“Off”/”On”
“ECO lamp”
(hybrid vehicles)
“Drive monitor”
“Tachometer Settings”
(hybrid vehicles)
“On (Selflighting)”
“Outside”
“On (Selflighting)”
“Off”
“On
(Always)”
“Fuel consumption”
“Cruising
range”
— O — O O —
— O — O O —
“HV Meter
(Always)”
“Tachometer
(Always)”
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
— O — O O —
8-2. Customization
Default
setting
Customized setting
“Standard”
“Bright”
— O — O O —
“SPORT lamp”
“On”
“Off”
— O — O O —
“EV driving Indicator”
(hybrid vehicles)
“On”
“Off”
— O — O O —
Function
“Lamp brightness”
1
2
3
4
5
6
*: The default setting varies according to countries.
■
Door lock (→P. 139, 802)
Function
Default
setting
Customized setting
1
On
“Unlock on Second Key
(Driver’s
Off (All
Turn”
door
(Allows all doors to be unlocked in
doors
—
unlocked by turning the one step, all unlocked in
mechanical key twice in
doors
one step)
the driver’ door)
unlocked in
two steps)
2
3
4
— O —
5
6
— O
“Auto Lock by Speed”
(All doors are automatically locked when vehicle
speed is approximately 12
mph [20 km/h] or higher)
Off
On
O — O — O O
“Auto Lock by Shift from P”
(All doors are automatically locked when shifting
the shift lever to position
other than P)
On
Off
O — O — O O
“Auto Unlock by Shift to P”
(All doors are automatically unlocked when shifting the shift lever to P)
On
Off
O — O — O O
“Auto Unlock by Driver
Door”
(All doors are automatically unlocked when
driver’s door is opened)
Off
On
O — O — O O
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle specifications
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
8-2. Customization
■
Smart access system with push-button start (→P. 123) and wireless
remote control (→P. 136)
Function
Default
setting
“Lock/Unlock FeedbackTone”
(Adjust the volume of
buzzer sounds)
5
“Lock/Unlock FeedbackLights”
(Enable/disable the operation of the emergency
flashers when the vehicle is
locked or unlocked)
On
Customized setting
1
2
3
4
5
6
Off
1 to 7
Off
O — O — O O
O — O — O O
“Auto Relock Timer”
Off
(Adjust the time elapsed
30 seconds
before the automatic door
60 seconds
O — O — O O
lock function is activated if
120
a door is not opened after
seconds
being unlocked)
Operation buzzer (When
the vehicle is locked or
unlocked)
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
Open door reminder
buzzer (When locking the
vehicle)
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-2. Customization
■
Smart access system with push-button start (→P. 123)
Function
Default
setting
Customized setting
1
2
“Access System with Elec.
Key”
(Smart access system with
push-button start can be
disabled)
On
Off
—
— O — O O
“Select Doors to Unlock”
(The doors that are
unlocked using the smart
access system with pushbutton start can be
selected)
Driver’s
door
All the
doors
Number of consecutive
door lock operations
2 times
■
3
4
5
6
O — O — O O
As many as
—
desired
—
—
—
— O
Default
setting
Customized setting
1
2
3
4
5
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
Wireless remote control (→P. 136)
Function
Wireless remote control
“Remote 2-Press Unlock”
(Allows all doors to be
unlocked by pressing
on the electronic
key twice)
6
One short
press
Trunk unlocking operation
Press and Push twice
hold (short) Press and
hold (long)
—
—
—
—
— O
—
—
—
—
— O
Off
Alarm (panic mode)
On
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Off
8
Vehicle specifications
On
(Driver’s
Off (All
door
doors
unlocked in
O — O — O O
one step, all unlocked in
doors
one step)
unlocked in
two steps)
8-2. Customization
■
Driving position memory* (→P. 153)
Function
Default
setting
Customized setting
“Driver’s Seat Easy Exit”
(Driver’s seat movement
when exiting the vehicle)
Standard
Selecting the door linking
driving position memory
with door unlock operation
Driver’s
door
All doors
—
—
—
—
— O
Automatic adjustment of
the mirror angle
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
1
2
3
4
5
6
Off
Partial
O — O — O O
*: If equipped
■
Power windows (→P. 170) and moon roof (→P. 173)
Default
setting
Customized setting
1
2
3
4
5
Off
On
—
—
—
—
— O
Wireless remote control
linked operation (DOWN)
Off
On
—
—
—
—
— O
Buzzer sounds if operated
using wireless remote control
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
Function
Mechanical
operation
key
linked
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
8-2. Customization
■
Power windows (→P. 170)
Default
setting
Customized setting
1
2
3
4
5
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
Function
Default
setting
Customized setting
1
2
3
4
5
Linked operation of components when door key is
used
Slide only
Tilt only
—
—
—
—
— O
Linked operation of components when wireless
remote control is used
Slide only
Tilt only
—
—
—
—
— O
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
Default
setting
Customized setting
1
2
3
4
5
—
— O —
Function
One-touch closing
■
Moon roof (→P. 173)
Automatic operation
■
6
6
Turn signal lever (→P. 221)
Function
“Lane Change Signal
Flashes”
(Time of flashing of the lane
change signal flashers)
6
OFF
3
5
— O
7
8
Vehicle specifications
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-2. Customization
■
Automatic light control system (→P. 224)
Function
Default
setting
Customized setting
“Headlamps-On Sensitivity”
(Adjust the sensitivity of the
ambient light sensor)
Standard
-2 to 2
1
2
3
4
O — O —
5
6
— O
“Headlamps
Auto-Off
Off
Timer”
(Adjust the time
30 seconds 60 seconds O — O — O O
elapsed before the headlights automatically turn
90 seconds
off)
Welcome light illumination
control
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
Function
Default
setting
Customized setting
1
2
3
4
5
“Daytime Running Lights”
(Daytime running lights
can be disabled)*
On
Off
■
Lights (→P. 224)
*: Except for Canada
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
O — O — O O
8-2. Customization
■
Intuitive parking assist* (→P. 271)
Function
Default
setting
Customized setting
“Distance (Front)”
(Detection distance of the
front center sensor)
Far
Near
O — O —
— O
“Distance (Rear)”
(Detection distance of the
rear center sensor)
Far
Near
O — O —
— O
“Alert Volume”
(Alert volume can be
adjusted)
3
1 to 5
O — O —
— O
“Display”
(when intuitive parking
assist is operating)
All sensors
displayed
Display off
O — O —
— O
1
2
3
4
5
6
*: If equipped
■
Automatic air conditioning system (→P. 347, 359)
Function
Default
setting
Customized setting
1
2
“Efficient
Ventilation
Mode”
(Switching between outside air and recirculated air
mode linked to “AUTO”
switch operation)
On
Off
—
— O —
“Auto A/C Mode”
(A/C Auto switch operation)
On
Off
O — O —
— O
“Smog Sensor Sensitivity”
(Exhaust gas sensor sensitivity)
Standard
-3 to 3
O — O —
— O
3
4
5
6
— O
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle specifications
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
8-2. Customization
■
Illumination (→P. 603)
Function
Default
setting
Customized setting
1
2
3
4
5
Interior lights illumination
control
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
“Interior Lights Off Timer”
(Time elapsed before the
interior lights turn off)
6
Off
15 seconds 7.5 seconds O — O — O O
30 seconds
Operation
after
the
“START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is
turned off
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
Operation when the doors
are unlocked
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
Operation when you
approach the vehicle with
the electronic key on your
person
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
Footwell lighting
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
Outer foot lights
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
“Exterior Lights Off Timer”
(Time elapsed before the
outer foot lights turn off)
Off
15 seconds 7.5 seconds O — O — O O
30 seconds
“Ambient illumin. (instrument panel)”
(Enable/disable operation
of the ornament lights on
the instrument panel)*
On
Off
Sensitivity of the ambient
light sensor used for dimming the meter lights etc.
Standard
-2 to +2
—
— O —
— O
Sensitivity of the ambient
light sensor used for
brightening the meter
lights etc.
Standard
-2 to +2
—
— O —
— O
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
— O — O O O
8-2. Customization
Function
Default
setting
Customized setting
1
2
3
4
5
Enable/disable operation
of the outer foot lights
when you approach the
vehicle with the electronic
key on your person
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
Enable/disable operation
of the outer foot lights
when the doors are
unlocked with the power
door lock switch
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
Default
setting
Customized setting
1
2
3
4
5
On
Off
—
—
—
—
— O
0 second
Time elapsed before the
reverse operation feature 0.7 seconds 0.9 seconds —
activates
1.2 seconds
—
—
—
— O
6
*: If equipped
■
Rear sunshade* (→P. 623)
Function
Reverse operation
6
*: If equipped
8
Vehicle specifications
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-2. Customization
■ Vehicle customization
● When the “Auto Lock by Speed” and “Auto Lock by Shift from P” are both on, the
door lock operates as follows.
• When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P, all the doors will be
locked.
• If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the “Auto Lock by Speed” would
not operate.
• If the vehicle is started with any door unlocked, the “Auto Lock by Speed” will
operate.
● When the smart access system with push-button start is off, the “Select Doors to
Unlock” cannot be customized.
● When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the “Auto Relock
Timer” activates, the signals will be generated in accordance with the “Lock/
Unlock Feedback-Tone” and the “Lock/Unlock Feedback-Lights” settings.
■ When customizing using the Remote Touch
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P.
Also, to prevent 12-volt battery discharge, leave the engine running
while customizing the features.
CAUTION
■ During customization
As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a
closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide
(CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
NOTICE
■ During customization
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing features.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-3. Items to initialize
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation
after such cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance
being performed on the vehicle:
Item
Maintenance
only)
data
When to initialize
Reference
(U.S.A. • After the maintenance is performed
P. 658
• When rotating the tires
• When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.
P. 696
Tire pressure warning system
8
Vehicle specifications
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8-3. Items to initialize
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-80025-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov ;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted
from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation adéquate des ceintures de sécurité
● Tirez sur la ceinture épaulière
jusqu’à ce qu’elle recouvre entièrement l’épaule; elle ne doit
cependant pas toucher le cou ni
glisser de l’épaule.
● Placez la ceinture abdominale le
plus bas possible sur les hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier.
Tenez-vous assis bien au fond du
siège, le dos droit.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
9
For owners
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Entretien et soin
■
Ceintures de sécurité
Avec un chiffon ou une éponge, nettoyez à l’aide d’un savon doux et de
l’eau tiède. Vérifiez aussi les ceintures régulièrement pour vous assurer
qu’elles ne présentent pas d’usure excessive, d’effilochage ou de coupures.
ATTENTION
■ Dommages et usure de la ceinture de sécurité
Vérifiez périodiquement le système de ceintures de sécurité. Assurez-vous qu’il
n’y a pas de coupures, d’effilochures ni de pièces desserrées. N’utilisez pas une
ceinture de sécurité endommagée avant qu’elle ne soit remplacée. Les ceintures
de sécurité endommagées ne peuvent pas protéger les occupants contre les blessures graves, voire mortelles.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions
extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in
English.
◆ Coussins gonflables SRS avant
2
Coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur/du passager avant
Peuvent aider à protéger la tête et la poitrine du conducteur et du passager avant contre les impacts avec des composants intérieurs
9
Coussins gonflables SRS de protection des genoux
Peuvent aider à protéger le conducteur et le passager avant
For owners
1
Un coussin gonflable SRS de protection des genoux pour le siège du passager
avant est intégré dans la porte de la boîte à gants.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
◆ Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et en rideau
3
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux avant
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges avant
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux arrière
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges latéraux
arrière
4
Coussins gonflables SRS en rideau
Peuvent aider à protéger principalement la tête des occupants des sièges latéraux
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS
Système de classification de 10 Lampe témoin SRS
l’occupant du siège du passager 11 Coussin gonflable du conducavant (ECU et capteurs)
teur
2 Capteurs de choc latéral (por- 12 Coussins gonflables latéraux
tières avant)
arrière
1
3
Coussins gonflables de protection des genoux
13
Capteurs
(arrière)
4
Coussin gonflable du passager
avant
14
Capteur de position de siège du
conducteur
5
Coussins gonflables en rideau
15
6
Lampes témoins “AIR BAG
ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”
Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité du conducteur
16
Module de capteur de coussin
gonflable
17
Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité du passager
avant
18
Capteurs de choc avant
Dispositifs de tension et limiteurs de force des ceintures de
sécurité
8
Capteurs de choc latéral (avant)
9
Coussins gonflables latéraux avant
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
choc
latéral
9
For owners
7
de
Votre véhicule est doté de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS dont
la conception s’appuie sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules à moteur
américains (FMVSS208). Le module de capteur de coussin gonflable
(ECU) contrôle le déploiement des coussins gonflables en fonction des
informations obtenues des capteurs et d’autres éléments affichés dans le
diagramme des composants du système ci-dessus. Ces informations
comprennent des données relatives à la gravité de l’impact et aux passagers. Au moment du déploiement des coussins gonflables, une réaction
chimique se produit dans les gonfleurs et les coussins gonflables se remplissent rapidement d’un gaz non toxique pour limiter le mouvement des
occupants.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
ATTENTION
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
Observez les précautions suivantes en ce qui concerne les coussins gonflables
SRS.
Les négliger pourrait occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de
sécurité de la manière appropriée.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires qui doivent être
utilisés de concert avec les ceintures de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur se déploie avec une force considérable
et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le
conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. La National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), aux États-Unis, donne les recommandations
suivantes :
La zone à risque d’un coussin gonflable côté conducteur couvre 2 à 3 in. (50 à
75 mm) de la zone de déploiement du coussin gonflable. Pour assurer une
marge de sécurité suffisante, restez à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable.
Cette distance est mesurée depuis le centre du volant jusqu’à votre sternum. Si
vous vous tenez à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs manières :
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
For owners
• Reculez votre siège à la position maximale vous permettant d’atteindre
encore aisément les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Même si les véhicules sont conçus différemment, la plupart des conducteurs
peuvent maintenir une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même si le siège se
trouve complètement vers l’avant, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier
du siège vers l’arrière. Si la visibilité avant est moindre après avoir incliné le
dossier du siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et non glissant pour être assis plus
haut ou relevez le siège si cette option est disponible sur votre véhicule.
• Si votre volant est réglable en hauteur, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela vous permet d’orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que vers la tête et
vers le cou.
Le siège doit être réglé de la manière recommandée ci-dessus par la NHTSA,
tout en gardant le contrôle des pédales et du volant, et la vue sur les commandes
du bloc d’instrumentation.
ATTENTION
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
● Si la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité a été
reliée à la boucle des ceintures de sécurité
des sièges avant sans avoir été attachée à la
plaque de blocage des ceintures de sécurité, les coussins gonflables SRS avant considéreront que le conducteur et le passager
avant portent tout de même leur ceinture
même si elles ne sont pas attachées. Les
coussins gonflables SRS avant peuvent
alors ne pas s’activer correctement lors
d’une collision, ce qui représente un risque
de blessures graves, voire mortelles. Bouclez toujours votre ceinture de sécurité
lorsque vous utilisez la rallonge.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant se déploie également avec une
force considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles,
notamment lorsque le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le
siège du passager avant doit se trouver le plus loin possible du coussin gonflable
et le dossier doit être réglé de manière à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien
droit.
● Le déploiement d’un coussin gonflable risque d’infliger des blessures graves,
voire mortelles, aux bébés et aux enfants mal assis ou mal attachés. Un bébé ou
un enfant trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement
retenu à l’aide d’un dispositif de retenue pour enfants. Lexus recommande vivement de placer et d’attacher correctement tous les bébés et tous les enfants sur
les sièges arrière du véhicule à l’aide de dispositifs de retenue adaptés. Les sièges
arrière sont plus sécuritaires pour les bébés et les enfants que le siège du passager avant. (→P. 55)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
ATTENTION
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et
ne vous appuyez pas sur le tableau de bord.
● Ne laissez pas un enfant se tenir face au
coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant ni
s’asseoir sur les genoux d’un passager
avant.
● Ne laissez pas les occupants du siège avant
tenir des objets sur leurs genoux.
● Ne vous appuyez pas sur la portière ou sur
le longeron du toit, ni sur les montants
avant, latéraux ou arrière.
● Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller face à la
portière sur le siège du passager ni sortir la
tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du véhicule.
9
For owners
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
ATTENTION
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
● Ne fixez et n’appuyez rien sur des zones
telles que le tableau de bord, le tampon de
volant, la partie inférieure du bloc d’instrumentation et la porte de la boîte à gants.
Ces objets peuvent se transformer en projectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables SRS
du conducteur, du passager avant ou de
protection des genoux se déploient.
● Ne fixez rien sur les portières, le pare-brise,
les glaces latérales, les montants avant ou
arrière, le longeron du toit et la poignée
d’appui.
● N’accrochez pas de cintres ni d’objets rigides sur les crochets porte-vêtements.
Tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et vous occasionner des
blessures graves, voire mortelles, en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables
SRS en rideau.
● Si un recouvrement de vinyle est placé sur la zone de déploiement du coussin
SRS de protection des genoux, veillez à le retirer.
● N’utilisez pas d’accessoires recouvrant les parties du siège où les coussins gon-
flables SRS latéraux se déploient, car ceux-ci pourraient nuire au déploiement de
ces coussins. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables latéraux de se déployer correctement, rendre le système inopérant ou provoquer
accidentellement le déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux, occasionnant
des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Ne frappez pas et n’appliquez pas une pression importante à l’emplacement des
composants de coussins gonflables SRS.
Vous risqueriez de provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS.
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
ATTENTION
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
● Ne touchez à aucun composant des coussins gonflables SRS immédiatement
après leur déploiement (gonflage), car ils pourraient être chauds.
● Si vous avez de la difficulté à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonfla-
bles SRS, ouvrez une portière ou une glace pour laisser entrer l’air, ou quittez le
véhicule si vous pouvez le faire en toute sécurité. Dès que possible, nettoyez tous
les résidus afin d’éviter les irritations cutanées.
● Si les emplacements de stockage des coussins gonflables SRS, notamment le
tampon de volant et les garnitures des montants avant et arrière, sont endommagés ou fissurés, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus.
■ Modification et mise au rebut des composants du système de coussins gonflables
SRS
Ne mettez pas le véhicule au rebut et n’effectuez aucune des modifications suivantes sans d’abord consulter votre concessionnaire Lexus. Les coussins gonflables
SRS pourraient fonctionner de manière incorrecte ou se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, ce qui serait susceptible d’occasionner des blessures graves, voire
mortelles.
● Installation, retrait, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS
● Réparations, modifications, retrait ou remplacement du volant, du bloc d’instru-
mentation, du tableau de bord, des sièges ou du capitonnage des sièges, des
montants avant, latéraux ou arrière et des longerons du toit
● Réparations ou modifications de l’aile ou du pare-chocs avant, ou du côté de
l’habitacle
● Installation de lames de déneigement, de treuils, etc. sur la calandre avant (barre
safari, barre kangourou, etc.)
● Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule
● Installation d’appareils électroniques tels qu’un émetteur-récepteur radio ou un
lecteur de CD
9
● Modifications à votre véhicule pour une personne aux capacités physiques rédui-
For owners
tes
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your
Lexus dealer.
The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
● If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys
can be made by your Lexus dealer. (→P. 121)
● If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft
increases significantly. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
(→P. 122)
The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (→P. 710)
● Is the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch in IGNI-
TION ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch off. (→P. 198, 205)
● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person.
● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of
the radio wave. (→P. 130)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
The rear door cannot be opened
● Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when
the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then
unlock the child-protector lock. (→P. 140)
The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside
● The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside
the trunk will operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take
the key out from the trunk. (→P. 146)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you think something is wrong
The engine does not start
● Did you press the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”>
switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal? (→P. 197, 204)
● Is the shift lever in P? (→P. 200, 207)
● Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle?
(→P. 126)
● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (→P. 201, 208)
● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?
In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. (→P. 803)
● Is the 12-volt battery discharged? (→P. 805, 809)
The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the
brake pedal
● Is the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch in IGNI-
TION ON mode?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake
pedal with the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch in
IGNITION ON mode (→P. 801)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is stopped
● It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle.
(→P. 200, 207)
The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches
● Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (→P. 170)
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned off
automatically
● Gasoline vehicles: The auto power off function will be operated
if the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode
(the engine is not running) for a period of time. (→P. 200)
● Hybrid vehicles: The auto power off function will be operated if
the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or ON mode (the hybrid
system is not operating) for a period of time. (→P. 207)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
A warning buzzer sounds during driving
● The seat belt reminder light is flashing
Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts?
(→P. 754)
● The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released? (→P. 222)
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may
also sound. (→P. 751, 761)
An alarm is activated and the horn sounds
● Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the
alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (→P. 84)
To stop the alarm, turn the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”>
switch to IGNITION ON mode or start the engine .
A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle
● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle or the moon roof
opened?
Check the message on the multi-information display.
(→P. 761)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed
● When a warning light turns on or a warning message is dis-
played, refer to P. 751, 761.
When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the
spare tire. (→P. 784)
The vehicle becomes stuck
● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud,
dirt, or snow. (→P. 820)
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
Trunk opener
Fuel filler door
P. 669
P. 144
P. 241
Hood lock release lever
Fuel filler door opener
Tire inflation pressure
P. 669
P. 241
P. 835
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
17.0 gal. (64.35 L, 14.2 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
Cold tire inflation
pressure
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference)
Engine oil type
P. 828
P. 835
With filter
Without filter
2GR-FE
6.4 (6.1, 5.4)
6.0 (5.7, 5.0)
qt. (L, Imp.qt.)
2AR-FXE
4.6 (4.4, 3.9)
4.2 (4.0, 3.5)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
P. 829
ES350 300h_OM_OM33A01U_(U)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Introduction
NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL
This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual
carefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times.
The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of the navigation system differ depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existed and the map data
available at the time of producing this document.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accessories ever developed. The system receives satellite signals from the Global Positioning
System (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using these signals and
other vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locating
a desired destination.
The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present starting
location to your destination. The system is also designed to direct you to a destination
that is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses DENSO maps. The calculated routes may not be the shortest nor the least traffic congested. Your own personal local knowledge or “short cut” may at times be faster than the calculated routes.
The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories to allow you to
easily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. If a destination is not in the database, you can enter the street address or a major intersection close to it and the system will guide you there.
The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio instructions
will announce the distance remaining and the direction to turn in when approaching an
intersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your eyes on the road and are
timed to provide enough time to allow you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down.
Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations that
may affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehicle’s position depends on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstances. For more information on the limitations of the system, refer to pages 139
through 141.
2
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
For safety reasons, this manual indicates items requiring particular attention with the
following marks.
CAUTION
● This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of
injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
● This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment
if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to
avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.
SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,
“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches
and other devices.
3
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
No.
Name
Description
Operational
Outlines
An outline of the operation is explained.
Main Operations
The steps of an operation are explained.
Related Operations
A main operation’s supplementary operations are described.
Information
Useful information for the user is described.
■ INFORMATION FOR HYBRID VEHICLES IS WRITTEN IN BRACKETS
NEXT TO THE INFORMATION FOR GASOLINE VEHICLES
Different writing styles for gasoline and hybrid vehicles
wExample
When the “START STOP ENGINE”*1 <“POWER”> *2 switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON*1 *2 mode, the initial screen will be displayed and the system
will begin operating.
*1: Gasoline vehicle
*2: Hybrid vehicle
4
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SAFETY INSTRUCTION
CAUTION
● For safety, the driver should not operate
To use this system in the safest possible
manner, follow all the safety tips shown below.
This system is intended to assist in reaching
the destination and, if used properly, can do
so. The driver is solely responsible for the
safe operation of your vehicle and the safety
of your passengers.
Do not use any feature of this system to the
extent it becomes a distraction and prevents safe driving. The first priority while
driving should always be the safe operation
of the vehicle. While driving, be sure to observe all traffic regulations.
Prior to the actual use of this system, learn
how to use it and become thoroughly familiar with it. Read the entire Navigation System Owner’s Manual to make sure you
understand the system. Do not allow other
people to use this system until they have
read and understood the instructions in this
manual.
For your safety, some functions may become inoperable when driving. Unavailable
screen buttons are dimmed. Only when the
vehicle is not moving, can the destination
and route selection be done.
the navigation system while he/she is
driving. Insufficient attention to the road
and traffic may cause an accident.
● While driving, be sure to obey the traffic
regulations and maintain awareness of
the road conditions. If a traffic sign on the
road has been changed, route guidance
may not have the updated information
such as the direction of a one way street.
While driving, listen to the voice instructions
as much as possible and glance at the
screen briefly and only when it is safe. However, do not totally rely on voice guidance.
Use it just for reference. If the system cannot determine the current position correctly, there is a possibility of incorrect, late, or
non-voice guidance.
The data in the system may occasionally be
incomplete. Road conditions, including
driving restrictions (no left turns, street closures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore,
before following any instructions from the
system, look to see whether the instruction
can be done safely and legally.
This system cannot warn about such things
as the safety of an area, condition of streets,
and availability of emergency services. If unsure about the safety of an area, do not drive
into it. Under no circumstances is this system a substitute for the driver’s personal
judgement.
Use this system only in locations where it is
legal to do so. Some states/provinces may
have laws prohibiting the use of video and
navigation screens next to the driver.
5
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
1. Remote Touch
10
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
No.
Name
Function
Page
Press to display the “Menu” screen.
22
“ · ” button
Press to change the scale of the map and to scroll
the list screen.
33, 36, 48
“MAP/VOICE”
button
Press to repeat a voice guidance, cancel the
screen scroll, start guidance, and display the current position.
40
Remote Touch
knob
Move in the desired direction to select a function,
letter and map screen button.
Press to enter the selected function, letter or map
screen button.
33
1
QUICK GUIDE
“MENU” button
11
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
2. MAP SCREEN
No.
Name
Function
Page
North-up or
heading-up
symbol
This symbol indicates whether the map orientation is set to north-up or heading-up. Selecting this
symbol changes the map orientation. Both northup and heading-up symbols display the vehicles
direction as a letter (e.g. N for north).
49
Scale indicator
This figure indicates the map scale.
48
Zoom out button
Select to reduce the map scale.
48
“vv Off”
Select to obtain a broader view. Some of the buttons on the screen will not be displayed. They are
displayed again by selecting “On ww”.
130
“Mark”
Select to register the current position or the cursor position as an address book entry.
41
12
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
No.
Name
Function
Page
“Route”
Select to change the route.
97, 99
“Show on Map”
Select to browse information about guidance
route, to set the POI (Point of Interest) icons to be
displayed on the screen, to record the route, etc.
Zoom in button
Select to magnify the map scale.
48
Foot print map
button
Select to display the foot print map and the building information.
48
“Map Mode”
Select to display the “Map Mode” screen.
45
Distance and
time to destination
Select to display the distance, estimated travel
and arrival time to the destination.
96
XM indicator
This mark is displayed when XM information is received.
340, 342
“GPS” mark
(Global Positioning System)
Whenever the vehicle is receiving signals from the
GPS, this mark is displayed.
139
104, 342,
367
1
QUICK GUIDE
*: Press and hold the “PWR·VOL” knob for 3 seconds or more to turn off the screen and restart the
navigation system. Do this when the vehicle-mounted device response is extremely slow.
INFORMATION
● Remove dirt from the display and its surrounding area by lightly wiping with a soft, dry cloth,
such as a cloth used for cleaning glasses with plastic lenses. Scrubbing too hard or using a
hard cloth could scratch the display. Also, the display is treated with a coating, and could be
damaged by coming into contact with benzine or alkaline solution.
● When the screen is viewed through polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pattern may appear on
the screen due to optical characteristics of the screen. If this is disturbing, please operate
the screen without polarized sunglasses.
13
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
3. REGISTERING HOME
1
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
2
Select “Destination” and press the
Remote Touch knob.
3
Select “Go Home” and press the
Remote Touch knob.
4
Select “Yes” and press the Remote
Touch knob.
5
There are 4 different methods to
search your home. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 68.)
6
Select “Enter” and press the
Remote Touch knob.
The “Edit Home” screen is displayed.
If a home address has not been registered, it can be registered by selecting
“Go Home”.
14
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
7
Select “OK” and press the Remote
Touch knob.
1
QUICK GUIDE
Registration of home is complete.
Home can also be registered by selecting
“Navigation” on the “Setup” screen. (See
“REGISTERING HOME” on page 109.)
The name, location, phone number and
icon can be changed. (See “EDITING
HOME” on page 110.)
The registered points can be used on the
“Destination” screen. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH BY HOME” on page
69.)
15
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
4. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS
1
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
2
Select “Destination” and press the
Remote Touch knob.
3
Select one of the preset destination
buttons and press the Remote
Touch knob.
A preset destination can be set to any preset destination button that has not yet
been set.
4
Select “Yes” and press the Remote
Touch knob.
5
There are 4 different methods to
search preset destinations. (See
“DESTINATION SEARCH” on
page 68.)
6
Select “Enter” and press the
Remote Touch knob.
The “Edit Preset Destination” screen is
displayed.
16
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
7
Select “OK” and press the Remote
Touch knob.
1
QUICK GUIDE
Registration of preset destinations is complete.
Preset destinations can also be registered
by selecting “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen. (See “REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS” on page 112.)
The name, location, phone number and
icon can be changed. (See “EDITING
PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 113.)
The registered points can be used on the
“Destination” screen. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH BY PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 69.)
17
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
5. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE
1
wPage 2
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
Select “Go to ” and press the
Remote Touch knob.
4
2
Select “Destination” and press the
Remote Touch knob.
The navigation system performs a search
for the route.
Select “OK” and press the Remote
Touch knob. Then start driving.
5
3
There are 11 different methods to
search destinations. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 68.)
wPage 1
Routes other than the one recommended
can also be selected. (See “STARTING
ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 87.)
Guidance to the destination is displayed
on the screen and can be heard via voice
guidance.
18
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
6. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION
1
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
Select “Go Home” and press the
Remote Touch knob.
3
1
Select “Destination” and press the
Remote Touch knob.
Select “OK” and press the Remote
Touch knob. Then start driving.
4
Routes other than the one recommended
can also be selected. (See “STARTING
ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 87.)
Guidance to the destination is displayed
on the screen and can be heard via voice
guidance.
19
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
QUICK GUIDE
2
“Go Home” can be used if your home address has been registered. (To register
home, see “REGISTERING HOME” on
page 109.)
Your home address is set as the destination. The navigation system performs a
search for the route.
2. FUNCTION INDEX
1. NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX
wMap
Displaying maps
Page
Viewing the map screen
12
Displaying the current position
40
Viewing the current position vicinity map
40
Changing the scale
48
Changing the map orientation
49
Displaying Points of Interest
104
Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination
96
Selecting the map mode
45
Deleting map screen buttons
130
Displaying traffic information
341
Searching destinations
Page
Searching the destination
68
Changing the selected search area
68
Operating the map location of the selected destination
87
wRoute guidance
Before starting route guidance
Page
Setting the destination
87
Viewing alternative routes
88
Starting route guidance
87
Before starting or during route guidance
Page
Viewing the route
87
Adding destinations
97
Changing the route
99
Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination
96
20
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. FUNCTION INDEX
During route guidance
Page
103
Adjusting route guidance volume
63
Deleting the destination
98
Displaying the entire route map
100
1
QUICK GUIDE
Pausing route guidance
wUseful functions
Address book
Page
Registering address book entries
114
Marking icons on the map
116
Information
Page
Displaying vehicle maintenance
133
Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Page
Initiating Bluetooth®
146
Making a call on a Bluetooth® phone
157
Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® phone
165
Voice command system
Page
Operating the system with your voice
308
21
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. QUICK REFERENCE
1. “Menu” SCREEN
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the “Menu” screen.
22
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. QUICK REFERENCE
No.
Name
“Destination”
Function
Select to display the “Destination” screen.
Page
14, 16, 18, 19,
24, 68,
363, 365
Select to display the “Information” screen.
For vehicles sold in Canada, “Info” is used instead
of “Info/Apps”.
“Display”
Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the
screens, turn the display off, etc.
38
1
QUICK GUIDE
“Info/Apps”
(“Info”)
28, 322,
327, 330,
333, 337,
341, 356,
359, 368
26, 51, 62,
108, 125,
133, 172,
194, 288,
344, 371
“Setup”
Select to display the “Setup” screen.
“Phone”
Select to display the hands-free operation screen.
152
“Climate”
Select to display the air conditioning control
screen.
294
“Media”
Select to display the media control screen.
211
“Radio”
Select to display the radio control screen.
211
23
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. QUICK REFERENCE
2. “Destination” SCREEN
The “Destination” screen enables a destination search. Press the “MENU” button on
the Remote Touch, then select “Destination” to display the “Destination” screen.
No.
Name
Function
Page
“Address”
Select to input a house number and the street address using the input keys.
70
“Point of Interest”
Select one of the POIs that have already been
stored in the system’s database.
73, 365
“Destination
Assist”
Select to provide you with live assistance finding
destinations via the Lexus Enform with Safety
Connect response center.
80, 363
“Previous
Destinations”
Select a destination from any of the last 100 previously set destinations and from the previous starting point.
80
“Del.Dest.”
Select to delete set destinations.
86
24
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. QUICK REFERENCE
No.
Name
Function
Page
“Address Book”
Select the desired location from a registered entry
in “Address book”. (To register address book entries, see “REGISTERING ADDRESS BOOK
ENTRIES” on page 115.)
81
“Emergency”
Select one of the 4 categories of emergency service points that have already been stored in the
system’s database.
81
“Intersection &
Freeway”
Select to enter the names of 2 intersecting streets
or a freeway (interstate) entrance or exit. This is
helpful if only the general vicinity, not the specific
address, is known.
82
“Map”
Select to enable setting a destination by specifying
a location on the map screen.
85
“Coordinates”
Select to enter latitude and longitude coordinates.
85
Preset destination buttons
Select one of the 5 preset destination points as a
destination. If a preset destination point has not
been registered, a message will be displayed asking if it is desirable to set a destination to the preset
screen button. (To register a preset destination,
see “REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS”
on page 112.)
69
“Go Home”
Select your personal home address without having to enter the address each time. If a home address has not been registered, a message will be
displayed and the setting screen will automatically
appear. (To register home, see “REGISTERING
HOME” on page 109.)
69
1
QUICK GUIDE
25
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. QUICK REFERENCE
3. “Setup” SCREEN
The items shown on the “Setup” screen can be set. Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup” to display the “Setup” screen.
26
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. QUICK REFERENCE
No.
Name
Page
“General”
Select to change the selected language, operation sound, automatic screen change settings, etc.
51
“Voice”
Select to set the voice guidance settings.
62
“Navigation”
Select to set home, preset destinations, address
book, areas to avoid, etc. or to delete previous
destinations.
108
“Vehicle”
Select to set vehicle information such as maintenance information.
133
“Other”
Select to set Lexus Insider, XM Sports, XM
Stocks and XM Fuel Prices.
344, 371
“Audio”
Select to set iPod and HD Radio™ channel settings.
288
“Bluetooth*”
Select to set Bluetooth® phones and Bluetooth®
audio devices.
194
“Phone”
Select to set the phone sound, phonebook, message settings, etc.
172
1
QUICK GUIDE
Function
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
27
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. QUICK REFERENCE
4. “Information” SCREEN
This screen can be used to display the XM satellite system, fuel consumption, etc.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info/Apps” (“Info”) to
display the “Information” screen.
28
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. QUICK REFERENCE
No.
Name
Function
Page
Select to display the “Apps” screen.
356, 359
“Fuel
Consumption”
Select to display the fuel consumption screen.
Owner’s
Manual
“Traffic Incidents”
Select to display traffic incidents.
341
“Map Data”
Select to display map data information.
322
“LEXUS Insider”
Select to display the “LEXUS Insider” screen.
368
“XM
NavWeather”
Select to display weather information.
337
“XM Stocks”
Select to display personally selected stocks information.
330
“XM Sports”
Select to display personally selected sports teams
information.
327
“XM Fuel Prices”
Select to display current fuel prices and gas station locations information.
333
1
QUICK GUIDE
“Apps”
29
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
30
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
1. INITIAL SCREEN
1 When the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY
or IGNITION ON mode, the initial screen will be displayed and the system will begin operating.
” When the navigation system is turned on
in a screen other than the map screen,
the “CAUTION” screen will be displayed
when the screen is changed to the map
screen for the first time after it has been
turned on.
MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
” Images shown on the initial screen can be
changed to suit individual preferences.
(See page 56.)
CAUTION
● When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running , always apply the parking brake for
safety.
This system reminds users when to replace certain parts or components and
shows dealer information (if registered)
on the screen.
When the vehicle reaches a previously
set driving distance or date specified for
a scheduled maintenance check, the
“Maintenance Reminder” screen will be
displayed when the navigation system is
turned on.
” After a few seconds, the “CAUTION”
screen will be displayed.
” After about 5 seconds, the “CAUTION”
screen automatically switches to the map
screen. (If a button other than the “MAP/
VOICE” button on the Remote Touch is
pressed, the function’s corresponding
screen will be displayed.)
” This screen goes off if the screen is not
operated for several seconds.
” To prevent this screen from being displayed again, select “Do Not Display
This Message Again”.
” To register maintenance information, see
“MAINTENANCE” on page 133.
32
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
2. HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch
This navigation system can be operated
by the Remote Touch when the “START
STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is
in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
1 Use the Remote Touch knob to select
the desired button on the screen.
BASIC FUNCTION
” When the pointer moves close to a button,
it will be automatically pulled onto that button. The strength of this pull can be
adjusted. (See page 60.)
” The pointer will disappear from the screen
if it is not moved for 6 seconds. Operation
of the Remote Touch knob will cause the
pointer to reappear.
” Press the “ ” button on the Remote Touch
to zoom in on the map screen and the “ ” 2
button to zoom out. These buttons can also
be used to scroll up and down on list
screens.
” Press the “MENU” button on the Remote
Touch to set a destination or adjust settings
for the audio/video system, air conditioning
system, etc.
” The map screen can be returned to by
pressing the “MAP/VOICE” button on the
Remote Touch.
2 To select the button on the screen, press
the Remote Touch knob. Once a button
has been selected, the screen will
change.
CAUTION
● Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to
become caught in the Remote Touch as
this may cause an injury.
● Be careful when touching the Remote
Touch in extreme temperatures as it may
become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle.
33
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
NOTICE
● Do not allow the Remote Touch to come
into contact with food, liquid, stickers or lit
cigarettes as doing so may cause it to
change color, emit a strange odor or stop
functioning.
● Do not subject the Remote Touch to
excessive pressure or strong impact as
the knob may bend or break off.
● Do not allow coins, contact lenses or
other such items to become caught in the
Remote Touch as this may cause it to stop
functioning.
● Items of clothing may rip if they become
caught on the Remote Touch knob.
● If your hand or any object is on the
Remote Touch knob when the “START
STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is
turned to ACCESSORY mode, the
Remote Touch knob may not operate
properly.
INFORMATION
● Under extremely cold conditions, the
Remote Touch knob may react slowly.
34
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
3. INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION
When searching for an address or
name, or entering data, letters and numbers can be input via the screen.
” On certain letter entry screens, letters can
be entered in upper or lower case.
Icon
” Keyboard layout can be changed. (See
page 55.)
TO INPUT LETTERS AND
NUMBERS
Function
Select to enter in lower case.
Select to enter in upper case.
2
TO INPUT SYMBOLS
1 Select “Other” to display symbol keys.
keys.
2 Select the symbol keys directly to enter
2 Select the keys directly to enter letters
symbols.
or numbers.
: Select to erase one character. Select
and hold to continue erasing characters.
: Select to erase one symbol. Select
and hold to continue erasing symbols.
35
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
BASIC FUNCTION
1 Select “A-Z” to display the alphabet
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
TO DISPLAY THE LIST
LIST SCREEN OPERATION
1 Select “OK” to search for an address or
a name.
” Matching items from the database are
listed even if the entered address or name
is incomplete.
” The list will be displayed automatically if the
maximum number of characters is entered
or the number of matching items is 5 or
less.
When a list is displayed, use the appropriate screen button to scroll through
the list.
Icon
Function
Select to skip to the next or previous page.
Select and hold
or
to scroll
through the displayed list.
This indicates the
screen’s position.
If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too
long to display.
Select to scroll to the end of the
name.
Select to move to the beginning
of the name.
INFORMATION
● The number of matching items is shown
on the right side of the screen. If the number of matching items is more than 999,
the system displays “∗∗∗” on the screen.
displayed
INFORMATION
● The “ ” and “ ” buttons on the Remote
Touch can be used to scroll up and down
on list screens.
36
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
SORTING
The order of a list displayed on the
screen can be rearranged.
1 Select “Sort”.
Function
“Distance”
Select to sort in order of
distance from the current
position.
“Date”
Select to sort in order of
date.
“Category”
Select to sort in order of
category.
“Icon”
Select to sort in order of
icon.
“Name”
Select to sort in order of
name.
“Brand”
Select to sort in order of
brand name. (XM functions)
“Price”
Select to sort in order of
price. (XM functions)
2 Select the desired sorting criteria.
37
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
BASIC FUNCTION
Screen button
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT
The contrast and brightness of the
screen display and the image the camera displays can be adjusted. The display
can also be turned off, and/or changed
to either day or night mode. (For information regarding audio/video screen
adjustment, see “AUDIO SCREEN
ADJUSTMENT” on page 244.)
wAdjusting the screen display
“Camera”: Select to adjust the image the
camera displays.
wAdjusting the image the camera displays
SCREEN SETTINGS
ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTING SCREEN
DISPLAY AND CAMERA
SETTINGS
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
“Map·Menu”: Select to return to the
screen display settings.
CONTRAST AND
BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT
2 Select “Display”.
The contrast and brightness of the
screen can be adjusted according to the
brightness of your surroundings. The
display can also be turned off.
1 Select “ ” or “ ” to select the desired
function (“Contrast” or “Brightness”).
38
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
2 Select the desired screen button to adjust contrast and brightness.
Function
“Contrast” “+”
Select to strengthen the
contrast of the screen.
“Contrast” “-”
Select to weaken the
contrast of the screen.
“Brightness” “+”
Select to brighten the
screen.
“Brightness” “-”
Select to darken the
screen.
Depending on the position of the headlight switch, the screen changes to day
or night mode.
1 To display the screen in day mode, even
with the headlight switch on, select “Day 2
Mode” for brightness and contrast control.
BASIC FUNCTION
Screen button
CHANGING BETWEEN DAY
AND NIGHT MODE
3 After adjusting the screen, select “OK”.
” The screen goes off when “Screen Off” is
selected. To turn the screen back on, press
any button on the audio panel or on the
Remote Touch. The selected screen
appears.
” The displays condition is not changed to
night mode even if headlight switch is
turned on when the vehicle is in a bright
area, such as outside in direct sunlight.
INFORMATION
● If the screen is set to day mode with the
headlight switch turned on, this condition
is memorized even with the engine
turned off.
39
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
5. MAP SCREEN OPERATION
CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY
INFORMATION
● After 12-volt battery disconnection, or on
When starting the navigation system,
the current position is displayed first.
This screen displays the current position
and a map of the surrounding area.
a new vehicle, the current position may
not be correct. As soon as the system
receives signals from the GPS, the correct current position is displayed.
SCREEN SCROLL
OPERATION
” The current position mark ( ) appears in
the center or bottom center of the map
screen.
” A street name will appear on the bottom of
the screen, depending on the scale of the
map ( ).
” The screen can be returned to this map
screen that shows the current position at
any time, from any screen by pressing the
“MAP/VOICE” button on the Remote
Touch.
” To correct the current position manually,
see page 130.
INFORMATION
● While driving, the current position mark
is fixed on the screen and the map moves.
● The current position is automatically set
as the vehicle receives signals from the
GPS (Global Positioning System). If the
current position is not correct, it is automatically corrected after the vehicle
receives signals from the GPS.
When any point on the map is selected,
that point moves to the center of the
screen and is shown by the cursor mark
( ).
” Use the scroll feature to move the desired
point to the center of the screen for looking
at a point on the map that is different from
the current position.
” To scroll over the map, place the pointer in
a position near the desired destination and
then press and hold the Remote Touch
knob. The map will continue scrolling in that
direction until the knob is released.
” A street name, city name, etc. of the
selected point will be shown, depending on
the scale of the map ( ). Distance from
the current position to
will also be
shown ( ).
40
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
TO SET THE CURSOR
POSITION AS A DESTINATION
TO REGISTER THE CURSOR
POSITION AS AN ADDRESS
BOOK ENTRY
Address book entry registration enables
easy access to a specific point.
1 Select “Mark”.
2
BASIC FUNCTION
” After the screen is scrolled, the map
remains centered at the selected location
until another function is activated. The
current position mark will continue to
move along your actual route and may
move off the screen. When the “MAP/
VOICE” button on the Remote Touch is
pressed, the current position mark
returns to the center of the screen and
the map moves as the vehicle proceeds
along the designated route.
” When the scroll feature is used, the current position mark may disappear from
the screen. Press the “MAP/VOICE”
button on the Remote Touch to display
the current position on the map screen.
2 This screen is displayed.
A specific point on the map can be set as
a destination using the scroll function.
1 Select “Enter ”.
” The registered point is shown by
map.
on the
” To change the icon or name, etc., see
“EDITING
ADDRESS
BOOK
ENTRIES” on page 115.
” The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and the
route preference. (See “STARTING
ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 87.)
INFORMATION
● Up to 100 address book entries can be
registered. If there is an attempt to register more than 100 address book entries,
an error message will appear.
41
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
” If “Enter ” is selected, the cursor position will be set as a destination.
” If a destination has already been set, “Go
Directly” and “Add to Route” will be displayed.
TO SEE INFORMATION
ABOUT THE ICON WHERE
THE CURSOR IS SET
“Go Directly”: Select to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new one.
“Add to Route”: Select to add a destination.
” To display information about an icon, set
the cursor on it.
■ POI INFORMATION
When the cursor is set on a POI icon, the
name and “Info” are displayed at the top
of the screen.
” To register this POI as an address book
entry, select “Mark”. (See “REGISTERING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES” on
page 115.)
” If
is selected, the registered
phone number can be called.
” The desired POI can be displayed on the
map screen. (See “DISPLAY POI
ICONS” on page 104.)
1 Select “Info”.
2 Information such as the name, address,
position and phone number are displayed.
42
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
■ ADDRESS BOOK ENTRY INFORMATION
When the cursor is set on an address
book entry icon, the name and “Info” are
displayed at the top of the screen.
1 Select “Info”.
“Go Directly”: Select to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new one.
“Add to Route”: Select to add a destination.
” To edit an address book entry, select
“Edit”. (See “EDITING ADDRESS
BOOK ENTRIES” on page 115.)
” To delete an address book entry, select
“Delete”.
” If
is selected, the registered
phone number can be called.
position and phone number are displayed.
43
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
BASIC FUNCTION
2 Information such as the name, address,
” If “Enter ” is selected, the cursor position will be set as a destination.
” If a destination has already been set, “Go
Directly” and “Add to Route” will be displayed.
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
■ DESTINATION INFORMATION
When the cursor is set on a destination
icon, the name and “Info” are displayed
on the top of the screen.
1 Select “Info”.
■ XM NavTraffic® TEXT INFORMATION
When the XM NavTraffic® icon on the
map screen is selected, the XM
NavTraffic® information bar will appear
on the upper part of the screen.
1 Select “Info”.
2 Information such as the name, address,
position and phone number are displayed.
2 Traffic information will be displayed on
the screen.
” To delete a destination, select “Delete”.
” If
is selected, the registered
phone number can be called.
” To display detailed traffic event information,
select “Detail”.
44
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
SWITCHING THE SCREENS
Any of the screen configurations can be
selected.
Function
“Intersection”
Select to display the intersection guidance screen
or the guidance screen on
the freeway. (See page
91.)
“Audio”
Select to display the audio
screen. (See page 46.)
“Fuel Consumption”
Select to display the fuel
consumption screen. (See
page 46.)
“Other
Information”
Select to display the following 4 screen configurations: “Dual map”,
“Compass”,
“Turn-byTurn Arrow” and “Freeway
Exit List”.
“Dual map”
Select to display the dual
map screen. (See page
46.)
“Compass”
Select to display the compass mode screen. (See
page 47.)
“Turn-byTurn Arrow”
Select to display the turnby-turn arrow screen. (See
page 92.)
“Freeway
Exit List”
Select to display the freeway exit list screen. (See
page 90.)
1 Select “Map Mode”.
2 Select the screen buttons to select the
desired configuration.
” Depending on the conditions, certain
screen configuration buttons cannot be
selected.
Screen button
Function
“Map Only”
Select to display the single
map screen. (See page
46.)
“Turn List”
Select to display the turn
list screen. (See page 92.)
45
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
BASIC FUNCTION
Screen button
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
SCREEN CONFIGURATIONS
■ FUEL CONSUMPTION
The fuel consumption screen and the
map screen are displayed.
■ MAP ONLY
This is a regular map screen.
” The screen shows the single map.
” While on a different screen, selecting
“Map Only” will display the single map
screen.
■ AUDIO
The audio screen and the map screen
are displayed.
” Selecting “ ” or “ ” allows selection of the
desired mode (“Energy Monitor”*, “Trip
Information” or “Past Record”).
*: Hybrid vehicle
” If a different screen is displayed, select
“Fuel Consumption” on the “Map
Mode” screen.
” For an explanation on each fuel consumption mode, refer to “FUEL CONSUMPTION”. For details, refer to
“Owner’s Manual”.
■ DUAL MAP
The map screen can be split into two.
” Information on the current radio station or
track is displayed.
” If a different screen is displayed, select
“Audio” on the “Map Mode” screen.
” For audio system operation, refer to
“AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION”. (See page 208.)
” This screen shows the dual map. The map
on the left is the main map.
46
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
” While on a different screen, selecting
“Dual map” will display the dual map
screen.
■ COMPASS
The current position is indicated with a
compass.
■ EDITING RIGHT MAP
The right side map can be edited by selecting any point on the right side map.
2
1 Select the desired screen button.
” The following procedures can be performed on this screen:
No.
” While on a different screen, selecting
“Compass” will display the compass
mode screen.
INFORMATION
Function
● The destination mark is displayed in the
Changing the orientation of the map
Displaying POI icons
Showing XM NavTraffic®
information (See page 342.)
Displaying eDestination icons (See
page 367.)
direction of the destination. When driving, refer to the longitude and latitude
coordinates, and the compass, to make
sure that the vehicle is headed in the
direction of the destination.
● When the vehicle travels out of the coverage area, the guidance screen changes to
the compass mode screen.
Changing the map scale
2 Select “OK” when editing is completed.
” The screen returns to the dual map screen.
47
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
BASIC FUNCTION
” Information about the destination, current
position and a compass is displayed on the
screen.
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
MAP SCALE
FOOT PRINT MAP
1 Select
or
to change the scale
of the map screen.
For the area which is covered by the foot
print map (Some areas in the following
cities: Detroit, Chicago, N.Y., L.A), you
can switch to the foot print map on a
scale of 75 ft. (25 m).
TO SWITCH TO THE FOOT
PRINT MAP
” The scale bar and indicator at the bottom of
the screen indicate the map scale menu.
The scale range is from 150 ft. (50 m) to
250 miles (400 km).
” Select and hold
or
to continue
changing the scale of the map screen.
” The scale of the map screen can be
changed by selecting the scale bar directly.
This function is not available while driving.
changes into
when the map is
scaled down to 150 ft. (50 m).
1 To display the foot print map, select
.
INFORMATION
● Press the “ ” button on the Remote
Touch to zoom in on the map screen and
the “ ” button to zoom out.
● The map scale is displayed under the
north-up or heading-up symbol at the top
left of the screen.
● When the map scale is at the maximum
is not
range of 250 miles (400 km),
shown. When the map scale is at the minimum range of 150 ft. (50 m),
is not
shown. In areas where the foot print map
is available the map scale changes from
to
when at the minimum
range.
” To delete the foot print map display, select
.
INFORMATION
● If the map or the current position is
moved to the area which is not covered
by the foot print map, the screen scale
automatically changes to 150 ft. (50 m).
● On the foot print map, a one way street is
displayed by
.
● It is not possible to perform scrolling on
the foot print map while driving.
Building footprints in the database were
created
and
provided
by
MAPMASTER.
48
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
TO DISPLAY BUILDING
INFORMATION
ORIENTATION OF THE MAP
Information is available only for buildings for which information is recorded
on the map data.
The orientation of the map can be
changed from north-up to heading-up
by selecting the orientation symbol at
the top left of the screen.
1 Select “Info” while the foot print map is
1 Select
displayed.
or
.
2
wNorth-up screen
BASIC FUNCTION
” Details of POIs in some buildings may be
displayed.
” For detailed POI information, select the
building name. You can see details of the
selected POIs.
wHeading-up screen
: North-up symbol
Regardless of the direction of vehicle travel,
north is always up.
: Heading-up symbol
The direction of vehicle travel is always up.
” Both the north-up and heading-up symbols display the vehicles direction as a
letter (e.g. N for north).
49
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
STANDARD MAP ICONS
Icon
Name
Island
Park
Industry
Business facility
Airport
Military
University
Hospital
Stadium
Shopping mall
Golf
50
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
1. GENERAL SETTINGS
Used for language selection and the on/
off settings of operation sounds and automatic screen change, etc.
SCREENS FOR GENERAL
SETTINGS
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
2
BASIC FUNCTION
2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “General”.
4 Select the items to be set.
” On this screen, the following functions can
be performed:
5 Select “Save”.
51
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
No.
Function
No.
Function
Select to change the time zone and
select “On” or “Off” for daylight saving time. (See “SYSTEM TIME SETTINGS” on page 53.)
Select to set automatic screen changes from the audio/air conditioning
control screen to the previous screen
to “On” or “Off”. If “On” is selected,
the screen will automatically return to
the previous screen from the audio/
air conditioning control screen after
20 seconds.
Select to change the language. (See
“SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on
page 54.)
Select to change the distance unit.
(See “UNIT OF MEASUREMENT”
on page 54.)
Select to turn the selection sounds
“On” or “Off”.
Select to turn the pointer sounds
“On” or “Off”.
Select to change the screen button
color. (See “SELECTING A BUTTON COLOR” on page 55.)
Select to turn the error sounds “On”
or “Off”.
Select to change the keyboard layout.
(See “SELECTING A KEYBOARD
LAYOUT” on page 55.)
Select to adjust the pointer sound volume. (See “POINTER SOUND
VOLUME SETTINGS” on page 60.)
Select to customize the startup image. (See “CHANGING THE
STARTUP IMAGE” on page 56.)
Select to adjust the strength of the
pull from the buttons to the pointer.
(See “SETTING A FEEDBACK
FORCE” on page 60.)
Select to customize the screen off image. (See “CHANGING THE
SCREEN OFF IMAGE” on page
58.)
Select to delete personal data. (See
“DELETING PERSONAL DATA”
on page 61.)
Select to update program versions.
For details, contact your Lexus dealer.
Select to update gracenote database
versions. For details, contact your
Lexus dealer.
52
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
■ TIME ZONE
SYSTEM TIME SETTINGS
Used for changing time zones and the
on/off settings of daylight saving time.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “System Time”.
A time zone can be selected and GMT
can be set.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “System Time” on the
“General Settings” screen.
BASIC FUNCTION
4 Select “Time Zone”.
4 Select the items to be set.
5 Select the desired time zone.
” On this screen, the following functions can
be performed:
No.
Function
Select to change the time zone. (See
“TIME ZONE” on page 53.)
2
” If “Other” is selected, the zone can be
adjusted manually. Select “+” or “-” to
adjust the time zone and then select “OK”.
To select “On” or “Off” for daylight
saving time.
5 Select “Save”.
6 Select “Save”.
53
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
SELECTING A LANGUAGE
UNIT OF MEASUREMENT
The language can be changed.
Distance unit can be changed.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Language”.
2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Unit of Measurement”.
4 Select the desired screen button.
4 Select “km” or “mile”.
5 Select “Yes”.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
5 Select “Save”.
6 Select “Save”.
” This function is available only in English
or Spanish. To change language, see
“SELECTING A LANGUAGE” on page
54.
54
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
SELECTING A BUTTON
COLOR
SELECTING A KEYBOARD
LAYOUT
The color of the screen buttons can be
changed.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
4 Select the desired screen button color.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
5 Select “Save”.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Keyboard Layout”.
2
BASIC FUNCTION
2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Button Color”.
Keyboard layout can be changed.
4 Select “ABC” or “QWERTY” of “Keyboard Layout” to change the keyboard
layout.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
5 Select “Save”.
55
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
■ LAYOUT TYPE
w“ABC” type
w“QWERTY” type
CHANGING THE STARTUP
IMAGE
When the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY
or IGNITION ON mode, the initial screen will be displayed.
An image can be copied from a USB
memory and used as the startup image.
(For information regarding the startup
image, see “INITIAL SCREEN” on page
32.)
INFORMATION
● When saving the images to a USB, name
the folder that the startup image is saved
to “StartupImage” and name the folder
that the screen off image is saved to
“DisplayOffImage”. If these folder names
are not used, the navigation system cannot download the images. (The folder
names are case sensitive.)
● The images file extension is JPG or
JPEG.
● The images file name, including the file
extension, can be up to 32 characters.
● Image files of 10 MB or less can be saved.
● Up to 3 images can be downloaded.
56
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
6 Select “Customize Startup Image”.
■ TRANSFERRING DATA
1 Grip the knob to release the lock, and
lift the armrest to open.
2
7 Select “Transfer”.
BASIC FUNCTION
2 Open the cover and connect a USB
memory.
8 Select “Yes”.
■ SETTING THE STARTUP IMAGE
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
” Turn on the power of the USB memory if it
is not turned on.
3 Close the console box.
4 Press the “MENU” button on the
2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Customize Startup Image” on
the “General Settings” screen.
4 Select the desired image.
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
5 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
5 Select “Save”.
57
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
■ DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAGES
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Customize Startup Image” on
the “General Settings” screen.
4 Select “Delete All”.
CHANGING THE SCREEN
OFF IMAGE
Select “Screen Off” to turn off the
screen. An image can be copied from a
USB memory and can be set to display
when “Screen Off” is selected. (For
more information on “Screen Off”, see
“SCREEN ADJUSTMENT” on page
38.)
■ TRANSFERRING DATA
1 Grip the knob to release the lock, and
lift the armrest to open.
5 Select “Yes”.
2 Open the cover and connect a USB
memory.
” Turn on the power of the USB memory if it
is not turned on.
58
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
3 Close the console box.
4 Press the “MENU” button on the
■ SETTING THE SCREEN OFF IMAGE
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
5 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
6 Select “Customize Screen Off Image”.
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Customize Screen Off Image”
on the “General Settings” screen.
2
4 Select the desired image.
BASIC FUNCTION
7 Select “Transfer”.
5 Select “Save”.
■ DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAGES
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
8 Select “Yes”.
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Customize Screen Off Image”
on the “General Settings” screen.
4 Select “Delete All”.
5 Select “Yes”.
59
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
POINTER SOUND VOLUME
SETTINGS
The pointer sound volume can be adjusted.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Pointer Sound Volume”.
SETTING A FEEDBACK
FORCE
When the pointer moves close to a button, it will be automatically pulled onto
that button. The strength of this pull can
be adjusted.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Feedback Force”.
4 Select the desired button.
4 Select “+” or “-”.
5 Select “OK”.
6 Select “Save”.
5 Select “OK”.
6 Select “Save”.
60
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
DELETING PERSONAL DATA
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Delete Personal Data”.
BASIC FUNCTION
4 Select “Delete”.
” The following personal data can be deleted
or returned to their default settings:
• Maintenance conditions
• Maintenance information off setting
• Address book
• Areas to avoid
• Previous points
• Route guidance
• Route trace
2
• Phonebook data
• Call history data
• Speed dial data
• Bluetooth® phone data
• Phone sound settings
• Phone display settings
• Message settings
• Audio setting
• Bluetooth® audio setting
• Startup image data
• Screen off image data
• Downloaded Apps
INFORMATION
● This function is not available while driving.
5 Select “Yes”.
61
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
2. VOICE SETTINGS
4 Select the items to be set.
Voice guidance etc. can be set.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
5 Select “Save”.
SCREEN FOR VOICE
SETTINGS
2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “Voice”.
” On this screen, the following functions can
be performed:
62
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
No.
VOICE VOLUME
Function
The voice guidance volume can be
adjusted or switched off. (See
“VOICE VOLUME” on page 63.)
The voice guidance volume can be adjusted or switched off.
Voice guidance during route guidance can be set to “On” or “Off”.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Voice guidance during audio/video
and/or air conditioning system use
can be set to “On” or “Off”.
2 Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select the desired level by selecting the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
BASIC FUNCTION
appropriate number.
Voice recognition prompts can be
set to “On” or “Off”. This setting can
also be changed on the “Shortcut
Menu” screen. (See page 308.)
When “On” is selected, the audio/
video and air conditioning systems
can be operated using voice commands.
When using the traffic information
function, voice guidance can be set to
“On” or “Off”. (See “TRAFFIC INCIDENT WARNING” on page 64.)
” If voice guidance is not needed, select
“Off” to disable the feature.
4 Select “Save”.
When using the XM NavWeather™
function, the severe weather warning
can be set to “On” or “Off”.
” To reset all setup items, select “Default”.
63
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
2. SETUP
TRAFFIC INCIDENT
WARNING
Traffic congestion information can be
received via voice guidance while being
guided to the desired destination.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “On” of “Traffic Incident Warning”.
4 Select “Save”.
INFORMATION
● When the “Traffic Information” indicator
is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic Incident
Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic”
will not operate. (See page 342.)
64
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
2
BASIC FUNCTION
65
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
SELECTING THE SEARCH
AREA
The selected state (province) can be
changed to set a destination from a different state (province) by using “Address”, “Point of Interest” or
“Intersection & Freeway”.
1 Select “Change State/Province” to display a list of the states/provinces/territories of the United States and Canada.
2 Select “Destination”.
” For map database information and
updates, see “MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERAGE AREA” on
page 322.
” If a state (province) has not been
selected yet, “Select State/Province” is
displayed.
3 This screen is displayed.
2 Select the desired state (province).
” One of 11 different methods can be used to
search a destination. (See pages 69
through 85.)
INFORMATION
● When
searching a destination, the
response to the screen button may be
slow.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
68
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
HOME
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
PRESET DESTINATIONS
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu”
2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu”
screen.
screen.
3 Select “Go Home”.
3 Select any of the preset destination buttons (1-5).
3
4 Select “OK”.
” To use this function, it is necessary to set a
home address. (To register home, see
page 109.)
INFORMATION
● If a home address has not been regis-
” The selected preset destination point is set
as the destination. The navigation system
performs a search for the route. (See
“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 87.)
4 Select “OK”.
” To use this function, it is necessary to set
preset destinations to the preset screen
buttons (1-5). (See “REGISTERING
PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 112.)
tered, a message confirming if it is desirable to set a home will be displayed, and
the setting screen will appear.
● Guidance starts from the current position
to the set home address if “OK” is
selected even while driving.
69
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
” Your home address is set as the destination.
The navigation system performs a search
for the route.
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
INFORMATION
● If a preset destination point has not been
registered, a message confirming if it is
desirable to set a preset destination will
be displayed, and the setting screen will
appear.
● Guidance starts from the current position
to the preset destination point if “OK” is
selected even while driving.
SELECTING A CITY TO
SEARCH
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote
Touch,
“Destination”.
then
select
2 Select “Address” on the “Destination”
screen.
3 Select “City”.
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Address”
There are 2 methods to search a destination by address:
(a) Search by city
(b) Search by street address
4 Input a city name.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu”
screen.
3 Select “Address” on the “Destination”
screen.
4 Select the desired search method.
5 Select the screen button of the desired
city name from the displayed list.
70
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
6 Input the street name and select “OK”.
■ SEARCHING FROM THE LAST 5
CITIES
1 Select “Last 5 Cities”.
7 When the desired street name is found,
select the corresponding screen button.
2 Select the screen button of the desired
3
city name from the displayed list.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
” When the desired street name is selected,
the “Confirm Destination” screen may be
displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”
on page 87.)
” The current screen changes to the
screen for inputting a street name. (See
“SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH” on
page 70.)
8 Input a house number.
INFORMATION
● If the navigation system has never been
used, this function will not be available.
” If the same address exists in more than 1
city, the current screen changes to the
address list screen.
71
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCH BY STREET ADDRESS
6 When the desired street name is found,
select the corresponding screen button.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote
Touch,
“Destination”.
then
select
2 Select “Address” on the “Destination”
screen.
3 Select “Street Address”.
4 Select numbers directly on the screen to
input the house number.
” When the desired street name is selected,
the “Confirm Destination” screen may be
displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”
on page 87.)
” If the same address exists in more than 1
city, a screen requesting the city name to be
input or selected will be displayed.
7 Input a city name.
” After inputting the house number, select
“OK” to display the screen for inputting the
street name.
5 Input the street name and select “OK”.
8 Select the screen button of the desired
city name from the displayed list.
72
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCH BY “Name”
INFORMATION
● A street name can be searched using
only the body part of its name.
● For example: S WESTERN AVE
• A search can be performed by inputting
“S WESTERN AVE”, “WESTERN AVE”
or “WESTERN”.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote
Touch,
“Destination”.
then
select
2 Select “Point of Interest” on the “Destination” screen.
3 Select “Name” on the “Point of Interest”
screen.
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Point of Interest”
4 Input the name of the POI.
3
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
5 Select the screen button of the desired
destination.
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu”
screen.
3 Select “Point of Interest” on the “Destination” screen.
4 Select the desired search method.
” When the desired destination is selected,
the “Confirm Destination” screen may be
displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”
on page 87.)
” When inputting the name of a specific POI,
and there are 2 or more sites with the same
name, the list screen is displayed.
73
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
There are 4 methods to search a destination by Points of Interest:
(a) Search by name
(b) Search by category
(c) Search by phone #
(d) Search by eDestination
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
6 Select the screen button of the desired
destination.
■ SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH
1 Select “City”.
” If the same name exists in more than 1 city, a
search can be performed more easily using
“City” or “Category”. (See “SELECTING
A CITY TO SEARCH” on page 74 and
“SELECTING FROM THE CATEGORIES” on page 75.)
2 Input the city name.
” The desired POI can be displayed on the
map screen. (See “DISPLAY POI
ICONS” on page 104.)
” To cancel the city setting, select “Any City”.
INFORMATION
● To search for a facility name using multi-
ple search words, put a space between
each word.
3 Select the screen button of the desired
city name from the displayed list.
74
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
■ SELECTING FROM THE CATEGORIES
SEARCH BY “Category”
The destination can be set by selecting
the search point and the POI category.
1 Select “Category”.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote
Touch,
“Destination”.
then
select
2 Select “Point of Interest” on the “Destination” screen.
2 Select the screen button of the desired
3 Select “Category”.
3
category.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4 This screen is displayed.
” If the desired POI category is on the
screen, select its screen button to display a
detailed list of the POI category.
” If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, select “List All Categories” to list
all POI categories.
” When the desired category is selected, the
POI name list screen is displayed.
75
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
” On this screen, the following operations
can be performed:
No.
Function
Select to set the search point from
near the current position.
■ SETTING THE SEARCH POINT
FROM NEAR CITY CENTER
1 Select “Near a City Center in XX*”.
2 Input the city center name.
Select to set the search point from
along the selected route.
Select to set the search point from
near a city center.
Select to set the search point from
near a destination.
3 Select the screen button of the desired
city center name.
INFORMATION
● The names of POIs located within
approximately 200 miles (320 km) from
the selected search point can be displayed.
■ SETTING THE SEARCH POINT
FROM NEAR HERE
1 Select “Near Here”.
” The search point is set at the current position, and the “POI Category” screen will be
displayed. (See page 78.)
” The search point is set and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed. (See page
78.)
*: XX represents the selected search area
name.
■ SETTING THE SEARCH POINT
FROM ALONG MY ROUTE
1 Select “Along My Route”.
” The search point is set and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed. (See page
78.)
76
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
■ SELECTING FROM THE LAST 5
CITIES
■ SETTING THE SEARCH POINT
FROM NEAR A DESTINATION
1 Select “Near a City Center in XX*”.
2 Select “Last 5 Cities”.
1 Select “Near a Destination”.
2 Select the screen button of the desired
destination.
3
3 Select the screen button of the desired
” The search point is set and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed. (See page
78.)
” The search point is set and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed. (See page
78.)
*: XX represents the selected search area
name.
77
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
city center name.
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
■ TO SEARCH FOR POIs NEAR THE
SEARCH POINT
3 Select the screen button of the desired
item.
When the search point is set, the “POI
Category” screen will be displayed.
1 Select the desired POI category.
” If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, select “List All Categories” to list
all POI categories.
” If “Favorite POI Categories” is selected, a
search can be performed using the 6 POIs
that have been previously set. For more
details, see “POI CATEGORY CHANGE
(SELECT POI ICONS)” on page 129.
” When the desired item is selected, the
“Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm
Destination” screen, the navigation system
performs a search for the route. (See
“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 87.)
2 Select the desired POI category from
the list.
78
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
SEARCH BY “Phone #”
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote
Touch,
“Destination”.
then
select
2 Select “Point of Interest” on the “Destination” screen.
” To set an address book entry as a destination using the phone number, the number must already be registered with the
address book entry. (See page 118.)
INFORMATION
● If there is no match for the phone number
3 Select “Phone #” on the “Point of Interest” screen.
input, a list of identical numbers with different area codes will be displayed.
4 Input a phone number.
SEARCH BY “eDestination”
3
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
then
select
2 Select “Point of Interest” on the “Destination” screen.
5 After inputting a phone number, select
“OK”.
” When a phone number is input, the “Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed.
If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (See
“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 87.)
” If there is more than 1 site with the same
number, the following screen will be displayed.
3 Select “eDestination” on the “Point of
Interest” screen.
” With the eDestination feature, you can go
online, via the Lexus.com owner’s Web site,
to select and organize destinations of your
choice and then wirelessly send them to
your vehicle’s navigation system. Up to
200 locations can be stored online and
accessed or updated at any time. Locations
can be organized into up to 20 folders.
(See “eDestination” on page 365.)
79
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Remote
Touch,
“Destination”.
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Destination Assist”
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Previous Destinations”
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu”
2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu”
screen.
screen.
3 Select “Destination Assist” on the
“Destination” screen.
3 Select “Previous Destinations” on the
“Destination” screen.
” Destination Assist provides you with live
assistance for finding destinations via the
Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
response center. You can request either a
specific business, address, or ask for help
locating your desired destination by category, such as restaurants, gas stations,
shopping centers or other points of interest
(POI). After you tell the agent your choice
of destination, its coordinates are sent wirelessly to your vehicle’s navigation system.
(See “Destination Assist” on page 363.)
4 Select the screen button of the desired
destination.
” The previous starting point and up to 100
previously set destinations are displayed on
the screen.
“Delete”: Select to delete the previous destination. (To delete previous destinations,
see page 86.)
” When the desired destination is selected,
the “Confirm Destination” screen may be
displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”
on page 87.)
80
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
” The list of previous destinations can also
be deleted by selecting “Delete Previous Dest.” on the “Navigation Settings”
screen when the vehicle is stopped. (See
“DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS” on page 124.)
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Address Book”
” When the desired address book entry is
selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen
may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the
“Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”
on page 87.)
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Emergency”
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
screen.
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” 3
on page 10.)
2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu”
screen.
3 Select “Address Book” on the “Destination” screen.
3 Select “Emergency” on the second
page of the “Destination” screen.
4 Select the screen button of the desired
address book entry.
” The display changes to a screen to select
police stations, dealers, hospitals or fire stations.
4 Select the desired emergency category.
” A list of registered address book entries is
displayed.
“Options”: Select to register or edit address
book entries. (See page 115.)
” The selected emergency category is displayed.
81
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu”
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
5 Select the screen button of the desired
destination.
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Intersection & Freeway”
There are 2 methods to search a destination by Intersection & Freeway:
(a) Search by intersection
(b) Search by freeway
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
” When the desired destination is selected,
the “Confirm Destination” screen may be
displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”
on page 87.)
INFORMATION
● The navigation system does not guide in
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu”
screen.
3 Select “Intersection & Freeway” on the
second page of the “Destination”
screen.
4 Select the desired method.
areas where route guidance is unavailable. (See page 140.)
● The emergency function can be used
even while driving.
● While driving, only the currently displayed items and the items on the next
page can be viewed.
82
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
7 Select the screen button of the desired
SEARCH BY “Intersection”
item.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote
Touch,
“Destination”.
then
select
2 Select “Intersection & Freeway” on the
second page of the “Destination”
screen.
3 Select “Intersection” on the “Intersection & Freeway” screen.
4 Input the name of the first intersecting
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
street which is located near the destination to be set, and select “OK”.
” When the desired item is selected, the
“Confirm Destination” screen may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the “Confirm 3
Destination” screen, the navigation system
performs a search for the route. (See
“STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on
page 87.)
INFORMATION
5 Select the screen button of the desired
item.
● If the same 2 streets cross at more than 1
6 Input the name of the second intersect-
intersection, the screen changes and displays the menu to select the city name
where the streets intersect. Select the
city, and the map location of the selected
destination and the route preference.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 87.)
ing street.
83
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
7 Input a freeway entrance or exit name,
SEARCH BY “Freeway
Entrance / Exit”
and select “OK”.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote
Touch,
“Destination”.
then
select
2 Select “Intersection & Freeway” on the
second page of the “Destination”
screen.
3 Select “Freeway Entrance / Exit” on
the “Intersection & Freeway” screen.
8 Select the screen button of the desired
entrance or exit name.
4 Input a freeway name.
5 Select the screen button of the desired
freeway.
” When the desired entrance or exit is
selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen
may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the
“Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”
on page 87.)
INFORMATION
● Be sure to use the complete name of the
6 Select “Entrance” or “Exit”.
freeway or highway, including the
hyphen, when entering the destination.
Freeways and interstates use an “I”
(I-405). US highways use the state designation before the number (CA-118).
84
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Map”
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Coordinates”
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu”
2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu”
screen.
screen.
3 Select “Map” on the second page of the
“Destination” screen.
3 Select “Coordinates” on the second
page of the “Destination” screen.
3
4 Input the latitude and the longitude.
5 Select “Go to ”.
5 After inputting the latitude and longi-
” The navigation system performs a search
for the route. (See “STARTING ROUTE
GUIDANCE” on page 87.)
INFORMATION
● Guidance starts if “OK” is selected even
while driving. However, the cursor cannot
be moved.
tude, select “OK”.
” When the desired screen button is
selected, the “Confirm Destination” screen
may be displayed. If “Go” is selected on the
“Confirm Destination” screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route.
(See “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE”
on page 87.)
85
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4 Scroll the map to the desired point.
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
5 Select “Yes” to delete the destination(s).
DELETING SET
DESTINATIONS
A set destination can be deleted.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu”
screen.
3 Select “Del.Dest.” on the “Destination”
screen.
” When more than 1 destination is set, a list
will be displayed on the screen.
4 Select the destination to be deleted.
” A message appears to confirm the request
to delete.
” If “Yes” is selected, the data cannot be
recovered. If more than 1 destination has
been set, the system will recalculate the
route(s) to the set destination(s) as necessary.
” If “No” is selected, the previous screen will
be displayed.
” Set destinations can also be deleted by
selecting “Route”. (See “DELETING
DESTINATIONS” on page 98.)
“Delete All”: Select to delete all destinations on the list.
86
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE
When “Map” is selected on the “Confirm Destination” screen, the map
screen will be displayed. The map location of the selected destination can be
set as a destination.
1 Scroll the map to the desired point.
” If a destination has already been set, “Go
to ” and “Add to Route” will be displayed.
“Go to ”: Select to delete the existing
destination(s) and set a new one.
“Add to Route”: Select to add a destination.
“Info”: If this screen button is displayed on
the top of the screen, select it to view
items such as name, address, position and
phone number.
3
3 To start guidance, select “OK”.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“Adjust Location”: Select to adjust the position in smaller increments.
No.
Function
Current position
” When an arrow facing the desired point is
selected, the map scrolls in that direction.
” The scroll stops when the selection of the
arrow is released.
Destination point
2 Select “Go to ”.
Distance of the entire route
” The system starts route search and displays
recommended routes.
Select to display a list of the turns required to reach the destination.
Type of route and its distance
Select the desired route from 3 possible routes. (See page 88.)
Select to change the route. (See
page 89.)
87
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
” Guidance can be paused or resumed.
(See “PAUSING AND RESUMING
GUIDANCE” on page 103.)
” If “OK” is selected until a beep sounds,
demo mode will start. Press the “MAP/
VOICE” button on the Remote Touch to
end demo mode.
3 ROUTES SELECTION
1 Select “3 Routes”.
CAUTION
● Be sure to obey traffic regulations and
keep road conditions in mind while driving. If a traffic sign on the road has been
changed, the route guidance may not
indicate such changed information.
2 Select “Preferred”, “Alternate” or
“Short”.
INFORMATION
● The route for returning may not be the
same as that for going.
● The route guidance to the destination
may not be the shortest route nor a route
without traffic congestion.
● Route guidance may not be available if
there is no road data for the specified
location.
● When setting the destination on a map
with a scale larger than 0.5 miles (800
m), the map scale changes to 0.5 miles
(800 m) automatically. If this occurs, set
the destination again.
● If a destination that is not located on a
road is set, the vehicle will be guided to
the point on a road nearest to the destination. The road nearest to the point
selected is set as the destination.
No.
Function
Select to display the recommended
route.
Select to display the alternative
route.
Select to display the route that is the
shortest distance to the set destination.
Select to display the information
shown below about each of the 3
routes.
88
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
2 This screen is displayed.
No.
Function
Function
Page
Select to add destinations.
97
Toll road
Select to delete destinations.
98
Freeway
Select to reorder destinations.
97
Select to display the choices available when setting
the conditions the system
uses to determine the route
to the destination.
101
Time necessary for the entire trip
No.
Distance of the entire trip
EDIT ROUTE
Conditions for the route to the destination can be set again.
1 Select “Edit Route”.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Ferry
3
INFORMATION
● Even if the “Freeways” indicator is
dimmed, the route cannot avoid including
a freeway in some cases. (See page 101.)
● If the calculated route includes a trip by
ferry, the route guidance shows a sea
route. After you travel by ferry, the current position may be incorrect. Upon
reception of GPS signals, it is automatically corrected.
89
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN
During route guidance, various types of
guidance screens can be displayed depending on conditions.
SCREEN LAYOUT
No.
DURING FREEWAY DRIVING
During freeway driving, the freeway exit
information screen will be displayed.
This screen displays the distance to the
next junction/exit, or POIs in the vicinity
of the freeway exit.
Function
Distance to the next turn and an arrow indicating the turning direction
No./
Icon
Function
Guidance route
Distance from the current position to
the exit or junction
Current position
Exit number and junction name
Distance and travel/arrival time to
the destination
Current position
Current street name
POIs that are close to a freeway exit
Current street name
INFORMATION
Select to display the selected map of
the exit vicinity.
● If the vehicle goes off the guidance route,
the route is searched again.
● For some areas, the roads have not been
completely digitized in our database. For
this reason, the route guidance may
select a road that should not be traveled
on.
● When arriving at the set destination the
destination name will be displayed on the
top of the screen. Selecting “Off” clears
the display.
Select to scroll to farther junctions or
exits.
Select to scroll to closer junctions or
exits.
Select to display the closest 3 junctions or exits.
90
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
WHEN APPROACHING A
FREEWAY EXIT OR
JUNCTION
WHEN APPROACHING AN
INTERSECTION
When the vehicle approaches an exit or
junction, the freeway guidance screen
will be displayed.
When the vehicle approaches an intersection, the intersection guidance
screen will be displayed.
3
Function
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No.
No.
Function
Next street name
Next street name
Current position
Current position
Distance to the intersection
Distance from the current position to
the exit or junction
: Select to hide the freeway guidance
screen.
” Select “Intersection”, or press the “MAP/
VOICE” button on the Remote Touch, to
change back to the freeway guidance
screen.
: Select to hide the intersection guidance screen.
” Select “Intersection”, or press the “MAP/
VOICE” button on the Remote Touch, to
change back to the intersection guidance
screen.
91
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
■ ARROW SCREEN
OTHER SCREENS
■ TURN LIST SCREEN
On this screen, the list of turns on the
guidance route can be viewed.
1 Select “Turn List” during guidance to
On this screen, information about the
next turn on the guidance route can be
viewed.
1 Select “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” during
guidance to display the arrow screen.
display the turn list.
No.
No.
Function
Function
Exit number or street name
Turn direction
Turn direction
Distance between turns
Distance to the next turn
Next street or destination name
Current street name
Current street name
92
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS
As the vehicle approaches an intersection, or point, where maneuvering the
vehicle is necessary, the system’s voice
guidance will provide various messages.
4 miles
0.5 miles
5 miles
0.5 miles
No.
Voice guidance
“Proceed about 5 miles to Main
street.”
“Proceed about 4 miles to the traffic
circle.”
3
“In half of a mile, traffic circle ahead
and then the 3rd exit onto Main
street.”
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No.
Voice guidance
“The 3rd exit ahead.”
“In half of a mile, right turn onto Main
street.”
“The exit ahead.”
“Next right.”/“Right turn ahead.”
(Beep sound only)
(Beep sound only)
INFORMATION
● The street names may not be pro-
nounced correctly or clearly due to the
text-to-speech function.
● On freeways, interstates or other highways with higher speed limits, the voice
guidance will be made at earlier points
than on city streets in order to allow time
to maneuver the vehicle.
93
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
*: The system indicates a U-turn if the distance between 2 one-way roads (of opposite directions) is less than 50 ft. (15 m) in
residential areas or 164 ft. (50 m) in nonresidential areas.
No.
” The system announces the approach to the
final destination.
No.
Voice guidance
“In half of a mile, your destination is
ahead.”
Voice guidance
“Your destination is ahead.”
“In half of a mile, make a legal Uturn.”
“You have arrived at your destination. The route guidance is now finished.”
“Make a legal U-turn ahead.”
(Beep sound only)
” If a voice guidance command cannot be
heard, press the “MAP/VOICE” button
on the Remote Touch to hear it again.
” To adjust the voice guidance volume, see
“VOICE VOLUME” on page 63.
INFORMATION
● If the system cannot determine the cur-
rent position correctly (in cases of poor
GPS signal reception), the voice guidance may be early or late.
94
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
■ ROUTES INCLUDING IPD ROADS
Even when on IPD roads (roads that are
not completely digitized in our database), you will be guided along the
searched route via voice guidance.
CAUTION
● Be sure to obey the traffic regulations and
keep the road condition in mind especially when you are driving on IPD roads.
The route guidance may not have the
updated information such as the direction
of a one way street.
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
” After it has made a route calculation, the
system will advise the user whether IPD
roads are included in the route or not.
” The portion of the route that covers IPD
roads is indicated by light blue.
No.
Voice guidance
“On the way to your destination,
there will be roads with incomplete
data.”
“In half of a mile, left turn.”
“Next left. Upcoming roads have incomplete data. Please carefully observe the local traffic restrictions, as
they may not match the navigation
guidance.”
” IPD roads are roads that are not yet completely digitized in our database. However, their geometry, name and
administrative coding are already known.
95
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
3. DISTANCE AND TIME TO DESTINATION
When the vehicle is on the guidance
route, the distance and the estimated
travel/arrival time to the destination are
displayed. When the vehicle is not on the
guidance route, the distance and direction of the destination are displayed.
When driving on the guidance route
with more than 1 destination set, the distance and estimated travel/arrival time
from the current position to each destination are displayed.
Icon
Function
Estimated travel time is displayed.
Estimated arrival time is displayed.
Select to switch to estimated arrival time.
1 Select the screen button indicated by
Select to switch to estimated
travel time.
the arrow.
Displayed while driving off the
guidance route. The destination
direction is indicated by an arrow.
INFORMATION
● When the vehicle is on the guidance
2 Select the number screen button to display the desired destination.
route, the distance measured along the
route is displayed. Travel time and arrival
time are calculated based on the set vehicle speed information. (See “DRIVING
SPEEDS” on page 127.) However, when
the vehicle is not on the guidance route,
the distance is the linear distance
between the current position and the
destination.
” The distance, estimated travel time and
estimated arrival time from the current
position to the selected destination are displayed.
96
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
4. SETTING AND DELETING DESTINATIONS
ADDING DESTINATIONS
REORDERING
DESTINATIONS
Destinations can be added and routes
can be searched again.
1 Select “Route”.
When more than 1 destination is set, the
arrival order of the destinations can be
changed.
1 Select “Route”.
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2 Select “Add”.
2 Select “Reorder”.
3 Input an additional destination in the
same way as a destination search. (See
“DESTINATION SEARCH” on page
68.)
4 Select the desired “Add Destination
3 Select the desired destination and select “Move Up” or “Move Down” to
change the arrival order.
Here” to insert the new destination into
the route.
4 After selecting the destinations, select
“OK”.
” The system searches for the guidance
route again, and displays the entire route.
97
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
4 Select “Yes” to delete the destination(s).
DELETING DESTINATIONS
” If “Yes” is selected, the data cannot be
recovered. If more than 1 destination has
been set, the system will recalculate the
route(s) to the set destination(s) as necessary.
” If “No” is selected, the previous screen will
be displayed.
A set destination can be deleted.
1 Select “Route”.
2 Select “Delete”.
” When more than 1 destination is set, a list
will be displayed on the screen.
3 Select the destination to be deleted.
“Delete All”: Select to delete all destinations on the list.
” A message appears to confirm the request
to delete.
98
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
5. SETTING ROUTE
DETOUR SETTING
While the route guidance is operating,
the route can be changed to detour
around a section of the route where a
delay is caused by road repairs, or an accident, etc.
1 Select “Route”.
“1 mile (km)”, “3 miles (km)” or “5 miles
(km)”: Select one of these screen buttons to
start the detour process. After detouring,
the system returns to the original guidance
route.
“Whole Route”: Select to make the system
calculate an entire new route to the destination.
“Around Traffic”: Select to make the system
search for the route based on the traffic
congestion information received from XM
NavTraffic®. For details, see “XM
3
NavTraffic®” on page 341.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
INFORMATION
2 Select “Detour”.
● This picture shows an example of how the
3 Select a screen button to select the desired detour distance.
system would guide around a delay
caused by a traffic jam.
This position indicates the location of a
traffic jam caused by road repairs, an accident, etc.
This route indicates the detour suggested by the system.
● When the vehicle is on a freeway, the
detour distance selections are 5, 15 and
25 miles (or 5, 15 and 25 km if units are
in km).
● The system may not be able to calculate a
detour route depending on the selected
distance and surrounding road conditions.
99
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
TURN LIST
ROUTE OVERVIEW
1 Select
1 Select “Route”.
or
to skip to the next page
of the list of roads. Select and hold or
to scroll through the list of roads.
2 Select “Overview”.
: This mark indicates the direction in which
you should turn at the intersection.
“Map”: The selected point is displayed on
the map screen.
3 The entire route from the current position to the destination is displayed.
INFORMATION
● However, not all road names in the route
No.
Function
Select to display a list of the turns required to reach the destination.
may appear on the list. If a road changes
its name without requiring a turn (such as
on a street that runs through 2 or more
cities), the name change will not appear
on the list. The street names will be displayed in order from the starting point,
along with the distance to the next turn.
Select to start guidance.
100
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
4 The entire route from the starting point
ROUTE PREFERENCE
to the destination is displayed.
TO SELECT ROUTE TYPE
The Preferred, Short or Alternative
route can be selected.
1 Select “Route”.
“OK”: Select to start guidance.
“Edit Route”: Select to change a route.
(See page 89.)
2 Select “Preferences”.
A number of choices are available when
setting the conditions the system uses to
determine the route to the destination.
1 Select “Route”.
3 Select “Preferred”, “Short” or “Alternate” and select “OK”.
101
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
TO SELECT ROUTE FEATURES
3
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
2 Select “Preferences” to display conditions that can be selected when the system determines the route to the
destination.
STARTING ROUTE FROM
ADJACENT ROAD
The route guidance can be started from
an adjacent road.
(e.g. When route guidance is set on the
freeway, but the vehicle is driven parallel
along the freeway.)
1 Select “Route”.
3 Select the desired route preferences.
2 Select “Preferences”.
” The system will avoid using routes that
include items whose indicators are off.
4 After selecting the desired route preference, select “OK”.
3 Select “Start from Adjacent Road”.
INFORMATION
● When there is no adjacent road, this
screen button will not be displayed.
102
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
TO RESUME GUIDANCE
PAUSING AND RESUMING
GUIDANCE
1 Select “Route”.
TO PAUSE GUIDANCE
1 Select “Route”.
2 Select “Resume Guidance”.
3
” The map screen, with the current position
displayed, will be returned to.
” The screen will return to the current position map without route guidance.
INFORMATION
● Without route guidance, “Pause Guid-
ance” cannot be used.
103
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2 Select “Pause Guidance”.
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
” A screen with a limited choice of POI will
be displayed. (To change the displayed POI
list, see page 129.)
SHOW ON MAP
DISPLAY POI ICONS
POI icons such as gas stations and restaurants can be displayed on the map
screen. Their location can also be set as
a destination and used for route guidance.
1 Select “Show on Map”.
SELECTING POI ICONS TO BE
DISPLAYED
Up to 5 categories of icons can be displayed on the map screen.
1 Select the desired POIs category to display POI location icons on the map
screen.
2 Select “Select POI” to display a particular type of POI icon on the screen.
” When the POI icons to be displayed on the
map screen have already been set,
“Change POI” is displayed.
” By selecting the desired POI category and
then selecting “OK”, the selected POI
icons are displayed on the map screen.
” To turn off the POI icons on the map
screen, select “Clear”.
“Other POIs”: Select to display other POIs
categories if the desired POIs cannot be
found on the limited choice screen.
“Find Local POI”: Select to search for the
nearest POIs. Then select one of the categories. The system will list the points within
20 miles (32 km). (See page 105.)
2 Select “Other POIs” on the “Select POI
Icons” screen.
” When a POI category is selected from
either the limited list or the complete list,
the icons of those locations will be displayed on the map screen.
104
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
3 Select the desired POI categories.
TO DISPLAY THE LOCAL POI
LIST
Points of Interest that are within
20 miles (32 km) of the current position
will be listed from among the selected
categories.
1 Select “Find Local POI”.
” The selected category’s icon will appear on
the top left of the screen.
” By selecting the desired POI category and
then selecting “OK”, the selected POI
icons are displayed on the map screen.
” If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, select “List All Categories” to list
all POI categories.
3
POI.
” Select the desired POI categories from the
list.
• The selected category icon appears on
the top left of the screen.
• By selecting the desired POI category
and then selecting “OK”, the selected
POI icons are displayed on the map
screen.
• To return to the POI category selection
screen, select “More”.
” The selected POIs are displayed on the
map screen.
“Near...”: Select to search for POIs near the
current position or along the route.
105
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2 Select the screen button of the desired
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
2 When the desired POI overlaps with the
cursor, select “Enter
”.
” The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and
route preference. (See “STARTING
ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 87.)
TO HIDE POI ICONS
No.
Function
1 Select “Show on Map”.
Select to display the list of POIs near
the current position.
Select to display the list of POIs
along the route.
TO SET A POI AS A
DESTINATION
One of the Point of Interest icons can be
selected on the map screen as a destination and can be used for route guidance.
2 Select “POI Icons”.
1 Directly select the desired POI icon to
set it as a destination.
” The “POI Icons” indicator is dimmed.
” The map screen will be displayed with the
POI icons hidden.
” To display the POI icons again, select “POI
Icons” on the “Show on Map” screen.
” The map will shift so that the icon is centered on the screen and overlaps with the
cursor . At this time, the distance from
the current position is displayed on the
screen. The distance shown is measured as
a straight line from the current position to
the POI.
106
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
TO STOP RECORDING THE
ROUTE TRACE
ROUTE TRACE
Up to 124 miles (200 km) of the traveled route can be stored and retraced
on the display.
1 Select “Show on Map”.
INFORMATION
● This feature is available when the map
scale is more than 30 miles (50 km).
TO START RECORDING THE
ROUTE TRACE
3
2 Select “Route Trace”.
” Selecting “Yes” stops recording and the
route trace remains displayed on the
screen.
” Selecting “No” stops recording and the
route trace is erased.
2 Select “Route Trace”.
” The “Route Trace” indicator is highlighted.
107
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
1 Select “Show on Map”.
3. ADDRESS BOOK
1. NAVIGATION SETTINGS
Points or areas on the map can be registered.
The registered points can be used on the
“Destination” screen. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH BY HOME” on page
69, and “DESTINATION SEARCH BY
“Address Book”” on page 81.)
Registered areas to avoid, will be avoided when the system searches for a route.
3 Select “Navigation”.
4 Select the desired items to be set.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
” On this screen, the following operations
can be performed:
No.
Function
2 Select “Setup”.
Page
Select to set home.
109
Select to set preset destinations.
111
Select to set the address
book.
114
Select to set areas to avoid.
119
Select to delete previous
destinations.
124
Select to set detailed navigation settings.
125
108
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. ADDRESS BOOK
5 Select the desired screen button.
SETTING UP THE “Home”
If home has been registered, that information can be recalled by selecting “Go
Home” on the “Destination” screen.
(See “DESTINATION SEARCH BY
HOME” on page 69.)
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
No.
2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
4 Select “Home”.
Function
Page
Registering home
109
3
Editing home
110
Deleting home
111
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
REGISTERING HOME
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3 Select “Home” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.
4 Select “Set Home”.
109
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. ADDRESS BOOK
5 Select the desired screen button and
enter the location in the same way as for
a destination search. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 68.)
5 Select “Edit” next to the item to be edited.
No.
” When registration of home is completed,
the “Edit Home” screen will be displayed.
6 Select “OK”.
” To edit registered information, see
“EDITING HOME” on page 110.
EDITING HOME
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3 Select “Home” on the “Navigation Set-
Function
Page
Select to edit the home
name. The name can be displayed on the map.
117
Select to edit location information.
117
Select to edit the phone
number.
118
Select to change the icon to
be displayed on the map.
116
“Show Name on Map”: The name of a home
can be set to be displayed on the map by selecting “On” or “Off”. (See page 117.)
6 Select “OK”.
tings” screen.
4 Select “Edit”.
110
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. ADDRESS BOOK
DELETING HOME
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3 Select “Home” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.
4 Select “Delete”.
SETTING UP THE “Preset
Destinations”
If preset destination has been registered, that information can be recalled
by using “Preset Destinations” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen. (See
“DESTINATION SEARCH BY PRESET DESTINATIONS” on page 69.)
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch” 3
on page 10.)
screen.
5 Select “Yes” to delete home and select
4 Select “Preset Destinations”.
“No” to cancel the deletion.
111
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
3. ADDRESS BOOK
5 Select the desired screen button.
5 Select the desired screen button and
enter the location in the same way as for
a destination search. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 68.)
No.
Function
Page
Registering a preset destination
112
Editing a preset destination
113
Deleting a preset destination
113
6 Select a position for this preset destination.
REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
7 Select “OK”.
screen.
3 Select “Preset Destinations” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.
4 Select “Set”.
” When registration of a preset destination is
completed, the “Edit Preset Destination”
screen will be displayed.
” To edit registered information, see
“EDITING PRESET DESTINATIONS”
on page 113.
112
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. ADDRESS BOOK
EDITING PRESET
DESTINATIONS
No.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3 Select “Preset Destinations” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.
4 Select “Edit”.
Function
Page
Select to edit the preset
destination name. The
name can be displayed on
the map.
117
Select to edit location information.
117
Select to edit the phone
number.
118
Select to change the icon to
be displayed on the map.
116
3
7 Select “OK”.
5 Select the screen button of the desired
preset destination.
DELETING PRESET
DESTINATIONS
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3 Select “Preset Destinations” on the
6 Select “Edit” next to the item to be edit-
“Navigation Settings” screen.
ed.
113
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
“Show Name on Map”: The name of a preset destination can be set to be displayed on
the map by selecting “On” or “Off”. (See
page 117.)
3. ADDRESS BOOK
4 Select “Delete”.
SETTING UP THE “Address
Book”
Points or areas on the map can be registered.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
5 Select the preset destination to be deleted.
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
4 Select “Address Book”.
Screen button
Function
“Select All”
Select all preset destinations.
“Unselect All”
Select to cancel the
“Select All” function.
5 Select the desired screen button.
6 Select “Delete”.
7 Select “Yes” to delete the preset destination and select “No” to cancel the deletion.
No.
Function
Page
Registering address book
entries
115
Editing address book entries
115
Deleting address book entries
118
114
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. ADDRESS BOOK
REGISTERING ADDRESS
BOOK ENTRIES
INFORMATION
● Up to 100 address book entries can be
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
registered.
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3 Select “Address Book” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.
4 Select “New”.
EDITING ADDRESS BOOK
ENTRIES
The icon, name, location and/or phone
number of a registered address book
entry can be edited.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
3
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
screen.
3 Select “Address Book” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.
5 Select the desired screen button and
4 Select “Edit”.
enter the location in the same way as for
a destination search. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 68.)
5 Select the screen button of the desired
address book entry.
” After the address book entry has been registered, the “Edit Address Book Entry”
screen will be displayed.
6 Select “OK”.
” To edit registered information, see
“EDITING
ADDRESS
BOOK
ENTRIES” on page 115.
115
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
3. ADDRESS BOOK
6 Select “Edit” next to the item to be edited.
■ TO CHANGE “Icon”
1 Select “Edit”.
No.
Function
Page
Select to edit the address
book entry name. The
name can be displayed on
the map.
117
Select to edit location information.
117
Select to edit the phone
number.
118
Select to change the icon to
be displayed on the map.
116
“Show Name on Map”: The name of an address book entry can be set to be displayed
on the map by selecting “On” or “Off”. (See
page 117.)
7 Select “OK”.
2 Select the desired icon.
” Change pages by selecting the “Page 1”,
“Page 2” or “With Sound” tab.
■ SOUND ICONS
A sound for some address book entries
can be set. When the vehicle approaches the location of the address book entry, the selected sound will be heard.
1 Select the “With Sound” tab on the “Address Book Entry Icon” screen.
2 Select the desired sound icon.
” The next screen appears when “Bell (with
Direction)” is selected.
116
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. ADDRESS BOOK
3 Select either
or
to adjust the direction. Then select “OK”.
■ DISPLAYING ADDRESS BOOK
ENTRY NAMES
1 Select “On” to display the name on the
map and select “Off” to not display it.
INFORMATION
● The bell sounds only when the vehicle
3
■ TO CHANGE “Location”
1 Select “Edit”.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
approaches this point in the direction that
has been set.
■ TO CHANGE “Name”
1 Select “Edit”.
2 Select one of the 8 directional screen
buttons to move the cursor
sired point on the map.
to the de-
2 Enter the name using the alphanumeric
keys.
3 Select “OK”.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
” Up to 70 characters can be entered.
3 Select “OK”.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
117
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. ADDRESS BOOK
4 Select “Delete”.
■ TO CHANGE “Phone #”
(PHONE NUMBER)
1 Select “Edit”.
5 Select the address to be deleted.
2 Enter the number using the number
keys.
Screen button
Function
“Select All”
Select all registered addresses.
“Unselect All”
Select to cancel the
“Select All” function.
3 Select “OK”.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
DELETING ADDRESS BOOK
ENTRIES
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
6 Select “Delete”.
7 Select “Yes” to delete the address book
entries and select “No” to cancel the deletion.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3 Select “Address Book” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.
118
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. ADDRESS BOOK
SETTING UP THE “Areas to
Avoid”
No.
Areas to be avoided because of traffic
jams, construction work or other reasons can be registered as areas to avoid.
Function
Page
Registering areas to avoid
119
Editing areas to avoid
120
Deleting areas to avoid
123
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
4 Select “Areas to Avoid”.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
3
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3 Select “Areas to Avoid” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.
4 Select “New”.
5 Select the desired screen button.
119
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
screen.
REGISTERING AREAS TO
AVOID
3. ADDRESS BOOK
5 Select the desired screen button and
enter the location in the same way as for
a destination search, or display the map
of the area to be avoided. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 68.)
INFORMATION
● If a destination is input in the area to avoid
or the route calculation cannot be made
without running through the area to
avoid, a route passing through the area to
be avoided may be shown.
● Up to 10 locations can be registered as
points/areas to avoid.
EDITING AREA TO AVOID
6 Scroll the map to the desired point.
The name, location and/or area size of a
registered area can be edited.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3 Select “Areas to Avoid” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.
“Adjust Location”: Select to adjust the position in smaller increments.
4 Select “Edit”.
7 Select “Enter”.
8 Select either
or
to change the
size of the area to be avoided.
5 Select the area to be avoided.
9 Select “OK”.
” When registration of an area to avoid is
completed, the “Area to Avoid” screen will
be displayed.
120
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. ADDRESS BOOK
6 Select “Edit” next to the item to be edited.
■ TO CHANGE “Name”
1 Select “Edit”.
No.
Function
Page
3
keys.
121
Select to edit area location.
122
Select to edit area size.
122
“Show Name on Map”: The name of an area to
be avoided can be set to be displayed on the
map by selecting “On” or “Off”. (See page
121.)
“Active”: The area to avoid feature can be
set to “On” or “Off”.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to edit the name of
the area to avoid. The name
can be displayed on the
map.
7 Select “OK”.
2 Enter the name using the alphanumeric
” Up to 70 characters can be entered.
3 Select “OK”.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
■ DISPLAYING NAMES OF AREAS
TO BE AVOIDED
1 Select “On”, next to “Show Name on
Map”, to display the name of an area to
be avoided on the map. Select “Off” not
to display it.
121
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. ADDRESS BOOK
■ TO CHANGE “Location”
■ TO CHANGE “Size”
1 Select “Edit”.
1 Select “Edit”.
2 Select one of the 8 directional screen
buttons to move the cursor
sired point on the map.
to the de-
3 Select “OK”.
2 Select either
or
to change the
size of the area to be avoided.
3 Select “OK”.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
122
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. ADDRESS BOOK
DELETING AREAS TO AVOID
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
6 Select “Delete”.
7 Select “Yes” to delete the area(s) and
select “No” to cancel the deletion.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3 Select “Areas to Avoid” on the “Navigation Settings” screen.
4 Select “Delete”.
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
5 Select the area to be deleted.
Screen button
Function
“Select All”
Select all registered areas to avoid.
“Unselect All”
Select to cancel the
“Select All” function.
123
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. ADDRESS BOOK
DELETING PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS
Screen button
Function
“Select All”
Select all previous destinations.
“Unselect All”
Select to cancel the
“Select All” function.
Previous destinations can be deleted.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
6 Select “Delete”.
7 Select “Yes” to delete the destination(s)
and select “No” to cancel the deletion.
screen.
4 Select “Delete Previous Dest.”.
5 Select the previous destination to be deleted.
124
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4. SETUP
1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS
Settings are available for driving speeds,
favorite POI categories, automatic
screen change, “vv Off” function, etc.
4 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings”.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
5 Select the items to be set.
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2 Select “Setup”.
6 Select “Save”.
SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION
SETTINGS
3 Select “Navigation”.
” On this screen, the following functions can
be performed:
125
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4. SETUP
No.
Function
No.
Function
Select to set the average cruising
speed. (See “DRIVING SPEEDS”
on page 127.)
Select to set screen buttons to be
displayed on the map screen when
“vv Off” is selected. (See
“SCREEN LAYOUT FUNCTION
(“vv Off” Function)” on page 130.)
Select to set the automatic input
function to “On” or “Off”.
Select to adjust the current position
mark manually. Miscalculation of the
distance caused by tire replacement
can also be adjusted. (See “CURRENT POSITION/TIRE CHANGE
CALIBRATION” on page 130.)
Select to set the voice guidance for
the next street name to “On” or
“Off” during route guidance.
Select to set the automatic reroute of
the guidance route to avoid heavy
congestion to “On” or “Off”. (See
“AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC” on page
127.)
Select to set the display of pop-up information to “On” or “Off”. (See
“POP-UP INFORMATION” on
page 132.)
Select to set the indication of freely
flowing traffic by the arrow to “On”
or “Off”. (See “SHOW FREE
FLOWING TRAFFIC” on page
128.)
Select to set displayed POI icon categories. (See “POI CATEGORY
CHANGE (SELECT POI ICONS)”
on page 129.)
Select to set IPD road guidance to
“On” or “Off”. (For information on
IPD roads, see page 95.)
” To reset all setup items, select “Default”.
126
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4. SETUP
6 After setting of the desired speeds is
DRIVING SPEEDS
completed, select “Save”.
The speed that is used for the calculation
of the estimated travel time and estimated arrival time can be set.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.
the approximate driving time that is calculated based on the selected speeds
and the actual position along the guidance route.
● The time shown on the screen may vary
greatly depending on progress along the
route, which may be affected by conditions such as traffic jams and construction
work.
● Up to 99 hours 59 minutes can be displayed.
AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC
5 Select “ ” or “ ” to set the average vehicle speeds for “Residential”, “Main
Streets” and “Freeways”.
The guidance route automatically
changes to another route to avoid heavy
congestion when “Avoid Traffic” is
turned on.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.
4 Select “Avoid Traffic”.
” To set the default speeds, select “Default”.
” To use settings based on traffic information,
select “Consider Traffic Info.”.
127
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4 Select “Driving Speeds”.
INFORMATION
● The displayed time to the destination is
4. SETUP
5 Select “On” or “Off”.
6 Select “Save”.
SHOW FREE FLOWING
TRAFFIC
” When congestion information about the
guidance route has been received, a
screen will appear to ask if it is desirable to
reroute to avoid the congestion.
” Select “Yes” to reroute. Another route to
avoid the congestion will appear.
” Select “No” if it is not desirable to reroute.
Free flowing traffic can be shown by an
arrow when “Show Free Flowing Traffic” is turned on.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
INFORMATION
● When the “Traffic Information” indicator
is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic Incident
Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic”
will not operate. (See page 342.)
3 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.
4 Select “Show Free Flowing Traffic”.
5 Select “On” or “Off”.
6 Select “Save”.
INFORMATION
● When the “Traffic Information” indicator
is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic Incident
Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic”
will not operate. (See page 342.)
128
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4. SETUP
6 Select the desired group.
POI CATEGORY CHANGE
(SELECT POI ICONS)
Select up to 6 POI icons to be displayed
on the map screen.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.
” If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, select “List All Categories” to list
all POI categories.
7 Select the desired category.
5 Select the category to be changed.
” The screen returns to the “Favorite POI
Categories” screen.
8 Select “OK”.
129
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4 Select “Favorite POI Categories”.
3
4. SETUP
SCREEN LAYOUT FUNCTION
(“vv Off” Function)
Each screen button and current street
name on the map screen can be displayed or hidden.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
CURRENT POSITION/TIRE
CHANGE CALIBRATION
The current position mark can be adjusted manually. Miscalculation of the distance caused by tire replacement can
also be adjusted.
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
screen.
3 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.
screen.
3 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.
4 Select ““vv Off” Function”.
4 Select “Calibration”.
5 Select the screen buttons to be turned
off. The selected screen buttons will be
dimmed.
” To set the setting as a default, select
“Default”.
6 Select “OK”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
5 Select the desired screen button.
” For additional information on the accuracy of a current position, see “LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION
SYSTEM” on page 139.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
7 Select “Save”.
130
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4. SETUP
■ POSITION/DIRECTION
BRATION
CALI-
4 Select either
or
to adjust the direction of the current position mark.
When driving, the current position mark
will be automatically corrected by GPS
signals. If GPS reception is poor due to
location, the current position mark can
be adjusted manually.
1 Select “Position / Direction”.
5 Select “OK”.
” The map will be displayed.
3
■ TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION
buttons to move the cursor
sired point on the map.
to the de-
1 To perform the distance calibration procedure, select “Tire Change”.
3 Select “OK”.
” The message appears and the quick distance calibration is automatically started. A
few seconds later, a map will be displayed.
131
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2 Select one of the 8 directional screen
The tire change calibration function will
be used when replacing the tires. This
function will adjust miscalculation
caused by the circumference difference
between the old and new tires.
4. SETUP
INFORMATION
● If this procedure is not performed when
wThis message appears when the map
scale is over 0.5 miles (800 m).
the tires are replaced, the current position mark may be incorrectly displayed.
POP-UP INFORMATION
When “Pop-up information” is turned
on, pop-up information will be displayed.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
wThis message appears when the map is
switched to dual map screen mode.
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Navigation” on the “Setup”
screen.
3 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” on the
“Navigation Settings” screen.
4 Select “Pop-up Information”.
5 Select “On” or “Off”.
6 Select “Save”.
” When “Pop-up Information” is turned off,
the following messages will not be displayed.
132
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4. SETUP
2. VEHICLE SETTINGS
4 Select “Maintenance”.
MAINTENANCE
When the navigation system is turned
on, the “Maintenance Reminder” screen
displays when it is time to replace a part
or certain components. (See page 32.)
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
5 Select the desired screen button.
3
” Setting maintenance information. (See
page 133.)
” Setting dealer. (See page 135.)
MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION SETTING
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
3 Select “Vehicle”.
2 Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Maintenance” on the “Vehicle
Settings” screen.
133
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2 Select “Setup”.
4. SETUP
4 Select the desired screen button.
” When the vehicle needs to be serviced, the
screen button color will change to orange.
Screen button
“Engine oil”
Function
“Personal”
New information items
can be created separately
from provided ones.
“Delete All”
Select to cancel all conditions which have been input.
“Reset All”
Select to reset the item
which has satisfied a condition.
“Set Dealer”
Select to register dealer
information. (See “DEALER SETTING” on page
135.)
“Dealer Info.”
Select to edit dealer information. (See “DEALER
SETTING” on page 135.)
“Reminder”
When this screen button
is selected, the indicator is
illuminated. The system is
set to give maintenance
information with the
“Maintenance Reminder”
screen. (See page 32.)
Function
Replace engine oil
“Oil filter”
Replace engine oil filter
“Rotation”
Rotate tires
“Tires”
Replace tires
“Battery”
Screen button
Replace 12-volt battery
“Brake pad”
Replace brake pads
“Wipers”
Replace wiper blades
“Coolant”
Replace coolant
“Brake oil”
Replace brake fluid
“Trans. fluid”
Replace transmission fluid
“Service”
Scheduled maintenance
“Air filter”
Replace air filter
134
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4. SETUP
5 Input the conditions.
DEALER SETTING
Dealer information can be registered in
the system. With dealer information registered, route guidance to the dealer is
available.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
No.
Function
Select to input the next maintenance
date.
Settings” screen.
4 Select “Set Dealer”.
Select to cancel the date and distance
conditions.
Select to reset the date and distance
conditions.
6 Select “OK”.
” The screen then returns to the “Maintenance” screen.
INFORMATION
5 If a dealer has not been registered, enter
the location of a dealer in the same way
as for a destination search. (See “DESTINATION SEARCH” on page 68.)
● For scheduled maintenance information,
refer to “Warranty and Services Guide/
Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.
● Depending on driving or road conditions,
the actual date and distance maintenance
should be performed may differ from the
stored date and distance in the system.
135
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Select to input the driving distance
until the next maintenance check.
2 Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Maintenance” on the “Vehicle
4. SETUP
” When “Set Dealer” registration is finished,
the “Dealer” screen is displayed.
6 Select “Edit” next to the item to be edited.
■ TO EDIT “Dealer” OR “Contact”
1 Select “Edit” next to “Dealer” or “Contact”.
2 Enter the name using the alphanumeric
No.
keys.
Function
Select to enter the name of a dealer.
(See page 136.)
Select to enter the name of a dealer
member. (See page 136.)
Select to set the location. (See page
137.)
Select to enter the phone number.
(See page 137.)
” Up to 70 characters can be entered for
dealer and 24 characters for contact.
Select to delete the dealer information displayed on the screen.
3 Select “OK”.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
Select to set the displayed dealer as a
destination. (See “STARTING
ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 87.)
136
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4. SETUP
■ TO EDIT “Location”
■ TO EDIT “Phone #”
(PHONE NUMBER)
1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”.
1 Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”.
2 Select one of the 8 directional screen
3 Select “OK”.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
2 Enter the number using number keys.
3
3 Select “OK”.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
buttons to move the cursor to the desired point on the map screen.
” The previous screen will be displayed.
137
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4. SETUP
VEHICLE CUSTOMIZATION
CAUTION
● When performing the customization pro-
Vehicle settings can be changed.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3 Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
4 Select “Vehicle Customization”.
cedure, ensure that there is sufficient ventilation in the vehicle and surrounding
area. If there is insufficient ventilation,
exhaust gases may collect and enter the
vehicle. Exhaust gases include harmful
carbon monoxide (CO) and inhaling
them may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
INFORMATION
● To avoid discharging the 12-volt battery,
perform the customization procedure
with the engine running .
5 Select the desired items to be set.
” For a list of the settings that can be
changed, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.
6 After changing the settings, select
“Save”. A message indicating that the
settings are being saved will appear. Do
not perform any other operations while
this message is displayed.
138
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
1. LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This navigation system calculates the
current position using satellite signals,
various vehicle signals, map data, etc.
However, an accurate position may not
be shown depending on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstances.
NOTICE
● The installation of window tinting may
obstruct the GPS signals. Most window
tinting contains some metallic content
that will interfere with GPS signal reception of the antenna in the instrument
panel. We advise against the use of window tinting on vehicles equipped with
navigation systems.
139
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
The Global Positioning System (GPS) developed and operated by the U.S. Department of Defense provides an accurate
current position, normally using 4 or more
satellites, and in some case 3 satellites. The
GPS system has a certain level of inaccuracy. While the navigation system will compensate for this most of the time, occasional
positioning errors of up to 300 ft. (100 m)
can and should be expected. Generally, position errors will be corrected within a few
seconds.
When the vehicle is receiving signals from
satellites, the “GPS” mark appears at the
top left of the screen.
The GPS signal may be physically obstructed, leading to inaccurate vehicle position on
the map screen. Tunnels, tall buildings,
trucks, or even the placement of objects on
the instrument panel may obstruct the GPS
signals.
The GPS satellites may not send signals due
to repairs or improvements being made to
them.
Even when the navigation system is receiv- 3
ing clear GPS signals, the vehicle position
may not be shown accurately or inappropriate route guidance may occur in some cases.
5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
” Accurate current position may not be
shown in the following cases:
• When driving on a small angled Y-shaped
road.
• When driving on a winding road.
• When driving on a slippery road such as
in sand, gravel, snow, etc.
• When driving on a long straight road.
• When freeway and surface streets run in
parallel.
• After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.
• When a long route is searched during
high speed driving.
• When driving without setting the current
position calibration correctly.
• After repeating a change of direction by
going forward and backward, or turning
on a turntable in a parking lot.
• When leaving a covered parking lot or
parking garage.
• When a roof carrier is installed.
• When driving with tire chains installed.
• When the tires are worn.
• After replacing a tire or tires.
• When using tires that are smaller or
larger than the factory specifications.
• When the tire pressure in any of the 4
tires is not correct.
” If the vehicle cannot receive GPS signals,
the current position can be adjusted
manually. For information on setting the
current position calibration, see page
130.
” Inappropriate route guidance may occur in
the following cases:
• When turning at an intersection off the
designated route guidance.
• If you set more than 1 destination but skip
any of them, auto reroute will display a
route returning to the destination on the
previous route.
• When turning at an intersection for which
there is no route guidance.
• When passing through an intersection for
which there is no route guidance.
• During auto reroute, the route guidance
may not be available for the next turn to
the right or left.
• During high speed driving, it may take a
long time for auto reroute to operate. In
auto reroute, a detour route may be
shown.
• After auto reroute, the route may not be
changed.
• If an unnecessary U-turn is shown or
announced.
• If a location has multiple names and the
system announces 1 or more of them.
• When a route cannot be searched.
• If the route to your destination includes
gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the route
guidance may not be shown.
• Your destination point might be shown on
the opposite side of the street.
• When a portion of the route has regulations prohibiting the entry of the vehicle
that vary by time or season or other reasons.
• The road and map data stored in the navigation system may not be complete or
may not be the latest version.
140
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
” After replacing a tire, implement the
operation described in “TIRE CHANGE
CALIBRATION”. (See page 131.)
INFORMATION
● This navigation system uses tire turning
data and is designed to work with factoryspecified tires for the vehicle. Installing
tires that are larger or smaller than the
originally equipped diameter may cause
inaccurate display of the current position.
The tire pressure also affects the diameter of the tires, so make sure that the tire
pressure of all 4 tires is correct.
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
141
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
142
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
Bluetooth® phones can be operated via the navigation system’s screen. To display the
hands-free operation screen, press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch and
then select “Phone”, or the switch on the steering wheel.
144
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
No.
Name
The condition
of Bluetooth®
connection
Function
No connection
Good
An antenna for the Bluetooth® connection is built in the instrument
panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection may deteriorate
and the system may not function when a Bluetooth® phone is used in
the following conditions and/or places:
• The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as when
it is behind the seat or in the glove box and console box).
• The cellular phone touches or is covered with metal materials.
Leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where the condition of the
Bluetooth® connection is good.
When the cellular phone is not connected, “No Connect” is displayed.
4
The receiving
area
The level of
reception
“Rm” is displayed when receiving in a roaming area.
The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the type of
phone you have.
Poor
Excellent
The level of reception does not always correspond with the level displayed on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not be displayed depending on the phone you have.
When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place inaccessible by radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.
145
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PHONE
The amount of
battery charge
left
Empty
Full
This is not displayed when the Bluetooth® is not connected.
The amount displayed does not always correspond with the amount
displayed on the cellular phone. The amount of battery charge left
may not be displayed depending on the type of phone you have. This
system does not have a charging function.
1. PHONE OPERATION
2. PHONE (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONE)
The hands-free system enables calls to
be made and received without having to
take your hands off the steering wheel.
®
This system supports Bluetooth .
Bluetooth® is a wireless data system
that enables cellular phones to be used
without being connected by a cable or
placed in a cradle.
The operating procedure of the phone is
explained here.
” For registering and setting of the phone,
see “PHONE SETTINGS” on page 172
and “Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page
194.
CAUTION
● While driving, do not use a cellular phone
or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
● An antenna for the Bluetooth® connec-
NOTICE
● Do not leave your cellular phone in the
vehicle. The temperature inside may rise
to a level that could damage the phone.
INFORMATION
● If your cellular phone does not support
Bluetooth®, this system cannot function.
● In the following conditions, the system
may not function:
• The cellular phone is turned off.
• The current position is outside the communication area.
• The cellular phone is not connected.
• The cellular phone has a low battery.
● When using Bluetooth® audio and
hands-free at the same time, the following
problems may occur:
• The Bluetooth® connection may be cut.
• Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth®
audio playback.
tion is built in the instrument panel. People with implanted pacemakers or
cardiac defibrillators should maintain a
reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The
radio waves may affect the operation of
such devices.
● Before using cellular phones, users of any
electrical medical device other than
implanted pacemakers and implanted
cardiac defibrillators should consult the
manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could
have unexpected effects on the operation
of such medical devices.
146
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
USING THE PHONE SWITCH
INFORMATION
● This system supports the following ser-
By pressing the phone switch, a call can
be received or ended without taking
your hands off the steering wheel.
4
” The microphone can be used when talking
on the phone.
*: This profile is necessary when using
Apps. (See “APPS” on page 356.)
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
147
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PHONE
vices:
• Bluetooth® Specification
Ver.1.1 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.2.1 + EDR or
higher)
• Profiles
HFP (Hands Free Profile)
Ver.1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.1.5 or higher)
OPP (Object Push Profile)
Ver.1.1 or higher
PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
Ver.1.0 or higher
MAP (Message Access Profile)
Ver.1.0 or higher
SPP (Serial Port Profile)
Ver.1.1 or higher*
● If your cellular phone does not support
HFP, registering the Bluetooth® phone
or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles individually will not be possible.
● If the connected Bluetooth® phone version is older than recommended or
incompatible, this function may not be
used.
● Refer to http://www.lexus.com/ to find
approved Bluetooth® phones for this system.
1. PHONE OPERATION
INFORMATION
● The other party’s voice will be heard from
the front speakers. The audio/video system will be muted during phone calls or
when hands-free voice commands are
used.
● Talk alternately with the other party on
the phone. If both parties speak at the
same time, the other party may not hear
what has been said. (This is not a malfunction.)
● Keep call volume down. Otherwise, the
other party’s voice may be audible outside the vehicle and voice echo may
increase. When talking on the phone,
speak clearly towards the microphone.
● The other party may not hear you clearly
when:
• Driving on an unpaved road. (Making
excessive traffic noise.)
• Driving at high speeds.
• The roof or windows are open.
• The air conditioning vents are pointed
towards the microphone.
• The sound of the air-conditioning fan is
loud.
• There is a negative effect on sound
quality due to the phone and/or network
being used.
USING THE STEERING
SWITCHES
Volume control switch
” Press the “+” side to increase the volume.
” Press the “-” side to decrease the volume.
Back switch
” Press the back switch to return to the previous screen.
148
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
ABOUT THE PHONEBOOK IN
THIS SYSTEM
WHEN SELLING OR
DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE
” The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is connected, the following registered data
cannot be read:
• Phonebook data
• Call history data
• Speed dial data
• Image data
• All phone settings
• Message settings
A lot of personal data is registered when
the hands-free system is used. When
selling or disposing of the vehicle, initialize the data. (See “DELETING PERSONAL DATA” on page 61.)
INFORMATION
● When a phone’s registration is deleted,
INFORMATION
● Once initialized, the data and settings will
be erased. Pay much attention when initializing the data.
149
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PHONE
the above-mentioned data is also
deleted.
” The following data in the system can be initialized:
• Phonebook data
• Call history data
• Speed dial data
• Image data
4
• All phone settings
• Message settings
1. PHONE OPERATION
wU.S.A.
wCanada
” FCC ID : BABFT0033A
” This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference
received,
including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
● FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
● CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation
Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled equipment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that it deemed to comply without
maximum
permissive
exposure
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it
should be installed and operated with at
least 20 cm and more between the
radiator and person’s body (excluding
extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
ankles).
● Co-location: This transmitter must not be
co-located or operated in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
” IC: 2024B-FT0033A
” This device complies with Industry
Canada
licence-exempt
RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
” Le présent appareil est conforme aux
CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit
pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en
compromettre le fonctionnement.
150
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
CAUTION
● CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation
Exposure
This equipment complies with IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled equipment and meets RSS102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. This equipment has very
low levels of RF energy that it deemed to
comply without maximum permissive
exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is
desirable that it should be installed and
operated with at least 20 cm and more
between the radiator and person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet
and ankles).
● ATTENTION : Exposition aux radiations
des fréquences radioélectriques
Cet équipement se conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux radiations établies par
Industrie Canada pour un environnement
non contrôlé ainsi qu’aux directives
d’exposition
aux
fréquences
radioélectriques (RF) émises par
Industrie Canada dans la norme
CNR-102. Cet équipement émet un
niveau d’énergie RF faible à un point tel
qu’il se conforme sans devoir effectuer
d’évaluation d’exposition maximum
admissible (MPE). Lorsque l’équipement
est installé et utilisé, il est toutefois
souhaitable de laisser au moins 20 cm
entre l’antenne et le corps (à l’exception
des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et
chevilles).
● This Category II radiocommunication
device complies with Industry Canada
Standard RSS-310.
● Ce dispositif de radiocommunication de
catégorie II respecte la norme CNR-310
d’Industrie Canada.
4
PHONE
151
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
3. REGISTER A Bluetooth® PHONE
To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a phone with the system.
Once the phone has been registered, it
is possible to make a hands-free call.
If a Bluetooth® phone has not been registered yet, it is necessary to register it
first according to the following procedure. A Bluetooth® phone cannot be
registered while driving.
” See “REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE” on page 195 of additional registration when registering.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
2 Select “Phone”.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
on the steering wheel.
pressing
3 Select “Yes” to register a phone.
” If 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been
registered, a registered device needs to be
deleted. See “When 5 Bluetooth® devices
have already been registered” on page
153.
4 When this screen is displayed, operate
the Bluetooth® device.
” Search for the navigation system displayed
on the system’s screen using your
Bluetooth® device, and register the
Bluetooth® device.
For details about operating the Bluetooth®
device, see the manual that comes with it.
” A passcode is not required for SSP (Secure
Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth®
phones. Depending on the type of
Bluetooth® phone being connected, a
message confirming registration may be
displayed on the Bluetooth® phone’s
screen. Respond and operate the
Bluetooth® phone according to the confirmation message.
152
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
” To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.
” If the Bluetooth® phone to be registered
has a Bluetooth® audio function, this can
be registered at the same time.
5 This screen will be displayed when registration is complete.
wWhen 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered
1 When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered, a registered device needs to be deleted. Select “Yes” to
delete 1 or more.
2 Select the device to be deleted, then select “Remove”.
3 Select “Yes”.
wIf the Bluetooth® phone has a
Bluetooth® audio function
” When using the same phone, it is not necessary to register it again.
4
wWhen another Bluetooth® device is connected
PHONE
wWhen this screen is displayed, follow the
guidance on the screen to try again.
” When the Bluetooth® phone to be registered has a Bluetooth® audio function, this
audio function will be registered automatically at the same time and this screen may
be displayed. If this screen is displayed,
select “Yes” to connect the audio function
or select “No” to cancel the connection.
” When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed.
” To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,
select “Yes”.
153
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
PHONE
AUTOMATICALLY
When a phone is registered, auto connection is turned on. Always set it to this
mode and leave the Bluetooth® phone
in a location where connection can be
established.
” The system will connect with the phone that
was last connected, if it is nearby.
When “Display Phone Status” is set to
“On”, the connection status is displayed.
(See “Bluetooth® DEVICE CONNECTION STATUS DISPLAY SETTINGS” on
page 204.)
” This screen appears when the Bluetooth®
phone is first connected after the “START
STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
INFORMATION
● It may take time if the phone connection
is carried out during Bluetooth® device
playback.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the
phone.
” For automatic connection, see “CHANGING “Bluetooth* Power”” on page 202.
” When the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode, the system
searches for a nearby registered cellular
phone.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
154
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
4 This screen is displayed.
MANUALLY
When the auto connection has failed or
“Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, it is
necessary to connect Bluetooth® manually.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
on the steering wheel.
pressing
5 When the connection is completed, this
screen is displayed.
2 Select “Connect Phone”.
4
3 Select the screen button corresponding
to the desired phone connection.
” When the cellular phone’s device name has
not been able to be obtained, “Device 1” to
“Device 5” will be displayed in the order the
phones were registered.
wWhen a phone is connected while
Bluetooth® audio is playing
” This screen is displayed, and the
Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
155
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PHONE
” Now you can use the Bluetooth® phone.
1. PHONE OPERATION
RECONNECTING THE
Bluetooth® PHONE
If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected
due to poor reception from the
Bluetooth® network when the “START
STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is
in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode, the system automatically
reconnects the Bluetooth® phone.
When “Display Phone Status” is set to
“On”, the connection status is displayed.
” If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected on
purpose, such as turning it off, this does not
happen. Reconnect the Bluetooth® phone
manually.
156
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
4. CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
After a Bluetooth® phone has been registered, a call can be made using the
hands-free system. There are 7 methods
by which a call can be made. These are
described below.
BY PHONEBOOK
A call can be made by inputting the
phone number.
This cannot be operated while driving.
Calls can be made by using the phonebook data which is transferred from the
registered cellular phone.
The phonebook changes depending on
the phone connected. Up to 1000 contacts (maximum of 3 numbers per contact) can be registered in each
phonebook.
This cannot be operated while driving.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
1 Select “Contacts”.
BY DIAL
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
4
2 Select “Phone” on the “Menu” screen.
PHONE
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
pressing
on the steering wheel.
3 Select the desired keys to input the
phone number.
” Each time
deleted.
4 Select
2 Select the desired data from the list.
is selected, an input digit is
or press the
the steering wheel.
switch on
” Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the
phone.
157
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
3 Select the desired number from the list.
wPBAP compatible models
4 Select
wPBAP incompatible but OPP compatible
models
or press the
the steering wheel.
switch on
WHEN THE PHONEBOOK IS
EMPTY
1 Select “Contacts”.
3 Transfer the phonebook data to the system using the Bluetooth® phone.
2 Select “Yes” or “Transfer” to automati-
” Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring phonebook data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
cally transfer the phonebook from the
connected phone.
” Select “Manual” to transfer the phonebook
manually. (See “TRANSFERRING A
PHONE NUMBER” on page 175.)
” Select “No” or “Cancel” to cancel transferring.
” If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor
OPP compatible, the phonebook cannot
be transferred.
” This screen appears while transferring. To
cancel this function, select “Cancel”.
158
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
BY SPEED DIAL
INFORMATION
● Depending on the type of
Bluetooth®
phone:
• It may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone when transferring phonebook data.
• The registered image on the phonebook may not appear when phonebook
data is transferred.
4 When the data transfer from a PBAP in-
Calls can be made using registered
phone numbers which can be selected
from a phonebook. (See “REGISTERING THE SPEED DIAL” on page 183
for registering the speed dial.)
This can be operated while driving.
1 Select “Speed Dials”.
compatible but OPP compatible model
is complete, “Done” will appear on the
screen. Select “Done”.
4
PHONE
2 Select the desired number to call.
” The list to be displayed can be changed by
selecting the “Speed Dial 1”, “Speed Dial
2” or “Speed Dial 3” tab.
159
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
3 Select
BY CALL HISTORY
or press the
the steering wheel.
switch on
CALLS CAN BE MADE BY
CALL HISTORY WHICH HAS 4
FUNCTIONS
All: all calls (missed, incoming or outgoing)
Up to 25 call history items can be selected from the “All” tab while driving.
Missed: calls that were missed
Incoming: calls that were received
Outgoing: calls that were made
1 Select “Call History”.
2 Select the desired data from the list.
” The list to be displayed can be changed by
selecting the “All”, “Missed”, “Incoming” or
“Outgoing” tab.
160
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
CALLS CAN BE MADE USING
THE LATEST CALL HISTORY
ITEM
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
on the steering wheel.
pressing
BY VOICE RECOGNITION
Calls can be made by giving a voice
command. (For the operation and command of voice recognition, see “VOICE
COMMAND SYSTEM” on page 308.)
This can be operated while driving.
2 Press the
switch on the steering
wheel to display the “Call History”
screen.
3 Press the
switch on the steering
wheel to select the latest history item.
4 Select
or press the switch on
the steering wheel to call the latest history item.
4
PHONE
” When making a call by phonebook, the
name (if registered) is displayed.
” When making a call to the same number
continuously, only the most recent call is
listed in call history.
” When a phone number registered in the
phonebook is received, the name and the
number are displayed.
” Number-withheld calls are also memorized
in the system.
” International phone calls may not be made
depending on the type of cellular phone
you have.
161
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
VOICE COMMAND
EXAMPLE: CALL NAME
1 Press the talk switch.
” “Call ” is displayed in the
“Shortcut Menu” screen.
” When “Call ” on the “Shortcut Menu” screen is dimmed, the phonebook’s voice command recognition cannot
be used. Check the Bluetooth® connection and if the contacts have been transferred to the navigation system.
” When a contact has multiple phone numbers registered in the phonebook, a candidate list will be displayed. If the desired
phone number is not displayed on the top
of the screen, say the number of the desired
phone number from the candidate list
(number 1 and number 2) to select a phone
number from the candidate list.
3 Say “Dial” to call the phone number.
2 Say the name, or the name and type of
phone, of a registered contact.
” In the same manner as it is displayed on the
screen, “Call ”, after saying
“Call” say the name, or the name and type
of phone, of a contact.
For example: “Call”, “John Smith” or “Call”,
“Mary Davis”, “Mobile”
” There are 4 types of phones: Home,
Mobile, Office and Other.
” Short or abbreviated names in the phonebook may not be recognized. Change
names in the phonebook to full names.
” Sometimes a voice recognition result confirmation screen will be displayed. After
confirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”.
” When the system recognizes multiple
names from the phonebook, a name candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If
the desired name is not displayed on the
top of the screen, say the number of the
name from the candidate list (number 1 and
number 2) to select a name from the candidate list.
VOICE COMMAND
EXAMPLE: DIAL NUMBER
1 Press the talk switch.
” “Dial ” is displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen.
” When “Dial ” on the “Shortcut
Menu” screen is dimmed, the phone number voice recognition cannot be used.
Check the Bluetooth® phone connection.
2 Say the phone number.
” In the same manner as it is displayed on the
screen, “Dial ”, after saying “Dial”
say the phone number.
” Say the phone number one digit at a time.
For example, if the phone number is
2345678:
Say “two three four five six seven eight”
Do not say “twenty three forty five sixty
seven eight”
162
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
” The system can recognize the following
types of phone numbers:
3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)
7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers)
10 digit numbers (Area code + Local
phone number)
11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code +
Local phone number)
” As the system cannot recognize additional
numbers, say the complete number without
stopping.
” When the system recognizes multiple
phone numbers, a phone number candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If
the desired phone number is not displayed
on the top of the screen, say the number of
the desired phone number from the candidate list (number 1 and number 2) to select
a phone number from the candidate list.
To dial a phone number that is not a 3, 7,
10 or 11 digit number, for example an international number, use “International
Call”.
1 Go to the “Main Menu” screen by
pressing the talk switch on the steering
wheel and saying “Main menu” or select
“Main Menu”.
2 Say “Use a phone”.
3 Say “International call”.
” Up to 24 digits can be recognized when
using the international call function. The
number can also be divided into multiple 4
groups and recognized.
Calling without the voice recognition:
After the desired phone number is displayed, a call can also made by pressing
the
switch on the steering wheel.
Canceling the voice recognition: The
voice recognition will be canceled when
either of the following is performed:
• Press and hold the talk switch.
• Select “Cancel”.
163
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PHONE
3 Say “Dial” to call the phone number.
■ INTERNATIONAL CALL
1. PHONE OPERATION
CALLING USING AN SMS/
MMS MESSAGE
BY POI CALL
Calls can be made to an SMS (Short
Message Service)/MMS (Multimedia
Messaging Service) message sender’s
phone number.
This can be operated while driving.
1 Select “Messages”.
A call can be made by selecting
when it is displayed on the screen from
the navigation system. (See “TO SEE
INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON
WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET” on
page 42 and “VIEW DETAILED FUEL
PRICE INFORMATION” on page
333.)
” When “Message Transfer” is set to “Off”, a
confirmation screen will be displayed.
Select “Yes”. (See page 187.)
2 Select the “SMS/MMS” tab and then
select the desired received message
from the list.
” The tab display may vary depending on the
type of cellular phone.
3 Select
or press the
the steering wheel.
switch on
164
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
5. RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
When a call is received, this screen is
displayed with a sound.
1 Select
or press the switch on
the steering wheel to talk on the phone.
To refuse to receive the call: Select
4
PHONE
or press the
switch on the
steering wheel.
To adjust the volume of a received call:
Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR·VOL”
knob, or use the volume switch on the
steering wheel.
INFORMATION
● During international phone calls, the
other party’s name or number may not be
displayed correctly depending on the
type of cellular phone you have.
● The incoming call display mode can be
set. (See “INCOMING CALL DISPLAY” on page 192.)
165
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
6. TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
While talking on the phone, this screen is
displayed. The operations outlined below can be performed on this screen.
INFORMATION
● Changing from hands-free call to cellular
phone call is not possible while driving.
● When cellular phone call is changed to
To adjust the volume of the other party’s
voice: Select “-” or “+”, turn the
“PWR·VOL” knob, or use the volume
switch on the steering wheel.
To hang up the phone: Select
or
press the
switch on the steering
wheel.
To mute your voice: Select “Mute”.
To input a key: Select “0-9”.
To transfer the call: Select “Handset
Mode” to change from hands-free call to
cellular phone call. Select “Handsfree
Mode” to change from cellular phone call
to hands-free call.
hands-free call, the hands-free screen will
be displayed and its functions can be
operated on the screen.
● Changing between cellular phone call
and hands-free call can be performed by
operating the cellular phone directly.
● Transferring methods and operations will
be different depending on the type of cellular phone you have.
● For the operation of the cellular phone,
see the manual that comes with it.
WHEN YOU SELECT “0-9”
INPUTTING A KEY
Inputting a key is not possible while driving.
1 Select the desired number to input the
key.
To hang up the phone: Select
or
press the
switch on the steering
wheel.
166
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
TONE SIGNAL
INFORMATION
If a continuous tone signal is registered
in a phonebook, this screen appears. (If
not registered, “Send” and “Clear” are
not displayed.) This can be operated
while driving.
1 Confirm the number displayed on the
screen and select “Send”. The number
before marked sign will be sent.
To hang up the phone: Select
or
press the
switch on the steering
wheel.
sign (p or w) and the number that follows
the
phone
number.
(e.g.
056133w0123p#1Û)
● When the “p” pause tone is used, after
waiting 2 seconds the tone data up until
the next pause tone will be automatically
sent. When the “w” pause tone is used,
the tone data up until the next pause tone
will be automatically sent after user operation.
● This operation can be done when it is
desirable to operate an answering
machine or use a telephone service in a
bank for example. The phone number
and the code number in the phonebook
can be registered.
BY VOICE RECOGNITION
“Send Tones” can be operated by giving
a command during a call.
” The operating procedure is similar to
other voice recognition operations. (For
the operation of voice recognition, see
“VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM” on
page 308.)
167
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
PHONE
” When “Clear” is selected, this function is
finished and the normal tone screen
appears.
● The continuous tone signal is the marked
1. PHONE OPERATION
INCOMING CALL WAITING
INFORMATION
● If your cellular phone does not support
When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, this screen is displayed.
1 Select
or press the switch
on the steering wheel to start talking
with the other party.
HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used.
● The ring tone that has been set in the
“Phone Sound Settings” screen sounds
when there is an incoming call. Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone,
both the navigation system and
Bluetooth® phone may sound simultaneously when there is an incoming call.
(See “RING TONE SETTING” on page
173.)
” Select
or press the
switch
on the steering wheel to refuse the call.
” Each time
is selected or the
switch on the steering wheel is pressed
during an interrupted call, the party who
is on hold will be switched.
168
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
7. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION
Received messages can be forwarded
from the connected Bluetooth® phone,
enabling checking and replying using
the navigation system (Quick reply).
4 Select the screen button corresponding
to the desired message.
CHECKING MESSAGES
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Phone” on the “Menu” screen.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
pressing
on the steering wheel.
3 Select “Messages”.
” Messages are displayed in the appropriate
connected Bluetooth® phone’s registered
mail address folder. Select the tab of the
desired folder to be displayed.
5 Messages can be checked.
4
PHONE
” Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the
phone.
” When “Message Transfer” is set to “Off”, a
confirmation screen will be displayed.
Select “Yes”. (See page 187.)
” Selecting “Previous” or “Next” displays the
previous or next message.
” Only received messages on the connected
Bluetooth® phone can be displayed.
” The text of the message is not displayed
while driving.
169
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
6 Select “Play” to start reading out of the
message. Select “Stop” to stop the function.
” Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR·VOL”
knob, or use the volume switch on the
steering wheel to adjust the message read
out volume.
” The message read out function is available
even while driving.
” When the received message is an e-mail
and “Update Message Read Status on
Phone” is set to “On”, “Mark as Unread”
or “Mark as Read” can be selected.
Select “Mark as Unread” to mark mails
that have been read on the Bluetooth®
phone as unread. Conversely, select
“Mark as Read” to mark mails that have
not been read on the Bluetooth® phone
as read. (See “MESSAGE SETTINGS”
on page 187.)
” For SMS/MMS, selecting
or
pressing the
switch on the steering
wheel calls the sender. (See page 164.)
” Select “Reply” to reply to the message.
(See page 170.)
REPLYING (QUICK REPLY)
1 Select “Reply”.
2 Select the screen button corresponding
to the desired message.
3 Select “Send”.
” While the message is being sent, a sending
message screen is displayed.
4 This screen will be displayed if message
delivery fails.
” Select “Retry” to attempt to send the message again or select “Cancel” to cancel.
170
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. PHONE OPERATION
EDITING REPLY MESSAGES
1 Reply messages can be edited while the
vehicle is parked. Select “Edit”.
If “New Message Pop-up” and “New
Message Voice Notification” are set to
“On”, a notification appears on the
screen and a voice notification will be
heard when a new message arrives.
(See “MESSAGE SETTINGS” on page
187.)
2 Select the screen button corresponding
to the desired message.
1 Select “Read” to check the message.
” The “Messages” screen will be displayed.
” When “Automatic Message Readout” is
set to “On”, the message will be automati- 4
cally read out. (See “MESSAGE SETTINGS” on page 187.)
” For SMS/MMS, selecting
or
pressing the
switch on the steering
wheel calls the sender. (See page 164.)
” To check the message later, select
“Ignore” or
.
.
171
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PHONE
3 Select “OK” when editing is completed.
4 Select
NEW MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION
2. SETUP
1. PHONE SETTINGS
The phonebook can be edited. Volume,
display and message settings can also
be changed.
4 Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
PHONE SOUND SETTINGS
The call and ring tone volume can be adjusted. A ring tone can be selected.
2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “Phone”.
1 Select “Phone Sound Settings”.
2 Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
3 When all settings are completed, select
“Save”.
172
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
RING TONE SETTING
INFORMATION
● The system will automatically increase
the volume when the speed exceeds 50
mph (80 km/h).
1 Select “Ring Tone” on the “Phone
Sound Settings” screen.
2 Select the screen button corresponding
to the desired ring tone.
CALL VOLUME SETTING
1 Select “Call Volume” on the “Phone
Sound Settings” screen.
2 Select “-” or “+” to adjust the call volume.
” Ring tones can be heard by selecting the 4
screen buttons.
PHONE
3 Select “OK”.
INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS
3 Select “OK”.
The settings can be initialized.
1 Select “Default” on the “Phone Sound
RING TONE VOLUME
SETTING
Settings” screen.
1 Select “Ring Tone Volume” on the
2 Select “Yes”.
“Phone Sound Settings” screen.
2 Select “-” or “+” to adjust the ring tone
volume.
3 Select “OK”.
173
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
SETTING THE PHONEBOOK
PHONEBOOK
The call history can be deleted and
phonebook and speed dial settings can
be changed.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3 Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
4 Select “Phonebook”.
5 Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
The phonebook can be transferred from
a Bluetooth® phone to the system. The
phonebook also can be added, edited
and deleted.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
4 Select “Manage Contacts”.
5 Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
INFORMATION
● Phonebook data is managed indepen-
dently for every registered phone. When
one phone is connected, another phone’s
registered data cannot be read.
174
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
■ THE “Contacts” SCREEN CAN
ALSO BE DISPLAYED
■ TRANSFERRING A PHONE NUMBER
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
The phone numbers in a Bluetooth®
phone can be transferred to the system.
The system can manage up to 5 phonebooks. Up to 1000 contacts (maximum
of 3 numbers per contact) can be registered in each phonebook.
Operation methods differ between
PBAP compatible and PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth®
phones.
If your cellular phone is neither PBAP
nor OPP compatible, the phonebook
cannot be transferred.
Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
on the steering wheel.
pressing
2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.
3 Select “Options”.
1 Select “Transfer Contacts”.
2 Select “Update Contacts”.
175
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PHONE
4 Select “Manage Contacts”.
wFor PBAP compatible Bluetooth®
phones
4
2. SETUP
3 Transfer the phonebook data to the sys®
tem using the Bluetooth phone.
” This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the cellular phone model.
” Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring phonebook data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
” This screen appears while transferring. To
cancel this function, select “Cancel”.
” If another Bluetooth® device is connected
when transferring phonebook data,
depending on the phone, the connected
Bluetooth® device may need to be disconnected.
wPBAP compatible models automatic
data transfer setting
When a PBAP compatible phone is connected, the phone’s phonebook data can
be automatically transferred.
1 Select “Transfer Contacts”.
2 Select “Automatically Download Contacts” to transfer the phonebook from a
connected cellular phone.
Select “Automatically Download Call
History” to transfer the call history from
a connected cellular phone.
3 Select “On”.
4 Select “Save”.
176
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
3 Transfer the phonebook data to the sys-
INFORMATION
● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone, the registered image on the
phonebook may not appear when
phonebook data is transferred.
wFor PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones
tem using a Bluetooth® phone.
” Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring phonebook data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
1 Select “Transfer Contacts”.
Contacts”.
PHONE
2 Select “Replace Contacts” or “Add
” This screen appears while transferring. To
cancel this function, select “Cancel”. If 4
“Add Contacts” is selected and there is an
interruption during the transfer of data, the
phonebook data transferred until then will
be stored in the system. This is not the case
when “Cancel” is selected.
4 When the transfer is complete, “Done”
will appear on the screen. Select
“Done”.
wWhen another Bluetooth® device is connected
” If the phonebook contains phonebook
data, this screen is displayed.
” When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed.
” To disconnect it, select “Yes”.
177
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
wFrom “Contacts” screen
Phonebooks of PBAP incompatible but
OPP compatible phones can also be
transferred from the “Contacts” screen.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
on the steering wheel.
pressing
2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone”
■ REGISTERING
BOOK DATA
THE
PHONE-
The phonebook data can be registered.
Up to 3 numbers per person can be registered. New phonebook data cannot be
added
for
PBAP
compatible
Bluetooth® phones.
1 Select “New Contact”.
screen.
3 Select “Transfer”.
2 Use the software keyboard to input the
name and select “OK”.
4 This screen is displayed. The following
operations are performed in the same
manner as when they are performed
from the “Setup” screen.
3 Input the phone number and select
“OK”.
” To use a tone signal after the phone number, input the tone signal too.
178
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
4 Select the phone type.
1 Select “Edit Contacts”.
5 When 2 or less numbers in total are reg-
2 Select the desired data to edit.
istered to this contact, this screen is displayed.
4
PHONE
3 Select the desired name or number.
” To add a number to this contact, select
“Yes”.
■ EDITING
DATA
THE
PHONEBOOK
The phone number can be registered in
“Phone # 1”, “Phone # 2” and “Phone #
3” separately. Phonebooks cannot be
edited
for
PBAP
compatible
®
Bluetooth phones via the navigation
system.
4 Edit the name or the number. (See
“REGISTERING THE PHONEBOOK
DATA” on page 178.)
5 Select “Save” when editing is completed.
179
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
■ THE “Edit Contact” SCREEN CAN
ALSO BE DISPLAYED
wFrom the “Contact” screen
wFrom the “Call History” screen
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
on the steering wheel.
pressing
Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
on the steering wheel.
pressing
2 Select “Call History” on the “Phone”
2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone”
3 Select the desired number from the list
on the “Call History” screen.
screen.
3 Select the desired data from the list on
the “Contacts” screen.
screen.
4 Select “Add to Contacts” or “Update
Contact”.
4 Select “Options”.
5 If “Update Contact” has been selected,
5 Select “Edit”.
this screen will be displayed. Select the
desired data from the list.
180
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
■ DELETING THE PHONEBOOK
DATA
The data can be deleted.
When selling or disposing of the vehicle,
delete all your data on the system.
For PBAP compatible phones, delete
the phonebook data after setting “Automatically Download Contacts” to
“Off”. (See “PBAP compatible models
automatic data transfer setting” on page
176.)
1 Select “Delete Contacts”.
■ ALTERNATIVE
PHONEBOOK
DATA DELETION METHOD
wPBAP incompatible but OPP compatible
models
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
pressing
on the steering wheel.
2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.
3 Select the desired data from the list on
the “Contacts” screen.
4 Select “Options”.
4
PHONE
2 Select the desired data or “Select All”,
then select “Delete”.
5 Select “Delete”.
” Multiple data can be selected and deleted
at the same time.
3 Select “Yes”.
6 Select “Yes”.
INFORMATION
● When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted, the
phonebook data will be deleted at the
same time.
181
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
SPEED DIALS SETTING
Speed dials can be registered and deleted.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
■ THE “Speed Dials” SCREEN CAN
ALSO BE DISPLAYED
wFrom the “Speed Dial” screen
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
on the steering wheel.
pressing
2 Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone”
screen.
3 Select “Options”.
4 Select “Manage Speed Dials”.
5 Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
wFrom the “Contacts” screen
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
pressing
on the steering wheel.
2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.
3 Select “Options”.
182
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
4 Select “Manage Speed Dials”.
3 Select the desired phone number.
■ REGISTERING THE SPEED DIAL
4 Select the desired speed dial location.
Speed dial numbers can be registered
by selecting the desired number from
the phonebook. Up to 18 numbers per
phone can be registered as a speed dial.
4
1 Select “New”.
lected, this screen will be displayed.
2 Select the desired data to be registered.
” Select “Yes” to replace it.
6 When this screen is displayed, the operation is complete.
183
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PHONE
5 If a location that is already in use is se-
2. SETUP
■ THE SPEED DIAL CAN ALSO BE
REGISTERED
wFrom the “Speed Dial” screen
6 Select the desired phone number.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
on the steering wheel.
pressing
2 Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone”
screen.
wFrom the “Contact” screen
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
3 Select “(add new)”.
Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
pressing
on the steering wheel.
2 Select “Contacts” on the “Phone”
screen.
3 Select the desired data from the list on
the “Contacts” screen.
4 Select “Yes” to set new speed dial.
4 Select “Options”.
5 Select the desired data to be registered.
5 Select “Set Speed Dial”.
184
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
6 This screen is displayed.
DELETING CALL HISTORY
” The following operations are performed in
the same manner as when they are performed from the “Setup” screen.
■ DELETING THE SPEED DIAL
The call history can be deleted.
For PBAP compatible phones, delete
the call history after setting “Automatically Download Call History” to “Off”.
(See “PBAP compatible models automatic data transfer setting” on page
176.)
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Set-
The speed dial can be deleted.
tings” screen.
4 Select “Delete Call History”.
2 Select the desired data, or to delete all
5 Select the desired history to be deleted.
4
PHONE
1 Select “Delete”.
the data select “Select All”, then select
“Delete”.
” Multiple data can be selected and deleted
at the same time.
3 Select “Yes”.
185
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
6 Select the desired data, or to delete all
4 This screen is displayed.
the data select “Select All”, then select
“Delete”.
” Multiple data can be selected and deleted
at the same time.
7 Select “Yes”.
■ THE CALL HISTORY CAN ALSO
BE DELETED
” The following operations are performed in
the same manner as when they are performed from the “Setup” screen.
” Other call history can be operated similarly.
wDeleting after call history has been displayed
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.
Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
pressing
on the steering wheel.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
pressing
on the steering wheel.
2 Select “Call History” on the “Phone”
screen.
3 Select “Delete”.
2 Select “Call History” on the “Phone”
screen.
3 Select the desired history to be deleted.
186
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
4 Select “Delete”.
5 Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
5 Select “Yes”.
6 Select “Save” when each setting is com-
MESSAGE SETTINGS
pleted.
Message settings can be changed.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3 Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
4 Select “Messaging Settings”.
4
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.
” The “Phone” screen can be displayed by
pressing
on the steering wheel.
2 Select “Messages” on the “Phone”
screen.
3 Select “Options”.
187
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PHONE
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
THE “Messaging Settings”
SCREEN CAN ALSO BE
DISPLAYED
2. SETUP
SCREEN FOR “Messaging
Settings”
No.
Function
Select to adjust the new message notification volume. (See “NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION VOLUME
SETTINGS” on page 189.)
Select a new message voice notification tone. (See “NEW MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION TONE SETTINGS” on page 189.)
Select to set the automatic message
read out function to “On” or “Off”.
Select to adjust the message read out
volume. (See “MESSAGE READ
OUT VOLUME SETTINGS” on page
190.)
Select to set the cellular phone’s message read and unread status update
function to “On” or “Off”.
” On this screen, the following functions can
be operated:
No.
Select to edit quick reply messages.
(See “EDIT QUICK REPLY MESSAGES” on page 190.)
Function
Select to set message forwarding
from cellular phones to “On” or “Off”.
Select to set the new message notification display to “On” or “Off”.
Select to set the new message voice
notification to “On” or “Off”.
” To reset all setup items, select “Default”.
INFORMATION
● Depending on the phone, these functions
may not be available.
188
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
NEW MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION VOLUME
SETTINGS
NEW MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION TONE
SETTINGS
The new message notification volume
can be adjusted.
A new message voice notification tone
can be selected.
1 Select “New Message Notification
1 Select “New Message Notification
Tone”.
Volume”.
4
2 Select the desired new message notification tone.
sage notification volume.
” New message notification tones can be
heard by selecting the screen buttons.
3 Select “OK”.
3 Select “OK”.
INFORMATION
● The system will automatically increase
the volume when the speed exceeds 50
mph (80 km/h).
189
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PHONE
2 Select “-” or “+” to adjust the new mes-
2. SETUP
MESSAGE READ OUT
VOLUME SETTINGS
EDIT QUICK REPLY
MESSAGES
Message read out volume can be adjusted.
Quick reply messages can be edited. 15
messages have already been stored.
1 Select “Message Readout Volume”.
1 Select “Edit Quick Reply Messages”.
2 Select “-” or “+” to adjust the message
2 Select the screen button corresponding
read out volume.
to the desired message.
3 Select “OK”.
3 Use the software keyboard to edit the
message.
INFORMATION
● The system will automatically increase
4 Select “OK”.
the volume when the speed exceeds 50
mph (80 km/h).
190
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS
The settings can be initialized.
1 Select “Default”.
PHONE DISPLAY SETTINGS
The phone display settings can be
changed.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3 Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
4 Select “Phone Display Settings”.
2 Select “Yes”.
4
PHONE
5 Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
6 When each setting is completed, select
“Save”.
191
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
SCREEN FOR “Phone Display
Settings”
” To reset all setup items, select “Default”.
INFORMATION
● Depending on the phone, these functions
may not be available even if the phone is
PBAP compatible.
INCOMING CALL DISPLAY
” On this screen, the following functions can
be operated:
No.
The type of incoming call display can be
selected.
Function
Select to change the incoming call
display. (See “INCOMING CALL
DISPLAY” on page 192.)
For PBAP compatible models, select to set the display of the automatic phonebook transfer completion
message to “On” or “Off”.
1 Select “Incoming Call Display Mode”.
For PBAP compatible models, select to set the display of the automatic call history transfer completion
message to “On” or “Off”.
For PBAP compatible models, select to set the display of images during calls to “On” or “Off”.
For PBAP compatible models, select to set the orientation of images
displayed during calls. (See “ROTATING CONTACT IMAGES” on
page 193.)
192
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
2 Select “Full Screen” or “Drop Down”.
1 Select “Rotate Contact Images”.
2 Select the desired orientation of the im-
Screen button
Function
“Full Screen”
When a call is received,
the hands-free screen is
displayed and it can be
operated on the screen.
“Drop Down”
The message is displayed
on the upper side of the
screen and it can only be
operated via the steering
wheel switches.
age to be displayed.
PHONE
3 Select “Save”.
4
3 Select “Save”.
INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS
ROTATING CONTACT
IMAGES
The settings can be initialized.
For PBAP compatible models, when
“Contact Image for Incoming Calls” is
set to “On”, images stored together with
phone numbers in the cellular phone’s
phonebook will be transferred and displayed during the incoming call. The orientation of the image can be set.
1 Select “Default”.
2 Select “Yes”.
193
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
A Bluetooth® device can be set up.
REGISTERED DEVICES
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
A Bluetooth® device can be registered,
deleted or set up.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3 Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”
screen.
4 Select “Registered Devices”.
2 Select “Setup”.
5 Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
3 Select “Bluetooth*”.
4 Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
194
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE
Bluetooth® devices compatible with
phones (HFP) and portable players
(AVP) can be registered simultaneously. Phones (HFP) and portable players
(AVP) (maximum of 5) can be registered.
1 Select “Add New” to register a
Bluetooth® device to the system.
” Search for the navigation system displayed
on the system’s screen using your
Bluetooth® device, and register the
Bluetooth® device.
For details about operating the Bluetooth®
device, see the manual that comes with it.
” A passcode is not required for SSP (Secure
Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth®
devices. Depending on the type of
Bluetooth® phone being connected, a
message confirming registration may be
displayed on the Bluetooth® phone’s
screen. Respond and operate the
Bluetooth® phone according to the confirmation message.
4
” To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.
screen is displayed.
” If 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been
registered, a registered device needs to be
deleted. See “When 5 Bluetooth® devices
have already been registered” on page
196.
2 When this screen is displayed, operate
the Bluetooth® device.
” When using the same device, it is not necessary to register it again.
195
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
PHONE
3 When the connection is completed, this
2. SETUP
” When this screen is displayed, follow the
guidance on the screen to try again.
DELETING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE
1 Select “Remove”.
” When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed.
” To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,
select “Yes”.
wWhen 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered
2 Select the desired device, or to delete
all the devices select “Select All”, then
select “Remove”.
1 When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered, a registered device needs to be deleted. Select “Yes” to
delete 1 or more.
2 Select the device to be deleted, then select “Remove”.
3 Select “Yes”.
” Multiple devices can be selected and
deleted at the same time.
3 Select “Yes”.
INFORMATION
● When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, the
phonebook data will be deleted at the
same time.
196
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
■ CHANGING A DEVICE NAME
EDITING THE Bluetooth®
DEVICE
1 Select “Details”.
The Bluetooth® device’s information
can be displayed on the screen. The displayed information can also be edited.
“Device Name”: The name of the
Bluetooth® device which is displayed on
the screen. It can be changed to a desired
name.
• Even if the device name is changed, the
name registered in your Bluetooth®
device does not change.
2 Select the device to be edited.
“Device Address”: The device address is
unique to each device. It cannot be
changed.
“My Phone Number”: The phone number of
the Bluetooth® phone is displayed on the
screen. Depending on the type of phone,
the phone number may not be displayed.
“Profiles”: The compatibility profile of the
Bluetooth® device is displayed on the
screen.
“Connect Portable Player from”: There are
2 portable player connection settings available; “Vehicle” and “Portable Player”.
PHONE
• If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been registered with the same device name, the
devices can be distinguished referring to
the device’s address.
4
3 Select “Device Name”.
4 Use the software keyboard to input the
device name and select “OK”.
5 Confirm the device name and select
“OK”.
197
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
■ SETTING PORTABLE PLAYER
CONNECTION METHOD
1 Select “Connect Portable Player
from”.
SELECTING A Bluetooth®
PHONE
If more than 1 Bluetooth® phone has
been registered, it is necessary to select
which phone to connect to.
It is possible to select from up to 5 registered Bluetooth® devices (Phones
(HFP) and portable players (AVP)
(maximum of 5) can be registered.)
2 Select the desired connection method.
Although up to 5 Bluetooth® phones
can be registered in the system, only 1
Bluetooth® phone can function at a
time.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
“Vehicle”: Select to connect the audio system to the portable player.
“Portable Player”: Select to connect the
portable player to the audio system.
2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3 Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”
screen.
4 Select “Connect Phone”.
” Depending on the portable player, the
“Vehicle” or “Portable Player” connection
method may be best. As such, refer to the
manual that comes with the portable player.
3 Select “OK”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
198
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
5 Select the phone to be connected.
7 When the result message is displayed,
the Bluetooth® phone can be used.
” The indicator of the selected Bluetooth®
phone will turn on.
” If the desired Bluetooth® phone is not on
the list, select “Add New” to register the
phone. (See page 195.)
6 This screen is displayed.
” This screen is displayed, and the
Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.
4
PHONE
” The currently connected Bluetooth®
phone’s screen button will have a
Bluetooth® mark displayed on it. If the
currently connected Bluetooth® phone’s
screen button is selected, the
Bluetooth® phone can be disconnected.
Select “Yes” to disconnect.
wWhen a phone is connected while
Bluetooth® audio is playing
wWhen another Bluetooth® device is connected
” When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed.
To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,
select “Yes”.
199
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
5 Select the desired portable player to be
SELECTING PORTABLE
PLAYER
connected.
If more than 1 portable player has been
registered, it is necessary to select which
portable player to connect to.
It is possible to select from up to 5 registered Bluetooth® devices (Phones
(HFP) and portable players (AVP)
(maximum of 5) can be registered.)
Although up to 5 portable players can
be registered in the system, only 1 portable player can function at a time.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3 Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”
screen.
4 Select “Connect Portable Player”.
” The indicator of the selected portable
player will turn on.
” If the desired portable player is not on the
list, select “Add New” to register the portable player. (See page 195.)
” The currently connected portable
player’s screen button will have a
Bluetooth® mark displayed on it. If the
currently connected portable player’s
screen button is selected, the portable
player can be disconnected. Select “Yes”
to disconnect.
6 This screen is displayed.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
200
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
7 When the result message is displayed,
the portable player can be used.
DETAILED Bluetooth®
SETTINGS
The Bluetooth® settings can be confirmed and changed.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
wWhen another Bluetooth® device is connected
” When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, this screen is displayed.
To disconnect it, select “Yes”.
2 Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
3 Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”
screen.
4 Select “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings”.
4
PHONE
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
201
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
5 This screen is displayed.
CHANGING THE Bluetooth®
SETTINGS
The Bluetooth® settings can be
changed according to the following procedures.
■ CHANGING “Bluetooth* Power”
” The information displays the following
items:
Screen button/
Screen item
Information
“Device Name”
This name will be displayed on the device
when it is connected. It
can be changed to a desired name.
“Passcode”
The password that was
set when the Bluetooth®
device was registered
can be changed.
Device
Address
The device address is
unique to each device. It
cannot be changed.
Profiles
The compatibility profile
of the Bluetooth® device
is displayed on the
screen. (See pages 146
and 264.)
The “Bluetooth* Power” display shows
the following state.
When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On”:
The Bluetooth® device is automatically
connected when the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
When “Bluetooth* Power” is “Off”:
The Bluetooth® device is disconnected,
and the system will not connect to it next
time.
” The “Bluetooth* Power” auto connection
state can be set on or off.
• “On”: The auto connection is turned on.
• “Off”: The auto connection is turned off.
” The auto connection state cannot be
changed from “On” to “Off” while driving,
but it can be changed from “Off” to “On”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
” If it is desirable to change the settings, refer
to the following pages.
” When the settings have been changed,
select “Save”.
202
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
1 Select “Bluetooth* Power”.
2 Use the software keyboard to input the
device name and select “OK”.
2 Select “On” or “Off”.
3 Select “Save”.
■ EDITING THE PASSCODE
1 Select “Passcode”.
4
PHONE
3 Select “Save”.
” In the event the state of “Bluetooth*
Power” is changed from “Off” to “On”,
Bluetooth® connection will begin.
■ EDITING THE DEVICE NAME
2 Input a passcode and select “OK”.
1 Select “Device Name”.
3 Select “Save”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
203
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
■ Bluetooth® DEVICE CONNECTION STATUS DISPLAY SETTINGS
When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On” and
the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is in ACCESSORY
or IGNITION ON mode, the
Bluetooth® phone and portable player’s
connection status can be displayed.
(See “CHANGING “Bluetooth*
Power”” on page 202.)
INITIALIZING THE Bluetooth®
SETTINGS
The settings can be initialized.
1 Select “Default”.
1 Select “Display Phone Status” or “Display Portable Player Status”.
2 Select “Yes”.
” If the state of “Bluetooth* Power” is
changed from “Off” into “On”, Bluetooth®
connection will begin.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
2 Select “On”.
3 Select “Save”.
204
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
4
PHONE
205
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
Operations such as selecting a preset station and adjusting the sound balance are carried out on the screen.
wUsing the instrument panel
Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button to display the audio/video screen.
wUsing the Remote Touch
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Radio” or “Media” to
display the audio/video screen.
If a Mark Levinson brand audio system is installed, the “Mark Levinson” logo is shown
on the panel.
208
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
No.
Name
Function
Page
Function menu tab
Select the desired radio or media mode screen
tab.
211
Function menu
display screen
Select to control the selected radio or media
mode.
211
“
” button
Press to mute/unmute or pause/resume the current operation.
—
“TUNE·SCROLL”
knob
Turn to step up and step down the station band,
change to the next or previous satellite radio
channel, or skip to the next or previous track,
DVD chapter, etc.
217, 227,
234, 236,
241, 255,
261, 269
“PRST·TRACK”
button
Press the “ ” or “ ” button to preset up or down
for a station or channel, or to change a desired
track, file or chapter.
Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button to seek up or
down for a station or channel, or to fast forwarding/rewinding for a track, file or chapter.
218, 228,
234, 236,
241, 255,
261, 269
5
Insert discs into the slot.
233
“RADIO” button
Press to display the radio control screen.
211
“MEDIA” button
Press to display the media control screen.
211
“PWR·VOL” knob
Press to turn the audio/video system on and off,
and turn to adjust the volume.
211
“
Press to eject a disc.
233
” button
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
Disc slot
209
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
2. SOME BASICS
This section describes some of the basic
features of the audio/video system.
Some information may not pertain to
your system.
Your audio/video system works when
the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to ACCESSORY
or IGNITION ON mode.
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
Press this switch to operate the voice
command system.
CAUTION
● For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada:
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
● Laser products
OF
CONTROL
OR
• USE
ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY
RESULT
IN
HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
• THE
USE
OF
OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
WITH
THIS
PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE
HAZARD.
” For the operation of the voice command
system and its list of commands, see
pages 308 and 317.
AUDIO SPLIT SCREEN
DISPLAY
The audio split screen can be displayed
while the map screen is displayed. For
details, see page 46.
NOTICE
● To prevent the 12-volt battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio/video
system on longer than necessary when
the engine is not running .
210
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON
AND OFF
SWITCHING BETWEEN
FUNCTIONS
wUsing the instrument panel
1 Each time the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”
button is pressed, the audio control
mode changes.
“RADIO”, “MEDIA” button: Press to display screen buttons for the audio/video system.
“PWR·VOL” knob: Press to turn the audio/
video system on and off. Turn this knob to
adjust the volume. The system turns on in
the last mode used.
wUsing the Remote Touch
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
211
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
” A function that enables automatic return
to the previous screen from the audio/
video screen can be selected. See page
51 for details.
“RADIO” button: To display the “AM”,
“FM”, “SAT” and “Apps” tabs on the screen. 5
(Radio mode)
“MEDIA” button: To display the “DISC”,
“BT Audio”, “AUX”, “USB” and “iPod” tabs
on the screen. (Media mode)
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
2 Select “Radio” or “Media”.
DSP CONTROL
1 Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”
button. (Using the instrument panel)
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch and select “Radio” or
“Media”. (Using the Remote Touch)
2 Select
.
3 Select the desired tab.
3 Select the “DSP” tab to display this
” Up to 4 tabs can be displayed on the
screen. Select
or
, located either
side of the screen tabs, to display tabs
from the previous or next page.
” The desired audio mode can be found by
selecting
or
and then selecting
that audio mode tab.
INFORMATION
● If a disc is not inserted, the DVD player
cannot be turned on.
screen.
4 Select the desired items to be set.
5 Select “OK”.
● The DVD player can be turned off by
ejecting a disc.
● When radio or media mode is selected,
the respective screen buttons are displayed on the screen.
● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.
212
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
AUTOMATIC SOUND
LEVELIZER (ASL)
TONE AND BALANCE
The system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed to compensate for increased
vehicle noise.
1 Select “Automatic Sound Levelizer”.
2 Select “On” or “Off”.
SURROUND FUNCTION
How good an audio program sounds is
largely determined by the mix of the treble, mid and bass levels. In fact, different
kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with different mixes of
treble, mid and bass.
BALANCE
This function can create a feeling of
presence.
1 Select “Surround”.
2 Select “On” or “Off”.
TONE
1 Select the “Sound” tab to display this
screen.
213
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear
sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that when listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing
the right/left balance will increase the
volume of 1 group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another.
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
2 Select the desired screen button.
SELECTING SCREEN SIZE
Screen button
Function
“Treble”
“+” or “-”
Select to adjust highpitched tones.
“Mid”
“+” or “-”
Select to adjust midpitched tones.
“Bass”
“+” or “-”
Select to adjust lowpitched tones.
“Front” or “Rear”
Select to adjust the
sound balance between
the front and rear
speakers.
“L” or “R”
Select to adjust the
sound balance between
the left and right speakers.
Before selecting screen size, it is necessary to insert a DVD disc and select
DISC mode.
1 Press the “MEDIA” button. (Using the
instrument panel)
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch and select “Media”.
(Using the Remote Touch)
2 Select the “DISC” tab.
3 Select “Options”.
3 Select “OK”.
INFORMATION
● The tone of each mode (such as AM, FM
4 Select “Wide”.
and DVD player) can be adjusted.
214
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5 Select the desired screen button.
DVD PLAYER
1 When inserting a disc, gently insert the
disc with the label facing up.
No.
Function
Select to display a 3 : 4 screen, with
either side in black.
Select to widen the 3 : 4 screen horizontally to fill the screen.
Select to widen the 3 : 4 screen vertically and horizontally, by the same ratio, to fill the screen.
6 Select “Save”.
● Never try to disassemble or oil any part of
the DVD player. Do not insert anything
other than a disc into the slot.
INFORMATION
● The player is intended for use with 4.7 in.
(12 cm) discs only.
215
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
” When
is selected, the previous
screen is displayed.
NOTICE
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
AUX PORT
INFORMATION
● When the portable audio player is not
The sound of portable audio players
connected to the AUX port can be enjoyed. For details, refer to “Owner’s
Manual”.
connected to the AUX port, the tab will
be dimmed.
USB PORT
1 Press the “MEDIA” button to display the
media control screen and select the
“AUX” tab or press the “MEDIA” button
repeatedly to change to AUX mode.
” For the Remote Touch operation method,
see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 211.
CAUTION
● Do not connect portable audio device or
operate the controls.
A USB memory/iPod can be connected
to the USB port. For details, see “CONNECTING A USB MEMORY” on page
254 and “CONNECTING iPod” on
page 260.
1 Press the “MEDIA” button to display the
media control screen and select the
“USB” or “iPod” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly to change to
USB memory/iPod mode.
” For the Remote Touch operation method,
see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 211.
NOTICE
● Depending on the size and shape of the
portable audio device that is connected
to the system, the armrest may not close
fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the
armrest as this may damage the portable
audio device or the terminal, etc.
● Do not leave portable audio device in the
vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio
device while it is connected as this may
damage the portable audio device or its
terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port
as this may damage the portable audio
device or its terminal.
INFORMATION
● When a USB memory/iPod is not con-
nected with the USB port, the tab will be
dimmed.
216
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
3. RADIO OPERATION
STEP UP AND DOWN THE
STATION BAND
LISTENING TO THE RADIO
1 Turn the knob clockwise to step up the
SELECTING A RADIO
STATION
station band or counterclockwise to
step down.
1 Press the “RADIO” button.
2 Select the “AM”, “FM”, “SAT” or “Apps”
tab or press the “RADIO” button repeatedly to select the desired tab.
● The radio automatically changes to ste-
reo reception when a stereo broadcast is
received.
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
” For the Remote Touch operation method,
see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 211.
INFORMATION
217
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRESETTING A STATION
SELECTING A STATION
Radio mode has a mix preset function,
which can store up to 36 stations (6 stations per page x 6 pages) from any of the
AM, FM or SAT bands.
Tune in the desired station using one of
the following methods.
1 Tune in the desired station.
2 Select one of the left side screen buttons
(1-6) and hold it until a beep is heard.
This sets the frequency to the screen
button. The station’s frequency will be
displayed in the screen button.
” To change the preset station to a different
one, follow the same procedure.
Preset tuning: Select one of the mix preset
channels on the left side of the screen or
press the “ ” or “ ” button of
“PRST·TRACK” to select the desired station. The screen button is highlighted and
the station frequency appears on the
screen.
Seek tuning: Press and hold the “ ” or “ ”
button of “PRST·TRACK”. The radio will
begin seeking up or down for a station of the
nearest frequency and will stop when a station is found. Each time the button is
pressed, the stations will be searched automatically one after another.
To scan all the frequencies: Select
“SCAN”. “SCAN” will appear on the
screen. The radio will find the next station
and stay there for 10 seconds if “All” or “HD
Only” is selected, or 5 seconds if “Analog”
is selected, and then scan again. To stay
tuned to a station and stop the scanning, select “SCAN” again. (To set HD Radio™
system, see page 288.)
218
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
RADIO BROADCAST DATA
SYSTEM
This audio system is equipped with Radio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS).
RBDS mode allows text messages to be
received from radio stations that utilize
RBDS transmitters.
When RBDS is on, the radio can
— only select stations of a particular program type,
— display messages from radio stations,
— search for a stronger signal station.
RBDS features are available only when
listening to an FM station that broadcasts RBDS information and the “FM info” indicator is on.
SELECTING A DESIRED TYPE
forward and backward through the program list.
” Once a program type has been set, “TYPE
SEEK” will appear on the screen.
” The program list is in the following order:
• Classical
• Country
• EasyLis (Easy Listening)
• Inform (Information)
• Jazz
5
• News
• Oldies
• Other
• Pop Music
• Religion
• Rock
• R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
• Sports
• Talk
• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio
Settings” are set to analog.)
• Alert (Emergency Alert)
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
1 Select “Options”.
2 Select “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” to move
3 Select “TYPE SEEK” and the system
will start to seek for stations in the relevant program type.
INFORMATION
● If no relevant program can be found, “no
type” will appear on the screen.
219
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT
A station that regularly broadcasts traffic information is automatically located.
“Traffic”: Select to seek a traffic program
station. “TRAF SEEK” will appear on the
screen.
INFORMATION
● If no traffic program station is found, “No
Traffic” will appear on the screen.
● If a traffic program station is found, the
name of the traffic program station will be
displayed for a while.
220
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
4. HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY INFORMATION
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver
which allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the
analog broadcasts it already receives.
Digital broadcasts have better sound
quality than analog broadcasts as digital
broadcasts provide free, crystal clear
audio with no static or distortion. For
more information, and a guide to available radio stations and programming,
refer to www.hdradio.com.
USING HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY
” For the Remote Touch operation method,
see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 211.
” As a user works through the analog radio
stations, (where applicable) the radio
receiver will automatically tune from an
analog signal to a digital signal within 10
seconds.
” An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be displayed on the screen when in digital. The
“HD)” logo will first appear in a gray color
indicating the station is indeed (an analog
and) a digital station. Once the digital signal is acquired, the logo will change to a
bright orange color.
” The song title, artist name and music genre
will appear on the screen when available by
the radio station.
3 This screen will be displayed if “Op-
1 Press the “RADIO” button.
tions” is selected.
the “RADIO” button repeatedly to select the desired tab.
” When “Text” is selected, information such
as the artist name, song title, album title and
music genre of the track being listened to
are displayed on the text screen. To display
messages from the station, select “Additional Information”.
” When “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” is selected,
a program type will be searched. Once a
program type has been set, “TYPE SEEK”
will appear on the screen. (See “SELECTING A DESIRED TYPE” on page 219.)
221
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
2 Select the “AM” or “FM” tab or press
5
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
AVAILABLE HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY
TAG
1 Select “Tag” to bookmark the music information.
MULTICAST
On the FM radio frequency most digital
stations have “multiple” or supplemental
programs on one FM station.
1 Select “Multicast”.
2 Grip the knob to release the lock, and
lift the armrest to open.
” Each time “Multicast” is selected, the supplemental program changes.
” If “Multicast” is selected when tuned to the
last of the supplemental programs, the main
program will be returned to.
3 Open the cover and connect iPod using
an iPod cable.
222
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
” Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not
turned on.
” Once an iPod is connected, the music tag
moves from the radio into the iPod.
” When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the
“tagged” information of the songs which
were tagged while listening to the radio can
be viewed. Then a user may decide to purchase the song or CD/Album which had
been listened to on their radio.
4 Close the console box.
INFORMATION
● If tagging the music information fails,
“Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will be
displayed on the screen. If this occurs, tag
the information again.
● HD Radio™ stations can be preset.
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
223
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Experience
Cause
Action
Mismatch of time alignment- a user may hear a
short period of programming replayed or an echo,
stutter or skip.
The radio stations analog
and digital volume is not
properly aligned or the station is in ballgame mode.
None, radio broadcast issue. A
user can contact the radio station.
Sound fades, blending in
and out.
Radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Reception issue, may clear-up as
the vehicle continues to be driven.
Selecting “Analog” can force radio
in an analog audio.
Audio mute condition
when an HD2/HD3 multicast channel had been playing.
The radio does not have access to digital signals at the
moment.
This is normal behavior, wait until
the digital signal returns. If out of
the coverage area, seek a new station.
Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/HD3 multicast channel preset.
The digital multicast content is not available until HD
Radio™ broadcast can be
decoded and make the audio available. This takes up
to 7 seconds.
This is normal behavior, wait for the
audio to become available.
Text information does not
match the present song audio.
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified.
Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences.
No text information shown
for the present selected frequency.
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified.
Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences.
224
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital
Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and
“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
225
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
5. RADIO OPERATION (XM Satellite Radio BROADCAST)
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN
XM Satellite Radio
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in
the vehicle, a subscription to the XM
Satellite Radio service is necessary.
An XM Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts
provided under a separate subscription.
Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous U.S. states and some Canadian
provinces.
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE
It is necessary to enter into a separate
service agreement with XM Satellite
Radio in order to receive satellite broadcast programming in the vehicle. Additional
activation
and
service
subscription fees apply that are not included in the purchase price of the vehicle and digital satellite tuner.
” For complete information on subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe to
XM Satellite Radio:
w U.S.A.
Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call
1-866-635-2349.
wCanada
Refer to www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677.
INFORMATION
● XM Satellite Radio is solely responsible
for the quality, availability and content of
the satellite radio services provided,
which are subject to the terms and conditions of the XM Satellite Radio customer
service agreement.
● Customers should have their radio ID
ready; the radio ID can be found by tuning to “CH 000” on the radio. For details,
see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID”
below.
● All fees and programming are the
responsibility of XM Satellite Radio and
are subject to change.
226
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
SATELLITE TUNER
TECHNOLOGY NOTICE
LISTENING TO SATELLITE
RADIO
Lexus’s satellite radio tuners are awarded Type Approval Certificates from XM
Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility with the services offered by XM
Satellite Radio.
1 Press the “RADIO” button.
DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID
Each XM tuner is identified with a
unique radio ID. The radio ID is required
when activating an XM service or when
reporting a problem.
DIO” button repeatedly until the “SAT”
tab is selected.
5
” For the Remote Touch operation method,
see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 211.
3 Turn the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob to select the next or previous channel.
” Turning the knob quickly allows rapid
scrolling through the channel list.
227
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
” If “CH 000” is selected using the
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob, the ID code,
which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will be
displayed. If another channel is selected,
the ID code will no longer be displayed.
The channel (000) alternates between displaying the radio ID and the specific radio
code.
2 Select the “SAT” tab or press the “RA-
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
CHANNEL CATEGORY
SELECTING A CHANNEL
1 Select either “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” to
go to the next or previous category.
PRESETTING A CHANNEL
1 Tune in the desired channel.
2 Select one of the left side screen buttons
Tune in the desired channel using one of
the following methods.
Preset tuning: Select the channel selector
screen button (1-6) or press the “ ” or “ ”
button of “PRST·TRACK” to listen to the
desired channel. The selected screen button (1-6) is highlighted and its related information appears on the right side of the
screen.
To select a channel within the current category: Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button
of “PRST·TRACK”. The radio will change
up or down to a channel within the current
channel category.
(1-6) and hold it until a beep is heard.
This sets the frequency to the screen
button. The channel number will be displayed in the screen button.
” To change the preset channel to a different
one, follow the same procedure.
To scan the currently selected channel category: Select “SCAN”. “SCAN” appears
on the screen. The radio will find the next
channel in the same channel category, stay
there for a few seconds, and then scan
again. To select a channel, select “SCAN”
again.
228
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
DISPLAYING THE TITLE AND
NAME
1 Select “Text” to display the artist name
and song title currently being listening
to.
INFORMATION
● Up to 64 alphanumeric characters can
be displayed. (Some information will not
be fully displayed.)
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
229
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS
When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action.
Message
Explanation
The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna
cable is attached securely.
Ck Antenna
A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer for assistance.
You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is being
updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radio
for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can
choose “CH 000” and all free-to-air channels.
Ch Unauth
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about
2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH
001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To
listen to the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.
No Signal
The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
Loading
The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit
has received the information.
Ch Off Air
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with
the channel at that time. No action is required.
Ch Unavail
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH 001”. If it
does not change automatically, select another channel.
INFORMATION
● Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677
(Canada).
230
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
NOTICE
INFORMATION
● This equipment has been tested and
(Music and Talk) of only XM Satellite
Radio and “Text Information*” linked to
the respective “Audio Services”.
*: Text Information includes, Station
Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and
Category Name.
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
found to comply with the limits for a class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates,
uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
● If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
● Information to user
• Alternation or modifications carried
out without appropriate authorization
may invalidate the user’s right to operate the equipment.
● This XM tuner supports “Audio Services”
231
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
6. RADIO OPERATION (INTERNET RADIO BROADCAST)
LISTENING TO INTERNET
RADIO
One of Apps’s features is the ability to
listen to internet radio. In order to use
this service, an Apps compatible phone
and the navigation system needs to be
set. For details, refer to the “APPS” section. (See page 356.)
1 Press the “RADIO” button.
” If a compatible phone has not been registered or the Bluetooth® connection cannot
be completed correctly, select “Connect”
to register and/or connect your phone.
(See page 194.)
” When connection is complete, the application screen can be displayed.
3 Select “View Application Screen”.
” The internet radio application screen is displayed.
” Perform operations according to the displayed application screen.
” By pressing the “RADIO” button, the
“Audio” screen can be returned to.
INFORMATION
● Other applications can be activated
while listening to internet radio.
● An iPhone cannot be connected via
2 Select the “Apps” tab or press the “RADIO” button repeatedly until the “Apps”
tab is selected.
” For the Remote Touch operation method,
see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 211.
” If a compatible phone is already registered,
it will be connected automatically.
Bluetooth® and USB connection at the
same time. However, it is possible to
recharge an iPhone while using Apps by
connecting via USB. The system uses the
connection method that was used last.
Therefore, if connected via USB after
Bluetooth® connection, it is necessary to
reconnect the iPhone via Bluetooth®.
● Services requiring a separate contract
can also be used.*
● Some parts of “Apps” can be adjusted
using the switches on the steering wheel.
● If internet radio has never been listened
to by activating “Apps” from the “Information” screen, the “Apps” tab will be
dimmed.
*: For
details,
refer
to
http://
www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800255-3987.
232
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
7. DVD PLAYER OPERATION
For safety reasons, the DVD video discs
can only be viewed when the following
conditions are met:
(a) The vehicle is completely stopped.
(b) The “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”>
switch
is
in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
(c) The parking brake is applied.
While driving in DVD video mode, only
the DVD’s audio can be heard.
EJECTING A DISC
1 Press the “ ” button and remove the
disc.
INSERTING A DISC
INFORMATION
1 Insert a disc into the disc slot.
● If a disc is inserted with the label facing
down, it cannot be played.
5
PLAYING A DISC
already been loaded in the disc slot.
” After insertion, the disc is automatically
loaded.
233
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
1 Press the “MEDIA” button if a disc has
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
2 Select the “DISC” tab or press the
“MEDIA” button repeatedly until the
“DISC” tab is selected.
SELECTING A DESIRED
TRACK
■ ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN
” For the Remote Touch operation method,
see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 211.
PLAYING AN AUDIO DISC
1 Select the “DISC” tab.
, : Select to skip to the next or previous
track.
“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly
until the desired track number appears on
the screen. The player will start playing the
selected track from the beginning.
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to
the desired track.
” When CD-TEXT information exists, the
name and artist of the CD currently being
listened to will be displayed.
: Select to pause the track.
: Select to resume playing the track.
234
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
■ ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN
1 Select the track name screen button to
■ FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING
1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of
display the CD’s track list.
“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the disc.
2 Select the desired track number. The
player will start playing the selected
track from the beginning.
” When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
REPEATING
5
The track currently being listened to can
be repeated.
■ REPEATING A TRACK
1 Select “RPT” while the track is playing.
” “RPT” appears on the screen. When the
track is finished, the player will automatically play it again. To cancel this function,
select “RPT” again.
235
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
, : Select to move the list up or down by
5 track groups. If either of these screen buttons is selected when the top/bottom page
of the list is displayed, the last/first page is
displayed.
“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll
through the track list one by one.
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the track list.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for the
screen. Select to scroll to the end of the
name. Select to move to the beginning of
the name.
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
RANDOM ORDER
PLAYING AN MP3/WMA DISC
Tracks or albums can be automatically
and randomly selected.
1 Select the “DISC” tab.
■ PLAYING THE TRACKS ON THE
DISC IN RANDOM ORDER
1 Select “RAND” while the disc is playing.
” The file name, folder name and artist name
currently being listened to and the disc icon
are displayed on the screen.
: Select to pause the file.
: Select to resume playing the file.
” Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a track randomly from the
disc currently being listened to. To cancel
this function, select “RAND” again.
SELECTING A DESIRED
FOLDER
■ ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN
INFORMATION
● If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of
the disc and track will be displayed. Up to
32 characters can be displayed.
, : Select to skip to the next or previous
folder.
236
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
■ ON THE FOLDER LIST SCREEN
1 Select the folder name screen button to
display the following folder list screen.
■ FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING
1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of
“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the file.
2 Select the desired folder number to display the folder’s file list. From the file list,
select the desired file number.
” When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
SELECTING A DESIRED FILE
5
■ ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
, : Select to move the list up or down by
5 folder groups. If either of these screen
buttons is selected when the top/bottom
page of the list is displayed, the last/first
page is displayed.
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the folder list.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for the
screen. Select to scroll to the end of the
name. Select to move to the beginning of
the name.
, : Select to skip to the next or previous
file.
“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly
until the desired file number appears on the
screen. The player will start playing the selected file from the beginning.
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to
the desired file.
237
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
■ ON THE FILE LIST SCREEN
1 Select the file name screen button to
■ FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING
1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of
display the following file list screen.
“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the file.
2 Select the desired file number. The player will start playing the selected file from
the beginning.
, : Select to move the list up or down by
5 file groups. If either of these screen buttons is selected when the top/bottom page
of the list is displayed, the last/first page is
displayed.
“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll
through the file list one by one.
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the file list.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for the
screen. Select to scroll to the end of the
name. Select to move to the beginning of
the name.
” When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
REPEATING
The file or folder currently being listened
to can be repeated.
■ REPEATING A FILE
1 Select “RPT” while the file is playing.
238
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
” Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
wWhen “RAND” is off
• File Repeat → Folder Repeat → Off
wWhen “RAND” is on
• File Repeat → Off
” “RPT” appears on the screen. When the file
is finished, the player will automatically play
it again. To cancel this function, select
“RPT” repeatedly until the repeat mode
turns off.
■ REPEATING A FOLDER
1 Select
“RPT” repeatedly until
“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.
” When the folder is finished, the player will
automatically go back to the beginning of
the folder and play it again. To cancel this
function, select “RPT” again.
” Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
• Random (1 Folder Random) →
Folder Random (1 Disc Random) → Off
” Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a file randomly from the
folder currently being listened to. To cancel
this function, select “RAND” repeatedly
until the random mode turns off.
■ PLAYING THE FILES IN ALL THE
FOLDERS ON THE DISC IN RANDOM ORDER
1 Select “RAND” repeatedly until
“FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.
” Once “FLD.RAND” appears on the screen,
the system selects a file randomly from all
of the existing folders. To cancel this function, select “RAND” again.
5
INFORMATION
● When a file is skipped or the system is
Files or folders can be automatically and
randomly selected.
inoperative, select “RAND” to reset.
■ PLAYING FILES FROM ONE
FOLDER IN RANDOM ORDER
1 Select “RAND” while the disc is playing.
239
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
RANDOM ORDER
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PRECAUTIONS ON DVD
VIDEO DISC
OPERATING A DVD DISC
The playback condition of some DVD
discs may be determined by the DVD
software producer. This DVD player
plays a disc as the software producer intended. As such some functions may not
work properly. Be sure to read the instruction manual that comes with the individual DVD disc. For detailed
information about DVD video discs, see
“DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO
DISC INFORMATION” on page 252.
When recording with a DVD video, audio tracks may not record in some cases
while the menu is displayed. As audio
will not play in this case, verify that the
video tracks are playing and then activate playback.
When playback of a disc is completed:
If an audio CD or MP3/WMA disc is
playing, the first track or file starts.
If a DVD video is playing, playback will
stop or the menu screen will be displayed.
The title/chapter number and playback
time display may not appear while playing back certain DVD video discs.
CAUTION
● Conversational speech on some DVDs is
recorded at a low volume to emphasize
the impact of sound effects. If you adjust
the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume
level that the DVD will play, you may be
startled by louder sound effects or when
you change to a different audio source.
The louder sounds may have a significant
impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when you
adjust the volume.
240
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
DISPLAYING DVD
CONTROLS
PLAYING A DVD DISC
1 Press the “MEDIA” button if a disc has
already been loaded in the disc slot.
” If
is selected, while watching a DVD, the
DVD controls will appear.
2 Select the “DISC” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the “DISC”
tab is selected.
INFORMATION
● If
appears on the screen when a control is selected, the operation relevant to
the control is not permitted.
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
” For the Remote Touch operation method,
see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 211.
” Select “Options” on the “DVD” screen,
then select “Wide” on the “DVD Options”
screen. The screen mode can be changed.
” If “Full Screen” is selected when the vehicle
is completely stopped and the parking
brake is applied, the video screen returns.
241
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
DESCRIPTION OF DVD VIDEO
CONTROLS
Screen button
Function
“Top Menu”,
“Menu”
Select to display the menu
screen for DVD video.
SELECTING A MENU ITEM
1 Select the menu item using
,
,
or
and select “Enter”. The
player starts playing the disc from the
start of the selected item.
The menu control key appears on the screen. (See
page 242.)
Select to pause the video
screen.
Select to rewind during
playback.
Select to stop the video
screen.
Select to resume normal
play during pause.
Select to fast forward during playback and forward
frame by frame during
pause.
” When
is selected, the previous
screen is displayed.
INFORMATION
● According to the DVD disc, some menu
items can be selected directly. (For
details, see the manual that comes with
the DVD disc provided separately.)
■ CHANGING A CHAPTER
1 Press the “ ” or “ ” button of
“PRST·TRACK”
or
turn
the
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob to change the
chapter.
242
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
DVD OPTIONS
No.
Function
Select to display the image quality adjustment screen. (See page 244.)
1 Select the “DISC” tab.
2 Select “Options”.
Select to display the initial setup
screen. (See page 245.)
SEARCHING BY TITLE
1 Select “Search” on the “DVD Options”
screen.
2 Enter the title number and select “OK”.
3 This screen is displayed.
5
Function
Select to display the title search
screen. (See page 243.)
Select to display the predetermined
scene on the screen and start playing.
Select to display the audio selection
screen. (See page 244.)
Select to display the subtitle selection
screen. (See page 244.)
Select to display the angle selection
screen. (See page 244.)
Select to display the screen mode
screen. (See page 214.)
243
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
No.
” The player starts playing video for that title
number.
” If the wrong numbers are entered, select
to delete the numbers.
” When
is selected, the previous
screen is displayed.
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
CHANGING THE AUDIO
LANGUAGE
CHANGING THE ANGLE
1 Select “Audio” on the “DVD Options”
screen.
2 Each time “Change” is selected, the audio language is changed.
The angle can be selected for discs that
are multi-angle compatible when the angle mark appears on the screen.
1 Select “Angle” on the “DVD Options”
screen.
2 Each time “Change” is selected, the angle is changed.
” The languages available are restricted to
those available on the DVD disc.
” When
is selected, the previous
screen is displayed.
CHANGING THE SUBTITLE
LANGUAGE
1 Select “Subtitle” on the “DVD Options”
screen.
2 Each time “Change” is selected, the language the subtitles are displayed in is
changed.
” The angles available are restricted to those
available on the DVD disc.
” When
is selected, the previous
screen is displayed.
AUDIO SCREEN
ADJUSTMENT
The brightness, contrast, color and tone
of the screen can be adjusted. In addition, the display can be turned off and
the screen can be changed to either day
or night mode.
” The languages available are restricted to
those available on the DVD disc.
” When “Hide” is selected, the subtitles can
be hidden.
” When
is selected, the previous
screen is displayed.
244
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
■ CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, COLOR AND TONE ADJUSTMENT
1 Select “Display” on the “DVD Options”
screen.
2 Select “ ” or “ ” to display the desired
3 After adjusting the screen, select “OK”.
” The screen goes off when “Screen Off” is
selected. To turn the screen back on, press
any button on the audio panel or on the
Remote Touch. The selected screen
appears.
item to be adjusted.
DVD SETTINGS
1 Select “DVD Settings” on the “DVD
Options” screen.
2 Select the items to be set.
Screen button
Function
“Contrast” “+”
Select to strengthen the
contrast of the screen.
Select to weaken the
contrast of the screen.
“Brightness” “+”
Select to brighten the
screen.
“Brightness” “-”
Select to darken the
screen.
“Color” “R”
Select to strengthen the
red color of the screen.
“Color” “G”
Select to strengthen the
green color of the
screen.
“Tone” “+”
Select to strengthen the
tone of the screen.
“Tone” “-”
Select to weaken the
tone of the screen.
3 After the initial setting has been
changed, select “Save”.
” This screen will close, and the system will
return to the previous screen.
” When “Default” is selected, all menus are
initialized.
245
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
“Contrast” “-”
5
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
■ AUDIO LANGUAGE
■ MENU LANGUAGE
The audio language can be changed.
The language on the DVD video menu
can be changed.
1 Select “Audio Language” on the “DVD
Settings” screen.
2 Select the desired language to be heard
on the “Audio Language” screen.
” If the desired language to be heard cannot
be found on this screen, select “Other” and
enter a language code. For entry of a language code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” on
page 248.
” To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
select
.
3 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
1 Select “Menu Language” on the “DVD
Settings” screen.
2 Select the desired language to be read
on the “Menu Language” screen.
” If the desired language to be read cannot
be found on this screen, select “Other” and
enter a language code. For entry of a language code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” on
page 248.
” To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
select
.
3 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
■ SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
The subtitle language can be changed.
1 Select “Subtitle Language” on the
“DVD Settings” screen.
2 Select the desired language to be read
on the “Subtitle Language” screen.
” If the desired language to be read cannot
be found on this screen, select “Other” and
enter a language code. For entry of a language code, see “ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/MENU LANGUAGE CODE” on
page 248.
” To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
select
.
■ ANGLE MARK
The multi-angle mark can be turned on
or off on the screen while discs that are
multi-angle compatible are being
played.
1 Select “Angle Mark” on the “DVD Settings” screen.
2 Select “On” or “Off”.
3 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
3 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
246
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
■ PARENTAL LOCK
■ AUTO START PLAYBACK
The level of viewer restrictions can be
changed.
Discs that are inserted while the vehicle
is in motion will automatically start playing. Certain discs may not play.
1 Select “Parental Lock” on the “DVD
Settings” screen.
2 Enter the 4-digit personal code on the
“Key Code” screen.
” If the wrong numbers are entered, select
to delete the numbers.
” To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
select
.
3 Select a parental level (1-8) on the “Select Restriction Level” screen.
” To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
select
.
4 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
1 Select “Auto Start Playback” on the
“DVD Settings” screen.
2 Select “On” or “Off”.
3 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
■ SOUND DYNAMIC RANGE
The difference between the lowest volume and the highest volume can be adjusted.
1 Select “Sound Dynamic Range” on the
“DVD Settings” screen.
screen.
247
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
2 Select “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”.
3 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
5
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/
MENU LANGUAGE CODE
Code
If “Other” on the “Audio Language”
screen, “Subtitle Language” screen or
“Menu Language” screen is selected,
the desired language to be heard or
read can be selected by entering a language code.
1 Enter the 4-digit language code.
” If the wrong numbers are entered, select
to delete the numbers.
” To return to the “DVD Settings” screen,
select
.
2 Select “OK”.
3 Select “Save” on the “DVD Settings”
screen.
Language
0514
English
1001
Japanese
0618
French
0405
German
0920
Italian
0519
Spanish
2608
Chinese
1412
Dutch
1620
Portuguese
1922
Swedish
1821
Russian
1115
Korean
0512
Greek
0101
Afar
0102
Abkhazian
0106
Afrikaans
0113
Amharic
0118
Arabic
0119
Assamese
0125
Aymara
0126
Azerbaijani
0201
Bashkir
0205
Byelorussian
0207
Bulgarian
0208
Bihari
0209
Bislama
248
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
Code
Language
Code
Language
Bengali, Bangla
0825
Armenian
0215
Tibetan
0901
Interlingua
0218
Breton
0905
Interlingue
0301
Catalan
0911
Inupiak
0315
Corsican
0914
Indonesian
0319
Czech
0919
Icelandic
0325
Welsh
0923
Hebrew
0401
Danish
1009
Yiddish
0426
Bhutani
1023
Javanese
0515
Esperanto
1101
Georgian
0520
Estonian
1111
Kazakh
0521
Basque
1112
Greenlandic
0601
Persian
1113
Cambodian
0609
Finnish
1114
Kannada
0610
Fiji
1119
Kashmiri
0615
Faroese
1121
Kurdish
0625
Frisian
1125
Kirghiz
0701
Irish
1201
Latin
0704
Scottish-Gaelic
1214
Lingala
0712
Galician
1215
Laotian
0714
Guarani
1220
Lithuanian
0721
Gujarati
1222
Latvian, Lettish
0801
Hausa
1307
Malagasy
0809
Hindi
1309
Maori
0818
Croatian
1311
Macedonian
0821
Hungarian
1312
Malayalam
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
0214
249
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
Code
Language
Code
Language
1314
Mongolian
1912
Slovenian
1315
Moldavian
1913
Samoan
1318
Marathi
1914
Shona
1319
Malay
1915
Somali
1320
Maltese
1917
Albanian
1325
Burmese
1918
Serbian
1401
Nauru
1919
Siswati
1405
Nepali
1920
Sesotho
1415
Norwegian
1921
Sundanese
1503
Occitan
1923
Swahili
1513
(Afan) Oromo
2001
Tamil
1518
Oriya
2005
Telugu
1601
Panjabi
2007
Tajik
1612
Polish
2008
Thai
1619
Pashto, Pushto
2009
Tigrinya
1721
Quechua
2011
Turkmen
1813
Rhaeto-Romance
2012
Tagalog
1814
Kirundi
2014
Setswana
1815
Romanian
2015
Tongan
1823
Kinyarwanda
2018
Turkish
1901
Sanskrit
2019
Tsonga
1904
Sindhi
2020
Tatar
1907
Sango
2023
Twi
1908
Serbo-Croatian
2111
Ukrainian
1909
Sinhalese
2118
Urdu
1911
Slovak
2126
Uzbek
250
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
Code
Language
2209
Vietnamese
2215
Volapük
2315
Wolof
2408
Xhosa
2515
Yoruba
2621
Zulu
IF THE PLAYER
MALFUNCTIONS
If the player or another unit equipped
with the player malfunctions, the audio/
video system will display a message.
These are described below.
If “Check DISC” appears on the screen: It
indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it
was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or
insert it correctly. If a disc which is not playable is inserted, “Check DISC” will also appear on the screen. For appropriate discs
for the player, see “AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS” on page 277.
If “Region code error” appears on the
screen: It indicates that the DVD region
code is not set properly.
5
If the malfunction is not rectified: Take
your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
● If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD-DA
files only, the CD-DA files can be played.
If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD-DA
files and files other than CD-DA files,
only MP3/WMA files can be played.
251
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
INFORMATION
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
DVD PLAYER AND DVD
VIDEO DISC INFORMATION
■ MARKS SHOWN ON DVD VIDEO
DISCS
NTSC/PAL
DVD VIDEO DISCS
Indicates NTSC/PAL
format of color TV.
Indicates the number
of audio tracks.
This DVD player conforms to NTSC/
PAL color TV formats. DVD video discs
conforming to another format such as
SECAM cannot be used.
Indicates the number
of language subtitles.
Region codes: Some DVD video discs have
a region code indicating which countries
the DVD video disc can be played in on this
DVD player. If the DVD video disc is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on
this DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc on this player,
“Region code error” appears on the screen.
Even if the DVD video disc does not have a
region code, there are cases when it cannot
be used.
Indicates the number
of angles.
Indicates the screen to
be selected.
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates a region
code by which this video disc can be played.
ALL: in all countries
Number: region code
252
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY
• Level 1: DVD video discs for children can
be played.
• Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for children
and G-rated movie can be played.
• Level 8: All types of the DVD video discs
can be played.
” Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
” This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is protected
by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be
authorized by Rovi Corporation, and is
intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Rovi Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
253
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc that
holds video. DVD video discs have adopted
“MPEG2”, one of the world standards of
digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate encoded
technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending
on the picture format has also been adopted. Audio data is stored using PCM and
Dolby Digital, which enables higher quality
of sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and
multi-language features will also help users
enjoy the more advanced technology of
DVD video.
Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what
can be viewed in conformity with a level of
restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be
played at all, or violent scenes are skipped
or replaced with other scenes.
Multi-angle feature: The same scene can
be enjoyed from different angles.
Multi-language feature: The subtitle and
audio language can be selected.
Region codes: The region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the
DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot
play the disc on the DVD player. For region
codes, see page 252.
Audio: This DVD player can play liner
PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format DVDs. Other decoded types cannot be
played.
Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and audio
programs stored on DVD video discs. Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio 5
program is assigned as a title.
Chapter: A unit smaller than that of title. A
title comprises of several chapters.
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
8. USB MEMORY OPERATION
Connecting a USB memory enables users to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
CONNECTING A USB
MEMORY
1 Grip the knob to release the lock, and
CAUTION
lift the armrest to open.
● Do not operate the player’s controls or
connect the USB memory while driving.
NOTICE
● Depending on the size and shape of the
USB memory that is connected to the
system, the armrest may not close fully. In
this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as this may damage the USB memory or the terminal, etc.
● Do not leave your portable player in the
car. In particular, high temperatures
inside the vehicle may damage the portable player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while
it is connected as this may damage the
portable player or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port
as this may damage the portable player
or its terminal.
2 Open the cover and connect a USB
memory.
” Turn on the power of the USB memory if it
is not turned on.
3 Close the console box.
254
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
wFolder mode
PLAYING A USB MEMORY
PLAYING AND PAUSING A
USB MEMORY
1 Press the “MEDIA” button if a USB
memory has already been connected.
INFORMATION
● If tag information exists, the file/folder
names will be changed to track/album
names.
: Select to start playing the music.
: Select to pause the music.
” To start playing the music again, select
2 Select the “USB” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the “USB”
tab is selected.
wTag mode
5
INFORMATION
● When the USB memory is connected
and the audio source is changed to USB
memory mode, the USB memory will
start playing the first file in the first folder.
If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been
changed), the USB memory will resume
playing from the same point it was last
used.
● Depending on the USB memory that is
connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.
255
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
” For the Remote Touch operation method,
see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 211.
.
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
2 Select the desired tab and select the de-
SELECTING A DESIRED
FOLDER/ALBUM
sired folder, artist or album.
■ ON THE USB TOP SCREEN
, : Select to skip to the next or previous
folder/album.
SELECTING A DESIRED
FOLDER, ARTIST OR ALBUM
1 Select the folder/album name screen
button.
” Character screen buttons, “ABC”, “DEF”
etc., allow a direct jump to list entries that
begin with the same letter as the character
button.
Each time the same character screen button is selected, the list starting with the subsequent character is displayed.
, : Select to move the list up or down by
5 folder/artist/album groups. If either of
these screen buttons is selected when the
top/bottom page of the list is displayed, the
last/first page is displayed.
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the folder/artist/album
list.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for the
screen. Select to scroll to the end of the
name. Select to move to the beginning of
the name.
256
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
SELECTING A DESIRED FILE/
TRACK
■ ON THE
SCREEN
FILE/TRACK
LIST
1 Select the file/track name screen button
■ ON THE USB TOP SCREEN
to display the following file/track list
screen.
2 Select the desired file/track number.
The player will start playing the selected
file/track from the beginning.
, : Select to move the list up or down by
5 file/track groups. If either of these screen 5
buttons is selected when the top/bottom
page of the list is displayed, the last/first
page is displayed.
“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll
through the file/track list one by one.
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the file/track list.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for the
screen. Select to scroll to the end of the
name. Select to move to the beginning of
the name.
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
, : Select to skip to the next or previous
file/track.
“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly
until the desired file/track number appears
on the screen. The player will start playing
the selected file/track from the beginning.
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to
the desired file/track.
257
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
■ FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING
1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of
“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the file/track.
REPEATING
The file or folder currently being listened
to can be repeated.
■ REPEATING A FILE/TRACK
1 Select “RPT” while the file or track is
playing.
” When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
” Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
wWhen “RAND” is off
• File/Track Repeat → Folder/Album
Repeat → Off
wWhen “RAND” is on
• File/Track Repeat → Off
” “RPT” appears on the screen. When the
file/track is finished, the player will automatically play it again. To cancel this function, select “RPT” repeatedly until the
repeat mode turns off.
■ REPEATING A FOLDER/ALBUM
1 Select
“RPT” repeatedly until
“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.
” When the folder/album is finished, the
player will automatically go back to the
beginning of the folder/album and play it
again. To cancel this function, select “RPT”
again.
258
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
RANDOM ORDER
Files or folders can be automatically and
randomly selected.
■ PLAYING FILES/TRACKS IN RANDOM ORDER
1 Select “RAND” while the file or track is
playing.
” Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
• Random (1 Folder/Album Random) →
Folder/Album Random (All Folder/Album
Random) → Off
” Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a file/track randomly from
the folder/album currently being listened to.
To cancel this function, select “RAND”
repeatedly until the random mode turns off.
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
■ ALL FOLDER/ALBUM RANDOM
PLAY
1 Select “RAND” repeatedly until
“FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.
” Once
“FLD.RAND”/“ALB.RAND”
appears on the screen, the system selects a
file randomly from all of the existing folders
or albums. To cancel this function, select
“RAND” again.
259
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
9. iPod OPERATION
Connecting an iPod enables users to
enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
CONNECTING iPod
1 Grip the knob to release the lock, and
lift the armrest to open.
CAUTION
● Do not operate the player’s controls or
connect the iPod while driving.
NOTICE
● Depending on the size and shape of the
iPod that is connected to the system, the
armrest may not close fully. In this case,
do not forcibly close the armrest as this
may damage the iPod or the terminal, etc.
● Do not leave your portable player in the
car. In particular, high temperatures
inside the vehicle may damage the portable player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while
it is connected as this may damage the
portable player or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port
as this may damage the portable player
or its terminal.
2 Open the cover and connect iPod using
an iPod cable.
” Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not
turned on.
INFORMATION
● When an iPod is connected using a genu-
ine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging its
battery.
3 Close the console box.
260
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PLAYING iPod
INFORMATION
● When the iPod connected to the system
PLAYING AND PAUSING iPod
1 Press the “MEDIA” button if an iPod has
already been connected.
2 Select the “iPod” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the “iPod”
tab is selected.
SELECTING A PLAY MODE
1 Select “Browse”.
: Select to start playing the music.
: Select to pause the music.
” To start playing the music again, select
.
261
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
” For the Remote Touch operation method,
see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 211.
includes iPod video, the system can only
output the sound by selecting “Video” on
the “iPod” screen.
● Depending on the iPod, the video sound
may not be able to be heard.
● Depending on the iPod and the songs in
the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.
This function can be changed to “On” or
“Off”. See “iPod SETTINGS” on page
289. It may take time to display iPod
cover art, and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process. Only the iPod cover art that is saved
in JPEG format can be displayed.
● When an iPod is connected and the audio
source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod
will resume playing from the same point it
was last used.
● Depending on the iPod that is connected
to the system, certain functions may not
be available.
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
2 Select the desired play mode.
■ ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN
1 Select the track name screen button to
display the following track list screen.
SELECTING A DESIRED
TRACK
2 Select the desired track number. The
player will start playing the selected
track from the beginning.
■ ON THE iPod TOP SCREEN
, : Select to skip to the next or previous
track.
“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly
until the desired track number appears on
the screen. The player will start playing the
selected track from the beginning.
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to
the desired track.
, : Select to move the list up or down by
5 track groups. If either of these screen buttons is selected when the top/bottom page
of the list is displayed, the last/first page is
displayed.
“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll
through the track list one by one.
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the track list.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for the
screen. Select to scroll to the end of the
name. Select to move to the beginning of
the name.
262
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
■ FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING
1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of
“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the player.
RANDOM ORDER
Tracks or albums can be automatically
and randomly selected.
■ PLAYING TRACKS IN RANDOM
ORDER
1 Select “RAND” while the track is playing.
” When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
REPEATING
1 Select “RPT” while the track is playing.
■ PLAYING ALBUMS IN RANDOM
ORDER
1 Select “RAND” repeatedly until
“ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.
” “RPT” appears on the screen. When the
track is finished, the player will automatically play it again. To cancel this function,
select “RPT” again.
” Once “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen,
the system selects an album randomly from
all of the existing albums on the iPod. To
cancel this function, select “RAND” again.
263
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
The track currently being listened to can
be repeated.
” Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode
5
changes as follows:
• Track Shuffle → Album Shuffle → Off
” Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a track randomly from all of
the existing albums on the iPod. To cancel
this function, select “RAND” twice.
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
10. Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION
The Bluetooth® audio system enables
users to enjoy listening to music that is
played on a portable player on the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®,
a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables.
If your portable player does not support
Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
CAUTION
● Do not operate the player’s controls or
connect to the Bluetooth® audio system
while driving.
● An antenna for the Bluetooth® connection is built in the instrument panel. People with implanted pacemakers or
cardiac defibrillators should maintain a
reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The
radio waves may affect the operation of
such devices.
● Before using portable players, users of
any electrical medical device other than
implanted pacemakers and implanted
cardiac defibrillators should consult the
manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could
have unexpected effects on the operation
of such medical devices.
NOTICE
● Do not leave your portable player in the
Bluetooth is a trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
vehicle. In particular, high temperatures
inside the vehicle may damage the portable player.
264
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
INFORMATION
● In the following conditions, the system
The quality of the Bluetooth® connection
is indicated as follows:
: An excellent
Bluetooth®.
connection
to
: Indicates a bad connection to
Bluetooth®, resulting in possible deterioration of audio quality.
: No connection to Bluetooth®.
Indicates the amount of battery charge 5
left.
Empty
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
may not function:
• The portable player is turned off.
• The portable player is not connected.
• The portable player has a low battery.
● It may take time to connect the phone
when Bluetooth® audio is being played.
● Portable players must correspond to the
following specifications in order to be
connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, some functions may be
limited depending on the type of portable
player. Also, the different screen is displayed depending on which portable
player is connecting.
• Bluetooth® Specification
Ver.1.1 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.2.1 + EDR or
higher)
• Profile
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.1.2 or higher)
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control
Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver.1.4 or higher)
● Refer to http://www.lexus.com/ to find
approved Bluetooth® devices for this
system.
Full
265
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
wU.S.A.
INFORMATION
● Remaining charge is not displayed while
the Bluetooth® device is connecting.
● The amount of charge left does not
always correspond correctly with your
portable player.
● This system does not have a charging
function.
● An antenna for Bluetooth® connection is
built into the instrument panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection may
not be good and the system may not
function when using a Bluetooth® portable player in the following conditions:
• The portable player is obstructed by
certain objects (behind a seat or in the
glove box or console box).
• The portable player selects or is covered with metal materials.
● Leave the Bluetooth® portable player in
a place where the condition of
Bluetooth® connection is good.
” Portable player information is registered
when the portable player is connected to
the Bluetooth® audio system. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, remove
the Bluetooth® audio information from
the system. (See “DELETING A
Bluetooth® DEVICE” on page 196.)
” FCC ID : BABFT0033A
” This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference
received,
including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
● FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
● CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation
Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled equipment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that it deemed to comply without
maximum
permissive
exposure
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it
should be installed and operated with at
least 20 cm and more between the
radiator and person’s body (excluding
extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
ankles).
● Co-location: This transmitter must not be
co-located or operated in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
266
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
wCanada
CAUTION
” IC: 2024B-FT0033A
” This device complies with Industry
Canada
licence-exempt
RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
” Le présent appareil est conforme aux
CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit
pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en
compromettre le fonctionnement.
● CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation
267
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
Exposure
This equipment complies with IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled equipment and meets RSS102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. This equipment has very
low levels of RF energy that it deemed to
comply without maximum permissive
exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is
desirable that it should be installed and
operated with at least 20 cm and more
between the radiator and person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet
and ankles).
● ATTENTION : Exposition aux radiations
des fréquences radioélectriques
Cet équipement se conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux radiations établies par
Industrie Canada pour un environnement
non contrôlé ainsi qu’aux directives
d’exposition
aux
fréquences
radioélectriques (RF) émises par
Industrie Canada dans la norme
CNR-102. Cet équipement émet un
niveau d’énergie RF faible à un point tel
qu’il se conforme sans devoir effectuer
d’évaluation d’exposition maximum
admissible (MPE). Lorsque l’équipement
est installé et utilisé, il est toutefois
souhaitable de laisser au moins 20 cm
entre l’antenne et le corps (à l’exception
des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et
chevilles).
● This Category II radiocommunication
device complies with Industry Canada
Standard RSS-310.
● Ce dispositif de radiocommunication de
catégorie II respecte la norme CNR-310
d’Industrie Canada.
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
AUDIO PLAYER
To use the Bluetooth® audio system, it is
necessary to register a portable player
with the system. Once the portable player has been registered, it is possible to
listen to the music.
Once the portable player has been registered, it is possible to listen to music
through the navigation system. (See
“REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE” on page 195.)
INFORMATION
● For operating the portable player, see the
WHEN “Bluetooth* Power” IS
OFF
Manually connect the portable player in
accordance with the following procedure.
1 Select “Connect”.
2 Select the desired portable player.
instruction manual that comes with it.
WHEN “Bluetooth* Power” IS
ON
” The portable player will be automatically
connected under the following conditions:
• The
“START
STOP
ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
• When “Bluetooth* Power” is switched
from off to on.
• When the portable player is disconnected for some reason.
3 When the connection is completed, this
screen is displayed. It is now possible to
use the portable player.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
268
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO
INFORMATION
● Selecting “Connect Portable Player” on
the “Bluetooth*” screen also connects a
Bluetooth® audio player. (See page
200.)
● When none of the selectable portable
players have been registered, a screen
confirming registration is displayed. Registration method is the same as phone
registration. (See page 152.)
● When the currently connected portable
player is selected, a screen confirming
the selected player’s disconnection is displayed. (See page 201.)
● If connection fails once, a changing connection method confirmation screen is
displayed. If connection fails 2 or more
times, a message will be displayed. When
this message is displayed, try again.
PLAYING AND PAUSING
Bluetooth® AUDIO
1 Press the “MEDIA” button if a
Bluetooth® audio player has already
been connected.
2 Select the “BT Audio” tab or press the
“MEDIA” button repeatedly until the
“BT Audio” tab is selected.
If the portable player is disconnected
due to poor reception from the
Bluetooth® network when the “START
STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is
in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode, the system automatically
reconnects the portable player.
” If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected
on purpose, such as it was turned off, this
does not happen. Reconnect the portable
player manually.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
” For the Remote Touch operation method,
see “SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS” on page 211.
: Select to start playing the music.
: Select to pause the music.
” To start playing the music again, select
.
269
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
RECONNECTING THE
PORTABLE PLAYER
5
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
” Depending on the portable player that is
connected to the system, the music may
start playing when selecting
while it is
paused. Conversely, the music may pause
when selecting
while it is playing.
2 Select the desired screen button.
” If the folder name screen button is selected,
the track list screen is displayed.
3 Select the desired track name screen
button.
SELECTING A DESIRED
TRACK/FOLDER/ALBUM
■ ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN
, : Select to skip to the next or previous
folder/album.
■ ON THE PLAYLIST SCREEN
1 Select the album name screen button to
display the following playlist screen.
, : Select to move the list up or down by
5 track/folder groups. If either of these
screen buttons is selected when the top/
bottom page of the list is displayed, the last/
first page is displayed.
“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll
through the track list one by one.
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the track/folder list.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for the
screen. Select to scroll to the end of the
name. Select to move to the beginning of
the name.
270
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
■ FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING
1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of
“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the song.
” When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
INFORMATION
● Depending on the portable player that is
■ ON THE AUDIO TOP SCREEN
, : Select to skip to the next or previous
track.
“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” repeatedly
until the desired track number appears on
the screen. The player will start playing the
selected track from the beginning.
5
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to skip to
the desired track.
■ ON THE TRACK LIST SCREEN
1 Select the track name screen button to
display the following track list screen.
271
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.
● Some titles may not be displayed
depending on the type of portable player.
SELECTING A DESIRED
TRACK
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
2 Select the desired track number. The
player will start playing the selected
track from the beginning.
, : Select to move the list up or down by
5 track groups. If either of these screen buttons is selected when the top/bottom page
of the list is displayed, the last/first page is
displayed.
“PRST·TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or
“ ” button of “PRST·TRACK” to scroll
through the track list one by one.
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly
scroll up or down the track list.
, : If appears to the right of an item
name, the complete name is too long for the
screen. Select to scroll to the end of the
name. Select to move to the beginning of
the name.
■ FAST FORWARDING OR REWINDING
1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” button of
“PRST·TRACK” to fast forward or rewind the track.
” When the button is released, the player
resumes playing from that position.
INFORMATION
● Depending on the portable player that is
connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.
272
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
REPEATING
RANDOM ORDER
The track or album currently being listened to can be repeated.
Tracks or albums can be automatically
and randomly selected.
■ REPEATING A TRACK
■ PLAYING THE TRACKS ON THE
ALBUM IN RANDOM ORDER
1 Select “RPT” while the track is playing.
1 Select “RAND” while the track is playing.
■ REPEATING AN ALBUM
1 Select
“RPT” repeatedly until
“ALB.RPT” appears on the screen.
” Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode
5
changes as follows:
• Album Random → All Track Random →
Off
” Once “RAND” appears on the screen, the
system selects a track randomly from the
album currently being listened to. To cancel
this function, select “RAND” repeatedly
until the random mode turns off.
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
” Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
• Track Repeat → Album Repeat → Off
” “RPT” appears on the screen. When the
track is finished, the player will automatically play it again. To cancel this function,
select “RPT” repeatedly until the repeat
mode turns off.
” When the album is finished, the player will
automatically go back to the beginning of
the album and play it again. To cancel this
function, select “RPT” again.
273
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
■ PLAYING TRACKS FROM ALL
THE ALBUMS IN RANDOM ORDER
1 Select “RAND” repeatedly until
“ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.
” Once “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen,
the system selects a track randomly from all
of the existing albums on the Bluetooth®
device. To cancel this function, select
“RAND” again.
INFORMATION
● Depending on the portable player that is
connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.
274
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
11. AUDIO/VIDEO REMOTE CONTROLS (STEERING SWITCHES)
Some parts of the audio/video system
can be adjusted using the switches on
the steering wheel.
No.
” To seek up or down the frequency, press
and hold the switch until a beep is heard.
When you release the switch, the radio will
begin seeking up or down for a station/
channel. Repeat to find the next station/
channel.
Switch
Volume control switch
“
” switch
“
wRadio
To select a preset station/channel: Quickly
press and release the “ ” or “ ” switch. Repeat this to select the next preset station/
channel.
To seek a station/channel: Press and hold
the “ ” or “ ” switch until a beep is heard.
Repeat this to find the next station/channel.
If either switch is pressed during seek mode,
seeking will be canceled.
wDVD player
” switch
” Use the “ ” or “ ” switch to skip up or 5
down to a different track, file or chapter in
either direction.
“MODE” switch
Volume control switch
” Press the “+” side to increase the volume.
The volume continues to increase while the
switch is being pressed.
” Press the “-” side to decrease the volume.
The volume continues to decrease while
the switch is being pressed.
To select a desired track, file or chapter:
Quickly press and release the “ ” or “ ”
switch until the desired track, file or chapter
to play is selected. To return to the beginning of the current track, file or chapter,
press the “ ” switch once quickly.
To select a desired folder: Press and hold
the “ ” or “ ” switch until a beep is heard to
change to the next or the previous folder.
Repeat it until the desired folder is selected.
275
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
Back switch
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
wBluetooth® audio player
” Use the “ ” or “ ” switch to skip up or
down to a different track or album in either
direction.
To select a desired track: Quickly press and
release the “ ” or “ ” switch until the desired track is selected. To return to the beginning of the current track, press the “ ”
switch once quickly.
To select a desired album: Press and hold
the “ ” or “ ” switch until a beep is heard to
change to the next or the previous album.
Repeat it until the desired album is selected.
wUSB memory/iPod
“MODE” switch
” Press the “MODE” switch to select an
audio mode. Each press changes the mode
sequentially if the desired mode is ready to
use.
” To turn the audio/video system on, press
the “MODE” switch.
” Press and hold the “MODE” switch to
mute/unmute or pause/resume the current
operation.
Back switch
” Press the back switch to return to the previous screen.
” Use the “ ” or “ ” switch to skip up or
down to a different file or track in either
direction.
To select a desired file or track: Press the
“ ” or “ ” switch until the desired file or
track is selected. To return to the beginning
of the current file or track, press the “ ”
switch once quickly.
To select a desired folder or album (USB
memory only): Press and hold the “ ” or
“ ” switch until a beep is heard to change to
the next or the previous folder or album. Repeat it until the desired folder or album is selected.
276
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
12. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS
FM
NOTICE
● To ensure correct audio/video system
operations:
• Be careful not to spill beverages over
the audio/video system.
• Do not put anything other than an
appropriate disc into the disc slot.
• The use of a cellular phone inside or
near the vehicle may cause a noise
from the speakers of the audio/video
system which you are listening to.
However, this does not indicate a malfunction.
RADIO RECEPTION
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
the radio — it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception.
Power lines or phone wires can interfere
with AM signals. And of course, radio
signals have a limited range. The farther
the vehicle is from a station, the weaker
its signal will be. In addition, reception
conditions change constantly as the vehicle moves.
Here, some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a
problem with the radio are described.
Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40
km). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with
the distance from the radio transmitter.
They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, making it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehicle’s antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other
out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of
reception.
Static and fluttering: These occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees or other
large objects. Increasing the bass level may
reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping: If the FM signal being listened to is interrupted or weakened, and 5
there is another strong station nearby on
the FM band, the radio may tune in the second station until the original signal can be
picked up again.
277
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
AM
iPod
Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by the
upper atmosphere — especially at night.
These reflected signals can interfere with
those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.
Station interference: When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.
Static: AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening or electrical
motors. This results in static.
XM
” Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier,
especially metal objects, may adversely
affect the reception of XM Satellite Radio.
” Alternation or modifications carried out
without appropriate authorization may
invalidate the user’s right to operate the
equipment.
” “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”
mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to
iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
” Apple is not responsible for the operation
of this device or its compliance with safety
and regulatory standards. Please note that
the use of this accessory with iPod or
iPhone may affect wireless performance.
” iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
278
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
COMPATIBLE MODELS
USB MEMORY
The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod
classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices can be used with this system.
Made for
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone
” USB memory that can be used for MP3
and WMA playback:
• USB communication formats: USB 2.0
HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)
• File formats: FAT 16/32
• Correspondence class: Mass storage
class
CARING FOR YOUR DVD
PLAYER AND DISC
CAUTION
● DVD players use an invisible laser beam
which could cause hazardous radiation
exposure if directed outside the unit. Be
sure to operate the player correctly.
279
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
Depending on differences between models
or software versions etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.
” This DVD player is intended for use with
4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only.
” Extremely high temperatures can keep the
DVD player from working. On hot days,
use the air conditioning system to cool the
inside of the vehicle before using the player.
5
” Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make
the DVD player skip.
” If moisture gets into the DVD player, the
discs may not be able to be played. Remove
the discs from the player and wait until it
dries.
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
wTransparent/translucent discs
DVD PLAYER
Audio CDs
DVD video
discs
wLow quality discs
” Use only discs marked as shown above.
The following products may not be playable
on your player:
• SACD
• dts CD
• Copy-protected CD
• DVD audio
• Video CD
• DVD+R
• DVD+RW
• DVD-RAM
wLabeled discs
wSpecial shaped discs
280
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
NOTICE
● Do not use special shaped, transparent/
translucent, low quality or labeled discs
such as those shown in the illustrations.
The use of such discs may damage the
player, or it may be impossible to eject the
disc.
● This system is not designed for use of
Dual Discs. Do not use Dual Discs
because they may cause damage to the
player.
● Do not use discs with a protection ring.
The use of such discs may damage the
player, or it may be impossible to eject the
disc.
To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-free
cloth that has been dampened with water.
Wipe in a straight line from the center to the
edge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it with
another soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use a
conventional record cleaner or anti-static
device.
MP3/WMA FILES
Wrong
” Handle discs carefully, especially when
inserting them. Hold them on the edge and
do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny
side.
” Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other
disc damage could cause the player to skip
or to repeat a section of a track. (To see a
pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)
” Remove discs from the players when not in
use. Store them in their plastic cases away
from moisture, heat and direct sunlight.
” MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA
(Windows Media Audio) are audio compression standards.
” The MP3/WMA player can play MP3 and
WMA files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CDRW discs.
” The unit can play disc recordings compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2 and
with the Romeo and Joliet file system.
” When naming an MP3 or WMA file, add
the appropriate file extension (.mp3 or
.wma).
” The MP3/WMA player plays back files
with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as MP3
or WMA files. To prevent noise and playback errors, use the appropriate file extensions.
” The MP3/WMA player can play only the
first session when using multi-session compatible CDs.
281
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
Correct
5
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
” MP3 player: MP3 files are compatible with
the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and
Ver. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot display
disc title, track title and artist name in other
formats.
” USB memory: MP3 files are compatible
with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2,
Ver. 2.3 and Ver. 2.4 formats. The unit cannot display track title and artist name in
other formats.
” WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is
used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA
tags carry information such as track title
and artist name.
” The emphasis function is available only
when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at
32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.
SAMPLING FREQUENCY
” MP3 files for MP3 player:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3 — 32, 44.1, 48 kHz
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 — 16, 22.05, 24
kHz
MP3 files for USB memory:
MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 — 32, 44.1,
48 kHz
MPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 — 16, 22.05,
24 kHz
WMA files for WMA player:
Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 32, 44.1, 48
kHz
WMA files for USB memory:
Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 32, 44.1, 48
kHz
” The sound quality of MP3/WMA files generally improves with higher bit rates. In
order to achieve a reasonable level of
sound quality, discs recorded with a bit rate
of at least 128 kbps are recommended.
PLAYABLE BIT RATES
” MP3 files for MP3 player:
MPEG1 LAYER3 — 32 to 320 kbps
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3 — 8 to 160 kbps
MP3 files for USB memory:
MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 3 — 32 to 320
kbps
MPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 3 — 8 to 160
kbps
WMA files for WMA player:
Ver. 7, 8 CBR — 48 to 192 kbps
Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 48 to 320 kbps
(VBR*)
WMA files for USB memory:
Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR — 48 to 320 kbps
(VBR*)
*: Variable Bit Rate
” The MP3/WMA player does not play back
MP3/WMA files from discs recorded
using packet write data transfer (UDF format). Discs should be recorded using “premastering” software rather than packetwrite software.
” M3u playlists are not compatible with the
audio player.
” MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO
formats are not compatible with the audio
player.
” The player is compatible with VBR (Variable Bit Rate).
” When playing back files recorded as VBR
(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time will
not be correctly displayed if the fast forward or reverse operations are used.
282
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
” It is not possible to check folders that do not
include MP3/WMA files.
” MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 levels
deep can be played. However, the start of
playback may be delayed when using discs
containing numerous levels of folders. For
this reason, we recommend creating discs
with no more than 2 levels of folders.
001.mp3
002.wma
Folder 1
003.mp3
Folder 2
004.mp3
005.wma
Folder 3
006.mp3
” The play order of the compact disc with the
structure shown above is as follows:
001.mp3
002.wma . . .
006.mp3
” CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been
subject to the “finalizing process” (a process that allows discs to be played on a
conventional CD player) cannot be played.
” It may not be possible to play CD-R/CDRW discs recorded on a music CD
recorder or a personal computer because
of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on
the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the
lens of the unit.
” It may not be possible to play discs
recorded on a personal computer depending on the application settings and the environment. Record with the correct format.
(For details, contact the appropriate application manufacturers of the applications.)
” CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by
direct exposure to sunlight, high tempera- 5
tures or other storage conditions. The unit
may be unable to play some damaged
discs.
” If you insert a CD-RW disc into the MP3/
WMA player, playback will begin more
slowly than with a conventional CD or CDR disc.
” Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
played using the DDCD (Double Density
CD) system.
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
” MP3/WMA player: It is possible to play up
to 192 folders or 255 files on one disc.
” USB memory: It is possible to play up to
3000 folders, 255 files per folder or
9999 files in the device.
” The order changes depending on the personal computer and MP3/WMA encoding
software you use.
CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS
283
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
ISO 9660 FORMAT
TERMS
PACKET WRITE
” This is a general term that describes the
process of writing data on-demand to CDR, etc., in the same way that data is written
to floppy or hard discs.
ID3 TAG
” This is a method of embedding trackrelated information in an MP3 file. This
embedded information can include the
track title, the artist’s name, the album title,
the music genre, the year of production,
comments and other data. The contents
can be freely edited using software with
ID3 tag editing functions. Although the
tags are restricted to a number of characters, the information can be viewed when
the track is played back.
WMA TAG
” WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is
used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA
tags carry information such as track title
and artist name.
” This is the international standard for the formatting of CD-ROM folders and files. For
the ISO 9660 format, there are 2 levels of
regulations.
” Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8
character file names, with a 3 character file
extension. File names must be composed of
one-byte capital letters and numbers. The
“_” symbol may also be included.)
” Level 2: The file name can have up to 31
characters (including the separation mark
“.” and file extension). Each folder must
contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.
m3u
” Playlists created using “WINAMP” software have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
MP3
” MP3 is an audio compression standard
determined by a working group (MPEG) of
the ISO (International Standard Organization). MP3 compresses audio data to about
1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.
WMA
” WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio
compression format developed by
Microsoft®. It compresses files into a size
smaller than that of MP3 files. The decoding formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and
9.
284
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
” Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry
standard
in
music
recognition
technology and related content delivery.
For
more
information
visit
www.gracenote.com.
End
User
License
This application or device contains
software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”).
The software from Gracenote (the
“Gracenote Software”) enables this
application to perform disc and/or file
identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist,
track, and title information (“Gracenote
Data”) from online servers or
embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform
other functions. You may use
Gracenote Data only by means of the
intended End-User functions of this
application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers for your own
personal non-commercial use only.
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer
or transmit the Gracenote Software or
any Gracenote Data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT
AS
EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED
HEREIN.
285
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
” CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to
present
Gracenote.
Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000 to present
Gracenote. One or more patents owned
by Gracenote apply to this product and
service. See the Gracenote website for a
non-exhaustive list of applicable
Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB,
MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote
in the United States and/or other
countries.
” Gracenote®
Agreement
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
You agree that your non-exclusive
license to use the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers will terminate if you violate
these restrictions. If your license
terminates, you agree to cease any and
all use of the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers,
including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will Gracenote become
liable for any payment to you for any
information that you provide. You
agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce
its rights under this Agreement against
you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly
assigned numeric identifier is to allow
the Gracenote service to count queries
without knowing anything about who
you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy
Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item
of Gracenote Data are licensed to you
“AS IS.” Gracenote makes no
representations or warranties, express
or implied, regarding the accuracy of
any Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote
Servers.
Gracenote
reserves the right to delete data from
the Gracenote Servers or to change
data categories for any cause that
Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are
error-free or that functioning of
Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide
you with new enhanced or additional
data types or categories that
Gracenote may provide in the future
and is free to discontinue its services at
any time.
286
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATION
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES
EXPRESS
OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED
TO,
IMPLIED
WARRANTIES
OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE,
AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE
DOES
NOT
WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT
WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN
NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE
LIABLE
FOR
ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL
OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
copyright © 2000 to present
Gracenote
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
287
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
1. AUDIO SETTINGS
HD Radio™ SYSTEM SETTINGS
4 Select “HD Radio Settings”.
HD Radio™ system can be set using the
procedure outlined below.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
5 Select “HD Radio/Analog Setting”.
2 Select “Setup”.
6 Select the item to be set.
3 Select “Audio”.
Screen button
Function
“All”
Select to receive both analog and digital broadcasts.
“HD Only”
Select to receive only digital broadcasts.
“Analog”
Select to receive only analog broadcasts.
7 Select “Save”.
288
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
3 Select “Audio”.
iPod SETTINGS
iPod can be set using the procedure outlined below.
COVER ART DISPLAY
SETTINGS
When the track currently being played
has cover art data, it can be displayed.
4 Select “iPod Settings”.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
5 Select “Display Cover Art”.
5
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
2 Select “Setup”.
6 Select “On” or “Off”.
289
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. SETUP
290
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Climate” to display the
air conditioning control screen.
*2
*1
*3
*1
*3
*1: Driver side temperature display
*2: Outside temperature display
*3: Passenger side temperature display
No.
Name
Function
Page
Driver’s side temperature control button
Press/select to control the driver’s side temperature.
296
Fan speed control buttons
Press/select to change fan speed.
297
292
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
No.
Name
Function
Page
Air flow control buttons
Press/select to change the air outlets.
298
Passenger’s side temperature control button
Press/select to control the passenger’s side temperature.
When you press/select this button, the “DUAL”
indicator light will turn on, and the mode will
change to independent mode.
296
Windshield wiper deicer (If equipped)
Select to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.
301
(Micro dust and
pollen filter button)
Select to remove micro dust and pollen.
302
Windshield air flow
button
Press to defog the windshield.
297
Rear window and outside rear view mirror
defogger button
Press to defog the rear window and outside rear
view mirror.
301
“DUAL” button/
“DUAL”
Press/select to set the temperatures independently for the driver’s, and front passenger’s seat.
296
Air intake control button
Press to change the function between outside air,
recirculated air and automatic mode.
299
“AUTO” button
Press to use the automatic air conditioning system.
295
“OFF” button
Press to turn the fan off.
295,
297
“A/C”
Select to change the air conditioning between on
and off.
302
6
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AIR CONDITIONING
293
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
2. SOME BASICS
CLIMATE CONTROL
INFORMATION
● During use, various odors from inside and
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch must be in IGNITION ON
mode.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
outside the vehicle may enter into and
accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be
emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be
delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning
system is started in automatic operation
mode.
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
2 Select “Climate”.
Press this switch to operate the voice
command system.
” A function that enables automatic return
to the previous screen from the air conditioning control screen can be selected.
See page 51 for details.
NOTICE
● To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, do
” For the operation of the voice command
system and the list of commands, see
pages 308 and 317.
not leave the air conditioning system on
longer than necessary when the engine
is stopped.
294
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
3. AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
USING THE AUTOMATIC AIR
CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
wUsing the instrument panel
3 Press the
button on “TEMP” to into decrease the temperature and
crease the temperature.
1 Press the “AUTO” button.
wUsing the screen
3 Select
(increase) or
(decrease).
2 Press the air intake control button to
switch to automatic air intake mode.
6
” The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air and
recirculated air modes.
” The temperature for the driver’s and front
passenger’s seats can be set separately.
” Only the “ ” and “ ” buttons on “TEMP”
(driver’s side) can be used to adjust the
temperature for all seats.
” Press the “OFF” button to turn the fan off.
295
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AIR CONDITIONING
Left-hand front seat side temperature control
Right-hand front seat side temperature control
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
■ DUAL
ADJUST THE SETTINGS
MANUALLY
“DUAL” is used to set the temperatures
independently for the driver’s seat and
front passenger seat.
SETTING THE VEHICLE
INTERIOR TEMPERATURE
wUsing the instrument panel
1 Press the “DUAL” button.
wUsing the instrument panel
1 Press the
button on “TEMP” to increase the temperature and
to decrease the temperature.
wUsing the screen
1 Select “DUAL”.
wUsing the screen
1 Select
(increase) or
(decrease).
” When the indicator on “DUAL” is on, the
temperature for the driver’s and front passenger’s seats can be set separately.
Left-hand front seat side temperature control
Right-hand front seat side temperature control
” The temperature for the driver’s and front
passenger’s seats can be set separately.
” Only the “ ” and “ ” buttons on “TEMP”
(driver’s side) can be used to adjust the
temperature for all seats.
296
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
SETTING THE FAN SPEED
DEFOGGING THE
WINDSHIELD
wUsing the instrument panel
1 Press the
button on fan speed control button to increase the fan speed and
press the
button to decrease the fan
speed. (7 levels)
” The air conditioning system control operates automatically.
” Recirculated air mode will automatically
switch to outside air mode.
wUsing the screen
1 Select
on
speed and
speed. (7 levels)
1 Press the windshield air flow button.
to increase the fan
to decrease the fan
CAUTION
● To prevent the windshield from fogging
” Press the “OFF” button to turn the fan off.
297
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
AIR CONDITIONING
up
• Do not use the windshield air flow button during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield
can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
wAir flows to the upper body (Panel)
SWITCHING THE AIR
OUTLETS AND AIR FLOW
The outlets from which air is delivered
can be selected manually.
wUsing the instrument panel
1 Press the air outlet selector button.
wAir flows to the upper body and feet (Bilevel)
wUsing the screen
1 Select any mode on the screen.
No.
Function
Panel
Bi-level
Floor
Floor/windshield
298
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
wAir flows to the feet (Floor)
SWITCHING BETWEEN
OUTSIDE AIR AND
RECIRCULATED AIR MODES
The mode switches among recirculated
air mode, “AUTO” mode and outside air
mode each time the button is pressed.
1 Press the air intake control button.
wAir flows to the feet and the windshield
defogger operates (Floor/windshield)
” When the system is switched to automatic
mode, the air conditioning system operates
automatically.
6
No.
Function
AIR CONDITIONING
Recirculated air mode
“AUTO” mode
Outside air mode
299
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
ADJUSTING THE POSITION
OF AND OPENING AND
CLOSING THE AIR OUTLETS
wRear center outlets
wFront center outlets
No.
Function
Direct air flow to the left or right, up
or down
No.
Function
Turn the knob to open or close the
vent
Direct air flow to the left or right, up
or down
wFront side outlets
No.
Function
Direct air flow to the left or right, up
or down
Turn the knob to open or close the
vent
300
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
REAR WINDOW AND
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW
MIRROR DEFOGGERS
NOTICE
● To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, turn
the defoggers off when the engine is off.
These features are used to defog the
rear window, and to remove raindrops,
dew and frost from the outside rear view
mirrors.
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch must be in IGNITION ON
mode.
1 Press the rear window and outside rear
view mirror defogger button.
WINDSHIELD WIPER
DE-ICER*
This feature is used to prevent ice from
building up on the windshield and wiper
blades.
The “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch must be in IGNITION ON
mode.
1 Select windshield wiper de-icer.
6
” The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
CAUTION
● When the outside rear view mirror
● When the windshield wiper de-icer is on,
defoggers are on, do not touch the rear
view mirror surfaces, as they can become
very hot and burn you.
do not touch the glass at the lower part of
the windshield or to the side of the front
pillars as the surfaces can become very
hot and burn you.
*: If equipped
301
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
AIR CONDITIONING
” The defoggers will automatically turn off
after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time
changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed.
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
MICRO DUST AND POLLEN
FILTER
Outside air mode switches to recirculated air mode. Pollen is removed from the
air that flows to the upper part of the
body.
1 Select
.
” Usually the system will turn off automatically after approximately 1 to 3 minutes.
” To stop the operation, select
again.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
OPERATING HINTS
OPERATION OF THE AIR
CONDITIONING SYSTEM IN
ECO DRIVE MODE (HYBRID
VEHICLE)
” In the Eco drive mode, the air conditioning
system is controlled as follows to prioritize
fuel efficiency:
• Engine speed and compressor operation
controlled to restrict heating/cooling
capacity
• Fan speed restricted when automatic
mode is selected
” To improve air conditioning performance,
perform the following operations:
• Adjust the fan speed and temperature
• Turn off Eco drive mode (refer to
“Owner’s Manual”.)
REGISTERING AIR
CONDITIONING SETTINGS
TO ELECTRONIC KEYS
” Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic
key and turning the “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch to IGNITION ON mode will recall that key’s
registered air conditioning settings.
” When the “START STOP ENGINE”
<“POWER”> switch is turned off, the current air conditioning settings will automatically be registered to the electronic key
that was used to unlock the vehicle.
The system may not operate correctly if
more than one electronic key is in the vicinity or if the smart access system with push
button start is used to unlock a passenger
door.
Settings for the electronic key and the corresponding door can be changed. Contact
your Lexus dealer.
302
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
USING AUTOMATIC MODE
” Fan speed is adjusted automatically
according to the temperature setting and
the ambient conditions.
” Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until
warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after “AUTO” is pressed.
WINDSHIELD FOG
DETECTION FUNCTION*
” When automatic mode is set, the humidity
sensor (see page 305) detects fog on the
windshield and controls the air conditioning system to prevent fog.
OUTSIDE/RECIRCULATED
AIR MODE
FOGGING UP OF THE
WINDOWS
” The windows will easily fog up when the
humidity in the vehicle is high. Selecting
“A/C” on will dehumidify the air from the
outlets and defog the windshield effectively.
” If “A/C” is switched off, the windows may
fog up more easily.
” The windows may fog up if the recirculated
air mode is used.
CAUTION
” When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/
recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle
interior. During cooling operation, setting
the recirculated air mode will also cool the
vehicle interior effectively.
” Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.
6
● To prevent the windshield from fogging
AIR CONDITIONING
up
• Do not use the windshield air flow button during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield
can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
*: If equipped
303
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
WHEN THE OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE EXCEEDS
75°F (24°C) AND THE AIR
CONDITIONING SYSTEM IS
ON
” In order to reduce the air conditioning
power consumption, the air conditioning
system may switch to recirculated air mode
automatically. This may also reduce fuel
consumption.
” Recirculated air mode is selected as a
default mode when the “START STOP
ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode.
” It is possible to switch to outside air mode at
any time by pressing the air intake control
button.
AUTOMATIC MODE FOR AIR
INTAKE CONTROL
” In automatic mode, the system detects
exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and
recirculated air modes.
When the dehumidification function is off,
and the fan is operating, turning automatic
mode on will activate the dehumidification
function.
MICRO DUST AND POLLEN
FILTER
” In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the following may occur:
• Outside air mode does not switch to
recirculated air mode.
• The dehumidification function operates.
• The operation cancels after approximately 1 minute.
” In rainy weather, the windows may fog up.
Press the windshield air flow button.
” In extremely humid weather, the windows
may fog up.
” The pollens are filtered out even if
turned off.
is
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
” In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to
change.
• When stopped, or driving at low speeds
(less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
• When the outside temperature has
changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of
a garage, tunnel, etc.)
304
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
WHEN THE OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE FALLS TO
NEARLY 32°F (0°C)
CUSTOMIZATION
” Settings can be changed. (For details, refer
to “Owner’s Manual”.)
” The dehumidification function may not
operate even when “A/C” is selected.
HUMIDITY SENSOR*
AIR CONDITIONING ODORS
” During use, various odors from inside and
outside the vehicle may enter into and
accumulate in the air conditioning system.
This may then cause odor to be emitted
from the vents.
” To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be
delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is
started in automatic mode.
AIR CONDITIONING FILTER
● In order to detect fog on the windshield, a
sensor which monitors the temperature
of the windshield, the surround humidity,
etc. is installed. (See page 303.)
Follow these points to avoid damaging
the sensor:
• Do not disassemble the sensor
• Do not spray the glass cleaner on the
sensor or subject it to strong impacts
• Do not stick anything on the sensor
*: If equipped
305
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
AIR CONDITIONING
” The air conditioning filter may clog after
long use. The filter may need to be
replaced if the air flow of the air conditioner
and heater experiences extreme reductions in operating efficiency, or if the windows fog up easily. (For details, refer to
“Owner’s Manual”.)
NOTICE
1. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM OPERATION
306
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
The voice command system enables the
navigation, audio/video, hands-free and
air conditioning systems to be operated
using voice commands.
The operating procedures of voice
commands from the “Shortcut Menu”
screen are explained here.
INFORMATION
● Commands that are not displayed in the
“Shortcut Menu” screen can be operated
from the “Main Menu” screen.
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION
1 Press the talk switch.
” After the “Shortcut Menu” screen has been
displayed, voice guidance will commence.
” Voice guidance for the voice command
system can be skipped by pressing the
talk switch.
2 After a beep sounds, say the command
of your choice.
STEERING SWITCHES FOR
THE VOICE COMMAND
SYSTEM
Talk switch
” Press the talk switch to start the voice command system.
” To cancel voice recognition, press and hold
the talk switch.
Back switch
” Press the back switch to return to the previous screen.
” Voice commands are marked with
.
Some commonly used commands are displayed on the screen.
” By saying “Next page” or “Previous page”,
or by selecting “Next Pg.”/“Prev. Pg.”, the
screen will display the commands displayed on the page in the background.
” Saying “Main menu” or selecting “Main
Menu” when the “Shortcut Menu” screen
is displayed will display the “Main Menu”
screen.
” Registered POIs, registered names in the
phonebook etc., can be said in the place of
the “<>” next to the commands. (See page
317.)
For example: Say “Find nearby dining”,
“Call John” etc.
308
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
” Saying “Help” prompts voice guidance to
offer examples of commands and operation methods.
3 Say the command displayed on the
screen.
” If a desired outcome is not shown, or if no
selections are available, perform one of the
following to return to the previous screen:
• Say “Go back”.
• Select “Go Back”.
• Press the back switch on the steering
wheel.
” To cancel voice recognition, select “Cancel”, or press and hold the talk switch.
INFORMATION
● If the navigation system does not respond
309
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
or the confirmation screen does not disappear, press the talk switch and try
again.
● If a voice command cannot be recognized within 6 seconds, voice guidance
will say “Pardon?” (“Command not recognized.” will be displayed on the screen)
and voice command reception will
restart.
● If a voice command cannot be recognized 2 consecutive times, the voice
command guidance system will say
“Paused. To restart voice recognition,
push the talk switch. To cancel voice recognition, push and hold the talk switch.”
Voice recognition will then be suspended. Select “Cancel” or “Go Back”,
or press the back switch on the steering
wheel.
● The voice recognition prompt can be set
to on or off when “Voice Prompts” is
selected. This setting can also be
changed on the “Voice Settings” screen.
(See page 62.)
● When “Voice Prompts” is selected, voice
recognition will be temporarily suspended. Press the talk switch again.
● Voice guidance can be canceled by setting voice prompts to off. Use this setting
when it is desirable to say a command
immediately after pressing the talk switch
and hearing a beep.
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
MICROPHONE
It is unnecessary to speak directly into
the microphone when giving a command.
VOICE COMMAND
EXAMPLE: SEARCHING FOR
A ROUTE TO YOUR HOME
1 Press the talk switch.
2 Say “Go home”.
” A confirmation screen will be displayed
showing the recognition results.
3 Say “Yes” or select “Yes”.
” The system starts searching for a route to
your home.
INFORMATION
● Wait for the confirmation beep before
speaking a command.
● Voice commands may not be recognized
if:
• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned
towards the microphone.
● In the following conditions, the system
may not recognize the command properly and using voice commands may not
be possible:
• The command is incorrect or unclear.
Note that certain words, accents or
speech patterns may be difficult for the
system to recognize.
• There is excessive background noise,
such as wind noise.
” When the voice command is recognized,
the map of the area around the home
address will be displayed and route guidance to the home address will begin.
” If a home address is not registered, voice
guidance will say “Your home is not set.
Please try again after setting a home
location.” and you will be prompted to
enter a home address. (See page 109.)
310
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
VOICE COMMAND
EXAMPLE: PERFORMING A
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
ADDRESS
1 Press the talk switch.
2 Say “Enter an address”.
” If the destination’s state/province has not
been set or is not contained in the voice
command recognition list, the screen to
input a state/province will be displayed.
4 Say “”.
” Say the desired full street name, or main
body of the street name that belongs to the
set state in the place of the “<>”.
” The voice command recognition is
designed to recognize the main body of the
official street name.
For example, if the official street name is
“East Main Street”, the voice command recognition will recognize “Main”.
5 Say “”.
” Say the desired number, cardinal/intercardinal direction etc. in the place of the “<>”.
For example: Say “West 555”.
” Inputting the house number can be
skipped.
6 Say “Start guidance” or “Show map”. Al” Some areas cannot be recognized by the
voice recognition system.
ternatively, select “Start Guidance” or
“Show Map”.
” For information regarding the state/
province setting to perform a destination
search by address, see “SELECTING
THE SEARCH AREA” on page 68.
7
3 Say “”.
” After this, follow the voice guidance and
search for a destination route by voice
command operation.
311
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
” Say the desired city name that belongs to
the set state in the place of the “<>”.
” Say “Change State” to change the set voice
recognition state.
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
INFORMATION
● Even if the state set using voice recogni-
tion is different from the set state in the
“Address” screen (which was set when a
destination was set manually), the set
state in the “Address” screen will not
change. (For more information on the
“Address” screen, see “SELECTING THE
SEARCH AREA” on page 68.)
● The house number voice recognition
conditions are outlined below:
• Numerals: 10 digits or less
• Numerals and cardinal/intercardinal
direction or a hyphen and numerals: A
total of 9 digits or less (Do not say
“and”.)
• Cardinal/Intercardinal direction or a
hyphen and numerals: A total of 9 digits or less (Do not say “and”.)
• Numerals are recognized as single
digits only.
• The cardinal/intercardinal direction
and hyphens are only recognized
once.
• The following cardinal/intercardinal
directions can be recognized: North,
East, West, South, North East, North
West, South East and South West.
● When inputting the house number is
skipped and the recognized candidate list
has multiple entries and so forth, the full
street name may need to be recognized.
If this occurs, say the full street name.
For example, say “East Main Street” and
“East Main Street” will be recognized.
VOICE COMMAND
EXAMPLE: SEARCH FOR A
TRACK USING ARTIST NAME
OR ALBUM NAME
1 Press the talk switch.
” “Play Artist ” and “Play Album
” are displayed in the “Shortcut
Menu” screen.
2 Say “Play artist ” or “Play album
”.
” Say the desired artist name or album name
in the place of the “<>”.
” A confirmation screen will be displayed
showing the recognition results. If multiple
matching items are found, a selection
screen will be displayed.
” When “Play Artist ” is used to
play music, the first track is selected randomly. For operations beyond playing
music, refer to the “AUDIO/VIDEO
SYSTEM” section of this manual.
3 Say “Yes” or select “Yes”.
” The system starts playing music.
312
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
” Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry
standard
in
music
recognition
technology and related content delivery.
For
more
information
visit
www.gracenote.com.
INFORMATION
● A USB memory or iPod must be con-
313
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
nected to enable track searching and
playback. (See “USB MEMORY OPERATION” on page 254 and “iPod OPERATION” on page 260.)
● When a USB memory or iPod is connected, recognition data is created so
tracks can be searched using voice commands.
● Recognition data is updated under the
following conditions:
• When the USB memory or iPod data
has changed.
• When the voice recognition language is
changed. (See page 54.)
● While the recognition data is being created or being updated, a track search
cannot be performed using a voice command.
● While “Play Music” is displayed in the
“Shortcut menu” screen, say “Play music”
to display the music screen from which
searching for a track using a voice command can be performed.
● When “Play Music” is dimmed in the
“Shortcut Menu” screen, it is not possible
to search for a track using a voice command. In this situation, reduce the amount
of music data in the USB memory or iPod
and update the recognition data to
enable searching by voice command.
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
2. NATURAL SPEECH INFORMATION (ENGLISH ONLY)
Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system enables
recognition of a command when spoken
naturally. However, the system cannot
recognize every variation of each command. In some situations, it is possible to
omit the command for the procedure
and directly state the desired operation.
Not all voice commands are displayed in
the short cut menu.
INFORMATION
● The “Set a Destination”, “Use the Phone”,
“Play Music” and “Get Information” commands displayed on the “Shortcut Menu”
screen can be operated using natural language speech recognition technology.
● If the command cannot be recognized
completely, the command input screen
will be displayed. (Search results will be
shown based on the part of the command
that was recognized.)
EXPRESSION EXAMPLES FOR
EACH FUNCTION
Command
Expression examples
“Go Home”
Let’s go home.
Take me home.
“Enter an
Address”
I wanna enter an address, please.
Put in an address.
“Find Nearby
”
Find nearby for me.
I need to see the nearby
.
“Call
”
Get
me
.
I need to call at right
away.
“Dial ”
Please dial the number
<3334445555>.
Ring <3334445555>.
“Play Artist
”
Play
the
artist
.
I’d like to hear the band
.*
“Play Album
”
Play album .
Music from album
.*
*: Say the desired artist name or album
name in the place of the “<>”.
314
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
Command
Expression examples
“Traffic”
How’s the traffic?
Check the traffic.
“Weather”
What’s the weather
like?
Let’s get a forecast.
“Sports Scores”
Team scores.
How are my favorite
teams doing?
“Stock Quotes”
Stock quotes.
How are my stocks doing?
“Fuel Prices”
Let’s check fuel prices.
Find the cheapest gas
prices.
INFORMATION
● Commands that are not displayed in the
“Shortcut Menu” screen can be accessed
from the main menu.
● For example, to make an “International
Call”, say “Main menu” while the “Shortcut Menu” screen is being displayed.
Then say “Use the phone” followed by
saying the desired number, e.g.
“123456789”.
7
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
315
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
3. EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS
Selecting “On” next to “Expanded
Voice Commands” on the “Voice Settings” screen enables voice command
operation of the audio/video and air
conditioning system. (See page 62.) For
more information on operations that can
be controlled using expanded voice
commands, refer to “COMMAND
LIST”. (See page 317.)
VOICE COMMAND
EXAMPLE: TURN THE AUDIO
SYSTEM ON
1 Press the talk switch.
2 Say “Audio on”.
INFORMATION
● Commands relating to operation of the
audio/video and air conditioning systems
can only be performed when the audio
and air conditioning systems are turned
on.
● Expanded voice commands can be recognized when the “Shortcut Menu”
screen is displayed.
316
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
4. COMMAND LIST
Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.
” All commands are listed in the table.
” For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen. Also, according to conditions, other commands
may not be displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen.
” The functions available may vary according to the navigation system installed.
” Voice recognition language can be changed. (See “SELECTING A LANGUAGE”
on page 54.)
w“Set a Destination”
Action
Shortcut
Menu
“Find Nearby ”
Displays a list of near the current position.
O
“Enter an Address”
Enables setting a destination by saying the address.
O
“Go Home”
Displays the route to home.
O
“Call Destination Assist”
Connects Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
response center.
—
“Destination by Phone
Number”*2
Enables setting a destination by saying the
phone number.
—
Command
317
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
*1: For example; Gas stations, Restaurants, etc.
*2: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Set a destination” while the “Shortcut
Menu” screen is being displayed.
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
w“Use the Phone” (See “BY VOICE RECOGNITION” on page 161.)
Action
Shortcut
Menu
“Call ”
Calls made by saying a name from the phonebook.
For example: Say “Call John Smith”, “Call John
Smith, mobile” etc.
O
“Dial ”
Calls made by saying the phone number.
For example: Say “Dial 911”, “Dial
5556667777” etc.
O
“International Call”*1
Calls international numbers by saying the
phone number.
—
Command
*1: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Use the phone” while the “Shortcut
Menu” screen is being displayed.
w“Play Music”
Command
Action
Shortcut
Menu
“Play Artist ”
Plays tracks by the selected artist.
For example: Say “Play artist ”*1
O
“Play Album ”
Plays tracks from the selected album.
For example: Say “Play album ”*1
O
“Play Song ”*2
Plays the selected track.
For example: Say “Play song Summertime”,
“Play song Concerto in A Major” etc.
—
“Play Playlist ”*2
Plays tracks from the selected playlist.
For example: Say “Play playlist My Favorite
Songs”, “Play Playlist Classic Hits” etc.
—
*1: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.
*2: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Play music” while the “Shortcut menu”
screen is being displayed.
318
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
w“Get Information”
Command
Action
Shortcut
Menu
“Traffic”
Displays the traffic incident list.
O
“Weather”
Displays weather information.
O
“Sports Scores”
Displays the sports list.
O
“Stock Quotes”
Displays the stocks list.
O
“Fuel Prices”
Displays the fuel prices list.
O
“Lexus Insider”
Displays the Lexus insider list.
—
wSelect audio mode
When Expanded Voice Commands are turned “On”. (See page 316.)
Command
Action
Shortcut
Menu
“Radio”
Sets the audio mode to radio.
O
“AM”
Selects the AM band.
O
“FM”
Selects the FM band.
O
“Satellite radio”
Selects the satellite radio mode.
O
“Disc”
Selects the disc audio mode.
O
“Auxiliary”
Selects the auxiliary audio mode.
O
“Bluetooth* audio”
Selects the Bluetooth® audio mode.
O
“iPod”
Selects the iPod audio mode.
O
“USB audio”
Selects the USB audio mode.
O
“Audio on”
Turns the audio system on.
O
“Audio off”
Turns the audio system off.
O
7
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
319
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
wClimate command
When Expanded Voice Commands are turned “On”. (See page 316.)
Command
Action
Shortcut
Menu
“Automatic climate control”
Turns air conditioning system on and off.
O
“Warmer”
Turns temperature up.
O
“Cooler”
Turns temperature down.
O
INFORMATION
● Commands that have a “O” in the Shortcut Menu column can be recognized from the
“Shortcut Menu” screen.
● Commands that have a “⎯” in the Shortcut Menu column can only be recognized from the
screen that they are displayed in.
320
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. INFORMATION DISPLAY
1. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERAGE AREA
MAP INFORMATION
INFORMATION
● Map data updates are available for a fee.
Coverage areas and legal information
can be displayed and map data can be
updated.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
2 Select “Info/Apps”.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further
information.
● The “Map Information” screen displays
“Map Update
“Map Version” and
ID”. This data is needed to perform a map
data update.
LEGAL INFORMATION
Legal information related to the map
data can be displayed.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Info/Apps”.
2 Select “Map Data” on the “Information”
screen.
3 Select “Map Data”.
3 Select “Legal Info.”.
” The “Map Information” screen will be displayed.
” The “Legal Information” screen will be displayed.
322
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. INFORMATION DISPLAY
MAP COVERAGE
CERTIFICATION
Map data coverage areas can be displayed.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Info/Apps”.
2 Select “Map Data” on the “Information”
screen.
3 Select “Map Coverage”.
” The “Map Data Coverage” screen will be
displayed.
wFor vehicles sold in Canada
” This device complies with Industry
Canada
licence-exempt
RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of this device.
” Le présent appareil est conforme aux
CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit
pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en
compromettre le fonctionnement.
” This device complies with RSS-310 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the condition that this device does not
cause harmful interference.
” Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310
d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est
autorisée sous réserve que l’appareil ne
cause pas de brouillage préjudiciable.
8
INFORMATION
323
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW
1. XM SERVICES
XM services are subscription-based
XM Satellite Radio services to provide
convenient features to subscribers.
” With an active XM subscription, the following features are available:
• XM Sports*1 (See page 327.)
• XM Stocks*1 (See page 330.)
• XM Fuel Prices*2 (See page 333.)
• XM NavWeather™*2 (See page 337.)
• XM NavTraffic®*2 (See page 341.)
*1: Available at no extra charge with an active XM Satellite Radio subscription.
*2: Available via separate XM subscription(s).
SUBSCRIPTION(S)
” XM NavTraffic®, XM NavWeather™ and
XM TravelLink require separate XM subscription(s). XM Sports*, XM Stocks* and
XM Fuel Prices are available with an XM
TravelLink subscription. After a 90-day
trial, you must contact XM and set up the
appropriate XM subscription(s) to continue receiving these services.
*: XM Sports and XM Stocks are included
with an XM Satellite Radio subscription.
AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE(S)
” The XM NavTraffic® service is available in
the contiguous 48 U.S. states and Canada.
” The XM NavWeather™, XM Sports, XM
Stocks and XM Fuel Prices services are
available in the contiguous 48 U.S. states.
ACTIVATION OF SERVICE(S)
” To receive XM NavTraffic®, XM
NavWeather™, XM Sports, XM Stocks
and XM Fuel Prices services, the XM service must be activated. To activate the service, call the XM Listener Care Center at 1866-635-2349 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-4389677 (Canada).
” Customers should have their radio ID
ready. The radio ID can be found by selecting “CH 000” on the radio. For details, see
“DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID” on page
227.
INFORMATION
● For further details about the service, con-
tact your Lexus dealer.
● XM Satellite Radio is responsible for all
fees and services, which are subject to
change.
324
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW
XM RADIO SERVICES —
DESCRIPTIONS
XM RADIO SERVICES —
SUBSCRIPTION
INSTRUCTIONS
■ RADIO AND ENTERTAINMENT
XM offers more than 170 satellite radio
channels of commercial-free music and
premier sports, news, talk, and
entertainment. XM is broadcast via
satellites to millions of listeners across the
continental
United
States.
XM
subscribers listen to XM on satellite radio
receivers for the car, home, and portable
use. More information about XM is
available online at www.siriusxm.com
(U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada).
■ INFOTAINMENT AND DATA SERVICES
XM offers a variety of advanced Infotainment and data services.
INFORMATION
For XM Services requiring a subscription
(such as XM Radio, and some Infotainment & data services), the following paragraph shall be included.
Required XM Radio and some
Infotainment & data services monthly
subscriptions sold separately after trial
period. Subscription fee is consumer only.
All fees and programming subject to
change. Subscriptions are subject to the
Customer Agreement available at
(U.S.A.)
or
www.siriusxm.com
www.xmradio.ca (Canada). XM service
only available in the 48 contiguous
United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. © 2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc.
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
All other marks, channel names and logos
are the property of their respective
owners.
For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription after complimentary trial period;
more information is available at:
8
wU.S.A. Customers
Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-866635-2349
wCanadian Customers
Visit www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877438-9677
325
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. XM FUNCTION-OVERVIEW
XM RADIO SERVICES —
LEGAL DISCLAIMERS AND
WARNINGS
Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, taxes,
one time activation fee, and other fees
may apply. Subscription fee is consumer
only. All fees and programming subject to
change. Subscriptions subject to
Customer Agreement available at
www.siriusxm.com
(U.S.A.)
or
www.xmradio.ca (Canada). XM service
only available in the 48 contiguous
United States and Canada*.
*: Canada — some deterioration of service may occur in extreme northern latitudes. This is beyond the control of XM
Satellite Radio.
Explicit Language Notice — Channels
with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL” preceding the channel
name. Channel blocking is available for
XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying
XM at;
wU.S.A. Customers
Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-866635-2349
wCanadian Customers
Visit www.xmradio.ca or calling 1-877438-9677
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any
technology or software incorporated in
receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM
website, the Online Service or any of its
content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice
compression software included in this
product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice
Systems, Inc.
Note: this applies to XM receivers only
and not XM Ready devices.
326
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
1. XM Sports
XM Sports is a service included with an
XM Satellite Radio subscription. This
service is also available with an XM
TravelLink subscription. With this service, you can receive updates via the
navigation system on your personally
selected sports teams.
3 Select “XM Sports”.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
” The “XM Sports” screen is displayed.
” The following operations can be performed:
• Sports information can be received. (See
page 327.)
• XM Sports settings can be set. (See page
328.)
RECEIVE SPORTS
INFORMATION
2 Select “Info/Apps”.
The desired teams must be added in order to receive information. (See page
328.)
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu”
screen.
8
3 Select “XM Sports” on the “InformaINFORMATION
tion” screen.
327
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
4 Select the desired team to receive information.
XM Sports SETTINGS — ADD
OR DELETE TEAMS
To input your personalized XM Sports
team.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
” Teams for which there is no current data
available will be dimmed and you will not be
able to select them.
5 Select the individual information item to
hear it, or select “Read All” to hear all
available information for that team.
” The selected information will be read out in
its entirety.
2 Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu”
screen.
3 Select “XM Sports” on the “Information” screen.
4 Select “Options”.
5 Perform each setting according to the
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
” Personalized XM Sports teams can also
be input from the “Setup” screen. (See
“XM SETTINGS” on page 344.)
328
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
ADD SPORTS TEAM
DELETE SPORTS TEAMS
1 Select “Add Sports Team”.
1 Select “Delete Sports Teams”.
” Up to 5 teams can be added and saved in
the system for which information will be
received. The desired teams can be
changed at any time. Teams must be added
one at a time.
2 Select the individual sports team to be
deleted or select “Select All” to delete
all the teams, and select “Delete”.
2 Select the desired sporting league of the
team.
3 Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to cancel.
3 Select the name of the desired team to
be added from the list that appears.
8
INFORMATION
4 Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to cancel.
329
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
2. XM Stocks
XM Stocks is a service included with an
XM Satellite Radio subscription. This
service is also available with an XM
TravelLink subscription. With this service, you can receive updates via the
navigation system on your personally
selected stocks.
3 Select “XM Stocks”.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
” The “XM Stocks” screen is displayed.
” The following operations can be performed:
• Stock data can be received. (See page
331.)
• XM Stocks setting can be set. (See page
331.)
2 Select “Info/Apps”.
330
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
RECEIVE STOCK DATA
XM Stocks SETTINGS — ADD
OR DELETE STOCKS
You must first add your desired stocks
prior to receiving data. (See page 331.)
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu”
screen.
To input your personalized XM Stocks
settings.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu”
3 Select “XM Stocks” on the “Information” screen.
screen.
3 Select “XM Stocks” on the “Informa-
4 Select an individual stock to hear its related data, or select “Read All” to hear
the data for all the stocks saved in the
system.
tion” screen.
4 Select “Options”.
5 Perform each setting according to the
” The selected data will be read out in its
entirety.
” Stock data may be delayed by approximately 20 minutes.
procedures outlined on the following
pages.
8
331
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INFORMATION
” Personalized XM Stocks settings can
also be input from the “Setup” screen.
(See “XM SETTINGS” on page 344.)
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
ADD STOCK
DELETE STOCKS
1 Select “Add Stock”.
1 Select “Delete Stocks”.
2 Input the desired stock symbol.
2 Select the individual stock to be deleted
or select “Select All” to delete all the
stocks, and select “Delete”.
3 When finished, select “OK”.
” Up to 10 individual stock symbols can be
added and saved in the system for which
information will be received. Stocks must
be input one at a time. To enter a stock, the
symbol of the desired stock must be known.
3 Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to cancel.
332
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
3. XM Fuel Prices
XM Fuel Prices is a service included
with an XM TravelLink subscription. It
enables the navigation system to display
current fuel prices and gas station locations, which can be set as a destination if
desired.
XM Fuel Prices SCREEN
SHOW XM Fuel Prices
INFORMATION
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
Gas station name
Sort
VIEW DETAILED FUEL PRICE
INFORMATION
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Info/Apps” on the “Menu”
screen.
2 Select “Info/Apps”.
3 Select “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Information” screen.
4 Select the desired gas station from the
list.
8
” The location of the selected gas station will
be displayed on the map screen.
” The “Fuel Price” screen is displayed.
333
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INFORMATION
3 Select “XM Fuel Prices”.
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
5 Select “Info”.
INFORMATION
● The information displayed is received via
satellite radio. Depending on the time the
information is received, the displayed
information may not be up to date.
XM Fuel Prices SETTINGS
” When the map scale is at the maximum
range of 0.5 miles (800 m),
is not
shown. When the map scale is at the minimum range of 150 ft. (50 m),
is not
shown.
The desired fuel type, preferred brand,
and show prices reported can be registered.
REGISTER FUEL TYPE
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
“Mark”: Select to mark the selected gas
station on the map screen.
“Go to ”: Select to set the selected gas
station as a destination with route directions.
“Add to Route”: Select to add the selected gas station as a destination.
“Detail”: Select to read the selected gas
station’s information.
2 Select “Setup”.
” If
is selected, the registered
phone number can be called.
334
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
3 Select “Other”.
REGISTER PREFERRED
BRAND
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Other” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Other
Settings” screen.
4 Select “XM Fuel Prices”.
4 Select “Preferred Brand”.
5 Select “Fuel Type”.
5 Select the preferred brand.
6 Select “Save”.
6 Select the desired fuel type.
” “Premium”, “Midgrade”, “Regular” or
“Diesel” can be selected.
8
INFORMATION
7 Select “Save”.
335
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
REGISTER SHOW PRICES
REPORTED
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.
2 Select “Other” on the “Setup” screen.
3 Select “XM Fuel Prices” on the “Other
Settings” screen.
4 Select “Show Prices Reported”.
5 Select the desired period.
” “Last 24 Hours”, “Last 2 Days” or “Show
All” can be selected.
” If “Show All” is selected, information about
gas stations which fuel prices are not provided is also displayed on the list.
6 Select “Save”.
336
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
4. XM NavWeather™
The
subscription-based
XM
NavWeather™ service allows the navigation system to display weather information on the map screen.
” The following operations can be performed:
• Show XM NavWeather™ information:
Weather forecast information is displayed
on the map screen. (See page 337.)
• Weather information: Weather information for the selected city is displayed. (See
page 339.)
• Weather warnings: Weather warnings
issued within a radius of approximately 15
miles (25 km) or 7.8 miles (12.5 km)
around the vehicle are displayed on the
warning screen. (See page 340.)
SHOW XM NavWeather™
INFORMATION
2 Select “Info/Apps”.
3 Select “XM NavWeather”.
” The XM NavWeather screen is displayed.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
XM NavWeather™ SCREEN
Remote Touch.
8
337
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INFORMATION
“Info.”
” When the city icon is selected, “Info.” is displayed on the map screen. Selecting this
screen button displays the “Forecast”
screen. (See page 339.)
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
City icon
” When this screen button is selected, city
names and “Info.” are displayed on the
upper part of the screen.
Icon
Weather
Tornado
“Forecast”
” When this screen button is selected, the
city selection screen is displayed.
Hurricane
Storm
Flood
Winter
• Select a city to display weather information. Weather information of the selected
city will be displayed. (See page 339.)
“Current Location”
” When “Current Location” is selected, the
current position is displayed.
Wind
Extremes
Zoom in/out screen button
” The scale of the map can be changed.
Three zoom levels can be selected; 16 miles
(26 km), 30 miles (48 km) and 60 miles
(97 km).
Other
Weather icons and grids
” Inclement weather information is displayed
on the map using weather icons and grids.
Selecting an icon shows the related information at the top of the screen.
Severe thunderstorm
Hail storm
Heavy fog
Heavy freezing rain/ice
Heavy snow
Heavy rain
338
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
” When the specified day’s weather screen
button is selected, weather information for
a specified day is displayed.
WEATHER INFORMATION
No.
Function
No.
Function
Received time
Daytime weather
City name
Nighttime weather
Today’s date
Maximum temperature
Current weather
Minimum temperature
Current temperature
Precipitation probability
Today’s weather
Tomorrow’s weather
Day after tomorrow’s weather
Observed time (Time elapsed since
last update)
8
Specified day’s weather
INFORMATION
339
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
WEATHER WARNINGS
Weather warnings issued within a radius
of approximately 15 miles (25 km) or
7.8 miles (12.5 km) around the vehicle
are displayed on the warning screen.
“Weather Map”: When this screen button is
selected, the “XM NavWeather” screen is
displayed.
“OK”: When this screen button is selected,
the screen returns to the map of the current
position.
XM NavWeather™ INDICATOR
” When an XM NavWeather™ warning is
issued within the vicinity, the XM
NavWeather™ indicator will appear on the
map screen.
340
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
5. XM NavTraffic®
The subscription-based XM NavTraffic®
service allows the navigation system to
display traffic information on the map
screen.
SHOW TRAFFIC EVENT
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
The following operations can be performed:
” Show XM NavTraffic® Information: Traffic
information is displayed on the map screen.
(See page 342.)
” Auto Avoid Traffic: If any heavy congestion
or moderate traffic has been detected on
the guidance route, it may be possible for
you to select another route offered by the
system. (See page 127.)
” Traffic Incident Warning: Traffic congestion
information is provided using voice guidance. (See page 64.)
” Show Free Flowing Traffic: Freely flowing
traffic is shown by the arrow on the map.
(See page 128.)
2 Select “Info/Apps”.
INFORMATION
● When the “Traffic Information” indicator
is dimmed, “Avoid Traffic”, “Traffic Incident
Warning” and “Show Free Flowing Traffic”
will not operate. (See page 342.)
3 Select “Traffic Incidents”.
8
341
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INFORMATION
” A list of current traffic incidents is displayed
along with information on the incident’s distance and position relative to the vehicle.
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
4 Select the desired traffic event.
SHOW XM NavTraffic®
INFORMATION
1 Select “Show on Map”.
“On Current Route”: Select to display the
traffic congestion information for the selected route, or the road which the current vehicle is on. If a route has not been set, “On
Current Road” will be displayed.
2 Select “Traffic Information”.
5 This screen is displayed.
” Guidance route traffic information is displayed on the screen. Select “Detail” to
display detailed traffic event information.
” The “Traffic Information” indicator is highlighted.
3 XM NavTraffic® information is displayed on the map screen.
wOn the map screen
wOn the freeway information screen
342
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3. XM FUNCTION OPERATION
XM NavTraffic® icon
” When any traffic information is received,
the XM NavTraffic® icon will appear on
the map screen. Selecting the XM
NavTraffic® icon on the screen will start
voice guidance for the traffic information.
(See page 44.)
” When the XM NavTraffic® icon is
selected, voice guidance for the traffic
information will start even if “Off” for “Traffic Incident Warning” is selected.
XM NavTraffic® indicator
” When any XM NavTraffic® information is
received, the XM NavTraffic® indicator will
appear on the screen. The color of the indicator changes depending on the traffic
information received.
Color
Function
White
Traffic information has been
received.
Yellow
Traffic restriction information on the guidance route
has been received (screen
button*).
Red
Congestion information on
the guidance route has been
received (screen button*).
XM NavTraffic® information arrow
®
” When any XM NavTraffic information is
received, the XM NavTraffic® information
arrow will appear on the map screen. The
color of the arrow changes depending on
the traffic information received.
Color
Red
Function
Heavy congestion
Yellow
Moderate traffic
Green
Freely flowing traffic
*: Selecting the XM NavTraffic® indicator
will start voice guidance.
8
INFORMATION
343
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4. SETUP
1. XM SETTINGS
Used for changing settings for XM
Sports, XM Stocks and XM Fuel Prices.
4 Select the item to be set.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
” On this screen, the following functions can
be performed:
No.
Function
2 Select “Setup”.
Page
Select to set XM Sports.
327
Select to set XM Stocks.
330
Select to set XM Fuel Prices.
333
3 Select “Other”.
344
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW
1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW
Lexus Enform with Safety Connect is a feature that includes Apps, Destination Assist,
eDestination, Lexus Insider, and Safety Connect.
” The functions included in Lexus Enform with Safety Connect are classified into the following three types.
Type A: Function achieved by using a cellular phone
Type B: Function achieved by using an embedded cellular device in the vehicle
(DCM: Data Communication Module) and the navigation system
Type C: Function achieved by using DCM
Function
Type
Apps
Type A
Destination Assist
Type B
eDestination
Type B
Lexus Insider
Type B
Safety Connect
Type C
” Each function is available in the following areas:
• Apps is available in the 48 states, D.C. and Alaska.
• Destination Assist and eDestination are available in the contiguous United States.
• Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous 48 states and Canada.
• Safety Connect includes four features.
Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Location
are available in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada, and
Enhanced Roadside Assistance is available in the United States (except Hawaii) and in
Canada.
INFORMATION
● The actual service availability is dependent on the network condition.
346
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW
2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE
Of the functions included with Lexus Enform with Safety Connect, only Apps can be
achieved by using a cellular phone.
Apps is a service that enables the usable contents of a cellular phone to be displayed
on and operated from the navigation screen. Before Apps can be used, a few settings
need to be performed. (See page 350.)
LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT
9
347
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW
No.
Name
Function
Contents provider
Provides contents to the navigation system via a cellular phone.
Application server
Provides applications to the navigation system via a cellular
phone.
Cellular phone*
Using the Apps application, communication is relayed between
the navigation system, the application server and the contents
provider.
A cellular phone cannot be operated while communicating.
Application player
Runs applications on the navigation system. The navigation system is equipped with an application player.
Applications
(“Apps”)
Displays and sounds the usable contents from the contents providers via a cellular phone on the application player.
Navigation system
Contents received, via a cellular phone, from the contents provider servers are displayed on the navigation screen.
*: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.lexus.com/bluetooth/.
348
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW
INITIALIZING PERSONAL
DATA
BEFORE USING THE
FUNCTION
SUBSCRIPTION
” Apps will be available on a trial period
included upon purchase of a new vehicle.
User registration is required to start using
the service. (See page 351.)
” When a trial period has elapsed after purchasing a new vehicle, a fee will be charged
to renew the contract.*
” Services requiring a separate contract can
also be used.*
” The following personal data can be deleted
and returned to their default settings:
• Downloaded contents
• Radio stations that were listened to
• Input history
INFORMATION
● Once initialized, data will be erased. Pay
close attention when initializing the data.
LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT
*: For details, refer to http://www.lexus.com/
enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987.
The personal data used in “Apps” can be
reset. (See “DELETING PERSONAL
DATA” on page 61.)
AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE
” Apps is available in the 48 states, D.C. and
Alaska.
INFORMATION
● When using Apps, depending on the
details of your cellular phone contract,
data usage fees may apply. Confirm data
usage fees before using this service.
● In this section, the required operations to
activate “Apps”, connect a cellular phone
to the navigation system and registration
steps for Apps are explained. For details
regarding Apps operations and each of
the
“Apps”,
refer
to
http://
www.lexus.com/enform/.
9
349
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW
USER REGISTRATION
PREPARATION BEFORE
USING APPS
SETTINGS REQUIRED TO USE
APPS
Perform the settings in the following order.
1 User registration
2 Download the Apps application to
your cellular phone.
When purchasing the vehicle, an email
address is registered at your Lexus dealer. If your email address was not registered at your Lexus dealer, your email
address can be registered at the Lexus
drivers website. A user registration
guidance email containing a web address will be sent.
1 Perform user registration from the designated web address.
INFORMATION
3 Register the cellular phone with the
navigation system.
In order to use Apps, the following settings
must first be performed:
● If your email address was not registered
at your Lexus dealer when the vehicle
was purchased, an email address can be
registered at http://www.lexus.com/
enform/.
” User registration with the service contract
(See page 350.)
” Download the Apps application onto your
cellular phone, and login to the application.
(See page 351.)
” Register the cellular phone that the Apps
application was downloaded to with the
navigation system. (See page 351.)
” Register a Bluetooth® phone with the
hands-free system. (For detailed information about registration and settings, see
“Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page 194.)
350
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW
REGISTERING THE APPS
APPLICATION
1 Download the Apps application using
your cellular phone.
2 Run the Apps application on your cellular phone.
3 Enter a user name and password into
the Apps application. Login to the application.
INFORMATION
● “Apps” can only be used when the Apps
LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT
application has been downloaded to your
cellular phone and the application is running.
● Apps operational procedures can also be
by
visiting
http://
confirmed
www.lexus.com/enform/.
● In order to use “Apps”, it is necessary to
run the Apps application, enter your user
name and password and display the main
menu on the cellular phone.
● An iPhone cannot be connected via
Bluetooth® and USB connection at the
same time. However, it is possible to
recharge an iPhone while using Apps by
connecting via USB. The system uses the
connection method that was used last.
Therefore, if connected via USB after
Bluetooth® connection, it is necessary to
reconnect the iPhone via Bluetooth®.
9
351
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW
3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Of the functions included with Lexus Enform with Safety Connect, Destination Assist,
eDestination, and Lexus Insider can be achieved by making DCM cooperate with the
navigation system.
These are subscription-based telematics services that use Global Positioning System
(GPS) data, embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security as well as
convenience features to subscribers.
The services are supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24
hours per day, 7 days per week.
The services are available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped
vehicles.
No.
Name
No.
Name
Lexus’ designated response center
DCM
TEL, GPS antenna
Navigation system
352
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW
ACTIVATION OF SERVICE(S)
BEFORE USING THE
FUNCTION
” Enrollment in Lexus Enform with Safety
Connect (via your dealership) is required
to activate all services.
SUBSCRIPTION
” After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are
enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available
for purchase. Contact your Lexus dealer,
call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-2553987), or select “Destination Assist” in
your vehicle for further subscription details.
(See page 363.)
AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE(S)
FCC ID: O9EGTM1
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
FCC ID: N7NGTM2
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference
received,
including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT
” Destination Assist and eDestination are
available in the contiguous United States.
” Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous
48 states and Canada.
” Certification for Lexus Enform with
Safety Connect
9
353
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW
INFORMATION
INFORMATION
● Exposure to radio frequency signals:
● Available beginning Fall 2009 on select
The Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
system installed in your vehicle is a low
power radio transmitter and receiver. The
system receives and also sends out radio
frequency (RF) signals.
● In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF
exposure guidelines with safety levels for
mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines
are consistent with the safety standards
previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies.
• ANSI (American National Standards
Institute) C95.1 [1992]
• NCRP (National Council on Radiation
Protection and Measurement) Report
86 [1986]
• ICNIRP (International Commission on
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection)
[1996]
● Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the
relevant scientific literature. Over 120
scientists, engineers, and physicians from
universities, government health agencies, and industry reviewed the available
body of research to develop the ANSI
Standard (C95.1).
● The design of Lexus Enform with Safety
Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.
Lexus models. Contact with the Lexus
Enform with Safety Connect response
center is dependent upon the telematics
device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, navigation
map data, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach
the response center or receive support.
Enrollment and Telematics Subscription
Service Agreement required. A variety of
subscription terms is available; charges
vary by subscription term selected.
● The Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
response center will offer support in multiple languages.
● Select Lexus Enform with Safety Connect-subscribed vehicles are capable of
communicating vehicle information, triggering owner reminder notifications.
Owners who do not wish to have their
vehicle transmit this information can opt
out of the service at the time of enrollment or by calling 1-800-255-3987 and
follow the prompt for Lexus Enform with
Safety Connect.
● For further details about the service, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Lexus Enform with Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of
the Telecommunications Act and the
device is not TTY compatible.
354
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT-OVERVIEW
4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM
Of the functions included with Lexus Enform with Safety Connect, Safety Connect
can be achieved by using DCM.
For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.
LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT
9
355
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
1. APPS
3 Select “Apps”.
ACTIVATING “APPS”
Each time “Apps” is activated, the system checks for updates. When there are
no updates available, the main menu
screen will be displayed right after a
screen indicating that updates are being
checked for has been displayed.
4 A screen indicating that updates are be-
ACTIVATING “APPS”
ing checked for will be displayed.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
5 Select “OK”.
2 Select “Info/Apps”.
” To cancel updating, select “Cancel”.
” After selecting “Cancel”, the “Information”
screen will be displayed.
” The “Information” screen will also be displayed if updating fails.
356
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
6 A screen indicating that an update is in
progress will be displayed.
menu screen will be displayed.
” To stop updating, select “Cancel”.
” After selecting “Cancel”, the “Information”
screen will be displayed.
” The “Information” screen will also be displayed if updating fails.
” The screen shown above is only an example. The actual screen may be different.
” For details about the function and service
of each application displayed in the main
menu, refer to http://www.lexus.com/
enform/.
LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT
7 Select “OK”.
8 When updating is complete, the main
9
357
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN
When problems occur starting up the application player, a message will appear on the
screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action.
Message
Display conditions
Corrective action
“This feature is unavailable
during an emergency call.”
Safety Connect is being implemented.
After Safety Connect is finished, perform the operation
again.
“This feature is unavailable
while transferring contacts.”
Contacts are being transferred manually from the
phonebook.
When the transfer of contacts
is complete, perform the operation.
“There is a problem with the
Bluetooth* connection.
For troubleshooting assistance, please visit lexus.com
or call 1-800-255-3987.”
The cellular phone cannot be
connected.
Refer to http://www.lexus.com/
enform/ to confirm if the
phone is compatible or not.
“This feature is unavailable
during a handsfree call.”
A hands-free call is in
progress.
After the hands-free call is finished, perform the operation.
“To use the services, an active
application needs to be running on your phone. For more
information, please visit
lexus.com.”
The Apps application cannot
be connected to Bluetooth*
SPP.
Refer to http://www.lexus.com/
enform/ to confirm if the
phone is Bluetooth* SPP compatible or not, and then activate the Apps application.
“Communication error.
Please try again.”
Communication was disconnected.
After a few moments, retry the
operation.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
358
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
4 A screen indicating that updates are be-
LINKING “APPS” AND
NAVIGATION LOCAL
FUNCTION
ing checked for will be displayed.
The navigation system’s setting a destination and making a hands-free call can
be performed via “Apps”.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
5 When updating is complete, the main
menu screen will be displayed.
” The screen shown above is only an example. The actual screen may be different.
” For details about the function and service
of each application displayed in the main
menu, refer to http://www.lexus.com/
enform/.
INFORMATION
● Some parts of “Apps” can be adjusted
using the switches on the steering wheel.
3 Select “Apps”.
LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT
2 Select “Info/Apps”.
9
359
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
SETTING A DESTINATION
USING “APPS”
MAKING A PHONE CALL
USING “APPS”
Locations that were searched using
“Apps” can be set as a destination.
Phone calls can be made to locations
which were searched using “Apps”.
1 Select “Map”.
1 Select “Call”.
2 Select “Go to ”.
2 Select “Yes”.
3 To start guidance, select “OK”.
” To cancel making a phone call, select “Cancel”.
3 A screen indicating that a call is in
progress will be displayed.
” For the operation of the route guidance
screen and the function of each screen
button, see “STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE” on page 87.
” For phone operation and the function of
each screen button, see “TALK ON THE
Bluetooth® PHONE” on page 166.
360
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
3 Input characters will be reflected on the
INPUTTING KEYWORD
OPERATION
character input space.
A keyword can be input to “Apps” by the
software keyboard or voice recognition
function.
” The keyboard layout can be changed.
(See page 55.)
” For details on operating the keyboard,
see “INPUTTING LETTERS AND
NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION” on page 35.
INPUTTING A KEYWORD
USING THE SOFTWARE
KEYBOARD
1 Select the character input space.
Voice recognition is a function that uses
the center’s database to enable the use
of the voice recognition function.
2 Select the screen buttons to input the de-
1 Select the microphone screen button.
sired characters, and then select “OK”.
LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT
INPUTTING A KEYWORD
USING THE VOICE
RECOGNITION FUNCTION
9
361
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
2 When this screen is displayed, say the
desired keyword.
” Completion of saying the keyword will be
detected automatically.
3 Search results will be displayed on the
screen.
” The screen shown above is only an example. The actual screen may be different.
362
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
2. Destination Assist
Destination Assist provides you with live
assistance for finding destinations via the
Lexus Enform with Safety Connect response center. You can request either a
specific business, address, or ask for
help locating your desired destination
by category, such as restaurants, gas
stations, shopping centers or other
Points of Interest (POI).
After you tell the agent your choice of
destination, its coordinates are sent
wirelessly to your vehicle’s navigation
system.
MAKE A CALL WITH
Destination Assist
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT
2 Select “Destination”.
3 Select “Destination Assist”.
9
” The “Destination Assist” screen is displayed.
363
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
4 When an agent comes on the line, tell
5 After the agent helps you determine
the agent the address, business name,
or the type of POI or service you would
like to locate.
your location of choice, this screen is
displayed.
Select the button of the screen for the
appropriate action.
” To adjust the call volume, select “–” or “+”
on the “Destination Assist” screen, or use
the volume switch on the steering wheel
during the call.
” To hang up the phone, select “Disconnect”
on the “Destination Assist” screen or press
the
switch on the steering wheel.
“Mark”: Select to mark the POI on the
navigation map.
“Map”: Select to display the POI on the
navigation map.
“Go”: Select to set the POI as a destination with route directions.
“Detail”: Select to read the POI notes you
entered online, if any.
” If
is selected, the registered
phone number can be called.
364
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
3. eDestination
With the eDestination feature, you can
go online, via the Lexus.com owner’s
Web site, to select and organize destinations of your choice and then wirelessly send them to your vehicle’s
navigation system. Up to 200 locations
can be stored online and accessed or
updated at any time.
DOWNLOAD eDestinations
After updating eDestination folders online, the information to update the data in
the vehicle will be needed to download.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
” Locations can be organized into up to 20
personalized folders.
INFORMATION
● You
LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT
must first go online at
www.lexus.com/drivers/ to view the
Owners site where you will need to register and log in. After this, personalized
folders that contains the locations to be
sent to your vehicle can be created. (See
Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
Guide for more information.)
2 Select “Destination”.
3 Select “Point of Interest”.
9
365
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
4 Select “eDestination”.
RETRIEVE AN eDestination
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch. (See “Remote Touch”
on page 10.)
2 Select “Destination” on the “Menu”
screen.
” The “eDestination” screen is displayed.
5 Select “Download”.
3 Select “Point of Interest” on the “Destination” screen.
4 Select “eDestination” on the “Point of
Interest” screen.
5 Select the desired eDestination folder.
6 Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to cancel download.
” When “Yes” is selected, your most recent
online eDestination data will be loaded to
the navigation system.
6 Select the desired location.
366
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
7 Select the button of the screen for the
appropriate action.
SHOW eDestination ICONS
1 Select “Show on Map”.
” If
is selected, the registered
phone number can be called.
2 Select “eDestination Icons”.
” The “eDestination Icons” indicator is highlighted.
LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT
“Mark”: Select to mark the POI on the
navigation map.
“Map”: Select to display the POI on the
navigation map.
“Go”: Select to set the POI as a destination with route directions.
“Detail”: Select to read the POI notes you
entered online, if any.
9
367
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
4. Lexus Insider
Lexus Insider is an optional service that
can send audio messages, or articles, to
participating owners’ vehicles via the
navigation system. Potential Lexus Insider subjects might include, for example,
Lexus vehicle technology tips, updates
on regional Lexus events, or audio excerpts from Lexus Magazine articles.
Up to 20 articles can be stored at a time.
You may opt out of receiving Lexus Insider messages at any time. (See page
370.)
VIEW AND PLAY RECEIVED
Lexus Insider MESSAGES
3 Select “LEXUS Insider”.
” The “LEXUS Insider” screen is displayed.
4 Select the desired article title from the
Lexus Insider menu to play that broadcast or select “Read All” to listen to all
stored Lexus Insider broadcasts.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
” When “Read All” is selected, “Stop” is displayed. To stop listening to the broadcast,
select “Stop”.
” To disrupt the audio read of Lexus Insider,
press the “MODE” switch on the steering
wheel, or press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”
button on the audio system.
2 Select “Info/Apps”.
368
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
ABOUT ICONS
DOWNLOAD A POI
” Icons appear at the left of the Lexus Insider
story titles and indicate the following:
Icon
Article
Some Lexus Insider stories will contain a
downloadable POI relevant to the content.
1 If it contains a POI, “Enter ” can be seUnread article
lected to download it to the navigation
system.
Previously read article
2 Select “Go to ” to set the POI as a
destination with route directions.
Unread article with
downloadable Point of
Interest (POI)
LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT
Previously read article
with downloadable Point
of Interest (POI)
LISTEN TO ANOTHER
ARTICLE
1 After selecting an individual article, select “Next” or “Previous” to listen to another article.
9
” The “ ” or “ ” switch on the steering wheel
can be used to move to the previous or next
article.
” To stop listening to the broadcast, select
“Stop” or press the “PWR·VOL” knob on
the audio system.
369
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
DELETE Lexus Insider ARTICLE
1 Select “Delete”.
NEW MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION
When the vehicle is first powered on and
a new Lexus Insider article is available, a
notification will appear on the navigation
screen.
The notice will appear for only approximately 6 seconds unless one of the options listed is selected.
2 Select the individual article title to be
deleted or “Select All” to delete all the
article titles, and select “Delete”.
3 Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to cancel.
1 When the new message notification appears, any of the following options can
be selected.
“Listen Now”: Select to play newly received Lexus Insider article(s).
“Listen Later”: Select to remove notification screen without playing articles. Notification will be displayed again when the
vehicle is next powered on.
370
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
4 Select “LEXUS Insider”.
Lexus Insider SETTINGS
To change Lexus Insider settings, notification, and opt in or out of article receipt.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
5 This screen is displayed.
” Perform each setting according to the procedures outlined on the following pages.
3 Select “Other”.
LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT
2 Select “Setup”.
9
371
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2. LEXUS ENFORM WITH SAFETY CONNECT OPERATION
RECEIVE/OPT OUT OF Lexus
Insider
1 Select “Receive LEXUS Insider”.
2 Select “Yes” to receive Lexus Insider ar-
RESTORE THE DEFAULT Lexus
Insider SETTINGS
1 Select “Default”.
ticles or “No” to opt out of receiving articles.
2 Select “Yes” to confirm or “No” to cancel.
3 Select “Save”.
NEW MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION
Automatic notification of new Lexus Insider articles is available and is the default setting.
1 Select “New Message Notification”.
2 Select “On” or “Off”.
3 Select “Save”.
372
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
The rear view monitor system assists the
driver by displaying an image of the view
behind the vehicle with fixed guide lines
on the screen while backing up, for example while parking.
INFORMATION
● The screen illustrations used in this text
When backing up, be sure to visually
check all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding. If you do not, you may hit another
vehicle, and could possibly cause an accident.
Pay attention to the following precautions when using the rear view monitor
system.
are intended as examples, and may differ
from the image that is actually displayed
on the screen.
374
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
CAUTION
CAUTION
● Do not use system in the following cases:
mental device intended to assist the
driver when backing up. Never depend
on the rear view monitor system entirely
when backing up. Always make sure your
intended path is clear.
Use caution, just as you would when
backing up any vehicle.
● Never back up while looking only at the
screen.
The image shown on the screen may differ from the actual state, and you could
collide with another vehicle or obstacles
if backing up looking only at the screen,
possibly causing an accident. When
backing up, be sure to check in front of
and behind the vehicle, both directly and
with mirrors.
● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the
brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
● The instructions given are only guidelines.
When and how much to turn the steering
wheel will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle
condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using
the rear view monitor system.
● When parking, be sure to check that the
parking space will accommodate your
vehicle before maneuvering into it.
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
• When using tire chains or emergency
tires
• When the trunk is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight,
such as curves or slopes.
● In low temperatures, the screen may
darken or the image may become faint.
The image could distort when the vehicle
is moving, or you may become unable to
see the image on the screen. Be sure to
visually check all around the vehicle both
directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the position
of the fixed guide lines displayed on the
screen may change.
● The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians
that appear in the image displayed on the
screen will differ from the actual distances. (See page 379.)
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
● The rear view monitor system is a supple-
10
375
ES350/300h_Navi_OM33A07U_(U)
12.05.11 08:14
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
SCREEN DESCRIPTION
The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the
“R” position while the “START STOP ENGINE” <“POWER”> switch is in IGNITION
ON